manualshive.com logo in svg

Siemens 7SJ82, Manual

Share
Download
Siemens 7SJ82 Manual Download Page 942

Function Description

Logic

[lotmpsup-170712-01.tif, 2, en_US]

Figure 6-324

Logic Diagram for a Temperature Supervision Location

The Temperature supervision location function block (Location FB) receives a measured temperature value
in °C or °F as an input variable delivered from the temperature sensor function blocks of the Analog units
function group. The Sensor number parameter is used to select the temperature sensor.
2 threshold value decisions can be performed for each measuring point. If the measured temperature value is
greater than or equal to the set threshold values, the stages generate a pickup indication independent of one
another and, after a set tripping time delay, an operate indication.
The indications from the supervision locations remain available for further processing.

i

i

NOTE

The pickup of the stages does not result in fault logging. The operate indications of the stages do not go
into the trip logic of the device.

Application and Setting Notes

If you use an external RTD unit, connect the RTD unit via an interface (Ethernet or serial) to the SIPROTEC 5
device. Observe the setting notes for configuration of the interfaces in chapter Analog Transformer Function
Group Type under 

5.6.7.3 Communication with an RTD Unit 

.

6.47.3

6.47.4

Protection and Automation Functions
6.47 Temperature Supervision

942

SIPROTEC 5, Overcurrent Protection, Manual

C53000-G5040-C017-8, Edition 07.2017

Summary of Contents for 7SJ82

Page 1: ...uction 1 Basic Structure of the Function 2 System Functions 3 Applications 4 Function Group Types 5 Protection and Automation Functions 6 Capacitor Bank Protection 7 Control Functions 8 Supervision Functions 9 Measured Values Energy Values and Supervision of the Primary System 10 Functional Tests 11 Technical Data 12 Appendix A Glossary Index ...

Page 2: ...lations nor does it change these All obligations of Siemens AG are stated in the relevant contractual agree ments Siemens AG reserves the right to revise this document from time to time Document version C53000 G5040 C017 8 00 Edition 07 2017 Version of the product described V7 50 and higher Copyright Copyright Siemens AG 2017 All rights reserved The disclosure duplication distribution and editing ...

Page 3: ...EC 5 device family Further Documentation dwprefdm 221012 01 tif 3 en_US Device manuals Each Device manual describes the functions and applications of a specific SIPROTEC 5 device The printed manual and the online help for the device have the same informational structure Hardware manual The Hardware manual describes the hardware building blocks and device combinations of the SIPROTEC 5 device famil...

Page 4: ...reas as well as operating sequences with tasks based on practical operation and a brief explanation SIPROTEC 5 catalog The SIPROTEC 5 catalog describes the system features and the devices of SIPROTEC 5 Selection guide for SIPROTEC and Reyrolle The selection guide offers an overview of the device series of the Siemens protection devices and a device selection table Indication of Conformity This pro...

Page 5: ...nt module or device However it comprises important information that must be followed for personal safety as well as to avoid material damage Information is highlighted and illustrated as follows according to the degree of danger DANGER DANGER means that death or severe injury will result if the measures specified are not taken Comply with all instructions in order to avoid death or severe injuries...

Page 6: ...ombination with third party equipment recommended and approved by Siemens Problem free and safe operation of the product depends on the following Proper transport Proper storage setup and installation Proper operation and maintenance When electrical equipment is operated hazardous voltages are inevitably present in certain parts If proper action is not taken death severe injury or property damage ...

Page 7: ... at least 3 years since purchase of the Product We are liable for the Product including the Open Source Software contained in it pursuant to the license conditions applicable to the Product Any liability for the Open Source Software beyond the program flow intended for the Product is explicitly excluded Furthermore any liability for defects resulting from modifications to the Open Source Software ...

Page 8: ...8 SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Protection Manual C53000 G5040 C017 8 Edition 07 2017 ...

Page 9: ...1 5 3 Fault Log 70 3 1 5 4 Ground Fault Log 71 3 1 5 5 User Log 73 3 1 5 6 Setting History Log 75 3 1 5 7 Communication Log 77 3 1 5 8 Security Log 78 3 1 5 9 Device Diagnosis Log 79 3 1 6 Saving and Deleting the Logs 80 3 1 7 Spontaneous Indication Display in DIGSI 5 82 3 1 8 Spontaneous Fault Display on the On Site Operation Panel 82 3 1 9 Stored Indications in the SIPROTEC 5 Device 84 3 1 10 Re...

Page 10: ...Protection Interface 138 3 5 3 11 Settings 142 3 5 3 12 Information List 143 3 6 Date and Time Synchronization 146 3 6 1 Overview of Functions 146 3 6 2 Structure of the Function 146 3 6 3 Function Description 146 3 6 4 Application and Setting Notes 149 3 6 5 Settings 152 3 6 6 Information List 153 3 7 User Defined Objects 154 3 7 1 Overview 154 3 7 2 Basic Data Types 155 3 7 3 Pulse and Energy Me...

Page 11: ...rite Protected Settings 201 5 1 5 Settings 201 5 1 6 Information List 202 5 2 Function Group Type Voltage current 1 Phase 203 5 2 1 Overview 203 5 2 2 Structure of the Function Group 203 5 2 3 Application and Setting Notes 206 5 2 4 Write Protected Settings 207 5 2 5 Settings 207 5 2 6 Information List 208 5 3 Function Group Type Voltage 3 Phase 209 5 3 1 Overview 209 5 3 2 Structure of the Functi...

Page 12: ...s 248 5 6 4 4 Information List 249 5 6 5 Communication with 20 mA Unit 249 5 6 5 1 Integration of a Serial 20 mA Unit 249 5 6 5 2 Integration of a 20 mA Unit Ethernet 252 5 6 6 V I Measuring Transducer Unit with Fast Inputs 254 5 6 6 1 Overview 254 5 6 6 2 Structure of the Function 255 5 6 6 3 Function Description 255 5 6 6 4 Application and Setting Notes 256 5 6 6 5 Settings 260 5 6 6 6 Informati...

Page 13: ...Description 291 5 7 9 2 Application and Setting Notes 292 5 7 9 3 Settings 293 5 7 9 4 Information List 293 5 8 Process Monitor 294 5 8 1 Overview of Functions 294 5 8 2 Structure of the Function 294 5 8 3 Current Flow Criterion 295 5 8 4 Application and Setting Notes Current Flow Criterion 296 5 8 5 Circuit Breaker Condition for the Protected Object 296 5 8 6 Closure Detection 297 5 8 7 Informati...

Page 14: ... List 354 6 3 7 Blocking of the Tripping by Device Internal Inrush Current Detection 354 6 3 7 1 Description 354 6 3 7 2 Application and Setting Notes 355 6 3 8 Influence of Other Functions via Dynamic Settings 355 6 3 8 1 Description 355 6 3 8 2 Application and Setting Notes Advanced Stage 359 6 4 Voltage Dependent Overcurrent Protection Phases 360 6 4 1 Overview of Functions 360 6 4 2 Structure ...

Page 15: ...tings 400 6 5 6 4 Information List 402 6 5 7 Blocking of the Tripping by Device Internal Inrush Current Detection 402 6 5 7 1 Description 402 6 5 7 2 Application and Setting Notes 403 6 5 8 Influence of Other Functions via Dynamic Settings 403 6 5 8 1 Description 403 6 5 8 2 Application and Setting Notes Advanced Stage 407 6 6 Directional Overcurrent Protection Phases 408 6 6 1 Overview of Functio...

Page 16: ...Information List 458 6 7 6 Stage with Inverse Time Characteristic Curve 459 6 7 6 1 Description 459 6 7 6 2 Application and Setting Notes 463 6 7 6 3 Settings 466 6 7 6 4 Information List 468 6 7 7 Stage with Inverse Time Overcurrent Protection with Logarithmic Inverse Char acteristic Curve 470 6 7 7 1 Description 470 6 7 7 2 Application and Setting Notes 472 6 7 7 3 Settings 473 6 7 7 4 Informati...

Page 17: ...in Operating Mode Light and Current 510 6 10 9 1 Description 510 6 10 9 2 Application and Setting Notes 512 6 10 10 Application Example for Arc Protection with Point Sensors via External Trip Initiation 512 6 10 10 1 Description 512 6 10 10 2 Application and Setting Notes 514 6 10 11 Application Example for Arc Protection with a Line Sensor in Operating Mode Light and Current 516 6 10 11 1 Descrip...

Page 18: ...ure of the Function 543 6 13 3 Stage Description 544 6 13 4 Application and Setting Notes 548 6 13 5 Settings 549 6 13 6 Information List 550 6 14 Directional Intermittent Ground Fault Protection 551 6 14 1 Overview of Functions 551 6 14 2 Structure of the Function 551 6 14 3 Stage Description 552 6 14 4 Application and Setting Notes 558 6 14 5 Settings 560 6 14 6 Information List 561 6 15 Sensiti...

Page 19: ... Description 612 6 15 11 2 Application and Setting Notes 614 6 15 11 3 Settings 615 6 15 11 4 Information List 615 6 15 12 Non Directional Y0 Stage 615 6 15 12 1 Description 615 6 15 12 2 Application and Setting Notes 618 6 15 12 3 Settings 619 6 15 12 4 Information List 619 6 15 13 Pulse Pattern Detection Stage 619 6 15 13 1 Description 619 6 15 13 2 Application and Setting Notes 624 6 15 13 3 Se...

Page 20: ...on List 654 6 19 4 Stage with Thermal Overload Protection 3 Phase Advanced 654 6 19 4 1 Description 654 6 19 4 2 Application and Setting Notes 659 6 19 4 3 Settings 662 6 19 4 4 Information List 663 6 20 Thermal Overload Protection User Defined Characteristic Curve 665 6 20 1 Overview of Functions 665 6 20 2 Structure of the Function 665 6 20 3 Function Description 666 6 20 4 Application and Setti...

Page 21: ...re of the Function 710 6 25 3 Stage Description 711 6 25 4 Application and Setting Notes 711 6 25 5 Settings 712 6 25 6 Information List 712 6 26 Overvoltage Protection with Negative Sequence Voltage 714 6 26 1 Overview of Functions 714 6 26 2 Structure of the Function 714 6 26 3 General Functionality 714 6 26 3 1 Description 714 6 26 3 2 Application and Setting Notes 715 6 26 3 3 Settings 716 6 2...

Page 22: ... 3 Settings 749 6 29 4 4 Information List 749 6 30 Undervoltage Protection with Positive Sequence Voltage 750 6 30 1 Overview of Functions 750 6 30 2 Structure of the Function 750 6 30 3 Stage Description 751 6 30 4 Application and Setting Notes 752 6 30 5 Settings 755 6 30 6 Information List 756 6 31 Undervoltage Protection with Any Voltage 757 6 31 1 Overview of Functions 757 6 31 2 Structure of...

Page 23: ...n and Setting Notes 788 6 35 5 Settings 789 6 35 6 Information List 789 6 36 Vector Jump Protection 791 6 36 1 Overview of Functions 791 6 36 2 Structure of the Function 791 6 36 3 General Functionality 791 6 36 3 1 Description 791 6 36 3 2 Application and Setting Notes 794 6 36 3 3 Settings 794 6 36 3 4 Information List 794 6 36 4 Δφ Stage 795 6 36 4 1 Description 795 6 36 4 2 Application and Set...

Page 24: ...9 4 Stage with Independent Characteristic Curve 824 6 39 4 1 Function Description 824 6 39 4 2 Application and Setting Notes 824 6 39 4 3 Settings 825 6 39 4 4 Information List 825 6 40 Undervoltage Controlled Reactive Power Protection 827 6 40 1 Overview of Functions 827 6 40 2 Structure of the Function 827 6 40 3 Protection Stage 828 6 40 3 1 Description 828 6 40 3 2 Application and Setting Note...

Page 25: ... with Tripping 891 6 45 4 4 Input Logic for Operating Modes with Pickup 892 6 45 4 5 Start 893 6 45 4 6 Cycle Control with Operating Mode 1 With Tripping With Action Time 894 6 45 4 7 Cycle Control with Operating Mode 2 With Pickup With Action Time 896 6 45 4 8 Cycle Control with Operating Mode 3 With Tripping Without Action Time 898 6 45 4 9 Cycle Control with Operating Mode 4 With Pickup Without...

Page 26: ...951 6 48 3 Function Description 951 6 48 4 Application and Setting Notes 954 6 48 5 Settings 955 6 48 6 Information List 956 6 49 Current Jump Detection 957 6 49 1 Overview of Functions 957 6 49 2 Structure of the Function 957 6 49 3 Function Description 957 6 49 4 Application and Setting Notes 958 6 49 5 Settings 959 6 49 6 Information List 959 6 50 Voltage Jump Detection 960 6 50 1 Overview of F...

Page 27: ...994 7 4 4 2 Application and Setting Notes 996 7 4 4 3 Settings 997 7 4 4 4 Information List 998 7 4 5 Counter Stage 999 7 4 5 1 Description 999 7 4 5 2 Application and Setting Notes 1000 7 4 5 3 Settings 1001 7 4 5 4 Information List 1001 7 5 Current Unbalance Protection for Capacitors 1 Phase 1002 7 5 1 Overview of Functions 1002 7 5 2 Structure of the Function 1002 7 5 3 General Functions and Me...

Page 28: ... 7 7 4 4 Information List 1042 7 8 Differential Protection for Capacitor Banks 1043 7 8 1 Overview of Functions 1043 7 8 2 Structure of the Function 1043 7 8 3 Function Description 1043 7 8 4 Application and Setting Notes 1061 7 8 5 Settings 1066 7 8 6 Information List 1068 7 9 Detuning Supervision for Capacitor Banks 1070 7 9 1 AC Filter Detuning Supervision 1070 8 Control Functions 1073 8 1 Intr...

Page 29: ...es 1149 8 4 8 3 Settings 1151 8 4 8 4 Information List 1152 8 4 9 Expanded Checks df dt and Smoothing of Oscillations 1153 8 4 10 Closing at De Energized Line Busbar 1154 8 4 10 1 Description 1154 8 4 10 2 Application and Setting Notes 1156 8 4 11 Direct Close Command 1157 8 4 12 Interaction with Control Automatic Reclosing AREC and External Triggering 1158 8 4 13 External Synchronization 1160 8 4...

Page 30: ...41 9 3 Supervision of the Secondary System 1244 9 3 1 Overview 1244 9 3 2 Measuring Voltage Failure 1244 9 3 2 1 Overview of Functions 1244 9 3 2 2 Structure of the Function 1245 9 3 2 3 Unbalanced Measuring Voltage Failure 1246 9 3 2 4 3 Phase Measuring Voltage Failure 1247 9 3 2 5 Switching onto a 3 Phase Measuring Voltage Failure Low Load 1248 9 3 2 6 Application and Setting Notes 1249 9 3 2 7 ...

Page 31: ... Setting Notes 1270 9 3 8 5 Settings 1270 9 3 8 6 Information List 1270 9 3 9 Broken Wire Detection 1271 9 3 9 1 Overview of Functions 1271 9 3 9 2 Structure of the Function 1271 9 3 9 3 Function Description 1271 9 3 9 4 Application and Setting Notes 1272 9 3 9 5 Settings 1272 9 3 9 6 Information List 1272 9 3 10 Current Balance Supervision 1272 9 3 10 1 Overview of Functions 1272 9 3 10 2 Structu...

Page 32: ...9 9 Group Indications 1304 10 Measured Values Energy Values and Supervision of the Primary System 1307 10 1 Overview of Functions 1308 10 2 Structure of the Function 1309 10 3 Operational Measured Values 1311 10 4 Fundamental and Symmetrical Components 1313 10 5 Average Values 1314 10 5 1 Function Description of Average Values 1314 10 5 2 Application and Setting Notes for Average Values 1314 10 6 ...

Page 33: ... Notes 1359 10 12 4 3 Settings 1359 10 12 4 4 Information List 1359 10 12 5 2P Method Stage 1360 10 12 5 1 Description 1360 10 12 5 2 Application and Setting Notes 1363 10 12 5 3 Settings 1364 10 12 5 4 Information List 1364 10 12 6 I2t Method Stage 1365 10 12 6 1 Description 1365 10 12 6 2 Application and Setting Notes 1366 10 12 6 3 Settings 1366 10 12 6 4 Information List 1366 10 12 7 Supervisi...

Page 34: ...12 1 General Device Data 1407 12 1 1 Analog Inputs 1407 12 1 2 Supply Voltage 1409 12 1 3 Binary Inputs 1411 12 1 4 Relay Outputs 1411 12 1 5 Design Data 1413 12 2 Protection Interface and Protection Topology 1417 12 3 Date and Time Synchronization 1419 12 4 Analog Units Function Group 1420 12 5 Overcurrent Protection Phases 1421 12 5 1 Stage with Definite Time Characteristic Curve 1421 12 5 2 Sta...

Page 35: ... Phasor Measurement of a Harmonic 1481 12 18 7 Non Directional V0 Stage with Zero Sequence Voltage Residual Voltage 1482 12 18 8 Non Directional 3I0 Stage 1483 12 18 9 Non Directional Y0 Stage 1483 12 18 10 Pulse Pattern Detection Stage 1484 12 19 Undercurrent Protection 1486 12 20 Negative Sequence Protection 1488 12 20 1 Stage with Definite Time Characteristic Curve 1488 12 20 2 Stage with Inver...

Page 36: ...42 12 53 Fault Locator 1543 12 54 Temperature Supervision 1544 12 55 Current Jump Detection 1545 12 56 Voltage Jump Detection 1546 12 57 Synchronization Function 1547 12 58 Voltage Controller 1550 12 59 Current Balance Supervision 1553 12 60 Voltage Balance Supervision 1554 12 61 Current Sum Supervision 1555 12 62 Voltage Sum Supervision 1556 12 63 Current Phase Rotation Supervision 1557 12 64 Vol...

Page 37: ...rrent Transformers 1594 A 8 Connection Examples of Voltage Transformers for Modular Devices 1600 A 9 Connection Examples of Voltage Transformers for Non Modular Devices 1606 A 10 Prerouting 7SJ82 85 General 1610 A 11 Prerouting 7SJ82 85 Capacitor Bank Applications 1612 Glossary 1615 Index 1635 Table of Contents SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Protection Manual 37 C53000 G5040 C017 8 Edition 07 2017 ...

Page 38: ...38 SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Protection Manual C53000 G5040 C017 8 Edition 07 2017 ...

Page 39: ...Introduction 1 1 General 40 1 2 Properties of SIPROTEC 5 42 1 SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Protection Manual 39 C53000 G5040 C017 8 Edition 07 2017 ...

Page 40: ...signals for the logic functions Decision about the trip and close commands Storage of indications fault data and fault values for fault analysis Administration of the operating system and its functions such as data storage real time clock communi cation interfaces etc External distribution of information Binary Inputs and Outputs Using the binary inputs and outputs the device receives information ...

Page 41: ...ly Brief interruptions in the supply voltage which can occur during short circuits in the system auxiliary voltage supply are generally bridged by capacitor storage see also the Technical Data Introduction 1 1 General SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Protection Manual 41 C53000 G5040 C017 8 Edition 07 2017 ...

Page 42: ...buffered synchronizable clock Modular Concept The SIPROTEC 5 modular concept ensures the consistency and integrity of all functionalities across the entire device series Significant features here include Modular system design in hardware software and communication Functional integration of various applications such as protection control and fault recorder The same expansion and communication modul...

Page 43: ...ce 44 2 2 Adjustment of Application Templates Functional Scope 51 2 3 Function Control 53 2 4 Text Structure and Reference Number for Settings and Indications 57 2 5 Information Lists 59 2 SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Protection Manual 43 C53000 G5040 C017 8 Edition 07 2017 ...

Page 44: ...ircuit breaker layout This application template covers the required functional scope Selecting this application template determines the preconfigured functional scope This can be changed as necessary see chapter 2 2 Adjustment of Application Templates Functional Scope Function Groups FG Functions are arranged in function groups This simplifies handling of functions adding and copying The function ...

Page 45: ...ature of the protected object there are different types of protection function groups line voltage current 3 phase transformer motor generator etc Circuit breaker function groups bundle functions assigned to the local switches for example circuit breakers and disconnectors such as processing of tripping circuit breaker failure protection automatic reclosing The number and type of function groups d...

Page 46: ...s 1 and 2 and from voltage transformer 1 The currents of measuring points I 3ph 1 and I 3ph 2 are added geometrically for feeder related processing The circuit breaker function group QA1 is assigned to the measuring point I 3ph 1 and receives the measured values from current transformer 1 The circuit breaker function group QA2 is assigned to the measuring point I 3ph 2 and receives the measured va...

Page 47: ...on groups you can also configure the interface for specific functionalities in detail Further information on this is included later in the section Figure 2 6 shows how to reach the detail configuration Figure 2 7 shows the possible assignments in detail These definitions are also set appropriately for the specific application by the selected application template The user can change this linkage as...

Page 48: ...erface for specific functionalities in detail Proceed as follows Open the SIPROTEC 5 device folder in the DIGSI 5 project tree Open the function settings folder in the DIGSI 5 project tree Open the respective protection function group in the DIGSI 5 project tree for example Line 1 see the following figure Basic Structure of the Function 2 1 Function Embedding in the Device 48 SIPROTEC 5 Overcurren...

Page 49: ...n of the interface between the protection function group and the Circuit breaker function group s opens in the working area In this view configure the interface via the context menu right mouse button see Figure 2 7 Basic Structure of the Function 2 1 Function Embedding in the Device SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Protection Manual 49 C53000 G5040 C017 8 Edition 07 2017 ...

Page 50: ... or other primary objects via function groups Functions can be further subdivided For example protection functions often consist of multiple protection stages for example the Overcurrent protection function Other functions can contain one or more function blocks Each stage each function block and each function without stages function blocks can be individually switched into specific operating mode...

Page 51: ...ing functions tripping stages and function blocks As previously described the functions tripping stages and function blocks auto matically connect themselves to the measuring points assigned to the function group In few cases it may be necessary to add a protection or circuit breaker function group These newly added function groups do not contain protection functions You must individually load the...

Page 52: ...www energy siemens com Siemens will provide you with a signed license file for your device either via e mail or for downloading Use DIGSI 5 to load the signed license file into your device The procedure is described in the Online Help of DIGSI 5 Basic Structure of the Function 2 2 Adjustment of Application Templates Functional Scope 52 SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Protection Manual C53000 G5040 C017 8 E...

Page 53: ... set the functions into these modes The function control is shown in Figure 2 8 It is standardized for all functions Therefore this control is not discussed further in the individual function descriptions losteurg 040411 01 tif 1 en_US Figure 2 8 General Control of a Function State Control You can control the state of a function via the parameter Mode and the input Superordinate state You set the ...

Page 54: ...On Test Test Test On Test Test Test Test The following table shows the possible function states Table 2 2 Possible States of a Function Function State Explanation On The function is activated and operating as defined The prerequisite is that the health of the function is OK Off The function is turned off It does not create any information The health of a disabled func tion always has the value OK ...

Page 55: ... functionality If an object is transmitted as a GOOSE message the test bit is set spontaneously and the GOOSE message is transmitted immedi ately The receiver of the GOOSE message is automatically noti fied of transmitter test mode If an object is transmitted via the protection interface the test bit is not transmitted The Test state must also be transmitted as information for this state to be tak...

Page 56: ...s as a protection or a monitoring function Further you use this to determine the type and scope of the logging see following table Parameter Value Description No The function works as a protection function It generates an operate indica tion and starts fault recording with pickup During fault recording a fault is created and logged as a fault record in the fault log Yes The function works as a sup...

Page 57: ...tripping stages function blocks of the same type can be created multiple times a so called instance number is added to these elements EXAMPLE The structure of the text and reference number is shown in the protection function group Line as an example of the parameter Threshold value and the indication Pickup of the 2nd definite time overcurrent protec tion stage of the function Overcurrent protecti...

Page 58: ...r Line 1 Overcurrent 3 ph 1 Definite time overcurrent protec tion 2 Threshold value 21 201 662 3 Indication Number Line 1 Overcurrent 3 ph 1 Definite time overcurrent protec tion 2 Pickup 21 201 662 55 The structure is simplified accordingly for parameters and indications with fewer hierarchy levels Basic Structure of the Function 2 4 Text Structure and Reference Number for Settings and Indication...

Page 59: ... are ENS ACD ACT SPS and MV etc A type is assigned to the individual data types The following table shows the possible types Type Meaning I Input input signal O Output output signal C Controllable control signal EXAMPLE The following table shows the types for some data types as examples Data Type Type ENS O ACD O ACT O SPS I or O SPC C MV O 2 5 Basic Structure of the Function 2 5 Information Lists...

Page 60: ...60 SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Protection Manual C53000 G5040 C017 8 Edition 07 2017 ...

Page 61: ...cording 104 3 5 Protection Communication 111 3 6 Date and Time Synchronization 146 3 7 User Defined Objects 154 3 8 Other Functions 160 3 9 General Notes for Setting the Threshold Value of Protection Functions 171 3 10 Device Settings 179 3 SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Protection Manual 61 C53000 G5040 C017 8 Edition 07 2017 ...

Page 62: ...he device with DIGSI 5 The device display and navigation using keys allow you to read and analyze the logs on site Indications can be output spontaneously via the communication interfaces of the device and through external request via general interrogation In DIGSI 5 indications can be tracked spontaneously during online mode in a special indication window Indications can be made accessible to hig...

Page 63: ...n at the top of the list The selected indication is shown with a dark background Which indications can be shown in the selected log depends on the assignments in the DIGSI 5 information routing matrix or is predefined Every indication contains date time and its state as additional information You will find information about this in chapter 3 1 5 1 General In some logs you are given the option of d...

Page 64: ...vice use the project tree window If you have not created the device within a project you can also do this via the Online access menu item After selecting the desired log you are shown the last state of the log loaded from the device To update it is necessary to synchronize with the log in the device Synchronize the log For this purpose click the appropriate button in the headline of the log see th...

Page 65: ...nction structure Name Value Quality Cause Number Time stamp date and time Function structure Name Value Log for fault indications Time stamp date and time Relative time Fault number Entry number Function structure Name Value Quality Cause Number Time stamp date and time Fault number Value Log for motor starting indications Time stamp date and time Motor starting time Starting current Starting volt...

Page 66: ...umber Indication Time stamp date and time Indication Overview of Displayed Quality Attributes If values are shown on the device display or in DIGSI the following quality attributes are different for meas ured values and metered values Table 3 2 Measured Values IEC 61850 Device Display DIGSI Description Detail Quality Validity Good Invalid Questionable X Value The measured value is valid Failure X ...

Page 67: ...on Structure Path of the signal with the signal name Name Signal name Value Current state of the command Also pay attention to the value quality to check whether the value is up to date Quality The quality of the value shows the source of the value and whether the value is up to date Cause Additional information such as the cause and validity Number DIGSI address of the signal Motor startup time T...

Page 68: ...d by means of battery buffering or storage in the flash memory You can read and analyze the log from the device with DIGSI 5 The device display and the navigation allow you to read and evaluate the logs on site using keys Configurability of Logs The indication capacity to be recorded in configurable logs for example ground fault log is laid down in columns of the information routing matrix of DIGS...

Page 69: ...d informa tion about the recording of system incidents please refer to the description of the fault log chapter 3 1 5 3 Fault Log Up to 2000 indications can be stored in the log Reading from the PC with DIGSI 5 To reach the operational log of your SIPROTEC 5 device use the project tree window Project Device Process Data Log Operational log The status of the operational log last loaded from the dev...

Page 70: ...perational indications which you can adjust individually at any time Fault Log Fault indications are events which arise during a fault They are logged in the fault log with real time stamp and relative time stamp reference point fault occurrence Faults are numbered consecutively in rising order With fault recording engaged a corresponding fault record with the same number exists for every fault lo...

Page 71: ... fault log is configured in a specifically defined column of the information routing matrix of DIGSI 5 Target Log Fault log column Selected application templates and functions from the library already bring a predefined set of operational indications with them which you can adjust individually at any time The operational measured values and the measured values of the fundamental components and sym...

Page 72: ...device diagnosis log last loaded from the ground fault log is shown to you To update synchronization with the device click the button Read log entries in the headline of the indi cation list Figure 3 7 a scgrflmd 191012 01 1 en_US Figure 3 7 Reading the Ground Fault Log with DIGSI 5 Reading on the Device through the On Site Operation Panel To reach the ground fault log from the main menu use the n...

Page 73: ...he possibility of individual indication logging parallel to the operational log This is helpful for example in special monitoring tasks but also in the classification into different areas of responsibility of the logs Up to 200 indications can be stored in the user defined log Reading from the PC with DIGSI 5 To reach the user defined log of your SIPROTEC 5 device use the project tree window Proje...

Page 74: ...ng on the context scuserrlog1 081217 01 1 en_US Figure 3 10 Reading the User Defined Log on the On Site Operation Panel of the Device Deletability The user defined log of your SIPROTEC 5 device can be deleted You will find details about this in chapter 3 1 6 Saving and Deleting the Logs Configuration of a User Defined Log The indication capacity of a created user defined log can be configured free...

Page 75: ... to their status at the time of the fault Up to 200 indications can be stored in the setting history log Reading from the PC with DIGSI 5 To reach the log for setting changes of your SIPROTEC 5 device use the project tree window Project Device Process Data Log Setting changes The status of the setting history log last loaded from the device is shown to you To update synchronization with the device...

Page 76: ...anges The following list gives you an overview of this information Table 3 5 Overview of Indication Types Displayed Information Explanation Selection editing Selection of settings group to be edited Reject Rejection of all changes successful PG activation PG activation via command successful PG activation PG activation via command failed set Parameter value was changed Acceptance Acceptance of cha...

Page 77: ...ading from the PC with DIGSI 5 Use the project tree window to reach the communication logs of your SIPROTEC 5 device Online access Device Test suite Communication module Then select J Onboard Ethernet Communication log The communication log is shown to you in the state last loaded from the device Before this refresh the contents by clicking the update arrows in the headline sccompuf 140912 01 2 en...

Page 78: ... access attempts are also recorded Up to 2048 indications can be stored in the security log Reading from the PC with DIGSI 5 To access the security log of your SIPROTEC 5 device use the project tree window The device must be in Online access Project Online access Device Device Information Log tab Security logs The state of the security log last loaded from the device is displayed Before this refre...

Page 79: ...ng items Required maintenance for example battery supervision Identified hardware defects Compatibility problems Up to 500 indications can be stored in the device diagnosis log In normal operation of the device it is suffi cient for diagnostic purposes to follow the entries of the operational log This specific significance is assumed by the device diagnosis log when the device is no longer ready f...

Page 80: ...he logged indications are preconfigured and cannot be changed Saving and Deleting the Logs Deleting the logs of the device in the operating state is unnecessary If storage capacity is no longer sufficient for new indications the oldest indications are automatically overwritten with new incoming events In order for the memory to contain information about the new faults in the future for example aft...

Page 81: ... history log User log Motor startup log Back up the deletable logs using DIGSI 5 i i NOTE If a ground fault is currently active the ground fault log cannot be deleted Deleting Logs on the On Site Operation Panel To reach the selected log from the main menu use the navigation keys of the on site operation panel example operational log Main Menu Indications Operational log Figure 3 20 Deleting the O...

Page 82: ...0211 01 2 en_US Figure 3 21 Displaying Spontaneous Device Indications in DIGSI 5 Spontaneous Fault Display on the On Site Operation Panel After a fault the most important data of the last fault can be displayed automatically on the device display without further operational measures In SIPROTEC 5 devices protected objects and even circuit breakers can be freely created and configured depending on ...

Page 83: ...rate indication Display of the first function stage triggered in a fault as needed with additional information phases Trip time Display of the operate time related to the beginning of the fault pickup start Fault distance Display of the measured fault location distance Acknowledgement of the Spontaneous Fault Display on the Device After faults the last occurred fault is always displayed to you In ...

Page 84: ...your binary indication in the desired LED or binary output column in the routing range of the targets You are offered the following options Table 3 7 Overview of Routing Options Routing Options LEDs BOs BIs Description H active X The signal is routed as active with voltage L active X The signal is routed as active without voltage U unlatched X X The signal is routed as unlatched Activation and res...

Page 85: ... is activated until it is acknowledged The protection and the circuit breaker function groups contain the block Reset LED FG The block Reset LED FG is visible only in the Information routing under the corresponding function group in DIGSI 5 You use the binary input signal Reset LED to reset the stored LEDs in the respective function group The configured outputs contacts are not reset Test Mode and...

Page 86: ...SAV in the measured value acquisition chain Figure 3 24 shows to whom the various sampling frequencies are made available In order to limit the bandwidth of the input signals a low pass filter anti aliasing filter to maintain the sampling theorem is installed downstream After sampling the current input channels are adjusted This means the magnitude phase as well as the transformer time constant ar...

Page 87: ...w is considered A higher sampling frequency is used for selected methods of measurement Detailed information can be found in the corresponding function description i i NOTE The measuring points for current and voltage are in the Power system data starting in chapter 6 1 Power System Data Each measuring point has its own parameters System Functions 3 2 Measured Value Acquisition SIPROTEC 5 Overcurr...

Page 88: ...the SIPROTEC 5 system Validity using the values good or invalid The Validity quality attribute shows if an object transferred via a GOOSE message is received valid invalid or not received invalid The invalid state can be suppressed in the receiver device by also setting a substitute value for the object that is not received see 3 3 2 Quality Processing Affected by the User for Received GOOSE Value...

Page 89: ...device If you take the device out of operation and want to isolate it from the supply voltage you can function ally log off the device ahead of time Once you functionally log off the device all data objects generated in the device state values and measured values receive the quality attribute OperatorBlocked TRUE This also applies to the output from CFC charts If objects are transferred via a GOOS...

Page 90: ...fferent functions require customized settings these are then set directly at the binary input signal of the function Quality Processing Affected by the User for Received GOOSE Values The properties of quality processing have changed with the introduction of GOOSE Later Binding You can find information about the former quality processing in chapter Previous Quality Processing Affected by the User f...

Page 91: ...g state as soon as the data access via the communication path is disturbed Select the property for the selected data object You can also set the Advanced quality attributes of the data object for GOOSE Later Binding The following figure shows the advanced quality attributes using the example of a DPC data type Open the Properties window and select the Advanced quality attributes sheet System Funct...

Page 92: ... to the application If no value was received the output value is assumed being in safe state Keep last valid value If an invalid quality attribute is received the last valid value is forwarded to the application If no value has yet been received the output value is assumed being in safe state Set value to false Applies only to Boolean communication objects Every invalid quality attribute causes th...

Page 93: ...ction in the transmitting device that issues this indication is in test mode As a result the indication is transmitted with the quality information test The receiving function block recog nizes this for this indication and reacts depending on its own test mode state specified in IEC 61850 7 4 Annex A according to the settings Table 3 8 i i NOTE Follow the sequence of tests First the Functional log...

Page 94: ...d 0 False 1 True SPC SPS stVal 0 False 1 True MV mag Floating point range and range of values according to IEEE 754 single precision For controllable types the following substitute values apply in addition to the settable state values or meas ured values ctlNum 0 stSeld False origin orIdent Substituted by quality processing origin orCat AUTOMATIC_BAY Previous Quality Processing Affected by the Use...

Page 95: ... opBlk Check box is not set Check box is set and received OperatorBlocked FALSE The OperatorBlocked attribute and data value are forwarded without change Check box is set and received OperatorBlocked TRUE The OperatorBlocked attribute is set to FALSE and processed further using this value The data value is set to the defined substitute value and processed further using this substitute value Intera...

Page 96: ...With the CFC chart quality handling parameter you control whether you want to influence the quality of CFC charts in a Manual or Automatic default setting manner If you select Manual the quality attribute of the CFC chart is always valid regardless of the quality of indi vidual signals Validity good Only the Test quality attribute of the CFC chart is processed If the device is in test mode or the ...

Page 97: ...depend on whether the data are formed via CFC building blocks with or without quality processing 1 A CFC chart can be switched to the test state by switching the entire device to test mode or the input TEST of the CFC building block CHART_STATE is set Quality Attribute OperatorBlocked CFC chart is in normal state In CFC charts for incoming data the OperatorBlocked attribute is ignored CFC chart is...

Page 98: ... g 1 i 0 i 1 g 0 g SPLIT_SPS SPLIT_DPS SPLI_XMV The building blocks isolate the data value and quality of a data object The requirement is that the quality is available from the input end This is the case if the building block is interconnected with CFC input data or is connected downstream with a quality processing building block x_SPS In other cases the CFC editor does not allow a connection SPL...

Page 99: ...lse To do this you have to create a separate CFC chart in addition to the interlocking plan of the switchgear inter locking Use the building blocks for quality processing in a separate CFC chart With the SPLIT_SPS building block split the input signal data type SPS into data value and quality information You can then continue to process these signals separately in the CFC chart Use the quality inf...

Page 100: ...ut data are supplied with a quality that is specified by the function state and device operating mode i i NOTE Take into account that pickup of chatter blocking see chapter 3 8 1 Signal Filtering and Chatter Blocking for Input Signals sets the corresponding Validity attribute to invalid loquali3 100611 01 tif 2 en_US Figure 3 32 Overview for Processing Quality within an Internal Function Internal ...

Page 101: ...rted loquali2 230212 01 tif 2 en_US Figure 3 33 Sources for Connecting a Binary Input Signal For this signal type SPS you can influence the processing of the quality see overview in Figure 3 32 The following figure shows the possible influence on a binary input signal of a protection stage In the DIGSI 5 project tree double click Information routing In the operating range select the desired binary...

Page 102: ... setting with only a few exceptions Set the binary value to be processed further to 0 Set the binary value to be processed further to 1 This configuration option is necessary to satisfy different applications The function health switches to Warning The input signal source is good The source signal data value is processed further Quality Attribute Test The input signal source and processed function...

Page 103: ...wing table displays the conditions required to set the quality of output signals of a function Cause D0 Value Quality Attribute After internal to the SIPROTEC 5 system for example in the direction of a CFC chart To the IEC 61850 interface in buffer Functional state Test thus result of device operating mode Test or function mode Test Unchanged Test TRUE Test TRUE Functional state Off thus result of...

Page 104: ... transferred to the substation automation technology by request in accordance with the standards via existing communica tion connections such as IEC 61850 IEC 60870 5 103 The central device analyzes the data using appro priate programs Function Description The Fault recorder function records the sampled values specific to each device of all analog inputs the inter nally calculated measured values ...

Page 105: ...ult recording can be up to 20 s The maximum record duration can be limited by the Maximum record time parameter In addition to starting the fault recording via the pickup the following alternatives are possible Externally via binary input signal External start for example from an external protection device without fault recording by an object transferred via a GOOSE message By way of a configurabl...

Page 106: ...int is the start of the recording Every fault recording has a corresponding fault log with the same number This ensures that the fault recording can be uniquely assigned to the event log Fault Memory The device manages its available fault memory dynamically so that the maximum recording capacity is always available When exceeding the limits of the fault memory the oldest recordings are automatical...

Page 107: ...tal record duration is defined as the duration of the fault plus the total of the parameters Pre trigger time Post trigger time and is limited by the maximum record duration Parameter Value Description with pickup The fault recording time is determined by the total number of all protection pickups The resulting pickup signals of all function groups are taken into account Note When the post trigger...

Page 108: ...gger time 0 50 s With the Post trigger time parameter you configure the post trigger time for an individual fault recording The post trigger time that has been configured is added to the actual recording criterion for the fault recording after the dropout The following table shows how the setting range changes for the Post trigger time parameter depending on the Sampling frequency Sampling Frequen...

Page 109: ...etting Options Default Setting General _ 2731 1 General Mode on test on Control _ 2761 130 Control Fault recording with pickup with pickup AR cyc user defined with pickup _ 2761 131 Control Storage always with trip always _ 2761 111 Control Maximum record time 0 20 s to 20 00 s 5 00 s _ 2761 112 Control Pre trigger time 0 05 sto 4 00 s 0 50 s _ 2761 113 Control Post trigger time 0 05 sto 0 50 s 0 ...

Page 110: ...ol External start SPS I _ 2761 503 Control Manual start SPS I _ 2761 310 Control Fault number INS O _ 2761 311 Control Recording started SPS O _ 2761 314 Control Record made SPS O _ 2761 327 Control Tmax reduced SPS O _ 2761 324 Control Fault log is full INS O System Functions 3 4 Fault Recording 110 SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Protection Manual C53000 G5040 C017 8 Edition 07 2017 ...

Page 111: ...ion Data Communication Structure Interface to VI 3 Phase Function Group Binary signals measured values and other data are automatically exchanged between the Protection data communication and the VI 3 phase protection function group Interface to Motor Function Group Binary signals measured values and other data are automatically exchanged between the Protection data communication and the Motor pro...

Page 112: ... of the protection topology assumes the role of the timing master The connection is continuously monitored for data faults and outage and the time delay of the data is meas ured The protection interfaces are typically used for differential protection and with the teleprotection scheme for distance protection and ground fault protection In SIPROTEC 5 you can configure protection interfaces in all d...

Page 113: ...ace If a multiple end differential protection application is realized all protection communications must be of type 1 A maximum of 6 line ends is possible If the Differential protection und Teleprotection scheme functions are to operate in parallel in the device the bit rate must not be less than 512 kBit s Type 2 Application without using differential protection Type 2 has a significantly higher ...

Page 114: ...lues can be communicated via the protection interface with settable update cycles priorities There are 3 different priorities when transferring protection interface information Priority 1 Use Priority 1 for the transmission of fast protection signals that are transferred and updated at a maximum of every 20 ms in a telegram Priority 2 Use Priority 2 for the transmission of fast single point or dou...

Page 115: ...Table 3 10 Plug In Modules for Applications with the Protection Interface Plug In Modules Module Type USART AF 1LDFO Module Type USART AW 2LDFO Module Type USART AG 1LDFO Module Type USART AU 2LDFO Module Type USART AK 1LDFO Module Type USART AV 2LDFO Module Type USART AH 1LDFO 4 Module Type USART AJ 1LDFO 5 Module Type USART AX 2LDFO 6 Module Type USART AY 2LDFO 7 Physical Connection 1 x optical ...

Page 116: ...dule Plug In Module USART AD 1FO USART AE 2FO Physical Connection 1 x optical serial 820 nm ST connector 1 5 km via 62 5 125 μm multimode optical fibers 2 x optical serial 820 nm ST connector 1 5 km via 62 5 125 μm multimode optical fibers Application Protection interface Sync HDLC IEEE C37 94 X X i i NOTE The USART plug in module types can be used in slots E and F in the base module as well as in...

Page 117: ...f 1 en_US Figure 3 43 Connection via Different Distances via Singlemode Optical Fiber i i NOTE In order to prevent optical overload of the receiver a 7XV5107 0AA00 attenuator must be used on one side in the fiber optic modules USART AF USART AG USART AU USART AK and USART AV for distances of less than 25 km 50 km System Functions 3 5 Protection Communication SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Protection Manua...

Page 118: ...nection via You can find more detailed information in Table 3 12 dwmultim 070611 06 tif 1 en_US Figure 3 46 Connection via Communication Network with a G703 6 Interface The connection to the multiplexer is established with 512 kBit s via a communication converter with a G703 6 interface E1 with 2 MBit s or T1 with 1 44 MBit s The communication converter offers a 2nd interface for connecting an add...

Page 119: ...nal protection interface The connection to a repeater is established with 512 kBit s repeater 512 setting in accordance with Table 3 12 dwmutip8 070611 01 tif 1 en_US Figure 3 49 Direct Optical Connection to a Multiplexer with a C37 94 N 64 kBit s Interface Time Slot N 1 2 or 8 i i NOTE The redundancy of different communication connections for the ring topology requires rigorous separa tion of all...

Page 120: ...evice with index 1 This device functions as the timing master in a protection topology If the timing master is logged off and switched off the device with the next highest device index takes on the function of the timing master The timing master synchronizes the clocks of the other devices of this topology via the protection interfaces The time of the timing master is typically synchronized via a ...

Page 121: ... tion route can be measured and displayed separately in the directions forward and reverse This ensures that the maximum responsivity can be obtained during differential protection even if transmission times are unbalanced in the communication networks Different transmission times are insignificant for the transmis sion of protection data with a protection communication of type 2 Log Off the Devic...

Page 122: ...ol Then select the Select constellation text box to select the number of devices see next figure scconfws 241110 01 tif 1 en_US Figure 3 52 Selecting the Constellation i i NOTE You have the option of changing the number of devices for example 2 protection communication devices depending on the product code any way you like via the Select constellation text box If you change the number of devices v...

Page 123: ...to select the protection interface A text box entitled Protec tion interface will then appear see Figure 3 51 Then use the Select constellation text box to select the number of devices for example 2 devices protection com see Figure 3 52 Device Combination Settings Make the device combination settings and the settings for protection communication see next figure scconfig 181013 01 2 en_US Figure 3...

Page 124: ...r a device with a unique address Default setting _ 5131 122 Lowest appearing bit rate 64 kBit s The Lowest appearing bit rate parameter is used to set the lowest bit rate occurring in the device group Set the lowest value in each device with a three end constellation with 2 fiber optic connections 2 MBit s and a 64 kBit s connection with the lowest value 64 kBit s This value determines the maximum...

Page 125: ...c 2 MBit s CC XG 512 communication converter Figure 3 4 5 CCXG 512 kBit s 512 kBit s CC XG 128 communication converter Figure 3 4 5 CCXG 128 kBit s 128 kBit s CC XG 64 communication converter Figure 3 4 5 CCXG 64 kBit s 64 kBit s Repeater 512 communication converter Figure 3 4 8 repeater 512 kBit s 512 kBit s CC CC 128 Communication converter Figure 3 4 7 CCPW 128 kBit s 128 kBit s CC 2M 512 Commu...

Page 126: ... example upon switchover to another transmission route the indication Time delay exceeded is issued Parameter Difference Tx and Rx time Default setting _ 5161 110 Difference Tx and Rx time 0 1 ms The Difference Tx and Rx time parameter can be used to set a maximum time delay difference between the send and receive paths Set this value to 0 for a direct fiber optic connection A higher value is nece...

Page 127: ...pported by the PPS measurement PPS sync off This setting means that no synchronization is performed via PPS at the protection interface This is typically the case if no time delay differences are expected The synchronization only takes place with the telegram measurement i i NOTE The synchronization mode can be set separately for both protection interfaces If no further PPS pulse is received withi...

Page 128: ...sing the GPSMON32 Program Step 1 scGPS_2 2 _ Figure 3 56 Checking the Setting Value for the 2nd Pulse Using the GPSMON32 Program Step 2 Routing Information in DIGSI 5 Protection communications of the same type form a topology For more information on this see chapter 3 5 3 3 Function Description A data bar is exchanged between the devices of a topology connected via protection communication This ca...

Page 129: ...nformation is transmitted at least every 100 ms This priority is used for transmission of measured and metered values Complex values must be routed separately as the real and the imaginary part for trans mission Measured value thresholds that lead to an updating of a measured value are set centrally as a prop erty of the measured value These measured value thresholds apply with the corresponding r...

Page 130: ...are connected via a 64 kbits channel This is a type 1 topology 8 bits are freely available for priority 1 Now for example 4 SPS and 2 DPS can be routed 4 x 1 bit 2 x 2 bits 8 bits i i NOTE Measured values are transmitted as primary values EXAMPLE For the rated current display in the receiving device When Irated 1000 A in the transmitting device and ILoad 200 A the number 200 is displayed in the re...

Page 131: ...nals 3 and 4 are double point indications DPS for example a switch position that is transmitted by a device 1 A double point indication occupies 2 positions on the data bar In addition a measured and metered value are communicated via priority 3 As a measured or metered value uses 32 bits value 2 starts at position 33 DIGSI 5 indicates the next available position scransps 021210 01 tif 1 en_US Fig...

Page 132: ...the original state for a short time in the event of brief interruptions These 3 dropout times apply for all data of one transmission priority and are set as parameters scspsemp 021210 01 tif 1 en_US Figure 3 61 Routing of Single Point Indications Receive to the Protection Interface in Device 1 The following figure shows the routing in the 2nd device Binary inputs 1 and 2 are routed with priority 1...

Page 133: ...on is interrupted is entered This state depends on the information In the case of single point indications the state is 0 or 1 In the case of double point indi cations the bit combinations 00 01 10 or 11 are possible in order to directly signal a disturbed position upon failure of the data connection for example Hold is used to retain the state scbausps 021210 01 tif 1 en_US Figure 3 63 Routing of...

Page 134: ...ailability of protection interface communication within the last minute as percentage Availability of protection interface communication within the last hour as percentage Time delay in the send and receive direction of the telegrams between local and neighboring device You can find this diagnostic data in DIGSI under the following menu structure see Figure 3 66 sc_diagnose_wskanäle_geräteadresse ...

Page 135: ...ollowing indications values are possible Initialized The protection interface is not connected and is in the Initial state Protection interface connected The protection interface is connected to the protection interface of a device Protection interface disturbance The protection interface has not received any valid telegrams for the time set in parameter _ 5161 107 Disturbance alarm after Protecti...

Page 136: ...ulated _ 9001 103 Rated apparent power at both ends is equal If a transformer is installed in the line _ 9001 102 Rated voltage and _ 9001 103 Rated apparent power must be adjusted at both ends such that the internally calculated value of the parameter _ 9001 101 Rated current at both ends is equal In order to clarify faults each individual protection interface provides the following binary signal...

Page 137: ...s Measured Values of the Protection Interface The protection interface provides the following measured value to diagnose the protection interface commu nication Measured Value Description _ 5161 308 Tx tel h Telegrams sent during the last hour _ 5161 309 Rx tel h Telegrams received during the last hour _ 5161 310 Tx tel min Telegrams sent during the last minute _ 5161 311 Rx tel min Telegrams rece...

Page 138: ...ing the module slots for example F and the corresponding channel 1 or 2 The following figures show the extensive diagnostic data for the protection interface It is particularly helpful if data failures occur or other irregularities in a communi cation connection for example transmission time fluctuations i i NOTE The diagnostic data can also be read via the device control on the display of the dev...

Page 139: ...faces Log Type Name Values Description Media Status Interface in Direction of Outside Interface Media Status Baud rate 64 kBit s 128 kBit s 512 kBit s 2048 kBit s 30 MBit s unknown HDLC baud rate FO 64 kBit s to 2048 kBit s for 820 Nm USART modules LDFO 30 MBit s for 1300 1500 Nm long distance modules Error case unknown Media Status LinkState N A UP DOWN FO N A always display N A Media Status Tran...

Page 140: ... RXLPFramesOK Number of corresponding frames 16 bit counter Incoming telegrams low priority OK HDLC RXHPFramesERR Number of corresponding frames 16 bit counter Incoming telegrams high priority faulty HDLC RXLPFramesERR Number of corresponding frames 16 bit counter Incoming telegrams low priority faulty HDLC TXHPFramesOK Number of corresponding frames 16 bit counter Sending telegrams high priority ...

Page 141: ...er of corresponding frames 16 bit counter Sending telegrams low priority faulty HDLC Bridge Details Sub nodes Sub nodes Siemens internal special diagnostic for fault search scdiahdl 140912 01 1 en_US Figure 3 70 Diagnostic Data of the Protection Interface Log COM Interface Internal COM Link Interface Between Module and Mainboard System Functions 3 5 Protection Communication SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent ...

Page 142: ...egrams high priority faulty COM interface TXLPFramesERR Number of corresponding frames 16 bit counter Sending telegrams low priority faulty COM interface Bridge Details Sub nodes Sub nodes Siemens internal special diagnostic for fault search Table 3 21 Description of Diagnostic Data of some Setting Values of the Protection Interface Protection Interfaces Log Type Name Values Description Protection...

Page 143: ... 1 Difference Tx and Rx time 0 000 ms to 3 000 ms 0 100 ms _ 5161 113 Prot interf 1 PPS synchronization telegr and PPS telegr or PPS PPS sync off PPS sync off Information List No Information Data Class Type Type Channel 1 _ 307 Prot interface Health ENS O _ 304 Prot interface Channel Live SPS O Device combin _ 5131 52 Device combin Behavior ENS O _ 5131 53 Device combin Health ENS O _ 5131 301 Dev...

Page 144: ...161 320 Prot interf 1 Time delay jump SPS O _ 5161 321 Prot interf 1 PI synchronized SPS O _ 5161 340 Prot interf 1 Telegram lost SPS O _ 5161 308 Prot interf 1 Tx tel h MV O _ 5161 309 Prot interf 1 Rx tel h MV O _ 5161 310 Prot interf 1 Tx tel min MV O _ 5161 311 Prot interf 1 Rx tel min MV O _ 5161 312 Prot interf 1 Tx err h MV O _ 5161 313 Prot interf 1 Rx err h MV O _ 5161 314 Prot interf 1 T...

Page 145: ...ev 3 Line ENS O _ 1351 6871 302 Meas val dev 3 Vph WYE O _ 1351 6871 303 Meas val dev 3 Iph WYE O Meas val dev 4 _ 1351 6901 300 Meas val dev 4 Dev adr INS O _ 1351 6901 301 Meas val dev 4 Line ENS O _ 1351 6901 302 Meas val dev 4 Vph WYE O _ 1351 6901 303 Meas val dev 4 Iph WYE O Meas val dev 5 _ 1351 6931 300 Meas val dev 5 Dev adr INS O _ 1351 6931 301 Meas val dev 5 Line ENS O _ 1351 6931 302 ...

Page 146: ...anel or via DIGSI 5 Within a system or even beyond it is usually necessary to record the time of process data accurately and to have exact time synchronization of all devices For SIPROTEC 5 devices the sources of time and synchronization options can be configured Configurable Synchronization Options None default setting The device functions without any external time synchronization The internal ti...

Page 147: ...device display you can define the local time zone of the device parameter Offset time zone for GMT including the applicable daylight saving times start end and offset of daylight saving time using parame ters This allows the display of the local time i i NOTE For time sources that transmit the status of the switch to daylight saving time this will be taken into account automatically when creating ...

Page 148: ...on Time sync error This indication signals after the parameterized time Fault indication after that synchronization using an external time source has failed Time synchronization Leap second This indication signals that a Leap second has occurred during time synchronization using an external GPS receiver protocol variant IRIG B 005 004 with extension according to IEEE C37 118 2005 Time synchronizat...

Page 149: ... the form of a numerical offset for UTC universal time Application and Setting Notes Parameter Date Format Default setting Date format YYYY MM DD With the Date format parameter you define the local customary format of the date display Parameter Value Description YYYY MM DD Day Month Year Typical European display Example 24 12 2010 YYYY MM DD Month Day Year Typical US representation Example 12 24 2...

Page 150: ... source 2 The value of this setting is not evaluated by the device since this protocol either transmits or in the case of local time specifies the appropriate offset to UTC in each set time telegram DCF77 Time synchronization by an external DCF 77 receiver Time zone time source 1 or Time zone time source 2 local Please note There are also clocks that generate a DCF 77 signal representing UTC In th...

Page 151: ...EEE 1588 timing master In this case SIPROTEC 5 devices operate as slave only clocks IEEE 1588 v2 is supported with P2P and Ethernet Transport The IEEE 1588 service must be enabled during configuration of Ethernet inter faces so that it is available as an option for the time synchronization Time zone time source 1 or Time zone time source 2 UTC Parameter Fault indication after Default setting Fault...

Page 152: ...me Input Offset daylight saving time min Default settings as in the picture above Settings Addr Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting Time sync _ 102 Time sync Time source 1 none IRIG B DCF77 PI SNTP IEC 60870 5 103 PROFIBUS DP Modbus DNP3 IEEE 1588 IEC 60870 5 104 none _ 103 Time sync Time source 1 port port J port F port E port P port N port G _ 104 Time sync Time source 1 channel Ch1 Ch2 ...

Page 153: ...600 s Information List No Information Data Class Type Type Time managem _ 300 Time managem Daylight saving time SPS O _ 301 Time managem Clock set manually SPS O No Information Data Class Type Type Time sync _ 303 Time sync Status time source 1 SPS O _ 304 Time sync Status time source 2 SPS O _ 305 Time sync Time sync error SPS O _ 306 Time sync Leap second SPS O _ 307 Time sync High accuracy SPS ...

Page 154: ...ns which are read via binary inputs This function can be deac tivated using the mode The standby mode is also analyzed or displayed The user defined function blocks can be instantiated at the highest level alongside other function groups as well as within function groups and functions In addition there is a user defined function block control Alongside the aforementioned possibilities presented by...

Page 155: ...gistered in the form of a single point indication or forwarded as the binary result from a CFC chart EXAMPLE Acquisition using binary input further processing in a CFC and or signaling using an LED Single Point Indication Type SPS unsaved Single Point Status Unsaved In contrast to SPS single point indications the state of the SPS unsaved indication is not maintained after the device restarts For t...

Page 156: ... ON Intermediate position OFF Disturbed position EXAMPLE Acquisition of a disconnector or circuit breaker switch position Marker Command Type SPC Single Point Controllable This data type can be used as a command without feedback for simple signaling or as an internal variable marker Integer Status Value Type INS The data type INS is used to create a whole number that represents a CFC result System...

Page 157: ...s a measured value that can be used as a CFC result for instance i i NOTE Additional data types can be found under other headings in the DIGSI 5 library as well as in the corre sponding function blocks This applies to the following data types Pulse metered values see User defined functions in the DIGSI 5 library Transformer taps Metered values Phase to Ground Measured Values WYE This data type rep...

Page 158: ...ion in chapter 10 7 1 Function Description of Energy Values Additional Data Types The following data types are also used in the system but are not available for general use as user defined signals in the library ENC Enumerated Setting Controllable The data type ENC models a command with which the user can set predefined values SEQ Sequence BSC Binary Controlled Step Position The data type BSC can ...

Page 159: ...OOSE Later Binding in the DIGSI Online Help User defined signals exist as external signals and as preconfigured inputs that have been activated via the GOOSE column System Functions 3 7 User Defined Objects SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Protection Manual 159 C53000 G5040 C017 8 Edition 07 2017 ...

Page 160: ...of the switch in the bay sclposi 260116 1 en_US Figure 3 78 Settings for Circuit Breaker Switch Position The setting range for the Software filtering time parameter ranges from 0 ms to 86 400 000 ms 1 day in ms increments The Retrigger filter check box can be used to select whether the software filter should be restarted by a change from 1 to 0 and back When activated the Indication timestamp befo...

Page 161: ...tware filter setting and you can edit the settings for this Chatter blocking can be activated or deactivated as a parameter of the position in the Circuit breaker or Disconnector function block scflatte 180315 1 en_US Figure 3 79 Setting Chatter Blocking The settings for the chatter blocking function are set centrally for the entire device in DIGSI They are acces sible as settings in the General f...

Page 162: ...estarts automatically cycle time No of chatter tests This number specifies the maximum number of test cycles to be run If the number of permissible status changes of the signal stays exceeded during the initial test time of the last test cycle the signal is finally blocked In this case the indication Group warning Alarm handling group and Device group is set additionally to the Chatter blocking in...

Page 163: ...onding indication is added to the operational log At the same time the Chatter blocking indication is set After expiry of the settable Chatter idle time during the following Subsequent test time it is checked whether the input signal is still chattering This check is repeated as the No of chatter tests is set to 2 in this example If during the 2nd Subsequent test time it has been detected that the...

Page 164: ...tory is removed and the Chatter blocking indication is reset As the temporary blocking of the signal is removed the Group warning indication is not set The chatter test starts again dw_chatter block 02 1 en_US Figure 3 82 Signal Change during Chatter Blocking with Permissible Number of Signal State Changes During 2nd Subsequent Test Time Acquisition Blocking and Manual Updating During commissionin...

Page 165: ...g to be updated manually for example off Figure 3 85 Confirm the process with the softkey marked OK in the display scstatus 310816 01 1 en_US Figure 3 84 Activating the Manual Update scstatu2 310816 01 1 en_US Figure 3 85 Selecting Position The manually updated position of the switching device will be displayed scstatu3 310816 01 1 en_US Figure 3 86 Position of the Switching Device i i NOTE For sa...

Page 166: ...start the device the acquisition blocking is deactivated Except for a restart the acquisition blocking and the manually updated position are retained If the acquisition blocking is activated via the input signal Acquisition blocking it is retained as long as the binary input is active To set the acquisition blocking of a switching device the following sources are possible Operation panel of the de...

Page 167: ...f a persistent command is selected the Pulse parameter is irrelevant Device Logoff Overview In the case of multibay functions a device uses information from one or more other devices For some applica tions it may be necessary for you to remove a device with all effective functions temporarily from the plant and even to switch it off These applications are for example Maintenance work System upgrad...

Page 168: ...device leads to an interruption in protection interface communication i i NOTE The option used to log the device off is stored in the operational log Even if you switch off the device after logoff the Device logged off _ 315 state is stored If you want to establish the initial state again after logging off the device you must log on the device again To log on the device you must use the same optio...

Page 169: ...terrupted when the device is logged off and switched off For this reason devices that are not at one of the ends in series connected topologies cannot be logged off Logoff via Binary Inputs The following diagrams show potential variants on how to control binary inputs If you want to use push buttons switch them on as shown in the following figure Use the push button Key2 to log off the device use ...

Page 170: ...t logoff on SPS I _ 508 General Dev funct logoff off SPS I _ 319 General Device logoff SPC C _ 313 General Logged off via BI SPS O _ 314 General Logged off via control SPS O _ 315 General Device logged off SPS O 3 8 4 3 System Functions 3 8 Other Functions 170 SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Protection Manual C53000 G5040 C017 8 Edition 07 2017 ...

Page 171: ...tion groups for example rated voltage and rated current or rated apparent power The setting values are thus related exclusively to the primary settings If other reference values are used then this is documented for the respective protection function in the application and setting notes If parameters are selected it may happen that they are set only in percent in all 3 setting views Recommendation ...

Page 172: ...set to 1 5 A scmodsek_1 1 en_US Figure 3 92 Protection Setting Display of the Active Setting Sheet When you click the green arrow in the setting sheet at the upper left you get to the window for switching over to the setting view see the following figure Select the setting view you prefer scmodums_2 1 en_US Figure 3 93 Switchover to the Desired Setting View The following figures show the setting s...

Page 173: ...are the reference variables for the percent setting scui3phd 1 en_US Figure 3 95 Reference Data for Percentage Settings The following figure shows the threshold value of the Overcurrent protection function in the primary view at 1500 A System Functions 3 9 General Notes for Setting the Threshold Value of Protection Functions SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Protection Manual 173 C53000 G5040 C017 8 Edition ...

Page 174: ...tection Edit Mode Primary When switching over to the percent view the result should be the following value 1500 A 1000 A 100 150 System Functions 3 9 General Notes for Setting the Threshold Value of Protection Functions 174 SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Protection Manual C53000 G5040 C017 8 Edition 07 2017 ...

Page 175: ...ction Edit Mode Percent When switching over to the secondary view the result should be the following value 1500 A 1000 A 1 A 1 5 A System Functions 3 9 General Notes for Setting the Threshold Value of Protection Functions SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Protection Manual 175 C53000 G5040 C017 8 Edition 07 2017 ...

Page 176: ...former ratio changes from 1000 A 1 A to 1000 A 5 A Change the secondary rated current of the current transformer in the setting sheet of the transformer data from 1 A to 5 A Edit mode Secondary If you change the transformer data a window will appear see the following figure that will ask you for the action desired System Functions 3 9 General Notes for Setting the Threshold Value of Protection Fun...

Page 177: ... view For the new secondary transformer current 5 A the new secondary threshold value obtained is 7 5 A 1 5 A 5 7 5 A The primary and percent values remain unchanged The following figure shows the newly calculated threshold value in the secondary view System Functions 3 9 General Notes for Setting the Threshold Value of Protection Functions SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Protection Manual 177 C53000 G5040...

Page 178: ...o the Question Yes No Threshold value secondary active setting view 7 5 A 1 5 A Threshold value primary covered setting view 1500 A 300 A Changing the Transformation Ratios of the Transformer on the Device The device is preset to the secondary value at the time of delivery Only secondary values can be set directly on the device If you change transformer data directly on the device it is not follow...

Page 179: ...ce settings in DIGSI 5 you find the following general settings scDeSeDe1 310715 01 1 en_US scDeSeAl 310715 01 2 en_US 3 10 3 10 1 3 10 1 1 System Functions 3 10 Device Settings SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Protection Manual 179 C53000 G5040 C017 8 Edition 07 2017 ...

Page 180: ... command to close an energized binary output for test purposes Siemens recommends deactivating theTest support again after the test phase Application and Setting Notes The major portion of the settings is described in the chapters cited above After that the parameters on the sections Device Setting change Spontaneous indication and Test support are described Parameter Rated frequency Default setti...

Page 181: ...ivate the test mode that adds a test bit to the output indications If test mode is activated but the test mode of the relay outputs is not no relay outputs are activated by the protection functions Parameter Oper bin outp under test Default setting _ 151 Oper bin outp under test inactive If you activate the parameter Oper bin outp under test you can permit the closing of a binary output for test p...

Page 182: ...quickly You can save up to 8 different settings groups in the device In the process only one settings group is active at any given time During operation you can switch between settings groups The source of the switchover can be selected via a parameter You can switchover the settings groups via the following alternatives Via the on site operation panel directly on the device Via an online DIGSI co...

Page 183: ...ntrol function for switching the settings groups can be switched via a communication connection from the substation automation technology or via a CFC chart The communication protocols IEC 60870 5 103 IEC 60870 5 104 IEC 61850 DNP or Modbus TCP can be used for switching the settings groups via a communication connection In order to use a CFC chart for switching you must create a new CFC chart in D...

Page 184: ...parameter you specify the settings groups that you want to acti vate or the mechanisms via which the switchover is allowed You can switchover only between the settings groups specified with the Number settings groups parameter Parameter Value Parameter Value Description via control The switchover between the settings groups can only be initiated via a communication connection from a substation aut...

Page 185: ... 301 General Act settings group 2 SPC C _ 302 General Act settings group 3 SPC C _ 303 General Act settings group 4 SPC C _ 304 General Act settings group 5 SPC C _ 305 General Act settings group 6 SPC C _ 306 General Act settings group 7 SPC C _ 307 General Act settings group 8 SPC C 3 10 2 6 System Functions 3 10 Device Settings SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Protection Manual 185 C53000 G5040 C017 8 Ed...

Page 186: ...186 SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Protection Manual C53000 G5040 C017 8 Edition 07 2017 ...

Page 187: ...Applications 4 1 Overview 188 4 2 Application Templates and Functional Scope for the Devices 7SJ82 7SJ85 189 4 SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Protection Manual 187 C53000 G5040 C017 8 Edition 07 2017 ...

Page 188: ...default settings delete add functions You can find more detailed information in the 2 1 Function Embedding in the Device Check the routing of binary outputs with respect to fast and normal relays Check the CFC charts for the group warning indications and group fault indications The following describes the application templates and maximum functional scope for the devices shown in this manual i i N...

Page 189: ...emplate 3 Directional OC grounded system Template 4 Directional OC resonant grounded isol system Template 5 Capacitor bank H bridge 1 RLC 2 BI 2 BO 12 I Template 6 Capacitor bank MSCDN 2 BI 2 BO 28 I 4 V Template 7 Capacitor bank H bridge 2 BI 2 BO 8 I The following table shows the functional scope and the required function points of the application templates for the device 7SJ82 7SJ85 Table 4 1 F...

Page 190: ...nt Θ I2t x x x 50TD 51 Overcurrent protection phases advanced I x x x 50TD 51 Overcurrent protection phases basic I x x x x x x 3 x 50TD 51 OC 3ph protection for RLC elements x x 50NTD 51N Overcurrent protection ground advanced IN x x x 50NTD 51N Overcurrent protection ground basic IN x x x x x x x 50N 51N Overcurrent protection 1 phase advanced I 1pA x x 50N 51N Overcurrent protection 1 phase bas...

Page 191: ...l overcurrent protection ground basic IN V I x x x 67Ns Directional sensitive ground fault detection for systems with resonant or isolated neutral INs V I x x x 67Ns Directional sensitive ground fault detection via admittance measurement for systems with resonant or isolated neutral G0 B0 x x 67Ns Transient ground fault function for transient and permanent ground faults in resonant grounded or iso...

Page 192: ...ircuit breaker wear monitoring x x VSEL Voltage measuring point selection x x 20mA MT 20 mA unit Ethernet x x 20mA MS 20 mA unit serial x x RTDMT RTD unit Ethernet x x RTDMS RTD unit Serial x x Signaling voltage supervision x x Measuring voltage failure detection x x x x Switch onto fault x x x x x x CB Test x x x x x x x x x Interlocking x x 4 4 4 4 x x x I jump detection x x V jump detection x x...

Page 193: ...n interface serial x x Capacitor bank x x x 2 x Circuit breaker x x x x x x x x x Circuit breaker control x x Circuit breaker status only x x Disconnector x x 3 3 3 3 Disconnector status only x x Tap changer x x Analog unit x x Communication modules x x x x x x x x x Function points class 0 0 30 45 90 295 80 Applications 4 2 Application Templates and Functional Scope for the Devices 7SJ82 7SJ85 SI...

Page 194: ...194 SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Protection Manual C53000 G5040 C017 8 Edition 07 2017 ...

Page 195: ...ion Group Type Voltage 3 Phase 209 5 4 Function Group Type Capacitor Bank 212 5 5 Function Group Type Capacitor Bank Differential Protection 224 5 6 Function Group Type Analog Units 237 5 7 Function Group Type Circuit Breaker 276 5 8 Process Monitor 294 5 SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Protection Manual 195 C53000 G5040 C017 8 Edition 07 2017 ...

Page 196: ...Basic Struc ture of the Function You can find the function scope of the application templates for the various device types in the chapter 4 Applications Structure of the Function Group The function group always contains the following blocks Protected object equipment data FB General Operational measured values Process monitor Output logic of the function group Reset LED group These blocks are esse...

Page 197: ...he function group to the V 3ph measuring point is optional You can connect multiple measuring points with this interface You can find more information in chapter 6 51 Voltage Measuring Point Selection If you want to test or change the connection between the voltages and the V 3ph measuring point double click in the DIGSI 5 project tree Name of the device on Measuring point routing Connec tion type...

Page 198: ...g information in the Voltage current 3 phase function group Current flow criterion Detection of an open activated protected object equipment based on the flow of leakage current Closure detection Detection of the switching on of the protected object equipment Cold load pickup detection optional only for protection devices These data apply to all functions in the Voltage current 3 phase function gr...

Page 199: ...e defined positively in the direc tion of the protected object Power Active power factor Energy Minimum maximum values Average values With the P Q sign parameter you can invert the sign of these operational measured values such that a power flow from the line to the busbar is displayed positively More information can be found in chapter 10 1 Overview of Functions Output Logic The output logic trea...

Page 200: ...d current parameter you can set the primary rated current of the protected object or equip ment The Rated current parameter is significant for protection functions as long as the current values are set in percentages In this case it is the reference value In addition it is the reference value for the meas ured values in percent If the device works with the IEC 61850 protocol then you change only t...

Page 201: ... protected object for example as seen by the consumer as positive With the P Q sign setting you can invert the sign for these components This inversion does not influence any protection function Write Protected Settings The settings listed here are used primarily for understanding during configuration of the function groups They are calculated on the basis of other settings and cannot be directly ...

Page 202: ...cat Operate ACT O Reset LED Group _ 7381 500 Reset LED Group LED reset SPS I _ 7381 320 Reset LED Group LED have been reset SPS O Closure detec _ 1131 4681 500 Closure detec Disconnector open SPS I _ 1131 4681 300 Closure detec Closure SPS O 5 1 6 Function Group Types 5 1 Function Group Type Voltage current 3 Phase 202 SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Protection Manual C53000 G5040 C017 8 Edition 07 2017 ...

Page 203: ...as to be connected The other is optional This assignment can only be made in DIGSI via Project tree Function group connections To connect the interfaces set a cross at the intersection between the row and column in the matrix The function group has the following interfaces to the measuring points 1 phase current The 1 phase current measured values are provided via this interface You can only conne...

Page 204: ...se Voltage Measuring Point The zero sequence voltage calculated from the 3 phase voltage system or the measured residual voltage is available via the voltage interface see figure below scVI1ph_V3ph 1 en_US Figure 5 7 Connecting Measuring Points 3 Phase Voltage and 1 Phase Current to the 1 Phase Voltage Current Function Group You can connect the voltage interface of the Voltage current 1 phase func...

Page 205: ... 1 phase function group sc1stspc 190214 01 1 en_US Figure 5 8 Connecting Voltage Current 1 Phase Function Group with Circuit Breaker Function Group Fundamental Components The fundamental components are always present in the Voltage current 1 phase function group and cannot be deleted The following table shows the fundamental components of the Voltage current 1 phase function group Table 5 2 Fundam...

Page 206: ...parent power in the General function block of the Voltage current 1 phase function group You can find the parameter Rated frequency in the General function block of the Device settings i i NOTE The frequency can be calculated from the voltage or current measured value The active and reactive power are only displayed if the voltage and the 1 phase current are connected to the function group If the ...

Page 207: ...or the phase to ground voltage Parameter P Q sign Default setting _ 9421 150 P Q sign not reversed The power values are set at the factory so that power in the direction of the protected object is considered positive You can also define the power output by the protected object as positive With the P Q sign parameter you can invert the signs of active and reactive power This inversion has no effect...

Page 208: ... Behavior ENS O _ 9421 53 General Health ENS O Group indicat _ 4501 55 Group indicat Pickup ACD O _ 4501 57 Group indicat Operate ACT O Reset LED Group _ 13381 500 Reset LED Group LED reset SPS I _ 13381 320 Reset LED Group LED have been reset SPS O 5 2 6 Function Group Types 5 2 Function Group Type Voltage current 1 Phase 208 SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Protection Manual C53000 G5040 C017 8 Edition 07...

Page 209: ...tree Function group connec tions To connect the interfaces set a cross at the intersection between the row and column in the matrix sc3span1 190214 01 1 en_US Figure 5 11 Connecting Measuring Points to the Voltage 3 Phase Function Group If you add functions to the Voltage 3 phase function group these are connected to the measuring point auto matically You can connect multiple measuring points with...

Page 210: ...VC Phase to ground voltages kV V Operating rated voltage of primary values 3 VAB VBC VCA Phase to phase voltage kV V Rated operating voltage of the primary values V0 Zero sequence voltage kV V Operating rated voltage of primary values 3 VNG Neutral point displacement voltage kV V Operating rated voltage of primary values 3 f Frequency Hz Hz Rated frequency Application and Setting Notes i i NOTE Be...

Page 211: ...icat _ 4501 55 Group indicat Pickup ACD O _ 4501 57 Group indicat Operate ACT O Reset LED FG _ 4741 500 Reset LED Group LED reset SPS I _ 4741 320 Reset LED Group LED have been reset SPS O 5 3 5 Function Group Types 5 3 Function Group Type Voltage 3 Phase SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Protection Manual 211 C53000 G5040 C017 8 Edition 07 2017 ...

Page 212: ...apacitor banks and others are universal standard functions which can be used for other protected objects as well You find the exclusive protection functions in the directory Capacitor bank protection scfgcapb 250314 01 2 en_US Figure 5 13 Capacitor Bank Function Group Functional Scope for Device Type 7SJ85 For more information about the embedding of the functions in the device refer to chapter 2 F...

Page 213: ...or bank function group The functions are available from the Global DIGSI 5 Library Functions that are not needed can be deleted from the function group Dwstrcap 20140619 01 vsd 2 en_US Figure 5 14 Structure of the Capacitor Bank Function Group The Capacitor bank function group has interfaces with the following parts Measuring points Circuit breaker function group Interfaces with the Measuring Poin...

Page 214: ...voltage within a capacitor bank are supplied via this interface The connection of the 3 phase voltage CB tap interface is optional You can connect the 3 phase voltage CB tap interface to a maximum of one 3 phase voltage measuring point Voltage unbalance optional The unbalanced voltage measurands for example an isolated neutral point of the capacitor bank are supplied via this interface The connect...

Page 215: ...eive the measured values from the correct measuring points If you add protection functions to the function group but the neces sary interface is not connected to any measuring point DIGSI 5 reports an inconsistency Configure the meas uring points in DIGSI 5 using the Function group connections editor For the protection functions applied on the interfaces Current unbalance and 3 phase current you h...

Page 216: ... sent in the direction of the protection function group The Capacitor bank function group is connectable to a Circuit breaker function group This connection generally determines Which circuit breaker is activated by the protection functions of the Capacitor bank function group Starting of the Circuit breaker failure protection function if available in the Circuit breaker function group through the...

Page 217: ...ction Functions and Stage Using the Circuit Breaker Interaction Editor If an application template is used the function groups have already been connected to each other because this link is essential to ensure proper operation You can modify the link in DIGSI 5 using the Function group connections editor You can find more information in chapter 2 1 Function Embedding in the Device If this link is m...

Page 218: ...Logic Diagram of Processing the Blocked by Discharge Signal Global Compensation FB General The Global compensation function block provides the binary input signal Compensate to carry out the manual compensation for all functions in the FG using compensated measuring values In addition the binary input signal Reset comp val is provided to reset all compensation values for the functions using compen...

Page 219: ...tem V0 Zero sequence voltage kV V Rated operating voltage of the primary system 3 VNG Neutral point displacement voltage kV V Rated operating voltage of the primary system 3 f Frequency Hz Hz Rated frequency Ptot Active power total power MW Rated operating voltage and rated oper ating current of the primary system 3 Vrated Irated Qtot Reactive power total power MVAr Rated operating voltage and rat...

Page 220: ...Inversion of Power Related Measured and Statistical Values FB General The following values calculated in operational measured values are defined positively in the direction of the protected object Power Power factor Energy Minimum maximum values of the power Average values of the power With the P Q sign setting you can invert the sign of these operational measured values such that a power flow fro...

Page 221: ...curr Default setting _ 14641 101 Capacitor reference curr 1000 A With the Capacitor reference curr parameter you set the reference current for the capacitor bank to be protected This Capacitor reference curr specified here is the reference value for the percentage measured values and setting values made in percentages Depending on the user philosophy the reference value could be the capacitor bank...

Page 222: ...ing _ 14641 109 Cap bank neutral point isolated With the parameter Cap bank neutral point you can specify whether the neutral point of capacitor bank is isolated or grounded This information is required when applying the function 87V voltage differ ential protection Parameter P Q sign Default setting _ 14611 158 P Q sign not reversed The power and energy values are defined by the manufacturer such...

Page 223: ...4611 158 Further settings P Q sign not reversed reversed not reversed Information List No Information Data Class Type Type Group indicat _ 4501 55 Group indicat Pickup ACD O _ 4501 57 Group indicat Operate ACT O Reset LED Group _ 7381 500 Reset LED Group LED reset SPS I _ 7381 320 Reset LED Group LED have been reset SPS O General _ 14641 500 General Compensate SPS I _ 14641 501 General Reset comp ...

Page 224: ...ion group always includes the Capacitor bank and Capacitor bank side function groups In total you can assign a maximum of 3 function groups Capacitor bank or Capacitor bank side to the Capacitor bank diff function group The following table shows you the number of function group types that can be instantiated for device 7SJ85 Table 5 7 Function Group Types in the Device Device Function Group Type C...

Page 225: ... Energy Values and Supervision of the Primary System You will find the corresponding function groups and the folders with the usable protection functions in the Global DIGSI library under each device type In the Capacitor bank diff function group you can load only the differential protection functions scfgcadf 300414 01 2 en_US Figure 5 25 Function Group Capacitor Bank Diff Functional Scope 5 5 2 ...

Page 226: ... between the protection function group and the Circuit breaker function group The following data is required Pickup and operate indications of the protection functions in the direction of the Circuit breaker function group Information on the circuit breaker condition in the direction of the Protection function groups You can connect the Capacitor bank diff function group to one or more Circuit bre...

Page 227: ... capacitor bank data characterizes the data of the capacitor bank to be protected The data relevant for the differential protection is shown The Capacitor bank diff function group takes the data from the coupled function groups Capacitor bank and Capacitor bank side Output Logic The output logic treats the pickup and trip signals of the protection and supervision functions in the function group se...

Page 228: ...bank side function group also contains the measuring functions You can find more information in chapter 10 Measured Values Energy Values and Supervision of the Primary System The Capacitor bank side function group must always have interfacing to the Capacitor bank diff function group You will find the corresponding function groups and the folders with the usable protection functions in the Global ...

Page 229: ...capacitor bank data Operational measured values Process monitor Output logic of the function group These blocks are required for the Capacitor bank side function group and therefore cannot be loaded or deleted You can load the protection and supervision functions required for your application in the Capacitor bank side function group The functions are available in the Global DIGSI 5 library Functi...

Page 230: ...surands from the 3 phase power system are supplied via this interface Depending on the trans former connection type these are for example I A I B I C I N or 3 I 0 All values that can be calculated from the measurands are also provided via this interface The Capacitor bank side function group must always be linked to the I 3ph measuring point You can connect the 3 phase current interface with a max...

Page 231: ...an application template is used the function groups are connected to each other because this link is abso lutely essential to ensure proper operation You can modify the connection in DIGSI 5 via the Function group connections Editor If the connection is missing DIGSI 5 reports an inconsistency You can find more detailed information in chapter 2 1 Function Embedding in the Device Interface with Pro...

Page 232: ...e and rated operating current of the primary system 3 Vrated Irated Q Reactive power total power MVAr Rated operating voltage and rated operating current of the primary system 3 Vrated Irated S Apparent power total power MVA Rated operating voltage and rated operating current of the primary system 3 Vrated Irated Cos φ Active factor abs abs 100 corresponds to c os φ 1 PA PB PC Phase related active...

Page 233: ...ision functions in the function group separately Pickup logic and output logic are each assigned to the signals The pickup and output logic generate the overarching indications group indications of the function group These group indications are transferred via the Protection information interface to the Circuit breaker function group and are processed further there The pickup and operate indicatio...

Page 234: ...rrection rated current of the protected object If the capacitor bank is part of a delta connection the value to be set here can differ from the capacitor refer ence current set in the Capacitor bank function group by factor 3 Otherwise set always the same values Depending on user philosophy you can use the capacitor bank rated current including the harmonics or the capacitor bank fundamental compo...

Page 235: ...h ID Default setting _ 1781 14611 211 MI3ph2 usesMeasP with ID 0 The MI3ph2 usesMeasP with ID parameter shows you which 3 phase measuring point is connected to the capacitor bank side Every measuring point is assigned a unique ID Parameter CT mismatch M I 3ph 1 Default setting _ 1781 14611 215 CT mismatch M I 3ph 1 0 000 The CT mismatch M I 3ph 1 parameter shows you the magnitude adaptation of the...

Page 236: ...General Neutral point grounded isolated isolated _ 1781 15571 104 General Winding configuration Y Wye D Delta Y Wye _ 1781 15571 100 General Vector group numeral 0 to 11 0 Measurements _ 1781 14611 158 Further settings P Q sign not reversed reversed not reversed Information List No Information Data Class Type Type Group indicat _ 4501 55 Group indicat Pickup ACD O _ 4501 57 Group indicat Operate A...

Page 237: ... 33 Analog Unit Function Group in DIGSI Structure of the Function Group If the device has a measuring transducer it is automatically mapped in the Analog units function group If one or more RTD units are connected to the device you have to load one or more RTD unit Ether or RTD unit serial functions from the Global DIGSI library in order to map the RTD units The following figure shows the structur...

Page 238: ... external RTD unit These measured tempera ture values are available for all protection function groups in which a temperature monitoring function works The RTD unit Ether function is not preconfigured by the manufacturer A maximum of 20 function instances can operate simultaneously The RTD unit serial function is set up structurally exactly in the same manner as the RTD unit Ether function Functio...

Page 239: ...ith the 20 mA unit Structure of the Function The function 20 mA unit Ether can work only in the function group Analog units A maximum of 4 function instances can work simultaneously Each instance contains 12 preconfigured channel function blocks The function 20 mA unit Ether contains input and output channels which can be configured independently of one another dwstrfn2 150113 01 tif 2 en_US Figur...

Page 240: ...ion and Setting Notes The 20 mA measurement unit 7XV5674 is supported Error Responses The following table lists the conditions under which the Health status transitions to the Alarm or Warning state Table 5 10 Error Responses Error Description Status Health The function 20 mA unit Ether cannot establish a connection with a communication module Alarm The function 20 mA unit Ether sends TCP settings...

Page 241: ...twork configuration You can set any valid IPv4 address that does not cause conflicts with other IP addresses in the network First set an IP address for the 7XV5674 20 mA unit Then specify the IP address settings for the communication module to the same address Settings on the 20 mA Unit The 7XV5674 20 mA unitis set with a web browser on the laptop computer via the latter s Ethernet interface Set M...

Page 242: ...ch as a temperature or a pressure Therefore the device must contain a characteristic curve that maps the physical quantity to the 20 mA value If you do not activate the Range active setting no x in the check box the function operates over the range 0 mA to 20 mA If a value smaller than 0 mA or greater than 20 mA is active at the input of the 20 mA unit the measured value is identified as invalid T...

Page 243: ...e 2 In this example the Range active setting is selected The setting Upper limit is at 20 mA the setting Lower limit is at 4 mA The setting Upper limit Sensor is at 55 and the setting Lower limit Sensor is at 33 If the input current is smaller than 4 mA or greater than 20 mA the quality of the scaled measured value in this example is invalid Each 20 mA channel makes available the scaled measured v...

Page 244: ...om a usable range of 20 mA to 20 mA If you activate the Range active setting then 4 additional settings Upper limit Upper limit Sensor Lower limit and Lower limit Sensor appear Parameter Upper limit Lower limit Upper limit Sensor and Lower limit Sensor Default setting _ 13111 105 Upper limit 20 000 mA Default setting _ 13111 109 Upper limit Sensor 100 Default setting _ 13111 106 Lower limit 4 000 ...

Page 245: ...el 1 Unit C F Ω Ω km Ω mi 1 s A As cos φ cycles dB F km F mi h Hz Hz s in J J Wh K l s m mi min p u Pa periods rad rad s s V V Hz VA VAh var varh Vs W W s Wh m _ 13111 108 Channel 1 Resolution 1 0 1 0 01 0 001 0 1 5 6 3 7 Function Group Types 5 6 Function Group Type Analog Units SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Protection Manual 245 C53000 G5040 C017 8 Edition 07 2017 ...

Page 246: ...0 mA unit Transforms the measured 20 mA values into slowly changing process variables such as temperature or gas pressure Makes the recorded process tags available to CFC GOOSE protocols and the device display Monitors communication with the 20 mA unit The function 20 mA unit Serial is structured in the same way as the function 20 mA Unit Ether The mode of operation is also identical The only diff...

Page 247: ...setting _ 13111 108 Resolution 0 1 The Resolution setting is used to specify the measured value resolution Parameter Range active Default setting _ 13111 107 Range active false If you do not activate the Range active setting no x in the check box the function operates over the range 0 mA to 20 mA The setting of the range for the scaled value goes from a usable range of 0 mA to 20 mA If you activat...

Page 248: ..._ 2311 106 General Slave address 1 to 247 1 Channel 1 _ 13111 103 Channel 1 Unit C F Ω Ω km Ω mi 1 s A As cos φ cycles dB F km F mi h Hz Hz s in J J Wh K l s m mi min p u Pa periods rad rad s s V V Hz VA VAh var varh Vs W W s Wh m 5 6 4 3 Function Group Types 5 6 Function Group Type Analog Units 248 SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Protection Manual C53000 G5040 C017 8 Edition 07 2017 ...

Page 249: ...l Health ENS O _ 2311 56 General Failure SPS O Channel 1 _ 13111 53 Channel 1 Health ENS O _ 13111 71 Channel 1 Failure SPS O _ 13111 301 Channel 1 20 mA output scale MV O _ 13111 302 Channel 1 20 mA output raw MV O Communication with 20 mA Unit Integration of a Serial 20 mA Unit Connection of the Communication Lines Figure 5 42 shows how to connect the 20 mA unit to the SIPROTEC 5 device Note tha...

Page 250: ...re 5 44 Selecting the SUP Protocol Communication Settings Make the communications settings for the relevant serial channels For this use the default settings specified by the 20 mA unit Normally you must adapt only the parameterization of the SIPROTEC 5 device to the settings of the 20 mA unit Make sure that the setting values in both devices are the same The settings of the Non flickering light o...

Page 251: ...ertion of the Function 20 mA Unit Serial 1 Now set the channel number over which the SUP protocol runs In addition set the slave address of the 20 mA unit This address must be set with the same value in the 20 mA unit refer to the following figure For the first use of the 20 mA unit the following device configuration must be set on the 20 mA unit Bus protocol mod Device address 1 Baud rate 9600 Pa...

Page 252: ...evice configura tion Figure 5 48 displays the available slots in the base module or on the expansion module CB 202 Alterna tively you can also use the integrated Ethernet interface Port J scautcp1 220114 01 DE 1 en_US Figure 5 48 Inserting an Ethernet Module Communication Settings Activate the SUP Ethernet protocol for the Ethernet module 5 6 5 2 Function Group Types 5 6 Function Group Type Analog...

Page 253: ...220114 01 DE 1 en_US Figure 5 50 Selection of the Protocol With the selection of the SUP protocol for the 20 mA unit DIGSI automatically adds the Analog units function group and the 20 mA unit Ether function to your device configuration refer to the following figure Function Group Types 5 6 Function Group Type Analog Units SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Protection Manual 253 C53000 G5040 C017 8 Edition 07...

Page 254: ...cess voltage values DC 10 V to 10 V as well as current values DC 20 mA to 20 mA The function MT fast input Provides sampled values for recording in the fault record the maximum sampling frequency is 8 kHz for all other SIPROTEC 5 devices The recorded sampling frequency results from the setting of the fault recorder function Calculated measured values from the sampled values These measured values h...

Page 255: ...nction Description Once you have instantiated the MT fast input function it will be visible in the project tree in the function group Analog units You can find the function group Analog units in DIGSI in the Settings folder If you open the subdirectory MT fast input you reach the setting sheet for the respective input for more details see Application and Setting Notes The hardware is designed in s...

Page 256: ...so been wired correctly see Hardware manual Input and Output Module IO212 Parameter Unit Default setting _ 103 Unit A With the parameter Unit you set the physical unit of measurement of the measured values The possible setting values are listed in the settings table Parameter Measuring window Default setting _ 142 Measuring window 10 ms With the parameter Measuring window you set the measuring win...

Page 257: ...transducer Parameter Upper limit Upper limit Sensor Lower limit and Lower limit Sensor With the following parameters you set the scaling of the measuring variables By that you can scale in an application specific way Default setting Upper limit 20 00 mA Default setting Upper limit Sensor 1 00 Default setting Lower limit 20 00 mA Default setting Lower limit Sensor 1 00 With these setting parameters...

Page 258: ...ue corresponds to 200 C and the lower value to 100 C This results in the following characteristic In accordance with the set characteristic curve the function calculates the sensor value from the measured current The coefficients of the linear equation gradient and foot point are calculated from the set threshold and the sensor values are determined A supplied current of 9 333 mA corresponds to a ...

Page 259: ...imits are at approx 20 mA and 20 mA or 10 V and 10 V Setting Example 2 For special applications the transmitter sends a maximum of 12 V This voltage shall be issued accordingly as sensor voltage Set the parameters as follows Upper limit 10 00 V Upper limit Sensor 10 00 V Lower limit 10 00 V Lower limit Sensor 10 00 V With this setting a signal of 12 V is issued as a 12 V measured value see followi...

Page 260: ...al Greater than 10 V Settings Addr Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting MT fast _ 101 MT in TD input signal type Voltage input Current input Current input 5 6 6 5 Function Group Types 5 6 Function Group Type Analog Units 260 SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Protection Manual C53000 G5040 C017 8 Edition 07 2017 ...

Page 261: ...w 10 ms 20 ms 40 ms 60 ms 80 ms 100 ms 10 ms _ 107 MT in Range active 0 1 false _ 104 MT in Conversion factor 1000000 00 to 1000000 00 1 00 _ 105 MT in Upper limit 20 00 m Ato 20 00 mA 5 00 mA _ 109 MT in Upper limit Sensor 1000000 00 to 1000000 00 1 00 _ 106 MT in Lower limit 20 00 m Ato 20 00 mA 4 00 mA Function Group Types 5 6 Function Group Type Analog Units SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Protection M...

Page 262: ...the RTD unit Provides the captured temperatures to the temperature monitoring function Monitors communication with the RTD unit Structure of the Function The RTD unit Ether function can only work in the Analog units function group A maximum of 20 function instances can work simultaneously Each instance contains 12 preconfigured sensor function blocks dwstrfnc 291112 01 tif 2 en_US Figure 5 58 Stru...

Page 263: ... a 100 Mbit communication module is therefore not possible For this reason you must connect the RTD box to the communication module via a 10 100 MBit s autosensing switch which automatically recognizes the transmis sion rates and adapts them accordingly Further information can be found in the Application and setting notes see chapter 5 6 7 4 Application and Setting Notes Error Responses The follow...

Page 264: ...sses in the network Set an appropriate IP address first at the Ziehl TR1200 IP RTD unit Then specify the IP address parameter for the communication module to the same address Settings on the RTD Unit The Ziehl TR1200 IP RTD unit is set with the front keys or in a Web browser on a laptop computer via its Ethernet interface Set the connection type of the sensors 3 wire connection or resistance value...

Page 265: ...nd can be monitored by the Temperature supervision function Error Responses If the measured input value is determined to be incorrect the quality attribute of the output measured temperature value is set to invalid The statuses for Health and Error take the statuses in accordance with the following table Table 5 13 Error response Error Description Health Status Error Status Sensor or line short ci...

Page 266: ...e Display Between C and F The following settings and information table shows only 1 of the 12 sensors as the setting possibilities of the 12 sensors do not differ Settings Addr Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting General _ 2311 103 General Port port E port F port J port N port P port J Sensor 1 _ 11611 102 Sensor 1 Sensor type Pt 100 Ni 100 Ni 120 Pt 100 Information List No Information Dat...

Page 267: ...on Parameter Channel number Default setting _ 2311 105 Channel number 1 A serial communication module optionally uses 2 channels With the Channel number settings you set the channel number 1 or 2 through which the RTD unit is connected to the device The communication module inputs are labeled with the channel numbers Parameter Slave address Default setting _ 2311 106 Slave address 1 Use the Slave ...

Page 268: ...or 4 _ 11614 102 Sensor 4 Sensor type Pt 100 Ni 100 Ni 120 Pt 100 Sensor 5 _ 11615 102 Sensor 5 Sensor type Pt 100 Ni 100 Ni 120 Pt 100 Sensor 6 _ 11616 102 Sensor 6 Sensor type Pt 100 Ni 100 Ni 120 Pt 100 Sensor 7 _ 11617 102 Sensor 7 Sensor type Pt 100 Ni 100 Ni 120 Pt 100 Sensor 8 _ 11618 102 Sensor 8 Sensor type Pt 100 Ni 100 Ni 120 Pt 100 Sensor 9 _ 11619 102 Sensor 9 Sensor type Pt 100 Ni 10...

Page 269: ...ealth ENS O _ 11613 60 Sensor 3 Failure SPS O _ 11613 80 Sensor 3 TmpOut MV O Sensor 4 _ 11614 52 Sensor 4 Health ENS O _ 11614 60 Sensor 4 Failure SPS O _ 11614 80 Sensor 4 TmpOut MV O Sensor 5 _ 11615 52 Sensor 5 Health ENS O _ 11615 60 Sensor 5 Failure SPS O _ 11615 80 Sensor 5 TmpOut MV O Sensor 6 _ 11616 52 Sensor 6 Health ENS O _ 11616 60 Sensor 6 Failure SPS O _ 11616 80 Sensor 6 TmpOut MV ...

Page 270: ...RTD Unit Ziehl TR1200 Connection of the Communication Lines Figure 5 62 shows how you connect the RTD box to the SIPROTEC 5 device Note that Pin 1 of the RJ45 plug is connected to RTD B and Pin 2 is connected to RTD A dwverbau 201112 01 tif 1 en_US Figure 5 62 Connection of the RTD Unit to the SIPROTEC 5 Device Adding a USART Module Add a USART AB 1EL or a USART AC 2EL USART module in DIGSI to the...

Page 271: ...use the default settings specified by the RTD box Normally you must adapt only the parameterization of the SIPROTEC 5 device to the settings of the RTD box Make sure that the setting values in both devices are the same The settings of the Non flickering light on off is not relevant for the RS485 interface i i NOTE The driver for the USART module for the SUP protocol is not preinstalled as standard...

Page 272: ...5 66 Analog Unit Instance Now set the channel number over which the SUP protocol runs In addition set the slave address of the RTD box This address must be set with the same value in the RTD box refer to the following figure The following device configuration must be set on the TR1200 RTD unit when the RTD unit is used for the first time Bus protocol mod Device address 1 Baud rate 9600 Parity no F...

Page 273: ... the device configu ration Figure 5 68 displays the available slots in the base module or on the expansion module CB 202 Alter natively you can also use the integrated Ethernet interface Port J scautcp1 220114 01 DE 1 en_US Figure 5 68 Inserting an Ethernet Module Communication Settings Activate the SUP Ethernet protocol for the Ethernet module 5 6 9 2 Function Group Types 5 6 Function Group Type ...

Page 274: ...14 01 DE 1 en_US Figure 5 70 SUP Ethernet Protocol Activation base module With the selection of the SUP protocol for the RTD unit DIGSI automatically adds the Analog units function group and the RTD unit Ether function to your device configuration refer to the following figure Function Group Types 5 6 Function Group Type Analog Units 274 SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Protection Manual C53000 G5040 C017 8...

Page 275: ...s Finally load the configuration in the device Temperature Simulation without Sensors Connect a resistor on the sensor terminals of the RTD unit Using this resistor simulate a constant tempera ture The resistance value should be around 50 Ω to 200 Ω If you want to simulate a changeable temperature connect an adjustable resistor of maximum 470 Ω instead of a fixed resistor 5 6 9 3 Function Group Ty...

Page 276: ...s for example the functional scope of the Circuit breaker function group scfgleis 200214 01 1 en_US Figure 5 73 Circuit Breaker Function Group Example of the Functional Scope The Circuit breaker function group includes 3 different types of circuit breakers Circuit breaker Circuit breaker control Circuit breaker status only The circuit breaker type can accept additional basic function blocks for pr...

Page 277: ...t breaker Circuit breaker position recognition for protection functions Detection of manual closure General settings The following figure shows the structure of the Circuit breaker function group The individual function blocks in the image are described in the following chapters dwfgstru 080812 01 tif 1 en_US Figure 5 74 Structure of the Circuit Breaker Function Group The Circuit breaker function ...

Page 278: ... used Interface with Protection Function Groups All required data is exchanged between the protection function groups and the Circuit breaker function group via the interfaces of the Circuit breaker function group This data includes for example the pickup and operate indications of the protection functions sent in the direction of the Circuit breaker function group and for example the circuit brea...

Page 279: ...ry voltage which serves as a reference for all voltage related values within the Circuit breaker function group This applies both for operational measured values and for setting values in Enter the primary rated voltage of the protected object for example the line here If the device works with the IEC 61850 protocol then you change only the setting value of the parameter via DIGSI 5 and not direct...

Page 280: ...00 Circuit break Trip open cmd SPS O _ 4261 301 Circuit break Close command SPS O _ 4261 302 Circuit break Command active SPS O _ 4261 303 Circuit break Definitive trip SPS O _ 4261 304 Circuit break Alarm suppression SPS O _ 4261 306 Circuit break Op ct INS O _ 4261 307 Circuit break ΣI Brk BCR O _ 4261 308 Circuit break ΣIA Brk BCR O _ 4261 309 Circuit break ΣIB Brk BCR O _ 4261 310 Circuit brea...

Page 281: ...6 loausbef 140113 01 tif 1 en_US Figure 5 75 Trip Command Trip Command Reset lobefe3p 140113 01 tif 1 en_US Figure 5 76 Trip Command Reset Once a trip command is issued it is stored see Figure 5 75 You determine the criteria for resetting a trip command that has been issued with the parameter Reset of trip command with dropout The trip command is reset if the function that initiated tripping reset...

Page 282: ...et of trip command with I Parameter Value Description with I With this setting the trip command is reset as soon as the current is removed provided the tripping function has dropped out The most important factor for recognition of the open circuit breaker is the current falling short of the value set in the parameter _ 2311 112 Current thresh CB open with I aux contact For this setting not only th...

Page 283: ...Opening of the circuit breaker as a result of control operations Closing of the circuit breaker as a result of automatic reclosing or control operations Tripping is always the result of a protection function The operate indications of the individual protection func tions are summarized in the Trip logic function block The trip command that causes the tripping in the Circuit breaker function block ...

Page 284: ...all closing operations The Output time parameter affects the signal The signal is pending for the duration of this period with the following exception The signal is canceled before expiration of the period if the auxiliary contacts report that the circuit breaker is closed before expira tion of the period Normal routing Command active This signal is active as long as one of the binary outputs assi...

Page 285: ...n of acquisition blocking Reset AcqBlk Subst SPS This is used to reset acquisition blocking and manual update of the circuit breaker Setting acquisition blocking and tracking is blocked with the input activated Ready SPS The active signal indicates that the circuit breaker is ready for an OFF ON OFF cycle The signal remains active as long as the circuit breaker is unable to trip The signal is used...

Page 286: ... use please refer to 5 7 9 2 Application and Setting Notes lounterd 100611 01 tif 1 en_US Figure 5 79 Definitive Tripping Circuit Breaker Tripping Alarm Suppression Tripping and Opening Information When a trip or opening command is issued the breaking information shown in the next figure is saved in the fault log loausloe 081210 01 tif 2 en_US Figure 5 80 Breaking Information The following statist...

Page 287: ...er You can find a detailed description in chapter 8 2 2 3 Connection Variants of the Circuit Breaker i i NOTE Do not confuse these 1 pole 1 5 pole and 2 pole activations of the circuit breaker with 1 pole or 3 pole tripping of the circuit breaker Routing for Analysis of the Circuit Breaker Switch Position For certain functions of the device it is useful to detect the circuit breaker switch positio...

Page 288: ... Parameter Output Time Default setting _ 101 Output time 0 10 s The Output time parameter acts on the signals for tripping opening and closing of the circuit breaker CAUTION Do not set a time that is too short If you set a time that is too short there is a danger that the device contacts will interrupt the control circuit If this happens the device contacts will burn out Set a time that is long en...

Page 289: ...rent IN Output Signal Indication Suppression Whereas in the case of feeders without an automatic reclosing function every trip command is final due to a protection function the use of an automatic reclosing function should only cause the motion detector of the circuit breaker fleeting contact on the circuit breaker to trigger an alarm if tripping of the circuit breaker is definitive see next figur...

Page 290: ... 306 Circuit break Op ct INS O _ 307 Circuit break ΣI Brk BCR O _ 308 Circuit break ΣIA Brk BCR O _ 309 Circuit break ΣIB Brk BCR O _ 310 Circuit break ΣIC Brk BCR O _ 311 Circuit break Break current phs A MV O _ 312 Circuit break Break current phs B MV O _ 313 Circuit break Break current phs C MV O _ 317 Circuit break Break current 3I0 IN MV O _ 314 Circuit break Break voltage phs A MV O _ 315 Ci...

Page 291: ...s incomplete due to the routing of the auxiliary contacts and the condition can no longer be determined reliably These uncertain conditions are evaluated differently by certain functions Opening This is a dynamically occurring condition that results when while a trip command is active and the auxiliary contact is still closed the current is detected to have fallen below the threshold value because...

Page 292: ...nal control function of the device This is possible because the control carries out plausibility checks itself and is also subject to inter locking Application and Setting Notes Input Signals Input Blocking of Manual Closure In practice the input signal Input is connected directly to the control circuit of the circuit breaker closing coil see following figure losteuer 150113 01 tif 1 en_US Figure ...

Page 293: ...ion time Siemens recommends an action time of 300 ms Parameter CB open dropout delay Default setting _ 102 CB open dropout delay 0 ms With the CB open dropout delay parameter you can maintain the effectiveness of internal indication CB open circuited for the set time If the input signal Input becomes active after external delayed manual closure the indication _ 300 Detected is output as long as th...

Page 294: ...turer with the following function blocks Cold load pickup detection optional Current flow criterion Circuit breaker condition Closure detection dwpro3pt 061212 01 tif 2 en_US Figure 5 89 Structure Embedding of the Function You can activate the cold load pickup detection as needed All other stages of the process monitor run perma nently in the background and are not displayed in DIGSI The following...

Page 295: ...llowing conditions is met A phase current falls below the set threshold of the Current thresh CB open parameter The hysteresis stabilizes the signal The corresponding phase current for example I A falls below 10 of the phase current when the trip command arrives If the current does not drop until after a delay due to current transformer influences an open pole can therefore be detected quickly eve...

Page 296: ...ed set the Current thresh CB open parameter sensitively Siemens recommends a setting value of 0 100 A Circuit Breaker Condition for the Protected Object Logic loprolsz 140611 01 tif 2 en_US Figure 5 92 Logic Diagram of the Circuit Breaker Condition for the Protected Object Function Block The circuit breaker position recognition in the Circuit breaker CB function group provides the circuit breaker ...

Page 297: ...duction of the responsivity The closure detection determines whether the protected object is switched on Logic loein6md 171012 01 tif 1 en_US Figure 5 93 Logic Diagram of Closure Detection For an applied binary input signal Detected from Manual close function block the indication Closure is active Information List No Information Data Class Type Type Closure detec _ 4681 500 Closure detec Disconnec...

Page 298: ...e threshold value of a protection function or you can select a special characteristic curve If the Cold load pickup detection function block detects an open feeder and the set time of the Min CB open time parameter has expired the indication Activate cold load is generated With the Activate cold load indication you can activate a parameter set of the Cold load pickup func tion Via the binary input...

Page 299: ...ted if one of the following conditions is met Analysis of the circuit breaker auxiliary contact detects a clearing open condition in at least one phase The current flow criterion detects a clearing open condition Parameter Dropout threshold current Default setting _ 102 Dropout threshold current 1 00 A With the Dropout threshold current parameter you set the threshold at which the output signal Co...

Page 300: ...5 000 A _ 103 Cold load PU Dropout delay curr crit 1 s to 600 s 600 s _ 104 Cold load PU Dropout delay CB closed 1 s to 21600 s 3600 s _ 105 Cold load PU Min CB open time 0 s to 21600 s 3600 s Information List No Information Data Class Type Type Cold load PU _ 81 Cold load PU Block stage SPS I _ 500 Cold load PU Block fast dropout SPS I _ 501 Cold load PU Activate cold load SPS I _ 54 Cold load PU...

Page 301: ...ional Negative Sequence Protection 642 6 19 Thermal Overload Protection 3 Phase Advanced 651 6 20 Thermal Overload Protection User Defined Characteristic Curve 665 6 21 Thermal Overload Protection 1 Phase 676 6 22 Unbalanced Load Protection 686 6 23 Overvoltage Protection with 3 Phase Voltage 692 6 24 Overvoltage Protection with Zero Sequence Voltage Residual Voltage 704 6 25 Overvoltage Protectio...

Page 302: ...36 6 42 Circuit Breaker Restrike Protection 853 6 43 Restricted Ground Fault Protection 862 6 44 External Trip Initiation 3 Pole 880 6 45 Automatic Reclosing Function 883 6 46 Fault Locator 933 6 47 Temperature Supervision 941 6 48 Phase Sequence Switchover 951 6 49 Current Jump Detection 957 6 50 Voltage Jump Detection 960 6 51 Voltage Measuring Point Selection 963 Protection and Automation Funct...

Page 303: ...pe and scope of the required measuring points depend on the application Possible measuring points are Voltage 3 phase measuring point V 3 ph Current 3 phase measuring point I 3 ph Voltage 1 phase measuring point V 1 ph Current 1 phase measuring point I 1 ph The measuring points have interfaces to the function groups requiring voltage and or current measured values of the power system Application a...

Page 304: ... 5 You can find connection examples for current transformers in chapter A 7 Connection Examples for Current Transformers The connection examples provide assistance when selecting the type of connection Parameter Tracking Default setting _ 8881 127 Tracking active With the parameter Tracking you specify whether you would like to work with the sampling frequency tracking function Parameter Value Des...

Page 305: ... defined as yes When switching the parameter the direction of the phase currents and of the ground current IN or IN sepa rate is rotated device internally dwpolstromwdl 251013 1 en_US Figure 6 2 Polarity of Current Transformers Parameter Inverted phases Default setting _ 8881 114 Inverted phases none The Inverted phases parameter is intended for special applications for example pumped storage hydr...

Page 306: ...nt Ix Parameter Rated primary current Default setting _ 2311 101 Rated primary current 1000 A With the Rated primary current parameter the active primary rated current of the current transformer is set Parameter Rated secondary current Default setting _ 2311 102 Rated secondary current 1 A With the Rated secondary current parameter you set the current secondary rated current of the current transfo...

Page 307: ...ption of these settings in chapter Supervision Functions Parameter Rated primary voltage Default setting _ 8911 101 Rated primary voltage 400 000 kV The Rated primary voltage parameter is used to set the primary rated voltage of the voltage trans former Parameter Rated secondary voltage Default setting _ 8911 102 Rated secondary voltage 100 V The Rated secondary voltage parameter is used to set th...

Page 308: ...ce voltage V0 sec is equal to the secondary phase to ground voltage Expressed as secondary transformer rated voltage then Vrated sec 3 The measured residual voltage on the broken delta winding is the sum of the voltage drops on the 3 sides Expressed with the side ratio the result is VN sec 3 Vrated sec 3 Calculate the Matching ratio Vph VN parameter as follows fo_bsp1 2 en_US Set Matching ratio Vp...

Page 309: ...dual voltage VN sec Proceed with the compilation as follows The Matching ratio Vph VN parameter is significant for the following functions Overvoltage protection with zero sequence voltage residual voltage Measured value supervision Scaling of the faulty and measured values Parameter VT connection Default setting _ 8911 104 VT connection 3 ph to gnd volt VN The parameter VT connection shows the co...

Page 310: ...tches to another channel etc Once switched to a current channel the system automatically switches back to the voltage channel if a voltage channel is valid again Parameter Value Description active If you have set the parameter Tracking active the measuring point will be included when determining the sampling frequency If possible only the 3 phase measuring points shall be considered Siemens recomm...

Page 311: ...ou can find more detailed information in chapter 6 1 6 Application and Setting Notes for Measuring Point Voltage 3 Phase V 3ph i i NOTE The Matching ratio Vph VN parameter is only visible in the Measuring point V 1 ph if the voltage VN broken delta has been routed Parameter Tracking Default setting _ 2311 103 Tracking inactive The Tracking parameter is used to determine whether the measuring chann...

Page 312: ...er phase selec tively The magnitude correction may be required for highly precise measurements Use a comparison meas urement to determine the setting value for example with a high precision measuring voltage transformer If a primary correction is not necessary retain the default setting i i NOTE The Magnitude correction parameter has nothing to do with the internal adjustment of the input circuit ...

Page 313: ...05 CT 3 phase Rated secon dary current 1 A 5 A 1 A _ 8881 119 CT 3 phase Current range 1 6 x IR 100 x IR 50 x IR 100 x IR _ 8881 120 CT 3 phase Internal CT type CT protection CT measurement CT Process bus CT protection CT IN2 _ 8881 106 CT 3 phase Rated primary current 1 0 A to 100 000 0 A 1000 0 A _ 8881 113 CT 3 phase Rated secon dary current 1 A to 5 A 1 A _ 8881 121 CT 3 phase Current range 1 ...

Page 314: ...CT 4 Sequence number device 1 to 2147483647 2147483647 Brk wire det _ 5581 1 Brk wire det Mode off on test off Supv balan I _ 2491 1 Supv balan I Mode off on test off _ 2491 101 Supv balan I Release threshold 1 A 100 Irated 0 030 A to 35 000 A 0 500 A 5 A 100 Irated 0 15 A to 175 00 A 2 50 A 1 A 50 Irated 0 030 A to 35 000 A 0 500 A 5 A 50 Irated 0 15 A to 175 00 A 2 50 A 1 A 1 6 Irated 0 001 A to...

Page 315: ...00 s to 100 00 s 5 00 s Supv ADC sum I _ 2401 1 Supv ADC sum I Mode off on test off Measuring Point I 1ph Addr Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting General _ 2311 101 General Rated primary current 1 0 A to 100 000 0 A 1000 0 A _ 2311 102 General Rated secondary current 1 A 5 A 1 A _ 2311 103 General Current range 1 6 x IR 100 x IR 50 x IR 100 x IR _ 2311 104 General Internal CT type CT prot...

Page 316: ...ed 3 ph to gnd volt VN 3 ph to gnd voltages 3 ph to ph volt VN 3 ph to ph voltages 2 ph to ph volt VN 2 ph to ph voltages 3 ph to gnd volt VN _ 8911 106 VT 3 phase Inverted phases none AC BC AB none _ 8911 111 VT 3 phase Tracking inactive active active _ 8911 130 VT 3 phase Measuring point ID 0 to 100 0 VT 1 _ 3811 103 VT 1 Magnitude correc tion 0 010 to 10 000 1 000 _ 3811 108 VT 1 Phase V A V B ...

Page 317: ... _ 2521 1 Supv balan V Mode off on test off _ 2521 101 Supv balan V Release threshold 0 300 V to 170 000 V 50 000 V _ 2521 102 Supv balan V Threshold min max 0 58 to 0 95 0 75 _ 2521 6 Supv balan V Delay supervision alarm 0 00 s to 100 00 s 5 00 s Supv ph seq V _ 2581 1 Supv ph seq V Mode off on test off _ 2581 6 Supv ph seq V Delay supervision alarm 0 00 s to 100 00 s 5 00 s Supv sum V _ 2461 1 S...

Page 318: ...king inactive active inactive _ 2311 130 General Measuring point ID 0 to 100 0 VT 1 _ 3811 103 VT 1 Magnitude correc tion 0 010 to 10 000 1 000 _ 3811 108 VT 1 Phase V A V B V C V AB V BC V CA VN Vx VCB VN broken delta _ 3811 107 VT 1 Sequence number device 1 to 2147483647 2147483647 VT miniatureCB _ 2641 101 VT minia tureCB Response time 0 00 s to 0 03 s 0 00 s Information List General No Informa...

Page 319: ..._ 5581 302 Brk wire det Phs B BW suspected SPS O _ 5581 303 Brk wire det Phs C BW suspected SPS O _ 5581 304 Brk wire det Phase A broken wire SPS O _ 5581 305 Brk wire det Phase B broken wire SPS O _ 5581 306 Brk wire det Phase C broken wire SPS O _ 5581 307 Brk wire det Broken wire suspected SPS O _ 5581 308 Brk wire det Broken wire confirmed SPS O Supv balan I _ 2491 82 Supv balan I Block functi...

Page 320: ...Information Data Class Type Type General _ 8911 315 VT 3 phase Phases AB inverted SPS O _ 8911 316 VT 3 phase Phases BC inverted SPS O _ 8911 317 VT 3 phase Phases AC inverted SPS O VT 1 _ 3811 300 VT 1 Sampled val voltage SAV O VT 2 _ 3812 300 VT 2 Sampled val voltage SAV O VT 3 _ 3813 300 VT 3 Sampled val voltage SAV O VT 4 _ 3814 300 VT 4 Sampled val voltage SAV O Supv balan V _ 2521 82 Supv ba...

Page 321: ...havior ENS O _ 2461 53 Supv sum V Health ENS O _ 2461 71 Supv sum V Failure SPS O Definite T 1 _ 2641 500 VT miniatureCB Open SPS I Measuring Point V 1ph No Information Data Class Type Type VT 1 _ 3811 300 VT 1 Sampled val voltage SAV O Definite T 1 _ 2641 500 VT miniatureCB Open SPS I Protection and Automation Functions 6 1 Power System Data SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Protection Manual 321 C53000 G50...

Page 322: ...ripping The group indications of the overcurrent protection are generated by a logical OR of the stage selective pickup and operate indications of the functions listed above see also Figure 6 4 Pickup Operate The pickup and operate indications are output where present with direction information loocgri2 271112 01 tif 3 en_US Figure 6 4 Logic Diagram of the Overcurrent Protection Group Indications ...

Page 323: ...ollowing stages can be operated simul taneously Maximum of 4 stages Definite time overcurrent protection advanced 2 stages Inverse time overcurrent protection advanced 2 stages User defined overcurrent protection characteristic curve In the Overcurrent protection phases basic function type the following stages can be operated simulta neously Maximum of 4 stages Definite time overcurrent protection...

Page 324: ...ickup values and tripping delays of the stages or block the stages The stage can also be affected by an external source via a binary input signal Automatic reclosing AREC Cold load pickup detection Binary input signal If the device is equipped with an Inrush current detection function the stages can be stabilized against trip ping due to transformer inrush currents available in both function types...

Page 325: ... order filter coefficients are set via the values of the respective parameters h 0 h 1 h 2 h 3 and h 4 i i NOTE A FIR filter configuration tool is provided as an auxiliary PC tool With this PC tool the coefficients h 0 h 1 h 2 h 3 h 4 of the FIR filter are generated according to the required gain factors amplitude response The tool can be obtained from the SIPROTEC download area For more informati...

Page 326: ...t and no gain is applied If the filter shall be applied to adapt the RMS value calculation to a specific protection object such as a reactor the reactor manufacturer has to provide the required amplitude response gain factors for the reactor To determine the coefficients h 0 to h 4 for the FIR filter you must enter the gain factors into the auxiliary PC tool which is available in the SIPROTEC down...

Page 327: ... 000 to 100 000 0 000 _ 5 Filter h 3 100 000 to 100 000 0 000 _ 6 Filter h 4 100 000 to 100 000 1 000 Information List No Information Data Class Type Type Filter _ 301 Filter Iph A MV O _ 302 Filter Iph B MV O _ 303 Filter Iph C MV O 6 3 3 3 6 3 3 4 Protection and Automation Functions 6 3 Overcurrent Protection Phases SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Protection Manual 327 C53000 G5040 C017 8 Edition 07 2017...

Page 328: ...age loocp3b1 280113 01 tif 3 en_US Figure 6 8 Logic Diagram of the Definite Time Overcurrent Protection Phases Basic 6 3 4 6 3 4 1 Protection and Automation Functions 6 3 Overcurrent Protection Phases 328 SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Protection Manual C53000 G5040 C017 8 Edition 07 2017 ...

Page 329: ...o_OCP_Adv_UMZ_StageControl 1 en_US Figure 6 9 Logic Diagram of the Stage Control Protection and Automation Functions 6 3 Overcurrent Protection Phases SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Protection Manual 329 C53000 G5040 C017 8 Edition 07 2017 ...

Page 330: ...out the fundamental component numerically Measurement of the RMS value This method of measurement determines the current amplitude from the sampled values according to the defining equation of the RMS value Harmonics are included in the analysis RMS Value Selection Advanced Stage If RMS value is selected as the method of measurement the protection function supports 2 kinds of RMS measurement Norma...

Page 331: ...nt 1 phase The function group Voltage current 1 phase must be connected to the func tion group Voltage current 3 phase in which the function Overcurrent protection phases is being used sccpfoint 230414 01 1 en_US Figure 6 12 Connection of the Voltage Current 1 Phase Function Group with the Neutral Point Input of the Voltage Current 3 Phase Function Group In case of an I0 elimination the following ...

Page 332: ... Advanced Stage If available in the device the following functions can influence the overcurrent protection stages Automatic reclosing Cold load pickup detection Binary input signal The influence of these functions via dynamic settings is described in chapter 6 3 8 1 Description Application and Setting Notes Parameter Method of measurement Default setting _ 661 8 Method of measurement fundamental ...

Page 333: ... in primary and secondary values result in the setting values foocpph1 030311 01 tif 2 en_US The Operate delay to be set is derived from the time grading schedule that has been prepared for the system 2nd stage high current stage This tripping stage can also be used for current grading This applies in the case of very long lines with low source impedance or ahead of high reactances for example tra...

Page 334: ...ge The I0 elimination in phase currents for overcurrent protection applications can be used in a transformer This increases the sensitivity for the 2 phase short circuit on the transformer low voltage side The following condi tions must be fulfilled The transformer neutral point current IY is measured and is available for the protection function group The parameter Method of measurement is set to ...

Page 335: ...d you can increase the setting value of the parameter Dropout ratio This avoids chattering of the tripping stage Parameter 1 pole operate allowed Default setting _ 661 11 1 pole operate allowed no The parameter must be set for the specific application Parameter Value Description no The stage always operates 3 pole yes The stage operates phase selectively However tripping by the device generated in...

Page 336: ... A 100 Irated 0 030 A to 35 000 A 1 500 A 5 A 100 Irated 0 15 A to 175 00 A 7 50 A 1 A 50 Irated 0 030 A to 35 000 A 1 500 A 5 A 50 Irated 0 15 A to 175 00 A 7 50 A 1 A 1 6 Irated 0 001 A to 1 600 A 1 500 A 5 A 1 6 Irated 0 005 A to 8 000 A 7 500 A _ 661 20 Definite T 1 Operate delay 0 00 s to 60 00 s 0 30 s Dyn set AR cycle 2 _ 661 30 Definite T 1 Effected by AR cycle 2 no yes no _ 661 37 Definit...

Page 337: ...load PU _ 661 33 Definite T 1 Effect b cold load pickup no yes no _ 661 40 Definite T 1 Stage blocked no yes no _ 661 18 Definite T 1 Threshold 1 A 100 Irated 0 030 A to 35 000 A 1 500 A 5 A 100 Irated 0 15 A to 175 00 A 7 50 A 1 A 50 Irated 0 030 A to 35 000 A 1 500 A 5 A 50 Irated 0 15 A to 175 00 A 7 50 A 1 A 1 6 Irated 0 001 A to 1 600 A 1 500 A 5 A 1 6 Irated 0 005 A to 8 000 A 7 500 A _ 661 ...

Page 338: ...61 62 Definite T 1 Dyn set AR cycle1act SPS O _ 661 63 Definite T 1 Dyn set AR cycle2act SPS O _ 661 64 Definite T 1 Dyn set AR cycle3act SPS O _ 661 65 Definite T 1 Dyn set ARcycl 3act SPS O _ 661 66 Definite T 1 Dyn set CLP active SPS O _ 661 67 Definite T 1 Dyn set BI active SPS O _ 661 68 Definite T 1 Dyn set blks pickup SPS O _ 661 55 Definite T 1 Pickup ACD O _ 661 56 Definite T 1 Operate de...

Page 339: ...ge loocp3b2 280113 01 tif 2 en_US Figure 6 13 Logic Diagram of the Inverse Time Overcurrent Protection Phases Basic 6 3 5 6 3 5 1 Protection and Automation Functions 6 3 Overcurrent Protection Phases SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Protection Manual 339 C53000 G5040 C017 8 Edition 07 2017 ...

Page 340: ...the Stage Control loocp3p2 310511 01 tif 4 en_US Figure 6 15 Logic Diagram of the Inverse Time Overcurrent Protection Phases Advanced Protection and Automation Functions 6 3 Overcurrent Protection Phases 340 SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Protection Manual C53000 G5040 C017 8 Edition 07 2017 ...

Page 341: ...e weighted time exceeds the value 1 the stage operates When the measured value falls below the pickup value by a factor of 1 045 0 95 x 1 1 x threshold value the dropout is started The pickup will be indicated as clearing You can influence the dropout behavior via setting parameters You can select between instantaneous dropout totalized time is deleted or dropout according to the characteristic cu...

Page 342: ...e transformer low voltage side use the I0 elimination of the phase currents for the overcurrent protection applications on one transformer In order to determine the I0 elimination of the phase currents the transformer neutral point current IY must be measured dwsgaocp 230414 01 1 en_US Figure 6 17 I0 Elimination Principle The transformer neutral point current IY is measured via a 1 phase current m...

Page 343: ... place Blocking of the Operate Delay and the Operate Signal via the Device Internal Inrush Current Detection Function Basic and Advanced Stage Blocking of the operate delay and the operate signal via the device internal Inrush current detection function is described in chapter 6 3 7 1 Description Influence of Other Functions via Dynamic Settings Advanced Stage If available in the device the follow...

Page 344: ...e inverse time characteristic curve This parameter is only required for time coordination in recloser schemes For all other applications Siemens recommends keeping the default setting of 0 s i i NOTE If the set value is smaller than the smallest possible time delay of the inverse time characteristic curve the parameter has no influence on the delay time Parameter Additional time delay Default sett...

Page 345: ...hold is briefly exceeded that this will not lead to the pickup of the stage and starts fault logging or recording If this stage is used as a thermal overload function that is considered a special application When using the Pickup delay parameter a time interval is defined during which a pickup is not trigger if the current threshold is exceeded For all short circuit protection applications this va...

Page 346: ...es no _ 691 11 Inverse T 1 1 pole operate allowed no yes no _ 691 26 Inverse T 1 Dynamic settings no yes no _ 691 27 Inverse T 1 Blk w inrush curr detect no yes no _ 691 8 Inverse T 1 Method of measurement fundamental comp RMS value fundamental comp _ 691 120 Inverse T 1 I0 elimina tion no yes no _ 691 3 Inverse T 1 Threshold 1 A 100 Irated 0 030 A to 35 000 A 1 500 A 5 A 100 Irated 0 15 A to 175 ...

Page 347: ... 35 000 A 1 500 A 5 A 100 Irated 0 15 A to 175 00 A 7 50 A 1 A 50 Irated 0 030 A to 35 000 A 1 500 A 5 A 50 Irated 0 15 A to 175 00 A 7 50 A 1 A 1 6 Irated 0 001 A to 1 600 A 1 500 A 5 A 1 6 Irated 0 005 A to 8 000 A 7 500 A _ 691 103 Inverse T 1 Time dial 0 00 to 15 00 1 00 Dyn set AR cycle 3 _ 691 31 Inverse T 1 Effected by AR cycle 3 no yes no _ 691 38 Inverse T 1 Stage blocked no yes no _ 691 ...

Page 348: ...y binary input no yes no _ 691 41 Inverse T 1 Stage blocked no yes no _ 691 19 Inverse T 1 Threshold 1 A 100 Irated 0 030 A to 35 000 A 1 500 A 5 A 100 Irated 0 15 A to 175 00 A 7 50 A 1 A 50 Irated 0 030 A to 35 000 A 1 500 A 5 A 50 Irated 0 15 A to 175 00 A 7 50 A 1 A 1 6 Irated 0 001 A to 1 600 A 1 500 A 5 A 1 6 Irated 0 005 A to 8 000 A 7 500 A _ 691 107 Inverse T 1 Time dial 0 00 to 15 00 1 0...

Page 349: ...the characteristic curve is processed An integrating method of measurement totalizes the weighted time The weighted time results from the charac teristic curve For this the time that is associated with the present current value is determined from the char acteristic curve Once the weighted time exceeds the value 1 the stage operates When the measured value falls short of the pickup value by a fact...

Page 350: ...nly the application and setting notes for setting characteristic curves and for setting the Threshold absolute parameter You can find more information on the other parameters of the stage in chapter 6 3 5 2 Application and Setting Notes Parameter Current time value pairs from the operate curve With these settings you define the characteristic curve Set a current time value pair for each characteri...

Page 351: ...tinuous order Parameter 1 pole operate allowed Default setting _ 11 1 pole operate allowed no The parameter must be set for the specific application Parameter Value Description no The stage always operates 3 pole yes The stage operates phase selectively However tripping by the device gener ated in the trip logic of the Circuit breaker function group is always 3 pole because the device does not sup...

Page 352: ...p delay 0 00 s to 60 00 s 0 00 s _ 110 User curve Reset instantaneous disk emulation disk emulation _ 101 User curve Time dial 0 05 to 15 00 1 00 _ 115 User curve Additional time delay 0 00 s to 60 00 s 0 00 s Dyn s AR off n rdy _ 28 User curve Effect by AR off n ready no yes no _ 35 User curve Stage blocked no yes no Dyn set AR cycle 1 _ 29 User curve Effected by AR cycle 1 no yes no _ 36 User cu...

Page 353: ...o yes no _ 39 User curve Stage blocked no yes no _ 17 User curve Threshold 1 A 100 Irated 0 030 A to 35 000 A 1 500 A 5 A 100 Irated 0 15 A to 175 00 A 7 50 A 1 A 50 Irated 0 030 A to 35 000 A 1 500 A 5 A 50 Irated 0 15 A to 175 00 A 7 50 A 1 A 1 6 Irated 0 001 A to 1 600 A 1 500 A 5 A 1 6 Irated 0 005 A to 8 000 A 7 500 A _ 105 User curve Time dial 0 05 to 15 00 1 00 Dyn s Cold load PU _ 33 User ...

Page 354: ...S O _ 59 User curve Disk emulation running SPS O _ 55 User curve Pickup ACD O _ 56 User curve Operate delay expired ACT O _ 57 User curve Operate ACT O Blocking of the Tripping by Device Internal Inrush Current Detection Description With the Blk w inrush curr detect parameter you can define whether tripping of the stage should be blocked when a threshold value is exceeded due to an inrush current ...

Page 355: ...de The trans former inrush current cannot become larger than the maximum trans mittable short circuit current yes When the transformer inrush current detection detects an inrush current that would lead to a tripping of the stage the start of the time delay and tripping of the stage are blocked Select this setting if the device is used on transformers and the threshold value of the stage is set bel...

Page 356: ...s generate signals that change the settings of the dynamic settings of the overcurrent protection stage or block it if required In the latter case the settings of the Threshold and Operate delay parameters are of no relevance Within the overcurrent protection stage each of these signals is provided with a configuration parameter Influence of function and its own dynamic settings Operate delay and ...

Page 357: ...pply This means that a signal with priority 2 precedes that of priority 3 The settings assigned to signal 2 become active The functionality of the dynamic settings can be disabled In this case the settings assigned to the signals are not visible and are without effect Link to the Device Internal Function Automatic Reclosing Advanced Stage loocp3awe 040311 01 1 en_US Figure 6 22 Influence of the AR...

Page 358: ...vsd 1 en_US Figure 6 23 Influence of the Cold Load Pickup Detection on the Overcurrent Protection Stage In the case of cold load pickup you have the option to change the settings for the Threshold and Operate delay parameters of the protection level You can also block the level To do so you must activate the influ ence of the cold load pickup You also have to set the Threshold and Operate delay or...

Page 359: ...hen they become active they switch to the assigned dynamic settings The two dynamic settings Operate delay assigned to these input signals sources of influence are set to the time delay 0 instantaneous tripping The two dynamic settings Threshold assigned to these input signals are set to the normal threshold value of 1 5 A If the threshold value 1 5 A is exceeded before AREC 1 and AREC 2 the overc...

Page 360: ...Voltage dependent overcurrent protection comes with the following factory set stages Inverse time overcurrent protection voltage dependent stage Definite time overcurrent protection undervoltage seal in stage In this function the following stages can operate simultaneously A maximum of 2 inverse time overcurrent protection voltage dependent stages A maximum of 2 inverse time overcurrent protection...

Page 361: ...rrent Protection Voltage Dependent Method of Measurement You use the Method of measurement parameter to define whether the stage uses the fundamental comp standard method or the calculated RMS value 6 4 3 6 4 3 1 Protection and Automation Functions 6 4 Voltage Dependent Overcurrent Protection Phases SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Protection Manual 361 C53000 G5040 C017 8 Edition 07 2017 ...

Page 362: ...ted voltage in the function block General of the protec tion function group PU sett Pickup threshold setting parameter address _11491 3 PU V Applied pickup threshold according to the voltage influence The minimum current pickup threshold value is 0 03 Irated This value cannot be decreased any further even not by voltage dependent pickup threshold factor Decreasing the pickup threshold is carried o...

Page 363: ...thus also the operate signal A running time delay is reset The pickup is indicated and the fault logging and recording takes place Blocking of the Operate Delay and the Operate Signal via the Device Internal Inrush Current Detection Function Blocking of the operate delay and the operate signal via the device internal Inrush current detection function is described in chapter 6 3 7 1 Description App...

Page 364: ...urrent protection operates with short tripping times as short circuit protection and not as overload protection Set the Threshold parameter for lines to approx 10 for transformers and motors to approx 20 above the maximum expected load Note that a safety margin is set between pickup value and threshold value The stage only picks up at approx 10 above the Threshold Parameter Type of character curve...

Page 365: ... A to 1 600 A 1 500 A 5 A 1 6 Irated 0 005 A to 8 000 A 7 500 A _ 11491 101 V dependent 1 Type of character curve _ 11491 102 V dependent 1 Reset instantaneous disk emulation disk emulation _ 11491 103 V dependent 1 Time dial 0 05 to 15 00 1 00 Information List No Information Data Class Type Type Group indicat _ 4501 55 Group indicat Pickup ACD O _ 4501 57 Group indicat Operate ACT O V dependent 1...

Page 366: ...sed This stage is structured in the same way as the Inverse time overcurrent voltage dependent stage see chapter 6 4 3 1 Description The only differences are the conditions for the pickup and the influence on the operate curve 6 4 4 6 4 4 1 Protection and Automation Functions 6 4 Voltage Dependent Overcurrent Protection Phases 366 SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Protection Manual C53000 G5040 C017 8 Editio...

Page 367: ... of this stage refer to chapter 6 4 3 2 Applica tion and Setting Notes Parameter Blk by meas volt failure Recommended setting value _ 10 Blk by meas volt failure yes You can use the Blk by meas volt failure parameter to control the response of the stage when a measuring voltage failure is detected A measuring voltage failure can only be detected if one of the following 2 conditions is met The devi...

Page 368: ...I normal inverse ANSI moderately inv ANSI definite inverse IEC normal inverse IEC very inverse IEC extremely inv IEC long time inverse IEC normal inverse _ 102 V release Reset instantaneous disk emulation disk emulation _ 103 V release Time dial 0 05 to 15 00 1 00 _ 104 V release Under voltage threshold 0 300 V to 175 000 V 75 000 V Information List No Information Data Class Type Type V release _ ...

Page 369: ...creases quickly in the event of close in faults for example in a generator or a generator transformer range The current decreases to a value below the current threshold within a few seconds because of the absence of the excitation voltage To avoid a dropout of the relay the positive sequence voltages are used as an additional criterion for detecting a short circuit 6 4 5 6 4 5 1 Protection and Aut...

Page 370: ...c blocked Default setting _ 16951 2 Operate flt rec blocked no With the parameter Operate flt rec blocked you can block the operate indication the fault recording and the fault log Parameter Threshold Default setting _ 16951 3 Threshold 1 350 A The setting is mainly determined by the maximum operating current Pickup by overload must be excluded since the protection may trip if a short operate dela...

Page 371: ...en_US Parameter Duration of V seal in time Default setting _ 16951 104 Duration of V seal in time 4 00 s The parameter Duration of V seal in time limits the pickup seal in induced by an overcurrent or undervoltage The value must be set higher than the value of the parameter Operate delay The difference shall be greater than 0 5 s In the default setting a difference of 1 s is used Settings Addr Par...

Page 372: ...eal in 1 Block stage SPS I _ 16951 500 V seal in 1 Block V seal in SPS I _ 16951 52 V seal in 1 Behavior ENS O _ 16951 53 V seal in 1 Health ENS O _ 16951 54 V seal in 1 Inactive SPS O _ 16951 55 V seal in 1 Pickup ACD O _ 16951 300 V seal in 1 Pickup I V seal in SPS O _ 16951 56 V seal in 1 Operate delay expired ACT O _ 16951 57 V seal in 1 Operate ACT O 6 4 5 4 Protection and Automation Function...

Page 373: ...igure 6 30 Logic Diagram of the Definite Time Overcurrent Protection Voltage Released Undervoltage Seal in Part 1 Signal 4 in the following figure refers to Figure 6 30 6 4 6 6 4 6 1 Protection and Automation Functions 6 4 Voltage Dependent Overcurrent Protection Phases SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Protection Manual 373 C53000 G5040 C017 8 Edition 07 2017 ...

Page 374: ...shold after an overcurrent pickup even if the current falls below the threshold again If the voltage recovers before the seal in time has elapsed or if the undervoltage seal in is blocked via a binary input Block V seal in the signal Pickup I V seal in drops out immediately You can switch off the undervoltage seal in via the parameter State of V seal in Blocking of the Undervoltage Seal in with Me...

Page 375: ...ctivated switched on Siemens recommends this setting if the excitation transformer is connected to the main lead of the generator Parameter V seal in threshold Default setting _ 102 V seal in threshold 46 2 V The V seal in threshold positive sequence voltage is set to a value below the lowest phase to phase voltage admissible during an operation for example 80 of the rated voltage of a generator T...

Page 376: ... Addr Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting Vseal in Vrel _ 1 Vseal in Vrel Mode off on test off _ 2 Vseal in Vrel Operate flt rec blocked no yes no _ 3 Vseal in Vrel Threshold 1 A 100 Irated 0 030 A to 35 000 A 1 350 A 5 A 100 Irated 0 150 A to 175 000 A 6 750 A 1 A 50 Irated 0 030 A to 35 000 A 1 350 A 5 A 50 Irated 0 150 A to 175 000 A 6 750 A 1 A 1 6 Irated 0 001 A to 1 600 A 1 350 A 5 A...

Page 377: ...O _ 54 Vseal in Vrel Inactive SPS O _ 55 Vseal in Vrel Pickup ACD O _ 300 Vseal in Vrel Pickup I V seal in SPS O _ 301 Vseal in Vrel Voltage release SPS O _ 56 Vseal in Vrel Operate delay expired ACT O _ 57 Vseal in Vrel Operate ACT O 6 4 6 4 Protection and Automation Functions 6 4 Voltage Dependent Overcurrent Protection Phases SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Protection Manual 377 C53000 G5040 C017 8 Edit...

Page 378: ...aneously Maximum of 3 stages Definite time overcurrent protection advanced 1 stage Inverse time overcurrent protection advanced 1 stage User defined characteristic curve overcurrent protection In the function type Overcurrent protection ground basic the following stages can be operated simultane ously Maximum of 3 stages Definite time overcurrent protection basic 1 stage Inverse time overcurrent p...

Page 379: ... affected by an external source via a binary input signal Automatic reclosing AREC Cold load pickup detection Binary input signal If the device is equipped with an Inrush current detection function the stages can be stabilized against trip ping due to transformer inrush currents available in both function types General Functionality Description Measured Value Selection The function provides the op...

Page 380: ... A N A 0 002 A to 8 000 A IN meas ured 4 Protec tion 0 010 A to 35 000 A N A N A 0 050 A to 175 00 A 4 Meas urement 0 001 A to 1 600 A N A N A 0 002 A to 8 000 A 3ph IN separate 3I0 calcu lated 4 Protec tion 0 010 A to 35 000 A 0 010 A to 35 000 A 0 050 A to 175 00 A 0 050 A to 175 00 A 3 Protec tion 1 sen 0 010 A to 35 000 A 0 010 A to 35 000 A 0 050 A to 175 00 A 0 050 A to 175 00 A 4 Meas ureme...

Page 381: ...he calculated zero sequence current 3I0 This setting option can be used when applying a redundant 50N 51N function for safety reasons Settings Addr Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting General _ 2311 9 General Measured value 3I0 calculated IN measured IN measured 6 5 3 3 Protection and Automation Functions 6 5 Overcurrent Protection Ground SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Protection Manual 381 C53000...

Page 382: ...ge loocpgb1 060213 01 tif 2 en_US Figure 6 35 Logic Diagram of the Definite Time Overcurrent Protection Ground Basic 6 5 4 6 5 4 1 Protection and Automation Functions 6 5 Overcurrent Protection Ground 382 SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Protection Manual C53000 G5040 C017 8 Edition 07 2017 ...

Page 383: ...ue Measurement of the fundamental component This method of measurement processes the sampled current values and filters out the fundamental component numerically Measurement of the RMS value This method of measurement determines the current amplitude from the sampled values according to the defining equation of the RMS value Harmonics are included in the analysis Protection and Automation Function...

Page 384: ... in the device the following functions can influence the overcurrent protection stages Automatic reclosing Cold load pickup detection Binary input signal The influence of these functions via dynamic settings is described in chapter 6 5 8 1 Description Application and Setting Notes Parameter Method of measurement Recommended setting value _ 751 8 Method of measurement fundamental comp With the Meth...

Page 385: ...e line Set the Operate delay parameter to 0 or to a low value Siemens recommends that the threshold values be determined with a system analysis The following example illustrates the principle of grading with a current threshold on a long line EXAMPLE High current stage 110 kV overhead line 150 mm2 cross section s length 60 km ZL s 0 46 Ω km Ratio of zero sequence impedance and positive sequence im...

Page 386: ...ecommended setting value _ 751 4 Dropout ratio 0 95 This parameter is not visible in the basic stage The recommended set value of 0 95 is appropriate for most applications To achieve high precision measurements the setting value of the parameter Dropout ratio can be reduced for example to 0 98 If you expect highly fluctuating measurands at the response threshold you can increase the setting value ...

Page 387: ...n set AR cycle 2 _ 751 30 Definite T 1 Effected by AR cycle 2 no yes no _ 751 37 Definite T 1 Stage blocked no yes no _ 751 15 Definite T 1 Threshold 1 A 100 Irated 0 010 A to 35 000 A 1 200 A 5 A 100 Irated 0 05 A to 175 00 A 6 00 A 1 A 50 Irated 0 010 A to 35 000 A 1 200 A 5 A 50 Irated 0 05 A to 175 00 A 6 00 A 1 A 1 6 Irated 0 001 A to 1 600 A 1 200 A 5 A 1 6 Irated 0 002 A to 8 000 A 6 000 A ...

Page 388: ...00 A 6 00 A 1 A 50 Irated 0 010 A to 35 000 A 1 200 A 5 A 50 Irated 0 05 A to 175 00 A 6 00 A 1 A 1 6 Irated 0 001 A to 1 600 A 1 200 A 5 A 1 6 Irated 0 002 A to 8 000 A 6 000 A _ 751 24 Definite T 1 Operate delay 0 00 s to 60 00 s 0 30 s Dyn set bin input _ 751 34 Definite T 1 Effected by binary input no yes no _ 751 41 Definite T 1 Stage blocked no yes no _ 751 19 Definite T 1 Threshold 1 A 100 ...

Page 389: ...active SPS O _ 751 52 Definite T 1 Behavior ENS O _ 751 53 Definite T 1 Health ENS O _ 751 60 Definite T 1 Inrush blocks operate ACT O _ 751 55 Definite T 1 Pickup ACD O _ 751 56 Definite T 1 Operate delay expired ACT O _ 751 57 Definite T 1 Operate ACT O Protection and Automation Functions 6 5 Overcurrent Protection Ground SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Protection Manual 389 C53000 G5040 C017 8 Edition 0...

Page 390: ...ic Stage lo_ocp_gr2 4 en_US Figure 6 37 Logic Diagram of the Inverse Time Overcurrent Protection Ground Basic 6 5 5 6 5 5 1 Protection and Automation Functions 6 5 Overcurrent Protection Ground 390 SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Protection Manual C53000 G5040 C017 8 Edition 07 2017 ...

Page 391: ...that is associated with the present current value is determined from the characteristic curve Once the weighted time exceeds the value 1 the stage operates When the measured value falls short of the pickup value by a factor of 1 045 0 95 x 1 1 x threshold value the dropout is started The pickup will be indicated as clearing You can influence the dropout behavior via setting parameters You can sele...

Page 392: ...ental comp or the calculated RMS value Measurement of the fundamental component This method of measurement processes the sampled current values and filters out the fundamental component numerically Measurement of the RMS value This method of measurement determines the current amplitude from the sampled values according to the defining equation of the RMS value Harmonics are included in the analysi...

Page 393: ...ndamental comp Select this method of measurement if harmonics or transient current peaks are to be suppressed Siemens recommends using this method as the standard method RMS value Select this method of measurement if you want the stage to take harmonics into account for example at capacitor banks Consider that aperiodic DC components present in the secondary circuit are measured and can cause an o...

Page 394: ...pends on the minimal occurring ground fault current This must be determined Parameter Time dial Default setting _ 781 101 Time dial 1 With the Time dial parameter you displace the characteristic curve in the time direction The set value for the Time dial parameter is derived from the time grading schedule that has been prepared for the electrical power system Where no time grading and therefore no...

Page 395: ... by AR off n ready no yes no _ 781 35 Inverse T 1 Stage blocked no yes no Dyn set AR cycle 1 _ 781 29 Inverse T 1 Effected by AR cycle 1 no yes no _ 781 36 Inverse T 1 Stage blocked no yes no _ 781 14 Inverse T 1 Threshold 1 A 100 Irated 0 010 A to 35 000 A 1 200 A 5 A 100 Irated 0 05 A to 175 00 A 6 00 A 1 A 50 Irated 0 010 A to 35 000 A 1 200 A 5 A 50 Irated 0 05 A to 175 00 A 6 00 A 1 A 1 6 Ira...

Page 396: ... 200 A 5 A 1 6 Irated 0 002 A to 8 000 A 6 000 A _ 781 105 Inverse T 1 Time dial 0 00 to 15 00 1 00 Dyn s Cold load PU _ 781 33 Inverse T 1 Effect b cold load pickup no yes no _ 781 40 Inverse T 1 Stage blocked no yes no _ 781 18 Inverse T 1 Threshold 1 A 100 Irated 0 010 A to 35 000 A 1 200 A 5 A 100 Irated 0 05 A to 175 00 A 6 00 A 1 A 50 Irated 0 010 A to 35 000 A 1 200 A 5 A 50 Irated 0 05 A t...

Page 397: ...int by point using up to 30 value pairs of current and time The device uses linear interpolation to calculate the characteristic curve from these values You can also define a dropout characteristic curve if you wish Pickup and Dropout Behaviors with the User Defined Characteristic Curve When the input variable exceeds the Threshold value by 1 1 times the characteristic curve is processed An integr...

Page 398: ...lue falls short of the Threshold absolute value by 0 95 times For measured current values lower than the Threshold absolute value no pickup takes place and consequently the characteristic curve is not processed If you set the Threshold absolute parameter to be less than 1 1 times the Threshold value the pickup and dropout behaviors are not affected by the Threshold absolute parameter Application a...

Page 399: ...cal devices or other devices which perform a dropout after a disk emulation instantaneous Select this setting if the dropout is not to be performed after disk emulation but an instantaneous dropout is desired Parameter Current time value pairs of the dropout characteristic curve With these settings you define the characteristic curve Set a current time value pair for each characteristic curve poin...

Page 400: ...0 A to 175 00 A 0 00 A 1 A 1 6 Irated 0 000 A to 1 600 A 0 000 A 5 A 1 6 Irated 0 000 A to 8 000 A 0 000 A _ 110 User curve Reset instantaneous disk emulation disk emulation _ 101 User curve Time dial 0 05 to 15 00 1 00 _ 115 User curve Additional time delay 0 00 s to 60 00 s 0 00 s Dyn s AR off n rdy _ 28 User curve Effect by AR off n ready no yes no _ 35 User curve Stage blocked no yes no Dyn se...

Page 401: ...A _ 104 User curve Time dial 0 05 to 15 00 1 00 Dyn s AR cycle 3 _ 32 User curve Effected by AR cycle gr 3 no yes no _ 39 User curve Stage blocked no yes no _ 17 User curve Threshold 1 A 100 Irated 0 010 A to 35 000 A 1 200 A 5 A 100 Irated 0 05 A to 175 00 A 6 00 A 1 A 50 Irated 0 010 A to 35 000 A 1 200 A 5 A 50 Irated 0 05 A to 175 00 A 6 00 A 1 A 1 6 Irated 0 001 A to 1 600 A 1 200 A 5 A 1 6 I...

Page 402: ... _ 57 User curve Operate ACT O Blocking of the Tripping by Device Internal Inrush Current Detection Description With the Blk w inrush curr detect parameter you can define whether tripping of the stage should be blocked when a threshold value is exceeded due to an inrush current In case of a blocking the stage picks up The start of the tripping delay and the trip signal are blocked The function sig...

Page 403: ...maximum trans mittable short circuit current yes When the transformer inrush current detection detects an inrush current that would lead to a tripping of the stage the start of the time delay and tripping of the stage are blocked Select this setting if the device is used on transformers and the threshold value of the stage is set below the maximum inrush current of the trans former This applies to...

Page 404: ...overcurrent protection stage each of these signals is provided with a configuration parameter Influence of function and its own dynamic settings Operate delay and Threshold The configuration settings are used to set whether the signal shall be active or not this means whether the dynamic settings shall be activated or not If one of these signals for example signal function x becomes active and is ...

Page 405: ...ings can be disabled In this case the settings assigned to the signals are not visible and are without effect Link to the Device Internal Function Automatic Reclosing Advanced Stage loocpgrnd 040311 01 vsd 1 en_US Figure 6 43 Influence of the AREC Signals on the Overcurrent Protection Stage Protection and Automation Functions 6 5 Overcurrent Protection Ground SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Protection Manu...

Page 406: ... 1 en_US Figure 6 44 Influence of the Cold Load Pickup Detection on the Overcurrent Protection Stage You have the option of changing the settings for the Threshold and the Operate delay of the protection stage for a cold load pickup You can also block the stage To do so you must activate the influence of the cold load pickup You also have to set the Threshold and Operate delay or assign settings t...

Page 407: ... stage When they become active they switch to the assigned dynamic settings The two dynamic settings Operate delay assigned to these input signals sources of influence are set to the time delay 0 instantaneous tripping The two dynamic settings Threshold assigned to these input signals are set to the normal threshold value of 1 5 A If the threshold value 1 5 A is exceeded before AREC 1 and AREC 2 t...

Page 408: ...ectional overcurrent protection phases advanced the following stages can be operated simultaneously Maximum of 4 stages Definite time overcurrent protection advanced 1 stage Inverse time overcurrent protection advanced 1 stage User defined overcurrent protection characteristic curve In the Basic function type Directional overcurrent protection phases basic the following stages can be operated simu...

Page 409: ... can influence the pickup values and tripping delays of the stages or block the stages The stage can also be affected by an external source via a binary input signal Automatic reclosing AREC Cold load pickup detection Binary input signal If the device is equipped with the Inrush current detection function the stages can be stabilized against trip ping due to transformer inrush currents Protection ...

Page 410: ...The Blk by meas volt failure parameter can be set so that measuring voltage failure detection blocks the stage or does not block it Application and Setting Notes Parameter Blk by meas volt failure Recommended setting value _ 8131 10 Blk by meas volt failure yes You use the Blk by meas volt failure parameter to control the behavior of the stage when a measuring voltage failure is detected A measuri...

Page 411: ...he directional overcurrent protection stage is not blocked Stage with Definite Time Characteristic Curve Description Logic of the Basic Stage lodocg6b 060213 01 tif 2 en_US Figure 6 49 Logic Diagram of the Directional Definite Time Overcurrent Protection Phases Basic 6 6 4 6 6 4 1 Protection and Automation Functions 6 6 Directional Overcurrent Protection Phases SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Protection Ma...

Page 412: ... determination itself works across stages see section 6 6 7 1 Description Non Directional Pickup Voltage Memory Basic and Advanced Stage If a 3 phase close up fault occurs all 3 phase to ground voltages drop to almost 0 If this happens direction determination can fall back on a voltage memory see chapter l6 6 7 1 Description If no voltage measure Protection and Automation Functions 6 6 Directional...

Page 413: ...mponent numerically Measurement of the RMS value This method of measurement determines the current amplitude from the sampled values according to the defining equation of the RMS value Harmonics are included in the analysis Dropout Delay Advanced Stage If the value falls below the dropout threshold the dropout can be delayed The pickup is maintained for the specified time The tripping delay contin...

Page 414: ...peaks are to be suppressed Siemens recommends using this method as the standard method RMS value Select this method of measurement if you want the stage to take harmonics into account for example at capacitor banks Consider that aperiodic DC components present in the secondary circuit are measured and can cause an overfunction For this method of measurement do not set the threshold value of the st...

Page 415: ...ault Parameter Threshold Default setting _ 8131 3 Threshold 1 50 A for the first stage The same considerations apply to setting the threshold value as for non directional overcurrent protection For further information refer to section 6 3 4 2 Application and Setting Notes Parameter Operate delay Default setting _ 8131 6 Operate delay 0 300 s for the 1st stage The Operate delay to be set is derived...

Page 416: ...s no _ 8131 106 Definite T 1 Release via input signal no yes no _ 8131 10 Definite T 1 Blk by meas volt failure no yes yes _ 8131 26 Definite T 1 Dynamic settings no yes no _ 8131 27 Definite T 1 Blk w inrush curr detect no yes no _ 8131 3 Definite T 1 Threshold 1 A 100 Irated 0 030 A to 35 000 A 1 500 A 5 A 100 Irated 0 15 A to 175 00 A 7 50 A 1 A 50 Irated 0 030 A to 35 000 A 1 500 A 5 A 50 Irat...

Page 417: ... 30 s Dyn set AR cycle 3 _ 8131 31 Definite T 1 Effected by AR cycle 3 no yes no _ 8131 38 Definite T 1 Stage blocked no yes no _ 8131 16 Definite T 1 Threshold 1 A 100 Irated 0 030 A to 35 000 A 1 500 A 5 A 100 Irated 0 15 A to 175 00 A 7 50 A 1 A 50 Irated 0 030 A to 35 000 A 1 500 A 5 A 50 Irated 0 15 A to 175 00 A 7 50 A 1 A 1 6 Irated 0 001 A to 1 600 A 1 500 A 5 A 1 6 Irated 0 005 A to 8 000...

Page 418: ... Irated 0 001 A to 1 600 A 1 500 A 5 A 1 6 Irated 0 005 A to 8 000 A 7 500 A _ 8131 25 Definite T 1 Operate delay 0 00 s to 60 00 s 0 30 s Information List No Information Data Class Type Type General _ 2311 501 General Test of direction SPS I _ 2311 301 General Test direction ACD O Group indicat _ 4501 55 Group indicat Pickup ACD O _ 4501 57 Group indicat Operate ACT O Definite T 1 _ 8131 81 Defin...

Page 419: ...1 Direction ACD O _ 8131 56 Definite T 1 Operate delay expired ACT O _ 8131 57 Definite T 1 Operate ACT O Stage with Inverse Time Characteristic Curve Description Logic of the Basic Stage lodoci6b 060213 01 tif 2 en_US Figure 6 51 Logic Diagram of the Directional Inverse Time Overcurrent Protection Phases Basic 6 6 5 6 6 5 1 Protection and Automation Functions 6 6 Directional Overcurrent Protectio...

Page 420: ... 6 6 7 1 Description Non Directional Pickup Voltage Memory Basic and Advanced Stage If a 3 phase close up fault occurs all 3 phase to ground voltages drop to almost 0 If this happens direction determination can fall back on a voltage memory see chapter 6 6 7 1 Description If no voltage measure ments which can be used to determine the direction are available in the voltage memory the basic stage Pr...

Page 421: ...curve is processed An integrating method of measurement summarizes the weighted time The weighted time results from the characteristic curve For this the time that is associated with the present current value is determined from the characteristic curve Once the weighted time exceeds the value 1 the stage operates When the measured value falls below the pickup value by a factor of 1 045 0 95 x 1 1 ...

Page 422: ... chapter 6 3 7 1 Description Influence of Other Functions via Dynamic Settings Advanced Stage If available in the device the following functions can influence the overcurrent protection stages Automatic reclosing Cold load pickup detection Binary input signal The influence of these functions via dynamic settings is described in chapter 6 3 8 1 Description Application and Setting Notes Parameter Di...

Page 423: ... of the time delay and therefore also the operate signal of the stage are only enabled if the Release delay op input signal is active The Release delay op input signal must be connected to the release information from the opposite end forward information from the Direc tion output signal see also the application example in chapter 6 6 10 Application Notes for Directional Comparison Protection Para...

Page 424: ...ting of 0 s Parameter Threshold Default setting _ 8161 3 Threshold 1 50 A The same considerations apply to setting the threshold value as for non directional overcurrent protection Therefore refer to chapter 6 3 5 2 Application and Setting Notes for further information Parameter Time dial Default setting _ 8161 101 Time dial 1 Use the Time dial parameter to displace the characteristic curve in the...

Page 425: ...o _ 8341 27 Inverse T 1 Blk w inrush curr detect no yes no _ 8341 3 Inverse T 1 Threshold 1 A 100 Irated 0 030 A to 35 000 A 1 500 A 5 A 100 Irated 0 15 A to 175 00 A 7 50 A 1 A 50 Irated 0 030 A to 35 000 A 1 500 A 5 A 50 Irated 0 15 A to 175 00 A 7 50 A 1 A 1 6 Irated 0 001 A to 1 600 A 1 500 A 5 A 1 6 Irated 0 005 A to 8 000 A 7 500 A _ 8341 130 Inverse T 1 Type of char acter curve _ 8341 114 I...

Page 426: ...03 Inverse T 1 Time dial 0 05 to 15 00 1 00 Dyn set AR cycle 3 _ 8341 31 Inverse T 1 Effected by AR cycle 3 no yes no _ 8341 38 Inverse T 1 Stage blocked no yes no _ 8341 16 Inverse T 1 Threshold 1 A 100 Irated 0 030 A to 35 000 A 1 500 A 5 A 100 Irated 0 15 A to 175 00 A 7 50 A 1 A 50 Irated 0 030 A to 35 000 A 1 500 A 5 A 50 Irated 0 15 A to 175 00 A 7 50 A 1 A 1 6 Irated 0 001 A to 1 600 A 1 50...

Page 427: ...rated 0 005 A to 8 000 A 7 500 A _ 8341 107 Inverse T 1 Time dial 0 05 to 15 00 1 00 Information List No Information Data Class Type Type General _ 2311 501 General Test of direction SPS I _ 2311 301 General Test direction ACD O Group indicat _ 4501 55 Group indicat Pickup ACD O _ 4501 57 Group indicat Operate ACT O Inverse T 1 _ 8161 81 Inverse T 1 Block stage SPS I _ 8161 501 Inverse T 1 Release...

Page 428: ...ned Characteristic Curve When the input variable exceeds the threshold value by 1 1 times the characteristic curve is processed An integrating method of measurement totalizes the weighted time The weighted time results from the char acteristic curve For this the time that is associated with the present current value is determined from the characteristic curve Once the weighted time exceeds the val...

Page 429: ...ovides application and setting notes for setting characteristic curves Parameter Current time value pairs from the operate curve Use these settings to define the characteristic curve Set a current time value pair for each characteristic curve point The setting depends on the characteristic curve you want to realize Set the current value as a multiple of the threshold value Siemens recommends that ...

Page 430: ...rrent time value pair for each characteristic curve point The setting depends on the characteristic curve you want to realize Set the current value as a multiple of the threshold value Siemens recommends that you set the Threshold parameter to 1 00 in order to obtain a simple relation You can change the threshold value setting afterwards if you want to displace the characteristic curve Set the tim...

Page 431: ...0 A 1 500 A 5 A 100 Irated 0 15 A to 175 00 A 7 50 A 1 A 50 Irated 0 030 A to 35 000 A 1 500 A 5 A 50 Irated 0 15 A to 175 00 A 7 50 A 1 A 1 6 Irated 0 001 A to 1 600 A 1 500 A 5 A 1 6 Irated 0 005 A to 8 000 A 7 500 A _ 102 User curve Time dial 0 05 to 15 00 1 00 Dyn set AR cycle 2 _ 30 User curve Effected by AR cycle 2 no yes no _ 37 User curve Stage blocked no yes no _ 15 User curve Threshold 1...

Page 432: ...load PU _ 33 User curve Effect b cold load pickup no yes no _ 40 User curve Stage blocked no yes no _ 18 User curve Threshold 1 A 100 Irated 0 030 A to 35 000 A 1 500 A 5 A 100 Irated 0 15 A to 175 00 A 7 50 A 1 A 50 Irated 0 030 A to 35 000 A 1 500 A 5 A 50 Irated 0 15 A to 175 00 A 7 50 A 1 A 1 6 Irated 0 001 A to 1 600 A 1 500 A 5 A 1 6 Irated 0 005 A to 8 000 A 7 500 A _ 106 User curve Time di...

Page 433: ...volved perform direction determination independently If one of the determined directions matches the set direction the stage picks up see descriptions of the stage logic The direction is determined by calculating the phase angle between the short circuit current and a reference voltage Measurands for Direction Determining The directional measuring element uses the short circuit current of the phas...

Page 434: ...ng voltages are not sufficient for reliable direction determination Insofar as and as long as no sufficient measuring voltage is available after the storage time 2 s has elapsed the detected direction is retained If the memory does not contain any voltages when closing onto a short circuit for example the behavior of the stage is defined using the Non direc tional pickup parameter Direction Determ...

Page 435: ...culated as 88o around the rotated reference voltage Vref rot If the short circuit current vector is located in this range the device decides on the forward direction In the mirrored range the device decides on the backward direction In the intermediate range the direction is undetermined dwdocp34 240611 01 tif 2 en_US Figure 6 57 Forward Characteristic of the Directional Function Phase Measuring E...

Page 436: ...Please also note that for phase to phase faults the reference voltage is rotated between 0 distant fault and 30o close up fault dependent upon the collapse of the faulted voltage see Figure 6 56 You can take this into account with an average value of 15 Rotation angle of ref volt 90 φsh 15o phase measuring elements PP faults Table 6 4 Example settings Application φsh typical Setting Rotation angle...

Page 437: ... time grading in opposition to the power flow with increasing time As load can only flow in one direction you can set the directional devices without time delay dwdocp05 240611 01 tif 1 en_US Figure 6 58 Parallel Line with Transformers Legend for Figure 6 58 Stage Stage T Directional stage forward direction set Non directional stage Grading time Cable Runs with Infeed at Both Ends Cable runs with ...

Page 438: ...in the forward direction the fault must be on this line section and the level trips immediately As this protection principle works with an enable procedure and not with a blocking procedure there is no need to delay the level A second directional definite time overcurrent protection stage with standard time grading works in parallel with the first stage as a selective backup stage This ensures ful...

Page 439: ...e stage proceed as follows The Directional mode parameter of both stages must be set to forward The Directional comparison and Release via input signal parameters of the first stage must be set to yes This is so that the first stage is only released if the Release delay op input signal is active Furthermore the direction is indicated if a threshold value is exceeded The first stage can be set with...

Page 440: ...rent protection advanced stages 1 Inverse time overcurrent protection advanced stage 1 Logarithmic inverse time overcurrent protection stage 1 Logarithmic inverse time with knee point overcurrent protection stage 1 User defined characteristic curve overcurrent protection stage In the basic function type Directional overcurrent protection ground basic the following stages can operate simultaneously...

Page 441: ...nfluence the pickup values and operate delays of the stages or block the stages The stage can also be affected by an external source via a binary input signal Automatic reclosing AREC Cold load pickup detection Binary input signal If the device is equipped with the Inrush current detection function the stages can be stabilized against operate due to transformer inrush currents Protection and Autom...

Page 442: ...hreshold Setting Range rated I sec ph 5 A IN 5 A 3ph IN 3I0 calculated 4 Protection 0 030 A to 35 000 A N A N A 0 15 A to 175 00 A 4 Measurement 0 001 A to 1 600 A N A N A 0 005 A to 8 000 A IN measured 4 Protection 0 030 A to 35 000 A N A N A 0 15 A to 175 00 A 4 Measurement 0 001 A to 1 600 A N A N A 0 005 A to 8 000 A 3ph IN separate 3I0 calculated 4 Protection 0 030 A to 35 000 A 0 030 A to 35...

Page 443: ...n 240812 01 vsd 1 en_US Figure 6 65 Measured Value Definition Start of the Direction Determination If the zero sequence current 3I0 exceeds the pickup threshold of a stage and the selected voltage V0 or V2 exceeds the parameter Min voltage V0 or V2 as well the direction determination is started Direction Determination with Zero Sequence Values The direction is determined by calculating the phase a...

Page 444: ...0913 2 en_US Figure 6 66 Rotation of the Reference Voltage Directional Overcurrent Protection Ground Function with Zero Sequence Values The rotated reference voltage Vref rot and the parameter Forward section define the forward and reverse ranges see Figure 6 67 The forward range is calculated as Δφ around the rotated reference voltage Vref rot Δφ is set with the parameter Forward section If the s...

Page 445: ...of the secon dary rated values of phase current and voltage Application and Setting Notes Parameter Measured value Recommended setting value _ 9 Measured value IN Measured This parameter is not available in the basic function Parameter Value Description IN Measured The function operates with the measured ground current IN This is the recommended setting unless there is a specific reason to use the...

Page 446: ...ref volt Forward section Recommended setting value _ 2311 102 Rotation angle of ref volt 45 Recommended setting value _ 2311 103 Forward section 88 The parameter Forward section is not available in the basic function The basic function uses a fixed value of 88 The direction characteristic that is the area of the forward and reverse ranges is set with the Rotation angle of ref volt and the Forward ...

Page 447: ...rable zero sequence impedance conditions or that a parallel line influences the zero sequence system Input Signal Test of direction If you activate the binary input signal Test of direction the direction is determined and indicated even without the current threshold being exceeded in one of the stages This provides an easy means of checking the direction during commissioning without changing the t...

Page 448: ...e available for the stage From an internal source on the pickup of the Measuring voltage failure detection function From an external source via the binary input signal Open of the function block Voltage transformer circuit breaker which links to the trip of the voltage transformer circuit breaker The Blk by meas volt failure parameter can be set to either block or not block the stage when the Meas...

Page 449: ...aker is connected to the voltage transformer circuit breaker Parameter Value Description yes The directional overcurrent protection stage is blocked when a measuring voltage failure is detected Siemens recommends using the default setting as correct direction determination cannot be guaranteed if a measuring voltage failure occurs no The directional overcurrent protection stage is not blocked when...

Page 450: ...280812 02 tif 1 en_US Figure 6 69 Logic Diagram of the Directional Definite Time Overcurrent Protection Ground Basic 6 7 5 6 7 5 1 Protection and Automation Functions 6 7 Directional Overcurrent Protection Ground 450 SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Protection Manual C53000 G5040 C017 8 Edition 07 2017 ...

Page 451: ...I0 as a criterion for the ground fault Depending on the parameter setting connection type of the Measuring point I 3ph the zero sequence current is measured or calculated Depending on the applied CT terminal type the 3I0 Threshold range varies according to the following table Protection and Automation Functions 6 7 Directional Overcurrent Protection Ground SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Protection Manual ...

Page 452: ... Stage The following blockings reset the picked up stage completely Externally or internally via the binary input signal Block stage see chapter 6 7 4 1 Description Measuring voltage failure see chapter 6 7 4 1 Description Via the dynamic settings functionality only available in the advanced function type see Influence of Other Functions via Dynamic Settings and chapter 6 7 10 Influence of Other F...

Page 453: ...de parameter to define the directional mode of the stage Parameter Value Description forward Select this setting if the stage is to work in forward direction in the direction of the line reverse Select this setting if the stage is to work in reverse direction in the direction of the busbar Parameter Method of measurement Recommended setting value _ 4861 8 Method of measurement fundamental comp Wit...

Page 454: ...nal functions is not necessary yes If a device internal function Automatic reclosing or Cold load pickup detection or an external function should affect the overcurrent protection stage such as change the setting of the threshold value or operate delay blocking of the stage the setting must be changed to yes This makes the configuration parameters affected by Auto reclosing Cold load PU Binary inp...

Page 455: ...meter This avoids chattering of the stage Parameter Dropout delay Recommended setting value _ 4861 101 Dropout delay 0 s This parameter is not visible for the basic stage Siemens recommends using the dropout delay of 0 s since the dropout of a protection stage must be performed as fast as possible You can use the Dropout delay parameter 0 s to obtain a uniform dropout behavior if you use it togeth...

Page 456: ... 1 Dropout delay 0 00 s to 60 00 s 0 00 s _ 4861 6 Definite T 1 Operate delay 0 00 s to 60 00 s 0 30 s Dyn s AR off n rdy _ 4861 28 Definite T 1 Effect by AR off n ready no yes no _ 4861 35 Definite T 1 Stage blocked no yes no Dyn set AR cycle 1 _ 4861 29 Definite T 1 Effected by AR cycle 1 no yes no _ 4861 36 Definite T 1 Stage blocked no yes no _ 4861 14 Definite T 1 Threshold 1 A 100 Irated 0 0...

Page 457: ...4861 32 Definite T 1 Effected by AR cycle gr 3 no yes no _ 4861 39 Definite T 1 Stage blocked no yes no _ 4861 17 Definite T 1 Threshold 1 A 100 Irated 0 030 A to 35 000 A 1 200 A 5 A 100 Irated 0 15 A to 175 00 A 6 00 A 1 A 50 Irated 0 030 A to 35 000 A 1 200 A 5 A 50 Irated 0 15 A to 175 00 A 6 00 A 1 A 1 6 Irated 0 001 A to 1 600 A 1 200 A 5 A 1 6 Irated 0 005 A to 8 000 A 6 000 A _ 4861 23 Def...

Page 458: ...finite T 1 Block stage SPS I _ 4861 501 Definite T 1 Release delay op SPS I _ 4861 84 Definite T 1 Activ dyn settings SPS I _ 4861 500 Definite T 1 Block delay op SPS I _ 4861 54 Definite T 1 Inactive SPS O _ 4861 52 Definite T 1 Behavior ENS O _ 4861 53 Definite T 1 Health ENS O _ 4861 60 Definite T 1 Inrush blocks operate SPS O _ 4861 62 Definite T 1 Dyn set AR cycle1act SPS O _ 4861 63 Definite...

Page 459: ...280812 02 tif 2 en_US Figure 6 71 Logic Diagram of the Directional Inverse Time Overcurrent Protection Ground Basic 6 7 6 6 7 6 1 Protection and Automation Functions 6 7 Directional Overcurrent Protection Ground SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Protection Manual 459 C53000 G5040 C017 8 Edition 07 2017 ...

Page 460: ...0 as a criterion for the ground fault Depending on the parameter setting connection type of the Measuring point I 3ph the zero sequence current is measured or calculated Depending on the applied CT terminal type the 3I0 Threshold range varies according to the following table Protection and Automation Functions 6 7 Directional Overcurrent Protection Ground 460 SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Protection Manu...

Page 461: ...asic and Advanced Stage When the input variable exceeds the threshold value by a factor of 1 1 the inverse time characteristic curve is processed An integrated measuring procedure totalizes the weighted time The weighted time results from the characteristic curve For this the time that is associated with the present current value is determined from the characteristic curve Once the weighted time e...

Page 462: ...ace Blocking of the Operate Delay and Operate Signal via the Device Internal Inrush Current Detection Function Basic and Advanced Stage Blocking of the operate delay and the operate signal via the device internal Inrush current detection function is described in chapter Blocking of the Tripping by Device Internal Inrush Current Detection For more information refer to 6 5 7 1 Description Directiona...

Page 463: ...aks are to be suppressed Siemens recommends using this method as the standard method RMS value Select this method of measurement if you want the stage to take harmonics into account for example at capacitor banks Consider that aperiodic DC components present in the secondary circuit are measured and can cause an overfunction For this method of measurement do not set the threshold value of the stag...

Page 464: ... of the stage the setting must be changed to yes This makes the configuration parameters affected by Auto reclosing Cold load PU Binary input as well as the dynamic settings Threshold Time dial and Stage blocked of the stage visible and enables the settings to be set for the specific influence For further setting notes refer to chapter 6 5 8 2 Application and Setting Notes Advanced Stage of the fu...

Page 465: ... time Parameter Additional time delay Default setting _ 4891 115 Additional time delay 0 00 s With the parameter Additional time delay you define a definite time delay in addition to the inverse time delay If the setting is left on its default value of 0 s this parameter has no effect on the inverse time characteristic curve This parameter is only required for time coordination in recloser schemes...

Page 466: ...e forward reverse forward _ 4891 8 Inverse T 1 Method of measurement fundamental comp RMS value fundamental comp _ 4891 110 Inverse T 1 Directional comparison no yes no _ 4891 112 Inverse T 1 Release via input signal no yes no _ 4891 10 Inverse T 1 Blk by meas volt failure no yes yes _ 4891 26 Inverse T 1 Dynamic settings no yes no _ 4891 27 Inverse T 1 Blk w inrush curr detect no yes no _ 4891 3 ...

Page 467: ...00 A 1 200 A 5 A 100 Irated 0 15 A to 175 00 A 6 00 A 1 A 50 Irated 0 030 A to 35 000 A 1 200 A 5 A 50 Irated 0 15 A to 175 00 A 6 00 A 1 A 1 6 Irated 0 001 A to 1 600 A 1 200 A 5 A 1 6 Irated 0 005 A to 8 000 A 6 000 A _ 4891 103 Inverse T 1 Time dial 0 00 to 15 00 1 00 Dyn set AR cycle 3 _ 4891 31 Inverse T 1 Effected by AR cycle 3 no yes no _ 4891 38 Inverse T 1 Stage blocked no yes no _ 4891 1...

Page 468: ...se T 1 Stage blocked no yes no _ 4891 19 Inverse T 1 Threshold 1 A 100 Irated 0 030 A to 35 000 A 1 200 A 5 A 100 Irated 0 15 A to 175 00 A 6 00 A 1 A 50 Irated 0 030 A to 35 000 A 1 200 A 5 A 50 Irated 0 15 A to 175 00 A 6 00 A 1 A 1 6 Irated 0 001 A to 1 600 A 1 200 A 5 A 1 6 Irated 0 005 A to 8 000 A 6 000 A _ 4891 107 Inverse T 1 Time dial 0 00 to 15 00 1 00 Information List No Information Dat...

Page 469: ... O _ 4891 59 Inverse T 1 Disk emulation running SPS O _ 4891 55 Inverse T 1 Pickup ACD O _ 4891 300 Inverse T 1 Direction ACD O _ 4891 56 Inverse T 1 Operate delay expired ACT O _ 4891 57 Inverse T 1 Operate ACT O Protection and Automation Functions 6 7 Directional Overcurrent Protection Ground SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Protection Manual 469 C53000 G5040 C017 8 Edition 07 2017 ...

Page 470: ...d Apart from the operate curve this type of stage is identical to the Inverse time overcurrent protection advanced stage see chapter 6 7 6 1 Description This section will only discuss the nature of the operate curve For further functionality refer to chapter 6 7 6 1 Description 6 7 7 6 7 7 1 Protection and Automation Functions 6 7 Directional Overcurrent Protection Ground 470 SIPROTEC 5 Overcurren...

Page 471: ... the charac teristic curve At high currents the Min time of the curve parameter indicates the lower time limit dwloginv 300913 3 en_US Figure 6 75 Operate Curve of Logarithmic Inverse Time Characteristic The time to operate is calculated with the following formula fomula01 240812 01 tif 1 en_US Where Tmax Maximum time of the curve parameter Max time of the curve Td Time dial parameter Time dial To...

Page 472: ...to the application EXAMPLE Threshold Secondary current Ithresh 1 2 A Threshold multiplier Imul 1 1 Pickup value Secondary current IPU 1 2 A 1 1 1 32 A Dynamic Settings Time dial Default setting _ 6 Time dial 1 250 s You can use the Time dial parameter to change the slope of the characteristic curve General information cannot be provided Define the value corresponding to the application Parameter M...

Page 473: ...0 15 A to 175 00 A 6 00 A 1 A 50 Irated 0 030 A to 35 000 A 1 200 A 5 A 50 Irated 0 15 A to 175 00 A 6 00 A 1 A 1 6 Irated 0 001 A to 1 600 A 1 200 A 5 A 1 6 Irated 0 005 A to 8 000 A 6 000 A _ 6 Log inv T Time dial 0 000 s to 60 000 s 1 250 s _ 113 Log inv T Min time of the curve 0 000 s to 60 000 s 1 200 s _ 114 Log inv T Max time of the curve 0 000 s to 60 000 s 5 800 s _ 116 Log inv T Threshol...

Page 474: ...no _ 38 Log inv T Stage blocked no yes no _ 16 Log inv T Threshold 1 A 100 Irated 0 030 A to 35 000 A 1 200 A 5 A 100 Irated 0 15 A to 175 00 A 6 00 A 1 A 50 Irated 0 030 A to 35 000 A 1 200 A 5 A 50 Irated 0 15 A to 175 00 A 6 00 A 1 A 1 6 Irated 0 001 A to 1 600 A 1 200 A 5 A 1 6 Irated 0 005 A to 8 000 A 6 000 A _ 109 Log inv T Time dial 0 000 s to 60 000 s 1 250 s Dyn s AR cycle 3 _ 32 Log inv...

Page 475: ... 005 A to 8 000 A 6 000 A _ 112 Log inv T Time dial 0 000 s to 60 000 s 1 250 s Information List No Information Data Class Type Type Log inv T _ 81 Log inv T Block stage I _ 501 Log inv T Release delay op I _ 84 Log inv T Activ dyn settings I _ 500 Log inv T Block delay op I _ 54 Log inv T Inactive O _ 52 Log inv T Behavior O _ 53 Log inv T Health O _ 60 Log inv T Inrush blocks operate O _ 62 Log ...

Page 476: ...ntical to the Inverse time overcurrent protec tion advanced stage see chapter 6 7 6 1 Description The only difference is that the dynamic settings change functionality is not available This section only discusses the nature of the operate curve For further functionality refer to chapter 6 7 6 1 Description 6 7 8 6 7 8 1 Protection and Automation Functions 6 7 Directional Overcurrent Protection Gro...

Page 477: ... Current at Min time determines the current value at Min time of the curve The parameter Time dial servers as a time factor to the operate time dwloinkn 300913 3 en_US Figure 6 77 Operate Curve of the Logarithmic Inverse Time with Knee Point Characteristic In the Example of Threshold 0 004 A Application and Setting Notes Apart from the operate curve this type of stage is almost identical to the In...

Page 478: ...General information cannot be provided Define the value corresponding to the application Parameter Maximum Time of the Operate Curve Default setting _ 103 Max time of the curve 93 00 s You can use the parameter Max time of the curve to determine the initial value of the operate curve for 3I0 Threshold General information cannot be provided Define the value corresponding to the application Settings...

Page 479: ...5 000 A 1 500 A 5 A 100 Irated 0 15 A to 175 00 A 7 50 A 1 A 50 Irated 0 030 A to 35 000 A 1 500 A 5 A 50 Irated 0 15 A to 175 00 A 7 50 A 1 A 1 6 Irated 0 001 A to 1 600 A 1 500 A 5 A 1 6 Irated 0 005 A to 8 000 A 7 500 A _ 104 Log inv T KP Min time of the curve 0 00 s to 30 00 s 0 80 s _ 103 Log inv T KP Max time of the curve 0 00 s to 200 00 s 93 00 s Information List No Information Data Class ...

Page 480: ... as the Inverse time overcurrent protection advanced stage see chapter 6 7 6 1 Description The only difference is that you can define the characteristic curve This section only discusses the nature of the operate curve For further functionality refer to chapter 6 7 6 1 Description 6 7 9 6 7 9 1 Protection and Automation Functions 6 7 Directional Overcurrent Protection Ground 480 SIPROTEC 5 Overcur...

Page 481: ...racteristic curve disk emulation is the same as turning back a rotor disk The weighted reduction of the time is started from 0 9 of the set threshold value The following figure shows the pickup behavior and dropout behavior when a directional user defined charac teristic curve is used dwpidrbe 300913 1 en_US Figure 6 79 Pickup and Dropout Behaviors when Using a User Defined Characteristic Curve i ...

Page 482: ...c curve behavior of a disk emulation rotor disk or instantaneously Parameter Value Description disk emulation Both operate curve and a dropout characteristic curve have to be specified with this setting Use this setting if the device is coordinated with electromechanical devices or other devices performing dropout after disk emulation instantaneous Use this setting if the dropout is not to be perf...

Page 483: ...to 8 000 A 6 000 A _ 110 User curve Reset instantaneous disk emulation disk emulation _ 101 User curve Time dial 0 05 to 15 00 1 00 Dyn s AR off n rdy _ 28 User curve Effect by AR off n ready no yes no _ 35 User curve Stage blocked no yes no Dyn set AR cycle 1 _ 29 User curve Effected by AR cycle 1 no yes no _ 36 User curve Stage blocked no yes no _ 14 User curve Threshold 1 A 100 Irated 0 030 A t...

Page 484: ...no _ 39 User curve Stage blocked no yes no _ 17 User curve Threshold 1 A 100 Irated 0 030 A to 35 000 A 1 200 A 5 A 100 Irated 0 15 A to 175 00 A 6 00 A 1 A 50 Irated 0 030 A to 35 000 A 1 200 A 5 A 50 Irated 0 15 A to 175 00 A 6 00 A 1 A 1 6 Irated 0 001 A to 1 600 A 1 200 A 5 A 1 6 Irated 0 005 A to 8 000 A 6 000 A _ 105 User curve Time dial 0 05 to 15 00 1 00 Dyn s Cold load PU _ 33 User curve ...

Page 485: ...60 User curve Inrush blocks operate SPS O _ 62 User curve Dyn set AR cycle1act SPS O _ 63 User curve Dyn set AR cycle2act SPS O _ 64 User curve Dyn set AR cycle3act SPS O _ 65 User curve Dyn set ARcycl 3act SPS O _ 66 User curve Dyn set CLP active SPS O _ 67 User curve Dyn set BI active SPS O _ 68 User curve Dyn set blks pickup SPS O _ 59 User curve Disk emulation running SPS O _ 55 User curve Pic...

Page 486: ...ction and the functions that are to be blocked If the parameter is set to yes the connection is effective A jump detection or the threshold value exceeding of the functions to be blocked is used as trigger signal for synchronization of the internal measurement methods The jump detection reacts to changes in the current The threshold value exceeding is recognized due to an internal pickup of the pr...

Page 487: ...ined for each of the phase currents IA IB and IC and the quotient I2nd harm I1st harm is formed from this If this quotient exceeds the set threshold value a phase selective signal is issued If 95 of the set threshold value is exceeded this leads to a pickup reset dropout ratio 0 95 Protection and Automation Functions 6 8 Inrush Current Detection SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Protection Manual 487 C53000 ...

Page 488: ...taneously The following figure shows a typical inrush current characteristic with the simultaneously occurring flat areas clearly recognizable dwinru03 240211 01 tif 1 en_US Figure 6 83 Inrush Current Characteristic The following figure shows the logic diagram of the CWA method From the present fundamental component current 1st harmonic the threshold value for identification of the flat areas is d...

Page 489: ...ent of threshold value violation a blocking indication for all 3 phase currents and the measured or calculated zero sequence current l2nd harm l1st harm The crossblock func tion works via a timer Set parameters for the time depending on the expected duration factor via the param eter Crossblocking time If the phase current exceeds the maximum permissible current Operat range limit Imax the inrush ...

Page 490: ...e to be greater than the RMS value of the maximum inrush current of the transformer A practicable value is 7 5 times the transformer rated current Parameter Blocking with CWA Recommended setting value _ 111 Blocking with CWA yes Parameter Value Description yes CWA process activated no CWA process deactivated Parameter Blocking with 2 harmonic Recommended setting value _ 110 Blocking with 2 harmoni...

Page 491: ...rossblocking time Default setting _ 109 Crossblocking time 0 06 s You define the duration of this blocking with the Crossblocking time parameter The default setting of 0 06 s about 3 periods has proven practicable Set the time as short as possible and check the value during the closure trials The parameter Crossblocking time is inactive at Crossblocking no Parameter Start flt rec Default setting _...

Page 492: ...ross blocking no yes no _ 109 Inrush detect Cross blocking time 0 03 s to 200 00 s 0 06 s _ 114 Inrush detect Start flt rec no yes yes Information List No Information Data Class Type Type Inrush detect _ 81 Inrush detect Block stage SPS I _ 54 Inrush detect Inactive SPS O _ 52 Inrush detect Behavior ENS O _ 53 Inrush detect Health ENS O _ 300 Inrush detect 2 harmonic phase A SPS O _ 301 Inrush det...

Page 493: ...tantaneous high current tripping function offers 2 different increment types Stage with standard release method Stage with release method via protection interface only applicable if the device is equipped with a protection interface The function with the stage for the standard release procedure is factory set dwihcstr 230211 01 tif 1 en_US Figure 6 86 Structure Embedding of the Function 6 9 6 9 1 ...

Page 494: ...if the circuit breaker is being closed or if the binary input signal release is active The way signals are gener ated Rel by CB switch on is described in section 5 7 8 Circuit Breaker Position Recognition for Protec tion Related Auxiliary Functions always active The stage is always released and is thus independent of closing of the circuit breaker switch and of the binary input signal release only...

Page 495: ...nly with binary signal Select this setting to release the stage via an external signal Parameter Threshold Default setting _ 3901 3 Threshold 10 0 A for Irated 1 A or 50 0 A for Irated 5 A The stage works independently of the position of the remote circuit breakers For this reason set the Threshold so that the fault current flowing through does not trigger the stage Thus use this stage only if cur...

Page 496: ...nd the line impedance have extremely different angles Parameter Dropout ratio Recommended setting value _ 3901 4 Dropout ratio 0 90 The recommended setting value of 0 90 is sufficient for many applications To obtain high precision measure ments the Dropout ratio can be reduced If you expect highly fluctuating measurands at the pickup threshold you can increase the setting value of the parameter Dr...

Page 497: ...se conditions are recognized internally if a circuit breaker is open or just closed Furthermore the stage can be activated externally via the release binary input signal i i NOTE To enable internal release of the stage the devices at all ends of the protected object must be informed of the circuit breaker position the circuit breaker auxiliary contacts must be connected to the devices the respecti...

Page 498: ...ease Parameter Dropout ratio Recommended setting value _ 3901 4 Dropout ratio 0 90 The recommended setting value of 0 90 is sufficient for many applications To obtain extremely accurate measurements the dropout ratio can be reduced If you expect highly fluctuating measurands at the pickup threshold you can increase the dropout ratio This avoids chattering of the tripping stage Settings Addr Parame...

Page 499: ... Standard 1 Inactive SPS O _ 3901 52 Standard 1 Behavior ENS O _ 3901 53 Standard 1 Health ENS O _ 3901 300 Standard 1 Rel by CB switch on ACT O _ 3901 55 Standard 1 Pickup ACD O _ 3901 57 Standard 1 Operate ACT O Protection and Automation Functions 6 9 Instantaneous High Current Tripping SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Protection Manual 499 C53000 G5040 C017 8 Edition 07 2017 ...

Page 500: ...vide current measured values The Arc protection function consists of the following blocks General 3 stages Output logic 3 phase The Arc protection function is preconfigured with 3 stages A maximum of 17 tripping stages can be operated simultaneously in the function The tripping stages have an identical structure The following figure shows the basic structure of the Arc protection function dw_struc...

Page 501: ...he Function Block lo_fb0_arcprot 2 en_US Figure 6 90 General Logic Diagram of the Function Block 6 10 3 Protection and Automation Functions 6 10 Arc Protection SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Protection Manual 501 C53000 G5040 C017 8 Edition 07 2017 ...

Page 502: ...g of the arc sensors must be avoided i i NOTE Once an optical sensor has detected an arc you must replace the affected optical sensor Within the Arc protection function you can use a fast current flow criterion as an additional release criterion The parameters for the current flow criterion can be found in the General block For each stage you can select individually whether the current flow criter...

Page 503: ...larm and the stage function is blocked Application and Setting Notes General Settings Go to General under the function Arc protection and set the following parameters The setting values apply to all stages Parameter Threshold I Default setting _ 2311 3 Threshold I 2 000 A Use the parameter Threshold I to define the trigger threshold of the phase currents The Threshold I is relevant for the current...

Page 504: ...ault setting _ 14551 8 Operating mode current and light With the Operating mode parameter you define the basic functionality of the stage Parameter Value Description current and light The stage operates with the input variables current and light The current flow criterion ensures that the light signal originates from an arc Siemens recommends using this setting value light only This stage operates...

Page 505: ...311 3 General Threshold I 1 A 100 Irated 0 030 A to 35 000 A 2 000 A 5 A 100 Irated 0 15 A to 175 00 A 10 00 A 1 A 50 Irated 0 030 A to 35 000 A 2 000 A 5 A 50 Irated 0 15 A to 175 00 A 10 00 A 1 A 1 6 Irated 0 001 A to 1 600 A 2 000 A 5 A 1 6 Irated 0 005 A to 8 000 A 10 000 A _ 2311 4 General Threshold 3I0 1 A 100 Irated 0 030 A to 35 000 A 1 000 A 5 A 100 Irated 0 15 A to 175 00 A 5 00 A 1 A 50...

Page 506: ...no current light no _ 14553 8 Stage 3 Operating mode light only current and light current and light _ 14553 11 Stage 3 Sensor point sensor line sensor custom point sensor _ 14553 7 Stage 3 Threshold light 34 00 dB to 10 00 dB 20 00 dB _ 14553 10 Stage 3 Channel Setting options depend on configuration Information List No Information Data Class Type Type General _ 2311 82 General Block function SPS ...

Page 507: ...cted SPS O _ 14552 301 Stage 2 Light detected SPS O _ 14552 55 Stage 2 Pickup ACD O _ 14552 57 Stage 2 Operate ACT O Stage 3 _ 14553 81 Stage 3 Block stage SPS I _ 14553 501 Stage 3 External current SPS I _ 14553 502 Stage 3 External light SPS I _ 14553 54 Stage 3 Inactive SPS O _ 14553 52 Stage 3 Behavior ENS O _ 14553 53 Stage 3 Health ENS O _ 14553 318 Stage 3 Fault arc counter INC C _ 14553 58...

Page 508: ...lowing figure shows the arrangement and the connection of the optical point sensors dw_arcprot light only 2 en_US Figure 6 92 Layout and Connection of the Optical Point Sensors Operating Mode Light only For this example the following is assumed The circuit breaker of the infeed must be switched off This ensures that the arcs in the busbar compart ments of the infeed and the feeders or in the circu...

Page 509: ...he cable connection compartment in feeder 1 to the protection device in feeder 1 Arcs in the cable connection compartment are cleared selectively by the circuit breaker in feeder 1 Connect one optical point sensor from the cable connection compartment in feeder 2 to the protection device in feeder 2 Arcs in the cable connection are cleared selectively by the circuit breaker in feeder 2 Connect opt...

Page 510: ...bar compartment supervision in the infeed The parameters in block General are not relevant since the Operating mode light only Application Example for Arc Protection with Point Sensors in Operating Mode Light and Current Description Overview The example describes the Arc protection function in a medium voltage switchgear with one infeed and 2 feeders The Arc protection function operates with the O...

Page 511: ...nfeed The protection device in the infeed clears all arcs in the busbar compartment the circuit breaker compartment and the cable connection compartment of feeder 1 and 2 Furthermore the protection device clears arcs in the busbar compartment of the infeed If the optical point sensors in the busbar compartment the circuit breaker compartment and the cable connection compartment of the feeders or i...

Page 512: ...and light applies to all stages Parameter Sensor point sensor applies to all stages Parameter External trip initiation no applies to all stages Parameter Channel Arc mod 1 channel 1 Stage 1 Busbar compartment supervision in feeder 1 Parameter Channel Arc mod 1 channel 2 Stage 2 Circuit breaker compartment supervision in feeder 1 Parameter Channel Arc mod 1 channel 3 Stage 3 Cable connection compar...

Page 513: ...uit breaker compartment of the feeders the Light detected indication is sent via binary inputs outputs a protection interface or IEC 61850 GOOSE to the protection device in the infeed Then the protection device in the infeed evaluates the current as well If the measured current exceeds the thresholds Threshold I and or Threshold 3I0 the protection device in the infeed switches off the malfunction ...

Page 514: ...ent If the measured current exceeds the threshold values Threshold I and or Threshold 3I0 the Current detected indication is sent to the protection devices in the feeders If at the same time an optical sensor in a cable connection compartment detects light the protection device trips in the corresponding feeder Setting Notes for the Protection Device in Feeder 1 The Arc protection function operate...

Page 515: ...device in the feeder Only if the indication in the feeder device Current detected is connected with the signal External current an external trip initiation for this stage is effective Parameter Operate flt rec blocked no Parameter Channel Setting Notes for the Protection Device in the Infeed The Arc protection function operates with 7 stages Stage 1 busbar compartment supervision Parameter Operate...

Page 516: ...t detected indication to the infeed device Only if the indication in the infeed device Light detected is connected with the signal External light an external trip initiation via these stages is effective The protection device in the infeed evaluates the current If the measured current exceeds the Threshold I and or Threshold 3I0 threshold values the protection device in the infeed switches off the...

Page 517: ...apters 6 10 8 Application Example for Arc Protection with Point Sensors in Operating Mode Light Only and 6 10 9 Application Example for Arc Protection with Point Sensors in Operating Mode Light and Current If an arc occurs in the circuit breaker compartment and in the cable connection compartment of the infeed the superordinate protection device will shut off i i NOTE If the Arc protection functio...

Page 518: ... Parameter External trip initiation no Parameter Channel Arc mod 1 channel 1 Stage 1 Busbar compartment supervision infeed feeder 1 feeder 2 You can find more information about the settings of the parameters Threshold I and Threshold 3I0 in chapter 6 10 4 Application and Setting Notes General Settings 6 10 11 2 Protection and Automation Functions 6 10 Arc Protection 518 SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Prot...

Page 519: ...ion The function Instantaneous tripping at switch onto fault can be used in all protection function groups The function is preconfigured with a stage A maximum of 2 tripping stages can be operated simultaneously in the function The stages have an identical structure dwstrsto 030211 01 tif 1 en_US Figure 6 96 Structure Embedding of the Function 6 11 6 11 1 6 11 2 Protection and Automation Functions...

Page 520: ...k up The stage is active only if switching is pending or executed for this see chapter 6 3 Overcurrent Protection Phases i i NOTE If a protection stage picks up and tripping is blocked by the Inrush current detection function the Instan taneous tripping at switch onto fault function does not pick up In this case there is no fault recording either Despite this if a fault recording is necessary you ...

Page 521: ... _ 5941 6 Operate delay 0 00 s When switching onto a fault the tripping should usually be instantaneous The tripping delay is therefore set to 0 Settings Addr Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting Stage 1 _ 5941 1 Stage 1 Mode off on test off _ 5941 2 Stage 1 Operate flt rec blocked no yes no _ 5941 6 Stage 1 Operate delay 0 00 s to 60 00 s 0 00 s _ 5941 102 Stage 1 Configuration Setting opt...

Page 522: ...tion stage In the function type Overcurrent protection 1 phase advanced the following stages can be operated simultaneously Maximum of 3 stages Definite time overcurrent protection UMZ 1 stage Inverse time overcurrent protection AMZ 1 stage User defined characteristic curve overcurrent protection 1 Fast stage In the function type Overcurrent protection 1 phase basic the following stages can operat...

Page 523: ...g the Function Overcurrent Protection 1 Phase Basic If the device is equipped with the Inrush current detection function you can stabilize the stages against issuing of the operate indication due to transformer inrush currents Protection and Automation Functions 6 12 Overcurrent Protection 1 Phase SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Protection Manual 523 C53000 G5040 C017 8 Edition 07 2017 ...

Page 524: ...e Measurement of the fundamental component This method of measurement processes the sampled current values and filters out the fundamental component numerically Measurement of the RMS value This method of measurement determines the current amplitude from the sampled values according to the defining equation of the RMS value Harmonics are included in the analysis 6 12 3 6 12 3 1 Protection and Auto...

Page 525: ...You connect protection function groups in the DIGSI 5 Project Tree Name of the device Function group connections Related Topics 6 3 7 1 Description Application and Setting Notes Parameter Method of measurement Recommended setting value _ 12661 8 Method of measurement fundamental comp With the Method of measurement parameter you define whether the stage uses the fundamental comp standard method or ...

Page 526: ...o 8 000 A 6 000 A _ 12661 6 Definite T 1 Operate delay 0 00 s to 60 00 s 0 30 s Information List No Information Data Class Type Type Group indicat _ 4501 55 Group indicat Pickup ACD O _ 4501 57 Group indicat Operate ACT O Definite T 1 _ 12661 81 Definite T 1 Block stage SPS I _ 12661 500 Definite T 1 Block delay op SPS I _ 12661 54 Definite T 1 Inactive SPS O _ 12661 52 Definite T 1 Behavior ENS O...

Page 527: ...hat is associated with the present current value is determined from the characteristic curve Once the weighted time exceeds the value 1 the stage operates When the measured value falls short of the pickup value by a factor of 1 045 0 95 x 1 1 x threshold value the dropout is started The pickup will be indicated as clearing You can influence the dropout behavior via setting parameters You can selec...

Page 528: ... inrush current In case of a blocking the stage picks up The start of the time delay and the operate indication are blocked The function signals this through a corresponding indi cation If the blocking drops out and the threshold value of the stage is still exceeded the time delay is started When complete the stage generates an operate indication Blocking of tripping with the Inrush current detect...

Page 529: ... up at approx 10 above the Threshold Parameter Time dial Default setting _ 12691 101 Time dial 1 Use the Time dial parameter to displace the characteristic curve in the time direction Where no time grading and therefore no displacement of the characteristic curve is required leave the param eter Time dial at 1 default setting Parameter Reset Default setting _ 12691 109 Reset disk emulation You use...

Page 530: ...12691 59 Inverse T 1 Disk emulation running SPS O _ 12691 55 Inverse T 1 Pickup ACD O _ 12691 56 Inverse T 1 Operate delay expired ACT O _ 12691 57 Inverse T 1 Operate ACT O Stage with User Defined Characteristic Curve Description The User defined characteristic curve overcurrent protection stage is only available in the advanced func tion type This stage is structured the same way as the stage wi...

Page 531: ...aracteristic runs in parallel to the current axis up to the smallest characteristic curve point Currents that are larger than the current value of the largest characteristic curve point do not reduce the operate time The pickup characteristic runs in parallel to the current axis from the largest characteristic curve point Application and Setting Notes This stage is structured the same way as the s...

Page 532: ...rent time value pairs of the dropout characteristic curve Use these settings to define the characteristic curve Set a current time value pair for each characteristic curve point The setting depends on the characteristic curve you want to realize Set the current value as a multiple of the threshold value Siemens recommends that you set the Threshold parameter to 1 00 in order to obtain a simple rel...

Page 533: ...ion Data Class Type Type User curve _ 81 User curve Block stage SPS I _ 500 User curve Block delay op SPS I _ 54 User curve Inactive SPS O _ 52 User curve Behavior ENS O _ 53 User curve Health ENS O _ 60 User curve Inrush blocks operate ACT O _ 59 User curve Disk emulation running SPS O _ 55 User curve Pickup ACD O _ 56 User curve Operate delay expired ACT O _ 57 User curve Operate ACT O Fast Stag...

Page 534: ...old Operate delay Default setting _ 3 Threshold 10 00 A Default setting _ 6 Operate delay 0 00 s Set the Threshold and Operate delay parameters for the specific application Ensure that the sampled values are compared directly without an additional factor with the set threshold value Parameter Dropout ratio Recommended setting value _ 4 Dropout ratio 0 90 The recommended setting value of 0 90 is su...

Page 535: ...iption With the high impedance method all current transformers operate in parallel at the limits of the protection range on a common relatively high impedance resistor R the voltage of which is measured The current transformers must be of the same type of construction and have at least one core of their own for the High impedance restricted ground fault protection Furthermore they must have the sa...

Page 536: ...ct so called resistor stabilization dwprhimp 310113 01 tif 2 en_US Figure 6 105 Principle of the Restricted Ground Fault Protection According to the High Impedance Principle With a ground fault in the protection range on the right in Figure 6 105 a neutral point current IY flows in any case The magnitude of the residual current in the phase currents depends on the grounding conditions in the rest ...

Page 537: ...urrent transformers and neutral point transformer in parallel The method can be realized for each protected object As busbar protection the device for example is connected via the resistor to the parallel connection of the transformers of all feeders Application and Setting Notes A prerequisite for the application of the high impedance restricted ground fault protection is that neutral point curre...

Page 538: ... High Impedance Restricted Ground Fault Protection The stability condition is based on the simplified assumption that one current transformer is completely satu rated and the others transfer their partial currents proportionately in the case of an external fault This is theo retically the worst case A safety margin is automatically provided since in practice even the saturated trans former still d...

Page 539: ...1 tif 1 en_US In the example the stability limit is 27 rated current or 21 6 kA primary Sensitivity Consideration for High Impedance Restricted Ground Fault Protection The voltage present at the set of current transformers is supplied to the protection device via a series resistor R as proportional current for evaluation For dimensioning of the resistor the following must be taken into account The...

Page 540: ...rotection The thermal stress of the series resistor depends on the voltage VRMS stab that is present during an internal fault It is calculated according to the following equations fousta5a 310113 01 tif 1 en_US fousta1a 310113 01 tif 1 en_US IK max int corresponds to the maximum fault current here in the case of an internal fault 5 A current transformer 800 5 with 40 kA primary corresponds to IK m...

Page 541: ...h use as busbar protection with several feeders the magnetization currents of the transformers switched in parallel can no longer be neglected In this case add up the magnetization currents at half of the knee point voltage corresponds to the set Threshold These magnetization currents reduce the current through the resistor R Thus the actual pickup value is correspondingly higher Application Examp...

Page 542: ...tion Over current protection 1 phase works with the 1 phase current connected to input I4 Use only the first definite time overcurrent protection stage of function Overcurrent protection 1 phase The Threshold setting is used to set the pickup value No further protection stages are needed Delete these or switch them off Set the Operate delay setting to 0 s 6 12 8 2 Protection and Automation Functio...

Page 543: ...accumulates their duration If the sum reaches a configurable value within a certain time the limit of the thermal rating has been reached If intermittent ground faults are distributed over a long period or if the ground fault disappears and does not restrike after some time the equipment under load is expected to cool down Tripping is not necessary in this case The Non directional intermittent gro...

Page 544: ...ground current input IN or via the sensitive ground current input INS It can also be calculated from the sum of the 3 phase currents The current value and its setting range depend on the parameter Connection type of the measuring point I 3ph 6 13 3 Protection and Automation Functions 6 13 Non Directional Intermittent Ground Fault Protection 544 SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Protection Manual C53000 G5040...

Page 545: ...ct With the coming operate signal this value is logged via the information 3I0 max Pickup and Intermittent Ground Fault Indication When 3I0 exceeds the threshold value the pickup signals Pickup and Limited pickup log are issued The stage generates the Stabilized pickup signal by extending the Pickup for a defined time param eter Pickup extension time The stage counts the Pickup signals If the coun...

Page 546: ...ter is considered as a new fault event Reset Conditions Under one of the following 2 conditions Timer T reset is reset The Intermittent ground fault protection stage operates The general operate indication is going Under one of the following conditions Integrator T sum and Counter are reset and the whole stage is reset and returns to its idle state Timer T reset expires without an operate signal o...

Page 547: ...ges Processing of Signal Status Changes Description Special buffering mechanism The status changes of signals are written to a special buffer This buffer can store a maximum of 2 status changes the most recent ones for each signal With the pickup signal as example if one of the preceding protection functions or stages picks up during an active Intermittent gnd flt signal the pickup signal is not w...

Page 548: ...e fault log and communication interface before the signal Intermittent gnd flt is issued This scheme prevents a burst of messages i i NOTE To avoid a burst of messages do not route the signal Pickup to the operational log and fault log Parameter Threshold Default setting _ 11341 3 Threshold 1 00 A With the Threshold parameter you set the threshold value of the ground current 3I0 measured as RMS va...

Page 549: ...ter Reset time you can define the maximum interval between 2 adjacent ground faults If the interval is larger than the Reset time the counter and integrator are reset The Reset time parameter must be much higher than the operate value of the Sum of extended PU times Parameter Operate flt rec blocked Default setting _ 11341 2 Operate flt rec blocked no You can block the operate indication the fault...

Page 550: ...rmation Data Class Type Type Group indicat _ 4501 55 Group indicat Pickup ACD O _ 4501 57 Group indicat Operate ACT O Stage 1 _ 11341 81 Stage 1 Block stage SPS I _ 11341 54 Stage 1 Inactive SPS O _ 11341 52 Stage 1 Behavior ENS O _ 11341 53 Stage 1 Health ENS O _ 11341 55 Stage 1 Pickup ACD O _ 11341 302 Stage 1 Stabilized pickup ACD O _ 11341 303 Stage 1 Limited pickup log ACD O _ 11341 304 Stag...

Page 551: ...ulses up to several hundred amperes with a duration of less than 1 ms Intermittent ground faults are self extinguishing and reignite within one half period up to several periods depending on the power system conditions and the fault type Intermittent ground faults can persist over longer periods several seconds to minutes and develop to static ground faults Structure of the Function The function D...

Page 552: ...an internal source upon pickup of the Measuring voltage failure detection function From an external source via the binary input signal Open of the function block Volt transf c b which links in the tripping of the voltage transformer circuit breaker The Blk by meas volt failure parameter can be set so that the measuring voltage failure detection blocks the stage or does not block it 6 14 3 Protecti...

Page 553: ...epend on the parameter Connection type of the measuring point I 3ph Table 6 12 Threshold Setting Range with Different Connection Types Connection Type of the Measuring Point I 3ph Current Threshold 3I0 IN CT Terminal Type Threshold Setting Range Secondary 20 3 phase Calculated 3I021 4 x Protection 0 030 A to 35 000 A 3 x Protection 1 x sensitive 0 030 A to 35 000 A 4 x Measurement 0 001 A to 1 600...

Page 554: ... release criteria Inte grator and counter operating mode Refer to the further description in the following sections The directional pulse counter is reset when a different direction than the set Directional mode is detected An undefined direction result does not reset the counter Operating Mode 2 different functional operating modes are available Counter and Integrator and counter You can select t...

Page 555: ...6 117 Pickup Operate and Reset Logic in Operating Mode Counter 1 The internal signal 4 is from Figure 6 116 Protection and Automation Functions 6 14 Directional Intermittent Ground Fault Protection SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Protection Manual 555 C53000 G5040 C017 8 Edition 07 2017 ...

Page 556: ...p The signal is intended to be applied for LED and relay output Stabilized pickup is formed by prolonging the pickup indication by a settable time Pickup extension time This stabilization is especially important for the coordination with the existing static or electromechan ical overcurrent protection The Limited pickup log signal is intend to be applied for logging and communication interface The...

Page 557: ...tored with the reset time If a ground fault occurs the Timer T reset with the setting Reset time and the Integrator T sum are launched simultaneously Unlike the inte grator each new ground current pulse restarts the reset time with its initial value If the Timer T reset expires that is no new ground fault was detected during that period all memories and the stage logics are reset The Timer T reset...

Page 558: ... Reclosing Function Automatic reclosing is not an effective measure against intermittent ground faults For this reason the Direc tional intermittent ground fault protection function is not intended to start the Automatic reclosing func tion Routing of Pickup Signals The signal Pickup is supposed to be routed to an LED and a relay The signal Limited pickup log is only reported to the fault log and ...

Page 559: ...le the counter criterion is only used for the direction determination The inte grator works in the same way as for the non directional intermittent ground fault function This allows the same time grading principles as for the non directional intermittent ground fault function Refer to this func tion for more description Parameter No of pulses for interm GF Default setting _ 16291 104 No of pulses ...

Page 560: ...ickup extension time reset time and integrator threshold value for coordination of the relays on subordinate devices It is comparable to the time grading of the overcurrent protection The Sum of extended PU times has the shortest summation time in the radial system for the device that is closest to the intermittent ground fault and that picks up Parameter Reset time Default setting _ 16291 107 Res...

Page 561: ...te 2 to 100 5 Information List No Information Data Class Type Type Group indicat _ 4501 55 Group indicat Pickup ACD O _ 4501 57 Group indicat Operate ACT O Stage 1 _ 16291 81 Stage 1 Block stage SPS I _ 16291 54 Stage 1 Inactive SPS O _ 16291 52 Stage 1 Behavior ENS O _ 16291 53 Stage 1 Health ENS O _ 16291 55 Stage 1 Pickup ACD O _ 16291 302 Stage 1 Stabilized pickup ACD O _ 16291 303 Stage 1 Lim...

Page 562: ...ent and voltage zero sequence systems 3I0 and V0 available The function comes factory set with a non directional V0 stage with zero sequence voltage residual voltage a directional 3I0 stage with cos φ or sin φ measurement and a directional transient ground fault stage The following stages can be operated simultaneously within the function 2 non directional V0 stages with zero sequence voltage resi...

Page 563: ...stage The following stages can be operated simultaneously within the function 4 non directional 3I0 stages 2 non directional Y0 stages 2 non directional pulse pattern detection stages The general functionality works across stages on the function level The group indications output logic generates the following group indications of the entire function by the logical OR from the stage selective indic...

Page 564: ...General Functionality Description Logic LoGFPger 280113 01 6 en_US Figure 6 121 Logic Diagram of the Cross Stage Functionality of the Directional Function 6 15 3 6 15 3 1 Protection and Automation Functions 6 15 Sensitive Ground Fault Detection 564 SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Protection Manual C53000 G5040 C017 8 Edition 07 2017 ...

Page 565: ...t is considered extin guished The signal Flt extinction det is issued Thus the possibility exists for example to block the 3I0 stage with cos φ or sin φ measurement directly after the fault extinction in order to avoid an overfunction during the subsiding process with a very sensitive setting of the stage Angle Error Compensation The high reactive power factor in the arc suppression coil ground sy...

Page 566: ...es not drop out and the log remains open i i NOTE The Ground fault indication in the general stage must be routed to the ground fault log If not you can meet an overflow of the ground fault log when an intermittent ground fault occurs Ground Fault Log Ground faults can be recorded in a designated buffer the ground fault log As long as the Operate flt rec blocked parameter is set to yes all indicat...

Page 567: ...tent ground fault for the indication Ground fault The intermittent ground fault is then treated as a ground fault and the stabili zation of the indication Ground fault can thus take action Angle Error Compensation of the Core Balance Current Transformer Default setting _ 2311 103 Core balance CT current 1 0 050 A Default setting _ 2311 104 Core balance CT current 2 1 000 A Default setting _ 2311 1...

Page 568: ...00 A 1 A 1 6 Irated 0 001 A to 1 600 A 1 000 A 5 A 1 6 Irated 0 005 A to 8 000 A 5 000 A _ 2311 105 General CT angle error at I1 0 0 to 5 0 0 0 _ 2311 106 General CT angle error at I2 0 0 to 5 0 0 0 Informationen No Information Data Class Type Type General _ 2311 302 General Ground fault ACD O _ 2311 303 General Flt extinction det SPS O _ 2311 309 General Pos measuring window SPS O _ 2311 301 Gene...

Page 569: ...he defining equation This method of measurement processes the sampled voltage values and filters out the fundamental compo nent numerically Measured Value 3I0 Method of Measurement The function usually evaluates the sensitively measured ground current 3I0 via a core balance current trans former Since the linearity range of the sensitive measuring input ends at approx 1 6 A for larger secondary gro...

Page 570: ...nizes the ground fault The direction determination see the next paragraph is started when the V0 threshold value is exceeded The direction result is indicated via the Ground fault signal in the General function block If the direction result equals the parameterized direction parameter Directional mode the stage picks up Direction Determination Exceeding the threshold values by the zero sequence vo...

Page 571: ...ir exceeds the negative setting value the direction is backward In the range in between the direction is undetermined With the α1 reduction dir area and α2 reduction dir area parameters you can limit the forward and backward ranges as shown in the figure With this the direction determination is secured in case of high currents in the direction of the axis of symmetry The symmetry axis can be turne...

Page 572: ...ry is decisive 3l0dir here the current 3l0reactive is included in the direction determination If the current 3l0dir here 3I0reac tive exceeds the negative setting value Min polar 3I0 for dir det the direction is forward If the current 3l0dir exceeds the positive setting value the direction is backward In the range in between the direction is undetermined This direction measurement thus is appropri...

Page 573: ...ring voltage failure detection blocks the stage or does not block it Blocking the Pickup with Detection of the Fault Extinction Using the evaluation of the instantaneous value developing of the zero sequence voltage the fault extinction can be recognized faster than via the dropout of the V0 fundamental component value under the pickup value The pickup of the stage is blocked with the fast detecti...

Page 574: ...e binary input signal Open of the function block Voltage transformer circuit breaker is linked with the voltage transformer circuit breaker Parameter Value Description yes The protection stage is blocked default setting Siemens recommends using the default setting no The protection stage is not blocked Parameter Blk w inrush curr detect Recommended setting value _ 12601 27 Blk w inrush curr detect...

Page 575: ...supplied to the device can vary considerably in its values regarding the magnitude and the phase angle However the device should only evaluate the active component of the ground fault current This requires extremely high accuracy particularly regarding the phase angle measure ment of all the instrument transformers Furthermore the device must not be set to operate too sensitively A reliable direct...

Page 576: ... smaller than the minimum absolute value of the zero sequence voltage V0 that must still be detected Parameter Dir determination delay Default setting _ 12601 104 Dir determination delay 0 00 s The start of the ground fault normally shows a significant transient behavior This can lead to an incorrect direction decision The direction determination can be delayed from the occurrence of the zero sequ...

Page 577: ...A 1 A 50 Irated 0 030 A to 35 000 A 0 050 A 5 A 50 Irated 0 15 A to 175 00 A 0 25 A 1 A 1 6 Irated 0 001 A to 35 000 A 0 050 A 5 A 1 6 Irated 0 005 A to 35 000 A 0 250 A _ 12601 103 3I0 cos sinφ1 V0 threshold value 0 300 V to 200 000 V 30 000 V _ 12601 104 3I0 cos sinφ1 Dir determination delay 0 00 s to 60 00 s 0 10 s _ 12601 6 3I0 cos sinφ1 Operate delay 0 00 s to 60 00 s 2 00 s Information List ...

Page 578: ...his process is most suitable for the use in closed loops or meshed systems Operational circulating zero sequence currents are eliminated and therefore cannot affect the directional result Stage Control Logic lostuwis 240113 01 tif 2 en_US Figure 6 130 Logic Diagram of the Stage Control Blocking the Stage via Binary Input Signal You can block the stage externally or internally via the binary input ...

Page 579: ... values of the zero sequence voltage V0 t and the ground current 3I0 t which are sampled at a high frequency 8 kHz are the basis for direction determination The fundamental component values of the zero sequence voltage V0 serve to release the directional result and the pickup as well as a criterion for the stabilization against switching operations The positive sequence system if it exists as a me...

Page 580: ...e V0 exceeds the associated threshold value V0 threshold value parameter within 100 ms after detecting the ground fault ignition the direction result will be reported In this way high impedance ground faults are also reported in which the zero sequence system values rise only slowly and for this reason the occurrence of the ground fault is detected noticeably earlier than the exceedance of the par...

Page 581: ...on compares the positive sequence current before and after the transient event and thus detects a disconnection In case of disconnection the direction result is not reported Through stabilization mechanisms the direction result is reported 100 ms after the ground fault ignition Thus a pickup occurs with a 100 ms delay If the stage is used in a 1 phase function group the additional criterion via th...

Page 582: ... voltage the fault extinction of the ground fault can be detected faster than via the dropout of the V0 fundamental component value under the pickup value The fast detection of the fault extinction see function block General information blocks the tripping delay after the dropout delay expires With the parameter Blk after fault extinction this accelerated blocking mechanism can be enabled or disab...

Page 583: ...0 threshold value 15 000 V With the parameter V0 threshold value you define the sensitivity for the indication of the direction and the pickup of the stage Note that the sensitivity of the direction determination itself is not influenced The direction determination always works with maximum sensitivity If high resistive ground faults must also be reported very sensitive settings are possible for e...

Page 584: ...he threshold value You can disable this criterion by setting the value to 0 A Parameter Dropout delay Default setting _ 13021 7 Dropout delay 0 00 s The parameter Dropout delay allows you to use the function also as a protection against intermittent ground faults With the parameter Dropout delay the dropout of the pickup state after fault extinction is delayed or held until the next ignition Thus ...

Page 585: ... flt1 Behavior ENS O _ 13021 53 Trans Gnd flt1 Health ENS O _ 13021 302 Trans Gnd flt1 Ground fault ACD O _ 13021 55 Trans Gnd flt1 Pickup ACD O _ 13021 56 Trans Gnd flt1 Operate delay expired ACT O _ 13021 57 Trans Gnd flt1 Operate ACT O Usage Information for Detection of Intermittent Ground Faults The stage type 3I0 with cos φ or sin φ measurement is suited for directional detection of intermitt...

Page 586: ... reduction dir area The current peaks show a clear ohmic component With these parameters you can limit the direction characteristic and ensure a reliable direction result Siemens recommends setting both parameters to 10 Parameter _ 12601 110 Blk after fault extinction To make possible a continuous and immediate detection of the current peaks you must switch off the blocking after fault suppression...

Page 587: ...hod of Measurement The function usually evaluates the sensitively measured ground current 3I0 via a core balance current trans former Since the linearity range of the sensitive measuring input ends at approx 1 6 A for larger secondary ground currents the function switches to the 3I0 current calculated from the phase currents This results in a very large linearity and settings range The method of m...

Page 588: ...eve steady state measurands The direction is determined via the determination of the phase angle between the angle error compensated ground current 3I0com and the rotated zero sequence voltage V0 indicated in the following as reference voltage Vref rot To take different system conditions and applications into account the reference voltage can be rotated through an adjustable angle Rotation angle o...

Page 589: ...lled pickup conditions the stage picks up The start of the time delay and the operate indica tion are blocked The function indicates this through a corresponding indication If the blocking drops out and the pickup conditions are still met the time delay is started Application and Setting Notes Parameter Operate flt rec blocked Default setting _ 2 Operate flt rec blocked no You can block the operat...

Page 590: ...ts default setting A reduction of the forward area by a few degrees is practical for example in an arc suppression coil ground system with long cable feeders that generate high capacitive fault currents Parameter Min V0 for dir determ Default setting _ 102 Min V0 for dir determ 2 000 V With the Min V0 for dir determ parameter you determine the minimum voltage V0 necessary for the release of the di...

Page 591: ... 0 050 A 5 A 100 Irated 0 15 A to 175 00 A 0 25 A 1 A 50 Irated 0 030 A to 35 000 A 0 050 A 5 A 50 Irated 0 15 A to 175 00 A 0 25 A 1 A 1 6 Irated 0 001 A to 1 600 A 0 050 A 5 A 1 6 Irated 0 005 A to 8 000 A 0 250 A _ 105 3I0 φ VI Dir deter mination delay 0 00 s to 60 00 s 0 10 s _ 6 3I0 φ VI Operate delay 0 00 s to 60 00 s 0 50 s Information List No Information Data Class Type Type 3I0 φ VI _ 81 ...

Page 592: ...winding The measured voltage VN is converted to a value with reference to the zero sequence voltage V0 If the residual voltage is not available to the device as a measurand the zero sequence voltage V0 is calculated from the measured phase to ground voltages VA VB and VC using the definition equation 6 15 8 6 15 8 1 Protection and Automation Functions 6 15 Sensitive Ground Fault Detection 592 SIPR...

Page 593: ...te value of the zero sequence voltage V0 exceeds the threshold value V0 threshold value the stage recognizes the ground fault The calculation of G0 or B0 is started with exceeding the threshold values and then the direction determination see the following is performed The direction result is indicated via the Ground fault signal in the General function block If the direction result equals the para...

Page 594: ... is possible for example to attain the greatest sensitivity in grounded systems in the resistive inductive range with a 45 turn In the case of electric machines in busbar connection on the isolated system the greatest sensitivity in the resistive capacitive range can be attained with a turn of 45 see following figure DwY0meas 171012 01 1 en_US Figure 6 138 Turning the Direction Characteristic Curv...

Page 595: ...g voltage failure detection blocks the stage or does not block it Blocking the Pickup with Detection of the Fault Extinction Using the evaluation of the instantaneous value developing of the zero sequence voltage the fault extinction can be recognized faster than via the dropout of the V0 fundamental component value under the pickup value The pickup of the stage is blocked with the fast detection ...

Page 596: ...tection stage is not blocked Parameter Blk w inrush curr detect Recommended setting value _ 27 Blk w inrush curr detect no With the Blk w inrush curr detect parameter you specify whether the operate is blocked during detection of an inrush current Siemens recommends disabling the blocking The fundamental component of the zero sequence voltage is a reliable criterion for the ground fault and remain...

Page 597: ...the magnitude and the phase angle However the device should only evaluate the active component of the ground fault current This requires extremely high accuracy particularly regarding the phase angle measure ment of all the instrument transformers Furthermore the device must not be set to operate too sensitively A reliable direction measurement can only be expected with connection to a core balanc...

Page 598: ...ination To evaluate this short circuit current set the parameters as follows Dir measuring method G0 φ correction 45 0 For the setting of the Polarized G0 B0 threshold parameter the rule of thumb is Set the pickup value according to the following formula where only the active ground fault current can be put into use where ks Safety margin ks 1 2 cable networks ks 2 0 overhead lines I0active Active...

Page 599: ... system conditions and the respective fault charac teristics If you have no knowledge of a suitable time delay Siemens recommends keeping the default setting Parameter Operate delay Default setting _ 6 Operate delay 2 0 s The Operate delay parameter determines the time during which the pickup conditions must be met to issue the operate indication The operate indication is issued when this time exp...

Page 600: ...1 Y0 G0 B0 Block stage SPS I _ 501 Y0 G0 B0 Block delay op SPS I _ 54 Y0 G0 B0 Inactive SPS O _ 52 Y0 G0 B0 Behavior ENS O _ 53 Y0 G0 B0 Health ENS O _ 60 Y0 G0 B0 Inrush blocks operate ACT O _ 55 Y0 G0 B0 Pickup ACD O _ 56 Y0 G0 B0 Operate delay expired ACT O _ 57 Y0 G0 B0 Operate ACT O Directional Stage with Phasor Measurement of a Harmonic Description The Directional stage with phasor measureme...

Page 601: ...igure 6 140 Logic Diagram of the Directional Stage with Phasor Measurement of a Harmonic Protection and Automation Functions 6 15 Sensitive Ground Fault Detection SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Protection Manual 601 C53000 G5040 C017 8 Edition 07 2017 ...

Page 602: ...5th or 7th harmonic phasor of V0 and 3I0 for direction determination The specific harmonic phasor to be used is determined by the Harmonic selection setting Ground Fault Detection Pickup If the fundamental component value of the zero sequence voltage V0 exceeds the threshold V0 threshold value the stage detects the ground fault and the timer Dir determination delay starts If the following 2 condit...

Page 603: ...ase angle between the following values Zero sequence harmonic current 3I0harm Rotated zero sequence harmonic voltage V0harm indicated in the following as reference voltage Vref rot The reference voltage is rotated by the angle 90 in relation to V0 This provides the maximum security for the direction determination assuming that 3I0harm is a reactive current The rotated reference voltage Vref rot an...

Page 604: ...ation unknown regardless of the actual direction that is indicated via the Ground fault signal Therefore the Pickup signal with the unknown information is extended If 3I0harm exceeds its threshold again the timer Dir result extension is reset immediately and the direction determination is carried out again Measured Value Display After the timer Dir determination delay expires and the V0 fundamenta...

Page 605: ...n Default setting _ 110 Dir result extension 5 00 s With the Dir result extension parameter you define the time for extending the last determined direc tion result if the conditions for further direction determination are no longer met This timer can be used to generate a stable direction indication under fluctuating zero sequence harmonics A stable direction indication again can be required for t...

Page 606: ... usually be set to a considerably greater value than the Dir result extension If the Operate delay is less than the Dir result extension the function will operate for each fault regardless of the fault duration as long as the fault direction equals the set direction Parameter Operate flt rec blocked Default setting _ 2 Operate flt rec blocked no With the Operate flt rec blocked parameter you block...

Page 607: ... 600 A 0 030 A 5 A 1 6 Irated 0 005 A to 8 000 A 0 150 A _ 204 V0 dir harm 3I0 harm dropout ratio 0 10 to 0 95 0 60 _ 110 V0 dir harm Dir result extension 0 00 s to 60 00 s 5 00 s _ 105 V0 dir harm Dir determination delay 0 00 s to 60 00 s 0 00 s _ 6 V0 dir harm Operate delay 0 00 s to 60 00 s 1 00 s Information List No Information Data Class Type Type V0 dir harm _ 81 V0 dir harm Block stage SPS ...

Page 608: ...dual Voltage Description Logic lo_gfps v0 4 en_US Figure 6 143 Logic Diagram of the Non Directional V0 Stage with Zero Sequence Voltage Residual Voltage 6 15 10 6 15 10 1 Protection and Automation Functions 6 15 Sensitive Ground Fault Detection 608 SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Protection Manual C53000 G5040 C017 8 Edition 07 2017 ...

Page 609: ...llows you to delay the pickup of the stage depending on the residual voltage With the Dropout ratio parameter you can define the ratio of the dropout value to the Threshold Determination of the Faulty Phase With the Detection of faulty phase parameter you can enable or disable the determination of the ground fault phase Determining is released when the stage picks up If 2 phases exceed the thresho...

Page 610: ... to ground voltages The setting value depends on the system grounding Since virtually the full residual voltage occurs during ground faults in isolated or arc suppression coil grounded systems the setting value is uncritical there Siemens recommends setting the value between 20 V and 40 V A higher sensitivity lower threshold value can be necessary for high fault resistances Siemens recommends sett...

Page 611: ...ch phase is affected by the ground fault Select this setting for applications in isolated or arc suppression coil grounded systems Parameter V faulty ph to gnd volt Default setting _ 12391 104 V faulty ph to gnd volt 30 V Set the threshold value for determining which phase is affected by the ground fault in the V faulty ph to gnd volt parameter The setting value is a phase to ground quantity The s...

Page 612: ...healthy ph to gnd volt 0 300 V to 200 000 V 70 000 V _ 12391 104 V0 1 V faulty ph to gnd volt 0 300 V to 200 000 V 30 000 V Information List No Information Data Class Type Type V0 1 _ 12391 81 V0 1 Block stage SPS I _ 12391 54 V0 1 Inactive SPS O _ 12391 52 V0 1 Behavior ENS O _ 12391 53 V0 1 Health ENS O _ 12391 300 V0 1 Faulty phase ACT O _ 12391 55 V0 1 Pickup ACD O _ 12391 56 V0 1 Operate dela...

Page 613: ...ge Depending on the connection type of the measuring point as well as the current terminal blocks used different linearity and setting ranges result You can find more information in section Measured Value 3I0 Method of Measurement Page 569 Method of Measurement You use the Method of measurement parameter to define whether the stage uses the fundamental comp or the calculated RMS value Measurement ...

Page 614: ... Blk w inrush curr detect parameter you determine whether the tripping is blocked during the detection of an inrush current Parameter Method of measurement Recommended setting value _ 8 Method of measurement fundamental comp With the Method of measurement parameter you define whether the stage uses the fundamental comp standard method or the calculated RMS value Parameter Value Description fundame...

Page 615: ... A 0 050 A 5 A 100 Irated 0 15 A to 175 00 A 0 25 A 1 A 50 Irated 0 030 A to 35 000 A 0 050 A 5 A 50 Irated 0 15 A to 175 00 A 0 25 A 1 A 1 6 Irated 0 001 A to 1 600 A 0 050 A 5 A 1 6 Irated 0 005 A to 8 000 A 0 250 A _ 102 3I0 Pickup delay 0 00 s to 60 00 s 0 00 s _ 6 3I0 Operate delay 0 00 s to 60 00 s 0 30 s Information List No Information Data Class Type Type 3I0 _ 81 3I0 Block stage SPS I _ 5...

Page 616: ...he zero sequence voltage V0 If the residual voltage is not available the device calculates the zero sequence voltage V0 from the measured phase to ground voltages VA VB and VC using the defining equation The method of measurement processes the sampled voltage values and filters out the fundamental compo nent numerically Protection and Automation Functions 6 15 Sensitive Ground Fault Detection 616 ...

Page 617: ...g the Stage via Binary Input Signal Blocking of the stage is possible externally or internally via the binary input signal Block stage In the event of blocking the picked up stage will be reset Blocking the Stage in Case of Measuring Voltage Failure The stage can be blocked if a measuring voltage failure occurs In the event of blocking the picked up stage will be reset The following blocking optio...

Page 618: ...h curr detect parameter you determine whether the operate is blocked during the detection of an inrush current Parameter V0 threshold value Default setting _ 101 V0 threshold value 5 000 V The V0 threshold value parameter allows you to set the zero sequence voltage sensitivity of the stage The threshold value must be smaller than the minimum amount of the zero sequence voltage V0 which must still ...

Page 619: ...yes no _ 101 Y0 V0 threshold value 0 300 V to 200 000 V 5 000 V _ 102 Y0 Threshold Y0 0 10 mS to 100 00 mS 2 00 mS _ 103 Y0 Pickup delay 0 00 s to 60 00 s 0 00 s _ 6 Y0 Operate delay 0 00 s to 60 00 s 0 30 s Information List No Information Data Class Type Type Y0 _ 81 Y0 Block stage SPS I _ 501 Y0 Block delay op SPS I _ 54 Y0 Inactive SPS O _ 52 Y0 Behavior ENS O _ 53 Y0 Health ENS O _ 60 Y0 Inrus...

Page 620: ...nce of the switched capacitor L Inductance of the arc suppression coil Pulse Pattern during a Ground Fault The following figure shows the 3I0 pulse pattern in an overcompensated system for a low impedance ground fault and a high impedance ground fault For low impedance ground faults the 3I0 pulse pattern exists only in the faulty feeder For high impedance ground faults the pulse pattern is also pr...

Page 621: ...eder is reduced and the corresponding current pulse pattern is off When the clocking pulse is off the capacitor is switched off 3I0 in the faulty feeder is increased and the current pulse pattern is on Clocking Pulse Capacitor 3I0 in the Faulty Feeder Current Pulse Pattern of the Faulty Feeder On On Reduced Off Off Off Increased On Protection and Automation Functions 6 15 Sensitive Ground Fault De...

Page 622: ... defining equation This method of measurement processes the sampled voltage values and filters out the fundamental compo nent numerically Measured Value 3I0 Method of Measurement The function usually evaluates the ground current 3I0 sensitively measured via a core balance current trans former Since the linearity range of the sensitive measuring input ends at approx 1 6 A for larger secondary groun...

Page 623: ...pulse is detected After the first valid pulse is detected the pulse counter is started to count the number of pulses continuously until the stage resets Pickup Operate After the first valid pulse is detected the stage picks up If the number of detected pulses within the pulse monitoring time reaches the setting of the No of pulses for operate parameter the stage operates The pulse monitoring time ...

Page 624: ...t sensi tivity of the stage Set the threshold value smaller than the minimum absolute value of the zero sequence current 3I0 that must still be detected Parameter Pulse on duration Pulse off duration Default setting _ 104 Pulse on duration 1 00 s Default setting _ 105 Pulse off duration 1 50 s With the Pulse on duration and Pulse off duration parameters you define the switch on and switch off dura...

Page 625: ...ce of the clocking device you can carry out a test recording while the clocking device is in operation From the test recording you can read the inaccuracy of the pulse on pulse off durations Add a safety margin of 20 ms on the read inaccuracy and consider this as the maximum toler ance of the clocking device For the setting add another 40 ms for the tolerance of the SIPROTEC 5 device Parameter 3I0...

Page 626: ...10 6 F Then the setting of the 3I0 delta pulse off on parameter is calculated as follows fo_delta calculate 1 en_US If the network information for the setting calculation is not available Siemens recommends using the default setting of 10 Parameter No of pulses for operate Monitoring time in pulses Default setting _ 107 No of pulses for operate 3 Default setting _ 108 Monitoring time in pulses 5 W...

Page 627: ...uration 0 20 s to 10 00 s 1 00 s _ 105 Pulse detect Pulse off duration 0 20 s to 10 00 s 1 50 s _ 109 Pulse detect Max tolera puls e on or off 0 02 s to 2 00 s 0 15 s _ 107 Pulse detect No of pulses for operate 2 to 100 3 _ 108 Pulse detect Moni toring time in pulses 2 to 100 5 Information List No Information Data Class Type Type Pulse detect _ 81 Pulse detect Block stage SPS I _ 54 Pulse detect I...

Page 628: ...in protection function groups with current measurement The Undercurrent protection function comes with 1 protection stage preconfigured at the factory A maximum of 2 protection stages can be operated simultaneously in this function The protection stages are structured identically lostuundcu 150813 2 en_US Figure 6 150 Structure Embedding of the Function 6 16 6 16 1 6 16 2 Protection and Automation...

Page 629: ...ction Method of Measurement You use the Method of measurement parameter to define whether the stage uses the fundamental comp standard method or the calculated RMS value 6 16 3 Protection and Automation Functions 6 16 Undercurrent Protection SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Protection Manual 629 C53000 G5040 C017 8 Edition 07 2017 ...

Page 630: ... the circuit breaker The circuit breaker switch position is detected as closed via the related binary inputs of the Position indication This is also true under the condition that no phase current is flowing The current flow criterion indicates that the circuit breaker is closed This is also true under the condition that the auxiliary contacts indicate the circuit breaker as open Application and Se...

Page 631: ...arameter Threshold Default setting _ 13051 3 Threshold 0 050 A Specify the Threshold pickup threshold for the specific application Parameter Operate delay Default setting _ 13051 6 Operate delay 0 05 s Operate delay must be set according to the specific application No general application notes can be given Settings Addr Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting Stage 1 _ 13051 1 Stage 1 Mode off...

Page 632: ...stage SPS I _ 13051 54 Stage 1 Inactive SPS O _ 13051 52 Stage 1 Behavior ENS O _ 13051 53 Stage 1 Health ENS O _ 13051 55 Stage 1 Pickup ACD O _ 13051 56 Stage 1 Operate delay expired ACT O _ 13051 57 Stage 1 Operate ACT O 6 16 6 Protection and Automation Functions 6 16 Undercurrent Protection 632 SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Protection Manual C53000 G5040 C017 8 Edition 07 2017 ...

Page 633: ...ent measure ment The function is preconfigured by the manufacturer with 2 Definite time negative sequence protection stages In the function Negative sequence protection the following stages can be operated simultaneously 3 stages Definite time negative sequence protection 2 stages Inverse time negative sequence protection The stages have an identical structure Stages that are not preconfigured are...

Page 634: ...Current With the parameters Current limitation Imax and Maximum phase current you restrict the oper ating range of the function When the limiting is activated pickup of the stages is blocked as soon as the maximum phase current threshold value is exceeded For more information refer to the stage description Release Current The threshold value of the Release current serves to release the negative se...

Page 635: ...aximum phase current 10 0 A at 1 A If the protection function needs a maximum current limitation set the value of the Current limitation Imax parameter from no to yes With the parameter Maximum phase current you set the upper limit of the phase current CT saturation will cause negative sequence current in the secondary system To avoid over function due to the CT saturation a suitable phase current...

Page 636: ...the FB General Blocking of the Stage When blocked the picked up protection stage will drop out Blocking the stage is possible externally or internally via the binary input signal Block stage Blocking of Tripping via the Device Internal Inrush Current Detection Function With the Blk w inrush curr detect parameter you can define whether tripping of the stage should be blocked when a threshold value ...

Page 637: ...ansformers are parts of the protection zones set this parameter to yes Settings Addr Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting General _ 2311 106 General Reference value pos seq current rated current rated current _ 2311 107 General Current limita tion Imax no yes no _ 2311 101 General Maximum phase current 1 A 100 Irated 0 030 A to 35 000 A 10 000 A 5 A 100 Irated 0 15 A to 175 00 A 50 00 A 1 A...

Page 638: ...S O Group indicat _ 4501 55 Group indicat Pickup ACD O _ 4501 57 Group indicat Operate ACT O Definite T 1 _ 1981 81 Definite T 1 Block stage SPS I _ 1981 52 Definite T 1 Behavior ENS O _ 1981 53 Definite T 1 Health ENS O _ 1981 54 Definite T 1 Inactive SPS O _ 1981 56 Definite T 1 Operate delay expired ACT O _ 1981 300 Definite T 1 Inrush blocks operate ACT O _ 1981 55 Definite T 1 Pickup ACD O _ ...

Page 639: ...nd ANSI When the input variable exceeds the threshold value by a factor of 1 1 the stage picks up and the inverse time characteristic curve is processed An integrating method of measurement totalizes the weighted time The weighted time results from the characteristic curve For this the time that is associated with the present current value is determined from the characteristic curve Once the weigh...

Page 640: ...uired for your specific application For more information about the parameter Type of character curve refer to chapter 12 20 2 Stage with Inverse Time Characteristic Curve Parameter Threshold Recommended setting value _ 3 Threshold 10 0 The setting of the parameter Threshold depends on the respective application A threshold value of 10 is a practicable value for fault detection for different applic...

Page 641: ...har acter curve _ 106 Inverse T Reset instantaneous disk emulation disk emulation _ 107 Inverse T Time dial 0 05 to 15 00 1 00 Information List No Information Data Class Type Type Inverse T _ 81 Inverse T Block stage SPS I _ 52 Inverse T Behavior ENS O _ 53 Inverse T Health ENS O _ 54 Inverse T Inactive SPS O _ 56 Inverse T Operate delay expired ACT O _ 300 Inverse T Inrush blocks operate ACT O _ ...

Page 642: ...hines following unbalanced loads that are caused by unbalanced voltages or conductor interruptions for example through a defective fuse Structure of the Function The Directional negative sequence protection with definite time delay function can be used in protection function groups with 3 phase current and voltage measurement The function comes factory set with 1 stage A maximum of 6 tripping stag...

Page 643: ... addition to the generally valid stage control the stage is blocked in the event of a measuring voltage failure provided the stage is working directionally Protection and Automation Functions 6 18 Directional Negative Sequence Protection SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Protection Manual 643 C53000 G5040 C017 8 Edition 07 2017 ...

Page 644: ...urrent I2 is used as a measurand From the 3 phase currents the fundamental phasors are determined via a 1 cycle filter and corresponding with the definition equation of the symmetrical components the negative sequence system is calculated from this Protection and Automation Functions 6 18 Directional Negative Sequence Protection 644 SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Protection Manual C53000 G5040 C017 8 Edit...

Page 645: ...ed through the parameters Angle forward α and Angle forward β see next figure The reference for the 2 angles that must be set is the positive real axis The angles are positively defined in a mathematical sense counter clockwise The region between the limit angle α and the limit angle β counted from the former in a positive direction is the forward region The remaining region is the reverse region ...

Page 646: ...very directionally set stage will be blocked Non direction ally set stages become active again if there are faults in the voltage transformer secondary circuit lorichtu 070611 01 tif 1 en_US Figure 6 161 Logic of Direction Determination Directional Mode You use the Directional mode parameter to define whether the stage works in a forward or reverse direc tion Non directional operation is also poss...

Page 647: ...r Direction Determination Parameter Limit Angle Region Forward Recommended setting value _ 2311 101 Angle forward α 338 Recommended setting value _ 2311 102 Angle forward β 122 With the parameters Angle forward α and Angle forward β you can change the location of the direc tional characteristic curve Siemens recommends using the defaults because the function with these settings reliably determines...

Page 648: ... via the 2 parameters Blocking by and Blocking by prot pickup The Blocking by parameter is used to select the zones or tripping stages of the main protection function s upon whose pickup the negative sequence protection is to be blocked Parameter Blocking by prot pickup Default setting _ 8101 130 Blocking by prot pickup every pickup The Blocking by prot pickup parameter can be used to define the t...

Page 649: ...tem current does not lead to undesired response of the stage due to unbalance for example non twisted line Parameter Operate delay Default setting _ 8101 6 Operate delay 0 30 s The tripping delay time delay to be set is derived from the time grading schedule that has been prepared for the system When selecting the current and time setting pay attention to whether the stage must work dependent on t...

Page 650: ...01 112 Definite T 1 Hold mode 1p dead time 0 000 s to 60 000 s 0 040 s _ 8101 140 Definite T 1 Blocking by Setting options depend on configuration Information List No Information Data Class Type Type General _ 2311 500 General Test of direction SPS I _ 2311 300 General Test direction ACD O Group indicat _ 4501 55 Group indicat Pickup ACD O _ 4501 57 Group indicat Operate ACT O Definite T 1 _ 8101 ...

Page 651: ...protection 3 phase advanced stage dw_TOLP_with Filter stage 2 en_US Figure 6 162 Structure Embedding of the Function Filter for RMS Value Gain Description The function block Filter can be used to adapt the RMS value for 2 means To gain harmonics in a defined way Higher harmonics can stress the protected object thermally more than lower harmonics This is the case for reactors applied in AC filters ...

Page 652: ... when the function block Filter is instantiated and the parameter Enable filter is set as yes Otherwise the normal RMS value is used Functional Measured Values Values Description Primary Secon dary Referenced to Iph A Filtered RMS measured value of current A kA A Parameter Rated current Iph B Filtered RMS measured value of current B kA A Parameter Rated current Iph C Filtered RMS measured value of...

Page 653: ... the SIPROTEC download area The 5 required coefficients are generated by the tool They have to be entered manually as settings to configure the filter The amplitude attenuation of higher frequencies due to the anti aliasing filter of the device is automatically taken into account and compensated by the filter To only compensate the attenuation of higher frequencies by the device set the following ...

Page 654: ...oad Protection 3 Phase Advanced Description Logic lo_TOLP_withFilterstage 2 en_US Figure 6 164 Logic Diagram of the Thermal Overload Protection 3 Phase Advanced Stage 6 19 3 4 6 19 4 6 19 4 1 Protection and Automation Functions 6 19 Thermal Overload Protection 3 Phase Advanced 654 SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Protection Manual C53000 G5040 C017 8 Edition 07 2017 ...

Page 655: ...gle body model according to the thermal differential equation with fo_diffgl 170914 2 en_US With the following standardization fo_normie 170914 3 en_US Θ Current overtemperature in relation to the final temperature at a maximum permis sible phase current k Irated obj ΘAmb Standardized ambient temperature where ϑAmbdescribes the coupled ambient temper ature The coupled ambient temperature ϑAmb can ...

Page 656: ...ΘOff tripping overtemperature is exceeded an operate indication is immediately issued and the equipment disconnected from the power supply This threshold is specified at 100 and corre sponds to the final temperature set at a flowing permissible continuous current Imax Figure 6 166 shows the temperature rise at different overload currents and the supervision thresholds dwtempve 030211 01 tif 1 en_U...

Page 657: ...ture sensor can be selected If the temperature measurement is faulty for example due to an open circuit between the device and the RTD unit the device reports this In this case the process continues with either the temperature measured last or the value set under the Default temperature parameter depending on which value is the highest Current Influence The thermal replica based on the single body...

Page 658: ...ffect for the set Emerg start T overtravel Blocking the Function Blocking will cause a picked up function to be reset The tripping function can be blocked externally or inter nally by the binary input signal Block stage All indications then drop out and the thermal memory is set to the value 0 Blocking Closure The signal Block close can be used to prevent closure of the protected object at a high ...

Page 659: ...alue for special applications desired additional cooling or longer blocking of closing Note that the calculation of the operational measured value Time until close refers to this value Parameter Emerg start T overtravel Default setting _ 112 Emerg start T overtravel 300 s This functionality is not required for protection of lines and cables If the logical binary indication is not routed the Emerg ...

Page 660: ... Thermal time constant according to the following formula fodauers 170309 07 tif 2 en_US If the short term current rating capacity is specified for an application time other than 1 s use the short time current instead of the 1 s current Multiply the result by the specified application time For a given short term current carrying capacity of 0 5 s use the following formula fodauers 170309 01 tif 2 ...

Page 661: ...Kelvin K which can be accepted as is If the absolute temperature is given the ambient temperature must be deducted As a rule this is 40 C The overtemperature at maximum permissible current ϑmax and the Temperature rise at Irated ϑrated obj can be converted by using the following formula fo_ueb_for_Irated 3 en_US EXAMPLE Temperature class B for continuous operation permissible overtemperature 80 K ...

Page 662: ...mperature of the protected object and feed it to the device via an RTD unit The Thermal overload protection 3 phase advanced function receives the measured temperature value via the functions RTD unit Ether or RTD unit Serial from the function group Analog transformer Parameter Default temperature Default setting _ 118 Default temperature 40 C The Default temperature is set as ambient temperature ...

Page 663: ... A to 1 600 A 2 500 A 5 A 1 6 Irated 0 005 A to 8 000 A 12 500 A _ 108 49 Th overl Imin cooling 1 A 100 Irated 0 000 A to 10 000 A 0 500 A 5 A 100 Irated 0 00 A to 50 00 A 2 50 A 1 A 50 Irated 0 000 A to 10 000 A 0 500 A 5 A 50 Irated 0 00 A to 50 00 A 2 50 A 1 A 1 6 Irated 0 000 A to 1 600 A 0 500 A 5 A 1 6 Irated 0 000 A to 8 000 A 2 500 A _ 109 49 Th overl Tempera ture rise at Irated 40 K to 20...

Page 664: ...l Time until close MV O _ 305 49 Th overl Time until trip MV O _ 306 49 Th overl Overload phase A MV O _ 307 49 Th overl Overload phase B MV O _ 308 49 Th overl Overload phase C MV O _ 309 49 Th overl Overload maximum MV O _ 310 49 Th overl Equival current phs A MV O _ 311 49 Th overl Equival current phs B MV O _ 312 49 Th overl Equival current phs C MV O _ 313 49 Th overl Equival current max MV O...

Page 665: ...ate of motors generators and transformers Structure of the Function The Thermal overload protection user defined characteristic curve function is used in protection function groups with 3 phase current measurement The Thermal overload protection user defined characteristic curve function is steplessly preconfigured dw_TOLP_UserCurveStr 1 en_US Figure 6 167 Structure Embedding of the Function 6 20 ...

Page 666: ... is from the used current transformer User Defined Characteristic Curve For specific equipment for example shunt reactors and transformers or for special applications the manu facturer specifies an overload characteristic curve This curve cannot be described accurately with a single 6 20 3 Protection and Automation Functions 6 20 Thermal Overload Protection User Defined Characteristic Curve 666 SI...

Page 667: ...he internal k Factor The point at I Irated obj 1 5 is used to calculate the internal thermal time constant If there is no point at I Irated obj 1 5 the point which is the closest to I Irated obj 1 5 from I Irated obj 1 1 is used to calcu late the internal thermal time The points are set according to the maximum permissible load current The Curve based on preload parameter describes for which therm...

Page 668: ...rrent The factor refers to the rated current of the protected object K Imax Irated obj and is calculated internally Irated obj Rated current of the protected object dw_TOLP_Temperature 1 en_US Figure 6 170 Temperature History for Different Overload Currents K factor 1 1 The overtemperature is calculated separately for each phase The current overtemperature can be obtained from the operational meas...

Page 669: ...and the thermal warning threshold are reduced at a fixed dropout threshold see Technical Data Behavior in the Event of Auxiliary Voltage Failure The behavior of the thermal replica can be controlled upon auxiliary voltage failure via the setting parameter Storage of thermal replica You can save the thermal state for a time of 500 min Once the supply voltage returns the thermal replica continues to...

Page 670: ...orrectly in the power system The rated values for the protected object must be correct in the used function group Parameter Threshold current warning Recommended setting value _ 101 Threshold current warning 1 1 A at Irated 1 A Set the threshold to the maximum permissible continuous current Imax perm This results in the same setting value as for the first value of the user defined characteristic c...

Page 671: ... setting can be retained Parameter Behav at I Imax therm Recommended setting value _ 114 Behav at I Imax therm current limiting The Behav at I Imax therm parameter is used to select the process by which the function reacts to short circuit currents To prevent premature tripping of the overload protection at low time constants high preloading and high short circuit currents the thermal replica can ...

Page 672: ...alues When setting the parameter consider the following Set the current value as per unit value with the rated current of the protected object as reference Set the time value in seconds Enter the values in continuous order EXAMPLE With the following 12 points you can get a user defined characteristic curve as shown in the following figure Table 6 13 User Defined Points I Iobj t s 1 16 120 00 1 21 ...

Page 673: ...15 A to 175 00 A 5 00 A 1 A 50 Irated 0 030 A to 35 000 A 1 000 A 5 A 50 Irated 0 15 A to 175 00 A 5 00 A 1 A 1 6 Irated 0 001 A to 1 600 A 1 000 A 5 A 1 6 Irated 0 005 A to 8 000 A 5 000 A _ 104 User charact Threshold thermal warn 50 to 100 90 _ 105 User charact Dropout threshold operate 50 to 99 90 _ 106 User charact Emerg start T overtravel 0 s to 15000 s 300 s 6 20 5 Protection and Automation ...

Page 674: ... 600 s _ 101 User charact Curve based on preload 0 to 100 100 Information List No Information Data Class Type Type User charact _ 81 User charact Block stage SPS I _ 500 User charact Reset thermal replica SPS I _ 501 User charact Emergency start SPS I _ 54 User charact Inactive SPS O _ 52 User charact Behavior ENS O _ 53 User charact Health ENS O _ 300 User charact Current warning SPS O _ 301 User...

Page 675: ... Equival current phs C MV O _ 313 User charact Equival current max MV O Protection and Automation Functions 6 20 Thermal Overload Protection User Defined Characteristic Curve SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Protection Manual 675 C53000 G5040 C017 8 Edition 07 2017 ...

Page 676: ...n The Thermal overload protection 1 phase function is used in 1 phase protection function groups with current measurement The Thermal overload protection 1 phase function is steplessly preconfigured dwtolp1p 270613 01 tif 2 en_US Figure 6 172 Structure Embedding of the Function 6 21 6 21 1 6 21 2 Protection and Automation Functions 6 21 Thermal Overload Protection 1 Phase 676 SIPROTEC 5 Overcurren...

Page 677: ...m the current flowing in the protected object for example reactor or resistance in the transformer neutral point on the basis of a thermal single body model according to the thermal differential equation with fodiffgl 310510 01 tif 2 en_US 6 21 3 Protection and Automation Functions 6 21 Thermal Overload Protection 1 Phase SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Protection Manual 677 C53000 G5040 C017 8 Edition 07 ...

Page 678: ... current of the protected object In a steady state the solution to the thermal differential equation is an e function whose asymptote repre sents the final overtemperature Θend The time constant τth determines the rise After reaching an initial adjust able overtemperature threshold Θwarn Threshold thermal warn a warning indication is given If the overtemperature limit ΘOff tripping overtemperature...

Page 679: ...t Influence The thermal replica based on the single body model applies with limitations to high overcurrent situations short circuits To avoid an overfunction of the overload protection the thermal replica must be influenced for overcurrents exceeding llimit You can select between 2 strategies for this Freezing of the thermal memory Limitation of the input current for the thermal replica to the se...

Page 680: ...he calculation of this value is based on the assumption of constant currents The thermal replica has then fallen below the setting value of the dropout threshold _ 305 Time until trip The Time until trip is the expected time until tripping 100 value exceeded occurs The calculation of this value is based on the assumption of constant currents _ 306 Overload The value Overload indicates the current ...

Page 681: ... i i NOTE The thermally permissible continuous current for the protected object is known from relevant tables or from the specifications of the manufacturer Siemens recommends using the default value as it is a typical value for many applications Parameter Thermal time constant Default value _ 110 Thermal time constant 900 s 15 min The Thermal time constant parameter is used to define the operate ...

Page 682: ...operated with the rated current and at an ambient temperature of 40 C Here the rated current refers to the protected object You can find the temperature value in the Technical data of the equipment or you can measure the value If you use a temperature sensor when measuring at the rated current deduct the actual ambient temperature or the coolant temperature from the measured value When selecting t...

Page 683: ...4 devices If you wish to take further temper ature rise into consideration the current limiting procedure is recommended Parameter Value Description current limiting The input current is limited to the value set in the Imax thermal parameter If the measured current exceeds the set current value the limited current value is supplied to the thermal replica An advisable current threshold is approx 2 ...

Page 684: ...5 000 A 1 000 A 5 A 100 Irated 0 15 A to 175 00 A 5 00 A 1 A 50 Irated 0 030 A to 35 000 A 1 000 A 5 A 50 Irated 0 15 A to 175 00 A 5 00 A 1 A 1 6 Irated 0 001 A to 1 600 A 1 000 A 5 A 1 6 Irated 0 005 A to 8 000 A 5 000 A _ 104 49 Th overl Threshold thermal warn 50 to 100 90 _ 105 49 Th overl Dropout threshold operate 50 to 99 90 _ 106 49 Th overl K factor 0 10 to 4 00 1 10 _ 110 49 Th overl Ther...

Page 685: ...Behavior ENS O _ 53 49 Th overl Health ENS O _ 301 49 Th overl Current warning SPS O _ 302 49 Th overl Thermal warning SPS O _ 303 49 Th overl Block close SPS O _ 55 49 Th overl Pickup ACD O _ 300 49 Th overl Operate alarm only ACT O _ 57 49 Th overl Operate ACT O _ 304 49 Th overl Time until close MV O _ 305 49 Th overl Time until trip MV O _ 306 49 Th overl Overload MV O _ 310 49 Th overl Equiva...

Page 686: ...edges and the winding bundles Another effect of unbalanced loads is the overheating of the damper winding Structure of the Function The Unbalanced load protection function is used in the protection function group The Unbalanced load protection function is preconfigured with 1 stage A maximum of 2 stages can operate simultaneously in the function dwunbla 240913 1 en_US Figure 6 175 Structure Embedd...

Page 687: ...g to the defining equation of symmetrical components Warning Stage If the negative sequence current I2 continuously exceeds the parameter Max continuously perm I2 the Warning indication is given after expiry of a set time Warning delay Thermal Characteristic Stage The machine manufacturers indicate the permissible unbalanced load using the following formula 6 22 3 Protection and Automation Functio...

Page 688: ...is calculated from the flowing negative sequence current I2 with an integrating method of measurement depending on the thermal characteristic As soon as the integrate result reaches the parameter Unbalanced load factor K the thermal characteristic stage operates Limitation of Operate Curve To avoid an overfunction of the thermal characteristic stage in the situation of unbalanced short circuits fo...

Page 689: ...equence current rated current of the machine If the functional measured value reaches 100 the operate of the function is initiated Application and Setting Notes The function is used in the applications of machines You can get the necessary settings from the technical data of the synchronous generators and motors The setting example is applied for a generator application Parameter Max continuously ...

Page 690: ...c according to Figure 6 178 You can read the time corresponding to Unbalanced load factor K at the point I2 Irated machine 1 In the example this is the p u value 10 which corresponds to a time of 15 s As the example shows the time is often written directly on the characteristic curve Parameter Cooling time therm replica Default setting _ 11011 103 Cooling time therm replica 1500 s The parameter Co...

Page 691: ...15 0 s Information List No Information Data Class Type Type Group indicat _ 4501 55 Group indicat Pickup ACD O _ 4501 57 Group indicat Operate ACT O Therm Stage 1 _ 11011 81 Therm Stage 1 Block stage SPS I _ 11011 501 Therm Stage 1 Reset thermal replica SPS I _ 11011 53 Therm Stage 1 Health ENS O _ 11011 54 Therm Stage 1 Inactive SPS O _ 11011 52 Therm Stage 1 Behavior ENS O _ 11011 302 Therm Stag...

Page 692: ...e levels can be due to one of these factors Incorrect operation when controlling the excitation system manually Failure of the automatic voltage controller After full load shedding of a generator Generators which are disconnected from the network or in island mode Structure of the Function The Overvoltage protection with 3 phase voltage function is used in protection function groups with voltage m...

Page 693: ...alue Measurement fundamental comp This method of measurement processes the sampled voltage values and filters out the fundamental component numerically Measurement RMS value This method of measurement determines the voltage amplitude from the sampled values according to the defining equation of the RMS value Harmonics are included in the analysis 6 23 3 6 23 3 1 Protection and Automation Functions...

Page 694: ...elect this method of measurement if you want the stage to take harmonics into account for example at capacitor banks Do not set the threshold value of the stage under 10 V for this method of measurement Parameter Measured value Default setting _ 181 9 Measured value phase to phase With the Measured value parameter you define whether the stage monitors the phase to phase voltages VAB VBC and VCA or...

Page 695: ...ed via the Operate flt rec blocked parameter EXAMPLE Example for 2 stage overvoltage protection The example describes the possible settings for a 2 stage overvoltage protection function We will look at the settings of the parameters Threshold and Operate delay 1 Stage To detect stationary overvoltages set the threshold value of the first overvoltage protection element at least 10 above the max sta...

Page 696: ...T 2 Operate flt rec blocked no yes no _ 182 9 Definite T 2 Measured value phase to ground phase to phase phase to phase _ 182 8 Definite T 2 Method of measurement fundamental comp RMS value fundamental comp _ 182 101 Definite T 2 Pickup mode 1 out of 3 3 out of 3 1 out of 3 _ 182 3 Definite T 2 Threshold 0 300 V to 340 000 V 130 000 V _ 182 4 Definite T 2 Dropout ratio 0 90 to 0 99 0 95 _ 182 6 De...

Page 697: ...ite T 2 Block stage SPS I _ 182 54 Definite T 2 Inactive SPS O _ 182 52 Definite T 2 Behavior ENS O _ 182 53 Definite T 2 Health ENS O _ 182 55 Definite T 2 Pickup ACD O _ 182 300 Definite T 2 Pickup loop AB SPS O _ 182 301 Definite T 2 Pickup loop BC SPS O _ 182 302 Definite T 2 Pickup loop CA SPS O _ 182 56 Definite T 2 Operate delay expired ACT O _ 182 57 Definite T 2 Operate ACT O Protection a...

Page 698: ...f measurement parameter to define whether the stage uses the fundamental comp or the RMS value Measurement fundamental comp This method of measurement processes the sampled voltage values and filters out the fundamental component numerically 6 23 4 6 23 4 1 Protection and Automation Functions 6 23 Overvoltage Protection with 3 Phase Voltage 698 SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Protection Manual C53000 G5040...

Page 699: ...nts that have picked up Pickup and Operate Curve When the input voltage exceeds the threshold value by a settable value Pickup factor the stage picks up and the inverse time characteristic curve is processed Operate delay starts The operate delay is the sum of inverse time delay and additional time delay Where Top Operate delay Tinv Inverse time delay Tadd Additional time delay parameter Additiona...

Page 700: ...nverse time delay does not decrease any further Dropout Behavior When the voltage falls below the dropout threshold 0 95 pickup factor threshold value the pickup signal is going and the dropout is started You can define the dropout behavior via parameter Reset time Instan taneous reset takes place by setting Reset time to 0 s A delayed reset takes place by setting the desired delay time During the...

Page 701: ... to phase as the default setting In this case the function will not pick up on ground faults Siemens recommends the measured value phase to phase as the default setting phase to ground Select the phase to ground setting if you want to detect voltage unbal ances and overvoltage conditions caused by ground faults Parameter Threshold Pickup factor Default setting _ 3 Threshold 110 000 V Default setti...

Page 702: ... 106 Additional time delay 0 00 s With the Additional time delay parameter you define a definite time delay in addition to the inverse time delay If the setting is left on its default value of 0 s only the inverse time delay is operative Parameter Reset time Default setting _ 107 Reset time 0 00 s With the Reset time parameter you define the reset time delay which is started when the voltage falls...

Page 703: ...0 s _ 107 Inverse T Reset time 0 00 s to 60 00 s 0 00 s Information List No Information Data Class Type Type Inverse T _ 81 Inverse T Block stage SPS I _ 54 Inverse T Inactive SPS O _ 52 Inverse T Behavior ENS O _ 53 Inverse T Health ENS O _ 55 Inverse T Pickup ACD O _ 300 Inverse T Pickup loop AB SPS O _ 301 Inverse T Pickup loop BC SPS O _ 302 Inverse T Pickup loop CA SPS O _ 56 Inverse T Operat...

Page 704: ...ction with zero sequence voltage residual voltage function is used in protection function groups with voltage measurement The Overvoltage protection with zero sequence voltage residual voltage function comes factory set with 1 stage A maximum of 3 stages can be operated simultaneously in the function The stages have an identical structure dwu0ovps 030211 01 tif 2 en_US Figure 6 183 Structure Embed...

Page 705: ...ta winding The measured voltage is converted to the zero sequence voltage V0 If the residual voltage is not available to the device as a measurand the zero sequence voltage V0 is calculated from the measured phase to ground voltages VA VB and VC using the defining equation 6 24 3 Protection and Automation Functions 6 24 Overvoltage Protection with Zero Sequence Voltage Residual Voltage SIPROTEC 5 ...

Page 706: ...e stage picks up If 2 phases exceed the threshold value V healthy ph to gnd volt and 1 phase falls below the threshold value V faulty ph to gnd volt the last phase is considered to be affected by the ground fault and is signaled as such Blocking the Stage In the event of blocking the picked up stage will be reset The following blocking options are available for the stage Via the binary input signa...

Page 707: ...sidual voltage occurs during ground faults in isolated or arc suppression coil grounded systems the setting value is uncritical there It should range between 20 V and 40 V A higher sensitivity lower threshold value can be necessary for high fault resistances You should select a more sensitive smaller value in a grounded system This value must be higher than the maximum residual voltage anticipated...

Page 708: ...grounded systems Parameter V faulty ph to gnd volt Default setting _ 331 104 V faulty ph to gnd volt 40 000 V 28 Set the threshold value for determining which phase is affected by the ground fault in the V faulty ph to gnd volt parameter The setting value is a phase to ground quantity The set value must be smaller than the minimum phase to ground voltage occurring during operation Siemens recommen...

Page 709: ... 00 s _ 331 101 Stage 1 V healthy ph to gnd volt 0 300 V to 200 000 V 75 000 V _ 331 104 Stage 1 V faulty ph to gnd volt 0 300 V to 200 000 V 40 000 V Information List No Information Data Class Type Type Group indicat _ 4501 55 Group indicat Pickup ACD O _ 4501 57 Group indicat Operate ACT O Stage 1 _ 331 81 Stage 1 Block stage SPS I _ 331 54 Stage 1 Inactive SPS O _ 331 52 Stage 1 Behavior ENS O ...

Page 710: ... the Function The Overvoltage protection with positive sequence voltage function is used in protection function groups which are based on voltage measurement The function Overvoltage protection with positive sequence voltage comes factory set with 2 stages A maximum of 3 tripping stages can be operated simultaneously in the function The tripping stages have an identical structure dwovpu1s 030211 0...

Page 711: ...ocking is possible externally or internally via the binary input signal Block stage Application and Setting Notes Parameter Threshold Default setting _ 211 3 Threshold 65 V The Threshold is set according to the definition of the positive sequence system Specify the Threshold pickup threshold for the specific application Parameter Operate delay Default _ 211 6 Operate delay 3 s The Operate delay mu...

Page 712: ...efault Setting Stage 1 _ 211 1 Stage 1 Mode off on test off _ 211 2 Stage 1 Operate flt rec blocked no yes no _ 211 3 Stage 1 Threshold 0 300 V to 200 000 V 65 000 V _ 211 4 Stage 1 Dropout ratio 0 90 to 0 99 0 95 _ 211 6 Stage 1 Operate delay 0 00 s to 60 00 s 3 00 s Stage 2 _ 212 1 Stage 2 Mode off on test off _ 212 2 Stage 2 Operate flt rec blocked no yes no _ 212 3 Stage 2 Threshold 0 300 V to...

Page 713: ...Stage 2 Inactive SPS O _ 212 52 Stage 2 Behavior ENS O _ 212 53 Stage 2 Health ENS O _ 212 55 Stage 2 Pickup ACD O _ 212 56 Stage 2 Operate delay expired ACT O _ 212 57 Stage 2 Operate ACT O Protection and Automation Functions 6 25 Overvoltage Protection with Positive Sequence Voltage SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Protection Manual 713 C53000 G5040 C017 8 Edition 07 2017 ...

Page 714: ...or reactive power compensation Structure of the Function The Overvoltage protection with negative sequence voltage function is used in protection function groups which are based on voltage measurement The Overvoltage protection with negative sequence voltage function comes factory set with 2 stages A maximum of 3 stages can be operated simultaneously in the function The stages have an identical st...

Page 715: ...rcuit breaker The parameter Blk by meas volt failure can be set so that the measuring voltage failure detection blocks the function or does not block it Application and Setting Notes Parameter Measuring window Default setting _ 2311 101 Measuring window 1 cycle With the parameter Measuring window you can optimize the measuring accuracy or the pickup time of this function For sensitive settings of ...

Page 716: ...n function is blocked default setting Siemens recommends using the default setting no The protection function is not blocked Settings Addr Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting General _ 2311 10 General Blk by meas volt failure no yes yes _ 2311 101 General Measuring window 1 cycles to 10 cycles 1 cycles Information List No Information Data Class Type Type General _ 2311 301 General V2 avera...

Page 717: ...external or internal source via the binary input signal Block stage Application and Setting Notes Parameter Threshold Default setting _ 271 3 Threshold 5 800 V The parameter Threshold is set according to the definition of the negative sequence system Specify the Threshold pickup threshold for the specific application The secondary voltage of the voltage transformer can be used if the voltage trans...

Page 718: ...age is released when the Negative sequence voltage stage picks up The Overcurrent protection stage remains blocked as long as the Negative sequence voltage stage has not picked up Figure 6 190 shows the voltage phasors during a 2 phase local fault between phases B and C The phase to phase voltage VBC is virtually 0 dwuazeig 020412 01 tif 1 en_US Figure 6 190 Voltage Phasors during a 2 Phase Local ...

Page 719: ... a basis 1 negative sequence voltage can lead to approximately 5 or 6 negative sequence current A negative sequence voltage can be caused by a broken conductor on the high voltage side If a negative sequence voltage occurs this can for example initiate a switching of the infeed in order to prevent a protec tion trip of an unbalanced load protection of the motors Siemens recommends using multiple s...

Page 720: ...p indicat Pickup ACD O _ 4501 57 Group indicat Operate ACT O Stage 1 _ 271 81 Stage 1 Block stage SPS I _ 271 54 Stage 1 Inactive SPS O _ 271 52 Stage 1 Behavior ENS O _ 271 53 Stage 1 Health ENS O _ 271 55 Stage 1 Pickup ACD O _ 271 56 Stage 1 Operate delay expired ACT O _ 271 57 Stage 1 Operate ACT O Stage 2 _ 272 81 Stage 2 Block stage SPS I _ 272 54 Stage 2 Inactive SPS O _ 272 52 Stage 2 Beha...

Page 721: ...s which are based on voltage measurement The function Overvoltage protection with any voltage comes factory set with 2 stages A maximum of 3 tripping stages can be operated simultaneously in the function The tripping stages have an identical struc ture dwovpuxs 030211 01 tif 1 en_US Figure 6 192 Structure Embedding of the Function 6 27 6 27 1 6 27 2 Protection and Automation Functions 6 27 Overvol...

Page 722: ...values and filters out the fundamental component numerically Measurement of the parameter value RMS value This method of measurement determines the voltage amplitude from the sampled values according to the defining equation of the RMS value Harmonics are included in the analysis Measured Value The parameter Measured value allows you to select whether the stage uses a measured directly connected v...

Page 723: ..._ 391 9 Measured value VA measured The Measured value parameter is used to specify which voltage is monitored by the stage The scope of setting options depends on the connection type for the voltage transformers and the routing of the measured values to the terminals of the voltage measuring point You can find connection examples for voltage transformers in the Appendix The following setting optio...

Page 724: ...nt with the voltage type VN broken delta you set the threshold value based on the equivalent zero sequence voltage Calculate the equivalent zero sequence voltage V0 equiv sec from the measured voltage VN sec with the following formula You can find more information about the Matching ratio Vph VN parameter in chapter 6 1 6 Appli cation and Setting Notes for Measuring Point Voltage 3 Phase V 3ph Par...

Page 725: ...lt rec blocked no yes no _ 392 9 Stage 2 Measured value VA measured VB measured VC measured VAB measured VBC measured VCA measured VAB calculated VBC calculated VCA calculated V0 calculated VA measured _ 392 8 Stage 2 Method of measure ment fundamental comp RMS value fundamental comp _ 392 3 Stage 2 Threshold 0 300 V to 340 000 V 130 000 V _ 392 4 Stage 2 Dropout ratio 0 90 to 0 99 0 95 _ 392 6 St...

Page 726: ... 1 Operate ACT O Stage 2 _ 392 81 Stage 2 Block stage SPS I _ 392 54 Stage 2 Inactive SPS O _ 392 52 Stage 2 Behavior ENS O _ 392 53 Stage 2 Health ENS O _ 392 55 Stage 2 Pickup ACD O _ 392 56 Stage 2 Operate delay expired ACT O _ 392 57 Stage 2 Operate ACT O Protection and Automation Functions 6 27 Overvoltage Protection with Any Voltage 726 SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Protection Manual C53000 G5040 C...

Page 727: ... of the Function The Overvoltage protection with negative sequence voltage positive sequence voltage function is used in protection function groups which are based on voltage measurement The Overvoltage protection with negative sequence voltage positive sequence voltage function comes factory set with 2 stages A maximum of 3 stages can be operated simultaneously in the function The stages have an ...

Page 728: ...b which links in the tripping of the voltage transformer circuit breaker The parameter Blk by meas volt failure can be set so that the measuring voltage failure detection blocks the function or does not block it Application and Setting Notes Parameter Measuring window Default setting _ 2311 102 Measuring window 1 cycle With the parameter Measuring window you can optimize the measuring accuracy or ...

Page 729: ... function is blocked default setting Siemens recommends using the default setting no The protection function is not blocked Settings Addr Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting General _ 2311 10 General Blk by meas volt failure no yes yes _ 2311 102 General Measuring window 1 cycles to 10 cycles 1 cycles _ 2311 101 General Minimum voltage V1 0 300 V to 60 000 V 5 000 V Information List No Inf...

Page 730: ...icked up function is reset The following blocking option is available for the function From an external or internal source via the binary input signal Block stage Application and Setting Notes Parameter Threshold Default setting _ 17071 3 Threshold 10 00 The parameter Threshold is set in percentage according to the definition of the symmetrical compents It is the ratio of the negative sequence vol...

Page 731: ...vercur rent protection stage is released when the Negative sequence voltage stage picks up The Overcurrent Protection stage remains blocked as long as the Negative sequence voltage stage has not picked up Figure 6 197 shows the voltage phasors during a 2 phase local fault between phases B and C The phase to phase voltage VBC is virtually 0 dwuazeig 020412 01 tif 1 en_US Figure 6 197 Voltage Phasor...

Page 732: ...on the high voltage side If a negative sequence voltage occurs this can for example initiate a switching of the infeed in order to prevent a protec tion trip of an unbalanced load protection of the motors Siemens recommends using multiple stages for a better grading whereby a sensitive setting of the threshold permits an increased tripping delay For a reference only 2 stages are discussed The firs...

Page 733: ... ENS O _ 17071 53 Stage 1 Health ENS O _ 17071 55 Stage 1 Pickup ACD O _ 17071 56 Stage 1 Operate delay expired ACT O _ 17071 57 Stage 1 Operate ACT O Stage 2 _ 17072 81 Stage 2 Block stage SPS I _ 17072 54 Stage 2 Inactive SPS O _ 17072 52 Stage 2 Behavior ENS O _ 17072 53 Stage 2 Health ENS O _ 17072 55 Stage 2 Pickup ACD O _ 17072 56 Stage 2 Operate delay expired ACT O _ 17072 57 Stage 2 Operat...

Page 734: ...oltage protection with 3 phase voltage the following stages can be operated simul taneously 3 stages Definite time undervoltage protection 2 stages Inverse time undervoltage protection Stages that are not preconfigured are shown in gray in the following figure The protection function is structured such that one current flow criterion can act on all undervoltage protec tion stages see Figure 6 199 ...

Page 735: ...e louvp3ph 140611 01_stagecontrol vsd 2 en_US Figure 6 200 Logic Diagram of the Stage Control 6 29 3 6 29 3 1 Protection and Automation Functions 6 29 Undervoltage Protection with 3 Phase Voltage SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Protection Manual 735 C53000 G5040 C017 8 Edition 07 2017 ...

Page 736: ...lue This method of measurement determines the voltage amplitude from the sampled values according to the defining equation of the RMS value Harmonics are included in the analysis Measured Value With the Measured value parameter you define whether the stage analyzes the phase to phase voltages VAB VBC and VCA or the phase to ground voltages VA VB and VC If the measured value is set to phase to phas...

Page 737: ...al Current flow crite rion The function reports when the current flow criterion is fulfilled Figure 6 201 illustrates the influence of the current flow criterion i i NOTE If the _ 2311 104 Current flow criterion parameter is deactivated the device picks up imme diately if a missing measuring voltage is detected while the undervoltage protection is active The param eter setting can be changed even ...

Page 738: ...round Select the phase to ground setting if you want to detect voltage unbal ances or overvoltage conditions caused by ground faults Parameter Threshold Default setting _ 421 3 Threshold 80 V The Threshold is set in accordance with the Measured value as either a phase to phase or phase to ground variable Specify the Threshold pickup threshold for the specific application For the default setting th...

Page 739: ...revent unwanted trip ping you must set a minimum tripping delay of 50 ms yes Use this setting when switching procedures opening of the CB are not permitted to result in stage pickup Note that pickup is delayed by approximately 40 ms This delay is added to the operate time Parameter Operate delay Default _ 421 6 Operate delay 3 s The Operate delay must be set for the specific application Parameter ...

Page 740: ...to 5 of the rated current With a secondary rated transformer current of 1 A the secondary setting value for Threshold I would be 0 05 A If the sensitivity of the Threshold I parameter is set too high compensation processes in the secondary circuit of the current transformer extend the dropout time when breaking extremely high currents To speed up dropout increase the default setting Operation as S...

Page 741: ...e T 2 Method of measurement fundamental comp RMS value fundamental comp _ 422 101 Definite T 2 Pickup mode 1 out of 3 3 out of 3 1 out of 3 _ 422 102 Definite T 2 Pickup delay no yes no _ 422 3 Definite T 2 Threshold 0 300 V to 175 000 V 65 000 V _ 422 4 Definite T 2 Dropout ratio 1 01 to 1 20 1 05 _ 422 6 Definite T 2 Operate delay 0 00 s to 60 00 s 0 50 s Information List No Information Data Cla...

Page 742: ...ealth ENS O _ 422 55 Definite T 2 Pickup ACD O _ 422 300 Definite T 2 Pickup loop AB SPS O _ 422 301 Definite T 2 Pickup loop BC SPS O _ 422 302 Definite T 2 Pickup loop CA SPS O _ 422 56 Definite T 2 Operate delay expired ACT O _ 422 57 Definite T 2 Operate ACT O Stage with Inverse Time Characteristic Curve Description Logic of the Stage lo_UVP3ph_In_StageControl 2 en_US Figure 6 202 Logic Diagra...

Page 743: ...his method of measurement processes the sampled voltage values and filters out the fundamental component numerically Measurement RMS value This method of measurement determines the voltage amplitude from the sampled values according to the defining equation of the RMS value Harmonics are included in the analysis Protection and Automation Functions 6 29 Undervoltage Protection with 3 Phase Voltage ...

Page 744: ... of inverse time delay and additional time delay Top TInv Tadd Where Top Operate delay TInv Inverse time delay Tadd Additional time delay Parameter Additional time delay After pickup the time value TInv is calculated for every input voltage less than the dropout value An integrator accumulates the value 1 TInv Once the accumulated integral reaches the fixed value 1 the inverse time delay expires T...

Page 745: ...d value the pickup signal is going and the dropout is started You can define the dropout behavior via parameter Reset time Instanta neous reset takes place by setting Reset time to 0 s A delayed reset takes place by setting the desired delay time During the Reset time 0 s the elapsed operate delay is frozen If the stage picks up again within this period the stage operates when the rest of operate ...

Page 746: ...ard method default setting or the calculated RMS value Parameter Value Description fundamental comp Select this method of measurement to suppress harmonics or transient voltage peaks Siemens recommends using this parameter value as the default setting RMS value Select this method of measurement if you want the stage to take harmonics into account for example at capacitor banks Do not set the thres...

Page 747: ... the function parameter Current flow criterion on If the current flow criterion is deactivated no pickup delay is required With the Pickup delay parameter you set whether pickup of the stage is to be delayed by approximately 40 ms or not The delay avoids possible brief pickup of the stage when the circuit breaker opens Parameter Value Description no Use this setting if you definitely do not want s...

Page 748: ...tage failure is detected A measuring voltage failure can only be detected if one of the following two conditions is met The device internal supervision function Measuring voltage failure detection is configured and switched on The binary input signal Open of the function block VTCB is connected to the voltage transformer circuit breaker see chapter 9 3 4 1 Overview of Functions Parameter Value Des...

Page 749: ...aract constant α 0 010 to 5 000 1 000 _ 105 Inverse T Charact constant c 0 000 to 5 000 0 000 _ 106 Inverse T Time dial 0 05 to 15 00 1 00 _ 107 Inverse T Additional time delay 0 00 s to 60 00 s 0 00 s _ 108 Inverse T Reset time 0 00 s to 60 00 s 0 00 s Information List No Information Data Class Type Type Inverse T _ 81 Inverse T Block stage SPS I _ 54 Inverse T Inactive SPS O _ 52 Inverse T Behav...

Page 750: ...age protection with positive sequence voltage function is used in protection function groups which are based on voltage measurement The Undervoltage protection with positive sequence voltage function comes factory set with 2 tripping stages A maximum of 3 tripping stages can be operated simultaneously in the function The tripping stages have an identical structure The protection function is struct...

Page 751: ...od of Measurement The stage uses the positive sequence voltage The positive sequence voltage is calculated from the measured phase to ground voltages according to the defining equation 6 30 3 Protection and Automation Functions 6 30 Undervoltage Protection with Positive Sequence Voltage SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Protection Manual 751 C53000 G5040 C017 8 Edition 07 2017 ...

Page 752: ...ly if a missing measuring voltage is detected while the undervoltage protection is active The parameter setting can be changed even when the device has picked up Blocking the Stage In the event of blocking the picked up stage will be reset The following blocking options are available for the stage Via the binary input signal Block stage from an external or internal source From inside on pickup of ...

Page 753: ...lk by meas volt failure yes You use the Blk by meas volt failure parameter to control the behavior of the stage when a measuring voltage failure is detected A measuring voltage failure can only be detected if one of the following 2 conditions is met The device internal supervision function Measuring voltage failure detection is configured and switched on The binary input signal Open of the functio...

Page 754: ...tection of motors within the power plant s own power system The example describes the possible settings for a two stage undervoltage protection function We will look at the settings of the parameters Threshold and Operate delay 1 Stage Set the Threshold to approx 80 of the rated voltage In the case of voltage dips down to that value the motors can still start up Depending on the machine characteri...

Page 755: ... off on on _ 2311 101 General Threshold I 1 A 100 Irated 0 030 A to 10 000 A 0 050 A 5 A 100 Irated 0 15 A to 50 00 A 0 25 A 1 A 50 Irated 0 030 A to 10 000 A 0 050 A 5 A 50 Irated 0 15 A to 50 00 A 0 25 A 1 A 1 6 Irated 0 001 A to 1 600 A 0 050 A 5 A 1 6 Irated 0 005 A to 8 000 A 0 250 A Stage 1 _ 481 1 Stage 1 Mode off on test off _ 481 2 Stage 1 Operate flt rec blocked no yes no _ 481 10 Stage ...

Page 756: ...SPS I _ 481 54 Stage 1 Inactive SPS O _ 481 52 Stage 1 Behavior ENS O _ 481 53 Stage 1 Health ENS O _ 481 55 Stage 1 Pickup ACD O _ 481 56 Stage 1 Operate delay expired ACT O _ 481 57 Stage 1 Operate ACT O Stage 2 _ 482 81 Stage 2 Block stage SPS I _ 482 54 Stage 2 Inactive SPS O _ 482 52 Stage 2 Behavior ENS O _ 482 53 Stage 2 Health ENS O _ 482 55 Stage 2 Pickup ACD O _ 482 56 Stage 2 Operate de...

Page 757: ...otection with any voltage comes factory set with 2 stages A maximum of 3 tripping stages can be operated simultaneously in the function The tripping stages have an identical struc ture The protection function is structured such that one current flow criterion can act on all undervoltage protec tion stages see Figure 6 207 dwstuvux 110211 01 tif 1 en_US Figure 6 207 Structure Embedding of the Funct...

Page 758: ...rks with the funda mental component or the calculated RMS value Measurement of the fundamental component This method of measurement processes the sampled voltage values and filters out the fundamental component numerically Measurement of the RMS value This method of measurement determines the voltage amplitude from the sampled values according to the defining equation of the RMS value Harmonics ar...

Page 759: ...Notes Parameter Method of measurement Recommended setting value _ 571 8 Method of measurement fundamental comp Use the Method of measurement parameter to define whether the tripping stage uses the fundamental component standard method default setting or the calculated RMS value Parameter Value Description fundamental comp Select this method of measurement to suppress harmonics or transient voltage...

Page 760: ...r as a phase to phase variable i i NOTE If the function is used in a Voltage current 1 phase function group connected to the 1 phase voltage measuring point with the voltage type VN broken delta you set the threshold value based on the equivalent zero sequence voltage Calculate the equivalent zero sequence voltage V0 equiv sec from the measured voltage VN sec with the following formula You can fin...

Page 761: ...via the Operate flt rec blocked parameter Settings Addr Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting General _ 2311 101 General Current flow criterion off on on Stage 1 _ 571 1 Stage 1 Mode off on test off _ 571 2 Stage 1 Operate flt rec blocked no yes no _ 571 9 Stage 1 Measured value VA measured VB measured VC measured VAB measured VBC measured VCA measured VAB calculated VBC calculated VCA calcu...

Page 762: ...1 300 General Current crit fulf SPS O Group indicat _ 4501 55 Group indicat Pickup ACD O _ 4501 57 Group indicat Operate ACT O Stage 1 _ 571 81 Stage 1 Block stage SPS I _ 571 54 Stage 1 Inactive SPS O _ 571 52 Stage 1 Behavior ENS O _ 571 53 Stage 1 Health ENS O _ 571 55 Stage 1 Pickup ACD O _ 571 56 Stage 1 Operate delay expired ACT O _ 571 57 Stage 1 Operate ACT O Stage 2 _ 572 81 Stage 2 Block...

Page 763: ...hout load Overfrequency protection is available in two functional configurations selectable from the DIGSI functions library The functional configurations differ in the frequency measurement method they use Structure of the Function The Overfrequency protection function is used in protection function groups which are based on voltage measurement The overfrequency protection function comes with 2 f...

Page 764: ... angle of the voltage phasor over a given time interval is proportional to the frequency change the current frequency can be derived from it Filtering method method B The filtering method processes the instantaneous voltage values and determines the current frequency using a suitable combination of filters The frequency protection function selects automatically the largest voltage as the measurand...

Page 765: ...e method of measurement Redundant solutions can be implemented by combining 2 different methods of frequency measurement You can implement a 2 out of 2 decision by connecting the operate indications of both functions in a CFC with a logical AND gate This increases the reliability of protection Frequency Measurement Method Description Angle difference method method A Select this method of measureme...

Page 766: ...bing influences for example switching operations A delay of a few seconds for example 10 s is deemed to be a good value You can leave the Dropout differential at the default value of 20 mHz The following table shows a setting recommendation For this application 1 stage of the overfrequency protection is used The following table shows a setting suggestion Stage Caused by Setting Values At frated 50...

Page 767: ...4 Stage 1 Inactive SPS O _ 31 52 Stage 1 Behavior ENS O _ 31 53 Stage 1 Health ENS O _ 31 55 Stage 1 Pickup ACD O _ 31 56 Stage 1 Operate delay expired ACT O _ 31 57 Stage 1 Operate ACT O Stage 2 _ 32 81 Stage 2 Block stage SPS I _ 32 54 Stage 2 Inactive SPS O _ 32 52 Stage 2 Behavior ENS O _ 32 53 Stage 2 Health ENS O _ 32 55 Stage 2 Pickup ACD O _ 32 56 Stage 2 Operate delay expired ACT O _ 32 5...

Page 768: ...or distur bances of the power and frequency controller Underfrequency protection is available in 2 functional configurations selectable from the DIGSI functions library The functional configurations differ in the frequency measurement method they use Structure of the Function The Underfrequency protection function is used in protection function groups which are based on voltage measurement The Und...

Page 769: ...f angle of the voltage phasor over a given time interval is proportional to the frequency change the current frequency can be derived from it Filtering method method B The filtering method processes the instantaneous voltage values and determines the current frequency using a suitable combination of filters The frequency protection function selects automatically the largest voltage as the measuran...

Page 770: ...ity of protection Method of Measurement Description Angle difference method method A Select this method of measurement if the frequency protection stage is used for the protection of machines Filtering method method B Select this method of measurement if the frequency protection stage is used in an electrical power system Parameter Threshold Recommended setting value _ 61 3 Threshold 49 80 Hz for ...

Page 771: ...power system load is disconnected 47 50 Hz Power plants are decoupled from the electrical power system For this application 3 stages of the underfrequency protection are used 2 of these stages are used for load shedding The following table shows a setting suggestion Stage Caused by Setting Values At frated 50 Hz At frated 60 Hz Delay f1 Warning 49 80 Hz 59 80 Hz 10 00 f2 1st load shedding 49 00 Hz...

Page 772: ...lock stage SPS I _ 61 54 Stage 1 Inactive SPS O _ 61 52 Stage 1 Behavior ENS O _ 61 53 Stage 1 Health ENS O _ 61 55 Stage 1 Pickup ACD O _ 61 56 Stage 1 Operate delay expired ACT O _ 61 57 Stage 1 Operate ACT O Stage 2 _ 62 81 Stage 2 Block stage SPS I _ 62 54 Stage 2 Inactive SPS O _ 62 52 Stage 2 Behavior ENS O _ 62 53 Stage 2 Health ENS O _ 62 55 Stage 2 Pickup ACD O _ 62 56 Stage 2 Operate del...

Page 773: ...he Underfrequency load shedding function can be used in the Voltage Current 3 phase function group and in the Line function group The Underfrequency load shedding function comes factory set with 8 stages A maximum of 12 stages can be operated simultaneously within the function These stages are identical in structure dw_load shedding_Structure 1 en_US Figure 6 213 Structure Embedding of the Functio...

Page 774: ...en_US Figure 6 214 Logic Diagram of the General Functionality 1 n means the number of the protection stage 6 34 3 6 34 3 1 Protection and Automation Functions 6 34 Underfrequency Load Shedding 774 SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Protection Manual C53000 G5040 C017 8 Edition 07 2017 ...

Page 775: ...nes the positive active power flow direction of the func tion in relation to the standard forward direction of the protection functionality You can find more informa tion in chapter 6 34 3 2 Application and Setting Notes In the following figures if the power flow is located in the release area which is marked in gray the protection stages are released In the remaining area the protection stages ar...

Page 776: ...e criterion You can determine whether to check the power criterion or not by setting the Power criterion parameter The power criterion is carried out only when the Power criterion parameter is set to yes The working method of the current criterion and of the power angle criterion differ at Phi power crite rion 0 and Phi power criterion 0 Protection and Automation Functions 6 34 Underfrequency Load...

Page 777: ...greater than the Minimum voltage The df dt rising blocking takes place when the df dt rising value exceeds the setting value of the param eter df dt rising blk threshold It is signaled via the indication df dt rising blocking The df dt falling blocking takes place when the df dt falling value exceeds the setting value of the param eter df dt falling blk threshold It is signaled via the indication ...

Page 778: ...itive power direction parameter is used With the Positive power direction parameter you can set the positive active power flow direction either to the same as or to the inverse of the standard forward direction For device 1 set the Positive power direction parameter to inv to CT neu pnt sett Then the positive active power flow direction of the power criterion is opposite to the standard forward di...

Page 779: ...rent of the connected current measuring point Siemens recommends using the default setting Parameter df dt rising blk criterion df dt rising blk threshold df dt falling blk criterion df dt falling blk threshold Default setting _ 18121 107 df dt rising blk criterion no Default setting _ 18121 108 df dt rising blk threshold 1 0 Hz s Default setting _ 18121 109 df dt falling blk criterion no Default ...

Page 780: ...filled a Pickup indication is issued The frequency value drops below the Threshold The Blocking input from the function block General is inactive The preceding 2 conditions are fulfilled during the configured number of frequency measurement cycles cycle time 10 ms You can set the number with the parameter f stabilization counter 6 34 4 6 34 4 1 Protection and Automation Functions 6 34 Underfrequen...

Page 781: ...hat is all protection stages whose Mode parameters are set to on become active again After a normal device restart reset the statuses of the protection stages which were influenced by the SPS signal Exclusive activation or the SPC signal Exclusive activation are still maintained After an initial startup the exclusive stage activation is reset EXAMPLE Configured protection stages Protection stages ...

Page 782: ... Hz and the dropout differential to 20 mHz the stage drops out at 48 98 Hz Due to the high precision frequency measurement the setting value can remain at the default value of 20 mHz Parameter Operate flt rec blocked Default setting _ 18151 2 Operate flt rec blocked no With the Operate flt rec blocked parameter you can block the operate indication the fault recording and the fault log Parameter f ...

Page 783: ... 5 periods 5 periods _ 18121 112 General df dt dropout differential 0 02 Hz s to 0 99 Hz s 0 10 Hz s _ 18121 113 General f stabilization counter 1 to 20 6 Stage 1 _ 18151 1 Stage 1 Mode off on test off _ 18151 2 Stage 1 Operate flt rec blocked no yes no _ 18151 3 Stage 1 Threshold 40 00 Hz to 70 00 Hz 49 00 Hz _ 18151 5 Stage 1 Dropout differ ential 20 mHz to 2000 mHz 20 mHz _ 18151 6 Stage 1 Oper...

Page 784: ...clusive activation SPS I _ 18151 347 Stage 1 Exclusive activation SPC C _ 18151 54 Stage 1 Inactive SPS O _ 18151 52 Stage 1 Behavior ENS O _ 18151 53 Stage 1 Health ENS O _ 18151 55 Stage 1 Pickup ACD O _ 18151 56 Stage 1 Operate delay expired ACT O _ 18151 57 Stage 1 Operate ACT O Protection and Automation Functions 6 34 Underfrequency Load Shedding 784 SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Protection Manual C...

Page 785: ...sing stage and 1 df dt falling stage A maximum of 5 df dt rising stages and 5 df dt falling stages can operate simul taneously within the function Both of the function block types are similar in structure Undervoltage check and df dt calculation are general functionalities and take place on the function level All stages use these general functionalities dwdfdt01 160113 01 tif 1 en_US Figure 6 219 ...

Page 786: ...cription df dt Calculated rate of frequency change Application and Setting Notes Parameter Minimum voltage Recommended setting value _ 13171 101 Minimum voltage 37 500 V For the Undervoltage blocking 65 of the rated voltage of the protected object is recommended The method of measurement uses the phasor of the positive sequence voltage When determining the setting value keep in mind that the absol...

Page 787: ...ng Falling The stage df dt falling is used to detect frequency falling and the stage df dt rising is used to detect frequency rising You set the threshold value as an absolute value You define the frequency change direction via the selected stage type Blocking of the Stage The following blockings reset the picked up stage completely Via the binary input signal Block stage Via the undervoltage bloc...

Page 788: ...rators salient pole machines H 1 5 s to 6 s For turbine driven generators non salient pole rotors H 2 s to 10 s For industrial turbine driven generators H 3 s to 4 s EXAMPLE frated 50 Hz H 3 s Case 1 ΔP Srated 0 12 Case 2 ΔP Srated 0 48 Case 1 df dt 1 Hz s Case 2 df dt 4 Hz s Parameter Operate delay Default setting _ 13231 6 Operate delay 1 00 s You can use the Operate delay parameter to avoid ove...

Page 789: ...st off _ 13231 2 df dt falling1 Operate flt rec blocked no yes no _ 13231 3 df dt falling1 Threshold 0 100 Hz s to 20 000 Hz s 3 000 Hz s _ 13231 4 df dt falling1 Dropout differential 0 02 Hz s to 0 99 Hz s 0 10 Hz s _ 13231 6 df dt falling1 Operate delay 0 00 s to 60 00 s 1 00 s df dt rising1 _ 13201 1 df dt rising1 Mode off on test off _ 13201 2 df dt rising1 Operate flt rec blocked no yes no _ ...

Page 790: ...T O _ 13231 57 df dt falling1 Operate ACT O df dt rising1 _ 13201 81 df dt rising1 Block stage SPS I _ 13201 54 df dt rising1 Inactive SPS O _ 13201 52 df dt rising1 Behavior ENS O _ 13201 53 df dt rising1 Health ENS O _ 13201 55 df dt rising1 Pickup ACD O _ 13201 56 df dt rising1 Operate delay expired ACT O _ 13201 57 df dt rising1 Operate ACT O Protection and Automation Functions 6 35 Rate of Fr...

Page 791: ...ion 1 Δφ stage 1 I1 Release stage dw_VJP_Structure 1 en_US Figure 6 222 Structure Embedding of the Function General Functionality Description Basic Principle of Vector Jump Protection The following 2 figures show the basic principle of the Vector jump protection function The following figure shows the voltage vector of the steady state condition The load current causes a voltage drop between the i...

Page 792: ...reaker of the system switch opens Therefore the generator unit can be protected against unacceptable stress dw_vector change 1 en_US Figure 6 224 Vector Change after the Load Shedding Table 6 17 Vector Description Vector Description Vp Vector of the generator internal voltage rotor voltage V Vector of the generator terminal voltage ΔV Vector of the voltage differential V Vector of the terminal vol...

Page 793: ...he posi tive sequence voltage via a delta interval measurement With the current measured power frequency the measuring errors of the angle measurement caused by frequency deviations are compensated Range If the measured frequency or voltage is below the set threshold the Vector jump protection is blocked The voltage and frequency bands have the following limits The threshold of the voltage band is...

Page 794: ...Threshold V1 max you can define the maximum threshold of the voltage band The setting value is closed to the allowed higher limit of the voltage band The default setting is 130 of the rated positive sequence voltage The value of the rated positive sequence voltage is 100 V 3 Parameter T Block Default setting _ 2311 6 T Block 0 10 s With the parameter T Block you set the dropout delay of the Δφ sta...

Page 795: ...g conditions The parameter Operate flt rec blocked is set to no The operate delay expires The phase angle differential exceeds the parameter Threshold Δφ Measurand The Δφ stage gets the measured value Δφ from the general functionality Pickup The Δφ stage compares the value of the vector jump Δφ with the Threshold Δφ If the value of the Threshold Δφ is exceeded the pickup delay starts 6 36 4 6 36 4...

Page 796: ...d load situations will be more precise If the setting for the parameter Threshold Δφ is too sensitive every time loads are connected or discon nected the protection function performs a network decoupling Therefore If no other calculated value is applicable to the setting of this parameter Siemens recommends using the default setting Parameter Operate delay Default setting _ 19261 6 Operate delay 0...

Page 797: ...lease_Stage 1 en_US Figure 6 227 Logic Diagram of the I1 Release Stage The I1 Release stage is an optional stage and is used to reduce the risk of overfunction The indication Undercurrent release is an additional safety criterion to avoid an unexpected trip It indi cates a load loss of the connected line to the system and the phase angle criterion is released If any load in the network is switched...

Page 798: ...Default Setting I1 Release _ 101 I1 Release I Threshold 1 A 100 Irated 0 030 A to 35 000 A 0 100 A 5 A 100 Irated 0 15 A to 175 00 A 0 50 A 1 A 50 Irated 0 030 A to 35 000 A 0 100 A 5 A 50 Irated 0 15 A to 175 00 A 0 50 A 1 A 1 6 Irated 0 001 A to 1 600 A 0 100 A 5 A 1 6 Irated 0 005 A to 8 000 A 0 500 A Information List No Information Data Class Type Type I1 Release _ 300 I1 Release Undercurrent ...

Page 799: ... and currents of the 3 phases for calculation of the power The 3 phase power protection P Q function comes with one factory set stage each for the active and the reactive power The following stages are preconfigured Power P Power Q Power P Power Q A maximum of 4 active power stages and 4 reactive power stages can be operated simultaneously in the func tion The tripping stages have an identical str...

Page 800: ...o specify which measured power value is analyzed by the tripping stage Possible settings are positive seq power and the phase selective powers power of phase A power of phase B or power of phase C Pickup Characteristic With the stage type you specify if the stage work as a greater stage stage type Power P or as a smaller stage stage type Power P 6 37 3 Protection and Automation Functions 6 37 Powe...

Page 801: ...ow the threshold value will lead to a pickup Dropout Delay A delay can be set for the dropout when the measured value falls below the dropout threshold The pickup is maintained for the specified time The time delay of the tripping parameter Operate delay continues to run Once the Operate delay has elapsed the stage trips Blocking the Stage In the event of blocking the picked up stage will be reset...

Page 802: ... of phase B or power of phase C Pickup Characteristic With the stage type you specify if the stage work as a greater stage stage type Power Q or as a smaller stage stage type Power Q The Threshold parameter is used to define the pickup threshold of the stage The Tilt power charac teristic parameter is used to define the tilt of the pickup characteristic The figure below shows the defini tion of th...

Page 803: ...p stage will be reset Blocking the stage is possible externally or internally via the binary input signal Block stage Application Example The setting of the function will be explained using an active reactive power range as an example If the appa rent power phasor is within the power range in Figure 6 234 tripping zone defined by characteristics an alarm indication is generated For this purpose yo...

Page 804: ... characteristic runs across the point of origin of the coordinates Set the parameter Threshold to 0 i i NOTE If you use several settings groups consider the following The dropout value of a stage must have the same sign in all settings groups Switching from a positive dropout value to a negative dropout value or vice versa is not allowed As a result DIGSI reports an inconsistency If you want to ch...

Page 805: ...positive seq power The Measured value parameter is used to specify which measured power value is evaluated For 3 phase measurement Siemens recommends to evaluate the positive sequence system power Parameter Threshold Recommended setting value _ 6331 3 Threshold 0 The Threshold parameter is used to define the pickup threshold of the reactive power stage In the example the pickup characteristic runs...

Page 806: ...r Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting Power P 1 _ 6241 1 Power P 1 Mode off on test off _ 6241 2 Power P 1 Operate flt rec blocked no yes no _ 6241 104 Power P 1 Measured value power of phase A power of phase B power of phase C positive seq power positive seq power _ 6241 3 Power P 1 Threshold 200 0 to 200 0 80 0 _ 6241 101 Power P 1 Dropout ratio 0 90 to 0 99 0 95 _ 6241 103 Power P 1 Til...

Page 807: ...t rec blocked no yes no _ 6331 105 Power Q 1 Measured value power of phase A power of phase B power of phase C positive seq power positive seq power _ 6331 3 Power Q 1 Threshold 200 0 to 200 0 30 0 _ 6331 101 Power Q 1 Dropout ratio 0 90 to 0 99 0 95 _ 6331 103 Power Q 1 Tilt power characteristic 89 0 to 89 0 0 0 _ 6331 7 Power Q 1 Dropout delay 0 00 s to 60 00 s 0 00 s _ 6331 6 Power Q 1 Operate ...

Page 808: ...NS O _ 6301 53 Power Q 1 Health ENS O _ 6301 55 Power Q 1 Pickup ACD O _ 6301 56 Power Q 1 Operate delay expired ACT O _ 6301 57 Power Q 1 Operate ACT O Power Q 1 _ 6331 81 Power Q 1 Block stage SPS I _ 6331 54 Power Q 1 Inactive SPS O _ 6331 52 Power Q 1 Behavior ENS O _ 6331 53 Power Q 1 Health ENS O _ 6331 55 Power Q 1 Pickup ACD O _ 6331 56 Power Q 1 Operate delay expired ACT O _ 6331 57 Power...

Page 809: ...fective after the circuit breaker has opened Conse quently disconnecting the system opening the circuit breaker of the system shall only occur after reverse power active power consumption has been detected Structure of the Function The Reverse power protection function comes factory set with 1 stage A maximum of 2 stages can be oper ated simultaneously within the function In all function groups th...

Page 810: ... the function calcu lates the exact active power even with a high apparent power and a small cos φ A constant correction angle φcorr makes correction possible The influence of the current transformer angle error is predominant here Determine this constant correction angle when you commission the protection device in the plant and adjust it as specified in the table see Table 11 1 Power Calculation...

Page 811: ...e power calculated per cycle Angle correction influences the measured value Q1fast Positive sequence system reactive power calculated per cycle Angle correction influences the measured value P1avg Positive sequence system active power calculated from P1fast over 16 cycles Input value for Reverse power protection Q1avg Positive sequence system reactive power calculated from Q1fast over 16 cycles Ap...

Page 812: ...former features a gap that limits the rema nence to 10 However this gap results in larger angle errors The following tables show excerpts from the test reports Table 6 19 Phase A I In Sb Sbr cos β 0 8 ε i δ i min 100 0 314 46 40 Table 6 20 Phase B I In Sb Sbr cos β 0 8 ε i δ i min 100 0 247 35 10 Table 6 21 Phase C I In Sb Sbr cos β 0 8 ε i δ i min 100 0 702 41 10 Since the positive sequence syste...

Page 813: ...ngs Addr Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting General _ 2311 101 General Angle correction 10 00 to 10 00 0 00 _ 2311 102 General Minimum voltage V1 0 300 V to 60 000 V 5 000 V Information List No Information Data Class Type Type General _ 2311 300 General Undervoltage blocking SPS O _ 2311 301 General P1avg MV O _ 2311 302 General Q1avg MV O _ 2311 303 General P1fast MV O _ 2311 304 General...

Page 814: ...rief delay is enough when the quick stop valve is closed Couple the position of the quick stop valve via the binary input signal Stop valve closed When quick stop is tripped the short Operate delay thus becomes effective Blocking the Stage In the event of blocking the picked up stage will be reset Blocking of the stage is possible externally or inter nally via the binary input signal Block stage 6...

Page 815: ...ansformers on the device side Since the transformers are calibrated at the factory there are hardly any differences between the transformers for the Reverse power protection function You can thus always select device inputs with a protection current transformer In contrast a primary current transformer significantly influences the measuring accuracy via its angle error The angle error of a class 0...

Page 816: ... Stage 1 Inactive SPS O _ 991 52 Stage 1 Behavior ENS O _ 991 53 Stage 1 Health ENS O _ 991 55 Stage 1 Pickup ACD O _ 991 56 Stage 1 Operate delay expired ACT O _ 991 57 Stage 1 Operate ACT O _ 991 300 Stage 1 Operate del stop val ACT O _ 991 301 Stage 1 Operate w stop valve ACT O 6 38 4 4 Protection and Automation Functions 6 38 Reverse Power Protection 816 SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Protection Manua...

Page 817: ... phase voltage input The function comes with the following factory set stages Thermal stage adjustable with a user defined characteristic curve Definite time stage which can be delayed using a time component Within this function the following maximum number of stages can be operated simultaneously one stage with a user defined characteristic curve and 2 definite time stages The group indication ou...

Page 818: ...ured voltage and the frequency The phase to phase voltage is used to process the voltage The angle difference method see 6 32 Overfrequency Protection is used to determine the frequency Both values form the V f ratio In order to arrive at an absolute value standardized data is applied Thus the ratio is derived from foverufn 080523 01 tif 1 en_US with 6 39 3 6 39 3 1 Protection and Automation Funct...

Page 819: ... threshold value triggers an indication _ 13591 55 Pickup In addition a definite time stage may be used to generate a delayed indication output as _ 13591 301 Warning The pickup is used to start the integration process weighted counting of the thermal characteristic curve If the time as a factor of V f is reached the pickup is triggered Based on the replica of the thermal behavior the trigger valu...

Page 820: ...erived from the characteristic curve and associated with the V f value is set to 100 With each function call the time will be increased according to the respective weighted invocation interval If the 100 value is exceeded tripping is initiated If the V f value is changed the associated time from the characteristic curve is added as a new 100 value In order to prevent excessive cooling times the th...

Page 821: ...quipment The following provides the recommended settings i i NOTE It must be noted that one requirement for the correct mode of operation of the function is based on the proper setting of the power system data You can find more detailed information on this in chapter 6 1 Power System Data For additional setting recommendations verity the following parameter in the power system data Adjusted rated ...

Page 822: ...el to the V f axis V f values that are larger than the V f value of the largest characteristic curve point do not reduce the operate time From the largest characteristic curve point the pickup characteristic runs parallel to the V f axis seeCharacteristic Curve Page 819 Settings Addr Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting Definite T 1 _ 13621 1 Definite T 1 Mode off on test off _ 13621 2 Defi...

Page 823: ...te T 1 Operate ACT O Therm charact _ 13591 81 Therm charact Block stage SPS I _ 13591 501 Therm charact Reset thermal replica SPS I _ 13591 54 Therm charact Inactive SPS O _ 13591 52 Therm charact Behavior ENS O _ 13591 53 Therm charact Health ENS O _ 13591 55 Therm charact Pickup ACD O _ 13591 301 Therm charact Warning ACT O _ 13591 57 Therm charact Operate ACT O _ 13591 321 Therm charact V f th ...

Page 824: ... 3 Threshold then the stage is tripped after an adjustable time delay has elapsed You can set the time delay with the parameter _ 13621 6 Operate delay The dropout ratio for the Threshold is fixed to 98 Application and Setting Notes The definite time stage can be applied when fast tripping is required in the presence of high V f values In this case the stage acts superimposed on the thermal depend...

Page 825: ...1 00 to 1 20 1 10 _ 13591 101 Therm charact Warning delay 0 00 s to 60 00 s 10 00 s _ 13591 102 Therm charact Cooling time therm replica 0 s to 100 000 s 3600 s Information List No Information Data Class Type Type General _ 2311 322 General V f MV O Group indicat _ 4501 55 Group indicat Pickup ACD O _ 4501 57 Group indicat Operate ACT O df dt falling1 _ 13621 81 Definite T 1 Block stage SPS I _ 13...

Page 826: ... ENS O _ 13591 55 Therm charact Pickup ACD O _ 13591 301 Therm charact Warning ACT O _ 13591 57 Therm charact Operate ACT O _ 13591 321 Therm charact V f th MV O Protection and Automation Functions 6 39 Overexcitation Protection 826 SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Protection Manual C53000 G5040 C017 8 Edition 07 2017 ...

Page 827: ... Undervoltage controlled reactive power protection function can be used in protection function groups containing 3 phase voltage and current measurement Depending on the device it is preconfigured by the manufacturer with 1 Protection stage and 1 Reclosure stage A maximum of 2 Protection stages and 1 Reclosure stage can operate simultaneously within the function dwqvprot 110713 01 tif 1 en_US Figu...

Page 828: ... 245 Logic Diagram of the Protection Stage of the Undervoltage Controlled Reactive Power Protec tion 6 40 3 6 40 3 1 Protection and Automation Functions 6 40 Undervoltage Controlled Reactive Power Protection 828 SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Protection Manual C53000 G5040 C017 8 Edition 07 2017 ...

Page 829: ...suring voltage failure For further information refer to chapter 6 7 4 1 Description Blocking of the Operate Delay and Operate Signal via the Device Internal Inrush Current Detection Function The Blk w inrush curr detect parameter permits you to define whether the operate delay should be blocked by a threshod value violation due to an inrush current For further information about device internal Inr...

Page 830: ...ere fore Siemens recommends using the default setting Parameter Q threshold value Default setting _ 13921 3 Q threshold value 5 You use the Q threshold value parameter to define the second of the 2 pickup criteria If the positive reactive power exceeds the parameterized Q threshold value the pickup criterion is fulfilled In the following example the pickup takes place if Q exceeds 5 of the power s...

Page 831: ... protected object is in the same direction as the power gener ation facility reversed The protected object is not in the same direction as the power generation facility Settings Addr Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting Prot stage 1 _ 13921 1 Prot stage 1 Mode off on test off _ 13921 2 Prot stage 1 Operate flt rec blocked no yes no _ 13921 10 Prot stage 1 Blk by meas volt failure no yes yes...

Page 832: ...ive SPS O _ 13921 52 Prot stage 1 Behavior ENS O _ 13921 53 Prot stage 1 Health ENS O _ 13921 60 Prot stage 1 Inrush blocks operate ACT O _ 13921 55 Prot stage 1 Pickup ACD O _ 13921 301 Prot stage 1 Op delay expir gen ACT O _ 13921 302 Prot stage 1 Operate generator ACT O _ 13921 56 Prot stage 1 Op delay expir grid ACT O _ 13921 57 Prot stage 1 Operate grid ACT O 6 40 3 4 Protection and Automatio...

Page 833: ...surand The stage works with fundamental values of voltage and current Release for Reconnecting The release for reconnecting the power generation facility is given under the following conditions 6 40 4 6 40 4 1 Protection and Automation Functions 6 40 Undervoltage Controlled Reactive Power Protection SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Protection Manual 833 C53000 G5040 C017 8 Edition 07 2017 ...

Page 834: ...the signal Operate generator can start the release time delay of this stage The signal Operate grid cannot start the release time delay The configuration depends on the specific application Parameter I release threshold Recommended setting value _ 13951 106 I release threshold 0 100 A You use the I release threshold parameter to define a precondition that the stage can work The default setting is ...

Page 835: ...to 0 01 Hz 2 50 Hz _ 13951 106 Reclos stage I release threshold 1 A 100 Irated 0 030 A to 10 000 A 0 100 A 5 A 100 Irated 0 15 A to 50 00 A 0 50 A 1 A 50 Irated 0 030 A to 10 000 A 0 100 A 5 A 50 Irated 0 15 A to 50 00 A 0 50 A 1 A 1 6 Irated 0 001 A to 1 600 A 0 100 A 5 A 1 6 Irated 0 005 A to 8 000 A 0 500 A _ 13951 108 Reclos stage Time delay 0 00 s to 3600 00 s 0 00 s _ 13951 102 Reclos stage ...

Page 836: ...source consumption tab Structure of the Function The function Circuit breaker failure protection CBFP can be used in the Circuit breaker function group dwstrbfp 260213 01 tif 1 en_US Figure 6 247 Structure Embedding of the Function Figure 6 248 shows the functionalities and the function control of the function The start is initiated by the device internal protection function or by an external prot...

Page 837: ... breaker failure protection function can in this case only drop out if the circuit breaker is detected to be open This is detected using the current flow or circuit breaker auxil iary contact criterion If necessary the Circuit breaker failure protection function can also drop out when the pickup signal has a falling edge or the protection function trips internal starting signal is not held Using r...

Page 838: ...n the default setting the starting signal External start drops out immediately when the input signals have a falling edge see Figure 6 251 If necessary the starting signal can be held In this case the start remains active when the binary input signals have a falling edge The input signals are monitored to avoid an unwanted pickup of the function If either of the signals Start or Release is active ...

Page 839: ...e Circuit Breaker Failure Protection Function Logic Current Flow Criterion The current flow criterion is the primary criterion for determining the circuit breaker switch position A circuit breaker pole is supposed to be closed and the current flow criterion fulfilled as soon as one of the phase currents exceeds the phase current threshold value and a plausibility current exceeds the associated thr...

Page 840: ...the negative sequence current With the Threshold I2 dir release parameter you set the threshold value to be exceeded If you set the I2 criterion parameter to Direct release plausibility is checked via the phase currents with 1 3 Threshold I2 dir release The measuring algorithm is optimized for fast dropout when the value drops below the threshold value lostrom1 030211 01 tif 4 en_US Figure 6 252 C...

Page 841: ...tart time the function can only pick up on the basis of the circuit breaker auxil iary contact criterion For this purpose the circuit breaker auxiliary contacts must be permitted as criterion When the current begins to flow after the start the function switches over to the current flow criterion If the circuit breaker is detected as closed and the starting condition is present the function picks u...

Page 842: ... trip signal can be sent to the opposite end You can find detailed information in the chapter 3 5 3 Protection Interface and Protection Topology If the CB defect input signal is valid any repetition of the trip signal is suppressed and the backup tripping signal T2 is generated immediately without delay The binary input of the CB defect input signal must be activated for at least 20 ms before the ...

Page 843: ...ew of the functions involved in an external start of the CBFP function In the case of an internal start there is no external protection device and the protection functionality is located in the CBFP device 6 41 4 Protection and Automation Functions 6 41 Circuit Breaker Failure Protection SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Protection Manual 843 C53000 G5040 C017 8 Edition 07 2017 ...

Page 844: ...cation it can be necessary to exclude certain device internal protection functions from starting the CBFP For instance busbar disconnection following a local circuit breaker failure can be undesirable in the case of load shedding applications or ground faults in isolated resonant grounded systems Where a start exclusively from external sources is required all internal protection functions must be ...

Page 845: ... start and release Parameter Supervision time for release signal Default setting _ 111 Sup time for release signl 0 06 s The setting depends on the external function which generates the release signal If the pickup or tripping of the external protection is used as release signal the default setting can be kept If it is ensured that the release signal is always present before the starting signal th...

Page 846: ...or load conditions ground faults lead to relatively low fault currents a sensitive setting of the parameter Threshold sensitive must be selected according to the rule 0 5 Isc min There can also be values which are noticeably below the rated or load current Input Signal Threshold sensitive In order to ensure that the function picks up reliably in all switch positions of the power supply system exam...

Page 847: ... sensitive parameter Direct release If a phase current exceeds 1 3 of the Threshold I2 dir release the current flow criterion can be satisfied just by the negative sequence current without the phase currents exceeding their set threshold value The threshold for the negative sequence current uses the value set in the Threshold I2 dir release parameter in this case If you have set the Threshold phas...

Page 848: ...iable criterion for detection of an open CB and thus for dropout of the CBFP function w aux c and curr crit Select this setting for applications on transformers or generators see the preceding examples in which the current flow is such that the current is no longer a reliable criterion for detecting the opening of the CB Parameter Retrip Default setting _ 108 Retrip after T1 no Parameter Value Des...

Page 849: ...ty Factor 2 Total time T1 130 ms Parameter Delay T2 for 3 pole trip Default setting _ 110 Delay T2 for 3 pole trip 0 13 s This setting has to ensure that after opening of the local CB the function drops out reliably and that backup tripping is avoided under all circumstances The setting depends on the parameter Retrip after T1 If T2 is started afterT1 there is no need to consider the time T1 for t...

Page 850: ...l binary input can be excluded due to the CB design Output Signal Retrip T1 If only one control circuit is available for the local CB it is not mandatory to route the output signal because the signal also controls the CB trip logic If a 2nd Control circuit is present the Retrip T1 output signal must be routed to the associated binary output Output Signal Trip T2 In order to operate the adjacent ci...

Page 851: ...bility check _ 121 50BF Ad CBF I2 crite rion Direct release Plausibility check Plausibility check _ 122 50BF Ad CBF Threshold 3I0 dir release 1 A 100 Irated 0 030 A to 35 000 A 0 250 A 5 A 100 Irated 0 15 A to 175 00 A 1 25 A 1 A 1 6 Irated 0 001 A to 1 600 A 0 250 A 5 A 1 6 Irated 0 005 A to 8 000 A 1 250 A _ 123 50BF Ad CBF Threshold I2 dir release 1 A 100 Irated 0 030 A to 35 000 A 0 250 A 5 A ...

Page 852: ... O _ 304 50BF Ad CBF BI aux ct rout miss SPS O _ 300 50BF Ad CBF Fail BI start SPS O _ 307 50BF Ad CBF Fail no BI release SPS O _ 301 50BF Ad CBF Fail BI release SPS O _ 315 50BF Ad CBF Immediate Operate SPS O _ 316 50BF Ad CBF CB failure pole ACD O Protection and Automation Functions 6 41 Circuit Breaker Failure Protection 852 SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Protection Manual C53000 G5040 C017 8 Edition 0...

Page 853: ... into the parts shown in Figure 6 258 In the following chapter these logic parts are described in detail lo_respro 210113 01 vsd 1 en_US Figure 6 258 Logic Overview of the Function Function Description Plausibility Release The function Circuit breaker restrike protection issues a trip command to a superordinated circuit breaker usually the infeed circuit breaker of a busbar Overfunction of this pr...

Page 854: ...s set to yes the release signal is monitored The plausibility release is given if the release signal has been received If one of the conditions is fulfilled the plausibility release is given for 5 s The 5 s timer ensures that the release criterion and start condition relate to the same circuit breaker opening tripping process If all the 3 plausibility settings are set to no the start stop monitori...

Page 855: ...monitoring is terminated The monitoring is also terminated immediately if one of the following conditions is met The circuit breaker position is detected no longer as open A close command is given by the device The binary input signal Stop is activated For safety reasons the input signal has a preset software filtering time of 20 ms Measuring Value Pickup Dropout During the Monitoring duration the...

Page 856: ...ay T2 backup tripping can start in parallel either with the start of time T1 or after expiration of time T1 If time delay T2 expires circuit breaker restriking takes place and the backup tripping signal Trip T2 is generated If the CB defect input signal is valid any repetition of the trip signal is suppressed and the backup trip ping signal Trip T2 is generated immediately without delay For safety...

Page 857: ...E Opening the circuit breaker manually without using the device will not release the start of the Circuit breaker restrike protection Pickup of the Circuit breaker failure protection Use this criterion if the Circuit breaker restrike protection should only be started in case that the Circuit breaker failure protection was started picked up before i i NOTE Opening the circuit breaker by control or ...

Page 858: ...in the range of 0 5 discharging time to 1 discharging time Parameter Threshold Default setting _ 3 Threshold 0 250 A After opening of the circuit breaker the phase currents are compared with the threshold value If no restriking takes place the current is zero Consequently the threshold for detecting restriking can be set much smaller than the operating current A typical value is 25 of the operatin...

Page 859: ...d by the retrip Afterwards the Circuit breaker restrike protection function will drop out during the T2 delay time Siemens recommends applying a retrip on the local circuit breaker Since the retrip is a safety mechanism it can be given without a delay time Siemens recommends setting the delay time to 0 s Parameter Delay T2 for 3 pole trip Default setting _ 110 Delay T2 for 3 pole trip 0 15 s This ...

Page 860: ...s no _ 102 Restrike prt Plaus via open trip cmd no yes no _ 103 Restrike prt Plaus via binary input no yes no _ 106 Restrike prt Retrip after T1 no start T2 after T1 parallel start T2 T1 start T2 after T1 _ 104 Restrike prt Monitoring duration 1 00 s to 600 00 s 200 00 s _ 105 Restrike prt Position recognition delay 0 00 s to 60 00 s 0 02 s _ 3 Restrike prt Threshold 1 A 100 Irated 0 030 A to 35 0...

Page 861: ...rike prt Inactive SPS O _ 52 Restrike prt Behavior ENS O _ 53 Restrike prt Health ENS O _ 304 Restrike prt Release by plausibility SPS O _ 303 Restrike prt Monitoring running SPS O _ 55 Restrike prt Pickup ACD O _ 301 Restrike prt Retrip T1 ACT O _ 302 Restrike prt Trip T2 ACT O 6 42 6 Protection and Automation Functions 6 42 Circuit Breaker Restrike Protection SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Protection Ma...

Page 862: ...mperage side with auto transformers and thereby prevents overfunction in the event of external ground faults Structure of the Function The Restricted ground fault protection function is used in the Transformer side or Auto transformer protection function group Furthermore you can use the function in the stabilizing winding of the auto trans former or also in the Standard UI function The function d...

Page 863: ...ding current transformer The amount adapted compensated currents are described by the symbol They are normalized to the rated object current of the respective side In case of an internal ground fault the residual currents flow to the fault location With an external ground fault the fault current inverts itself in the phase current transformers In this way the direction of current flow serves as th...

Page 864: ...ith km IN transformer IN side IDiff REF I0 I0 IRest REF I0 IA IB IC where 3I0 Measured zero sequence current at neutral point 3I0 Zero sequence current calculated from the phase currents km Factor for magnitude adaptation Irated transformer Primary transformer rated current Irated side Primary rated current of the transformer side IDiff REF Differential current IRest REF Restraint current Using th...

Page 865: ...used dwautraf 201112 01 tif 1 en_US Figure 6 267 Connecting a Ground Side on the Auto Transformer In this case the neutral point current calculates as sum of the phase currents of the ground side I0 km 3I0 3I0 Ignd A Ignd B Ignd C with km IN transformer IN side Protection and Automation Functions 6 43 Restricted Ground Fault Protection SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Protection Manual 865 C53000 G5040 C017...

Page 866: ...is compared to the set or increased threshold value dwausken 170712 01 tif 1 en_US Figure 6 268 Operate Curve Depending on the Phase Angle between l0 and I0 at I0 I0 180 External Fault In case of an external ground fault the zero sequence current calculated from the phase currents reverses by 180 The phase angle between the residual currents thus I0 I0 equals 180 They are located in the left part ...

Page 867: ...ring points are present on one side of a star winding as with a 1 1 2 circuit breaker layout the angle decision occurs separately for each measuring point The maximum current IAngle REF is used to establish the tripping decision i i NOTE With an external fault the current IAngle REF is always 0 The following figure shows the behavior under different fault conditions Also observe that the restraint...

Page 868: ...eshold values Threshold value max 0 05 I Irated S 0 05 I Irated S Iprim transf max Irated protected object Threshold value min 2 00 I Irated S 100 00 I Irated S Iprim transf max Irated protected object The value 0 05 I Irated S is the minimum possible setting value and 2 00 I Irated S the maximum possible Iprim transf max is the largest transformer current and Irated protected object the protected...

Page 869: ...rrent is guided via the Transformer neutral point function group to the Transformer side function group To be compatible with SIPROTEC 4 including reference arrow definition of the restricted ground fault protection in addition to the magnitude scaling of the neutral point current a rotation of the polarity phase rotation by 180 is also done in the Transformer neutral point function group i i NOTE...

Page 870: ...ite2 070211 01 tif 2 en_US Figure 6 273 Current Transformer Connection 1 According to Definition or tileite4 260313 01 tif 2 en_US Figure 6 274 Current Transformer Connection 2 According to Definition The following connection is defined for the transformer according to Figure 6 275 The current flow for an external ground fault is entered at the same time It is recognized that the secondary current...

Page 871: ...ion is done as follows scedsall 200214 01 1 en_US Figure 6 276 DIGSI 5 Setting The point in Figure 6 275 describes the polarity of the current transformer At the same time the current terminal is designed so that this side is fed out on an odd number terminal point Since in the SIPROTEC 5 system each current transformer can be assigned a 1 phase measuring point the odd number terminal points are n...

Page 872: ...al point has sensitivity problems due to the sinking current On the other hand the neutral point current IF2 is sufficiently large There is therefore no need to set the Threshold current through the neutral point transformer to sensitive dwf1pole 170712 01 tif 1 en_US Figure 6 277 Principal Fault Current Curves with a 1 Pole Ground Fault Recommended setting value _ 103 Threshold 0 2 I Irated S The...

Page 873: ... 1 en_US dwsteiga 221012 01 tif 2 en_US Figure 6 278 Derivation of the Setting Value for the Gradient If you have several measuring points on an outgoing side see Figure 6 270 Siemens recommends using the value 3 I Irated S in the intersection calculation for the restraint current In the load case the maximum trans former rated current flows on one side If however several measuring points are on t...

Page 874: ...oint is M2 230 kV side For this side a rated current of 500 MVA 3 230 kV 1255 A results The primary transformer rated current is 1500 A With this you can estimate the minimum permissible pickup value foscwe01 170712 01 tif 1 en_US Siemens recommends a setting value of 0 2 I Irated S Recommended setting value _ 103 Threshold 0 2 I Irated S Protection and Automation Functions 6 43 Restricted Ground ...

Page 875: ...07 Recommended setting value _ 105 Slope 0 07 Protection of a Resistance Grounded Star Winding Y Side dwrefspa 170712 01 tif 1 en_US Figure 6 280 Application with Resistance Grounded Neutral Point To also capture faults in the resistance to ground a current transformer must be installed at the neutral point of the protected object see Figure 6 280 The pickup values can be derived from the data in ...

Page 876: ...You must coordinate its operate time with the line protection i i NOTE Ensure that the protection range further limits itself with larger neutral point resistances or the restricted ground fault protection can no longer be used Protection with Neutral Reactors on the Delta Side To produce ground currents on the delta side of a transformer neutral reactors zigzag reactors are used A resistance for ...

Page 877: ...rated S2 2 3 34 5 kV 2 3 9 96 kV The following minimum ground current results IGnd min VGnd min RGnd 9 96 kV 19 05 Ω 523 A With reference to the side rated current the relationship is IGnd min Irated S 523 A 2343 A 0 223 With a safety margin of 2 0 223 2 0 1115 results Select this value as threshold value rounded 0 12 I Irated S Recommended setting value _ 103 Threshold 0 12 I Irated S As gradient...

Page 878: ...rated S as threshold value Recommended setting value _ 103 Threshold 0 35 I Irated S For the shunt reactor there is no external fault that can lead to overfunction Siemens recommends a minimum rise 0 05 Recommended setting value _ 105 Slope 0 05 Settings Addr Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting 87N REF _ 1 87N REF Mode off on test off _ 2 87N REF Operate flt rec blocked no yes no 6 43 5 Pr...

Page 879: ...tion SPS I _ 54 87N REF Inactive SPS O _ 52 87N REF Behavior ENS O _ 53 87N REF Health ENS O _ 55 87N REF Pickup ACD O _ 57 87N REF Operate ACT O _ 303 87N REF Operate delay expired ACT O _ 305 87N REF Block by direct det SPS O _ 306 87N REF I REF operate MV O _ 307 87N REF I Angle REF MV O _ 311 87N REF I REF Trip operate MV O _ 312 87N REF I angle REF operate MV O _ 301 87N REF I diff MV O _ 302...

Page 880: ... breaker in conjunction with busbar protection applications Enables direct tripping of the circuit breaker in the case of circuit breaker failure at the other line end Structure of the Function The External trip initiation function contains one stage You can instantiate the External trip initiation func tion in DIGSI 5 multiple times dwstrext 030211 01 tif 1 en_US Figure 6 283 Structure Embedding ...

Page 881: ...ate indication remains stopped for the minimum operating time _ 102 Minimum operate time Application and Setting Notes Parameter Operate delay Recommended setting value _ 901 6 Operate delay 0 05 s The Operate delay parameter must be set for the specific application After expiry of the Operate delay the time out and tripping are signaled The duration of the initiation signal as well as the adjusta...

Page 882: ... Type Stage 1 _ 901 82 Stage 1 Block function SPS I _ 901 501 Stage 1 External trip SPS I _ 901 54 Stage 1 Inactive SPS O _ 901 52 Stage 1 Behavior ENS O _ 901 53 Stage 1 Health ENS O _ 901 55 Stage 1 Pickup ACD O _ 901 56 Stage 1 Operate delay expired ACT O _ 901 57 Stage 1 Operate ACT O 6 44 5 6 44 6 Protection and Automation Functions 6 44 External Trip Initiation 3 Pole 882 SIPROTEC 5 Overcurr...

Page 883: ...f 1 en_US Figure 6 285 Process Diagram of a Two Time Reclosing With Action Time 2nd Reclosing Successful The integrated Automatic reclosing function allows for up to 8 reclosing attempts Each of the 8 disruption cycles can work with different parameters Structure of the Function The automatic reclosing function is used in function groups for circuit breakers In a function group for circuit breaker...

Page 884: ...e from the opposite end has been placed back under voltage dwaweasp 100611 01 tif 1 en_US Figure 6 288 Structure Embedding of the Automatic Reclosing Function With Adaptive Dead Time ADT Operation with External Automatic Reclosing Function The cooperation of an external reclosing device with the SIPROTEC protection device occurs through the func tion mode Operation with external automatic reclosin...

Page 885: ...ion stages can be configured so that their operate indication blocks the AREC If such a blocking exists the AREC cannot be started If the AREC is already started the blocking will lead to the cancellation of the AREC The automatic reclosing device can thus have an influence on the effects of the protection functions The following influence possibilities exist The AREC provides signals that can be ...

Page 886: ...n internal protection functions and automatic reclosing functions can be set separately for each protection function see Figure 6 291 The configuration occurs in a matrix view in DIGSI see the following figure Protection and Automation Functions 6 45 Automatic Reclosing Function 886 SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Protection Manual C53000 G5040 C017 8 Edition 07 2017 ...

Page 887: ...be connected to the internal Automatic reclosing function Cyclic Automatic Reclosing Function Operating Modes for Cyclic Automatic Reclosing Function For the cyclic automatic reclosing function there are 4 operating modes from which one can be selected for the parameterization parameter _ 6601 101 79 operating mode The selection of the operating mode is dependent on the tripping behavior of the pr...

Page 888: ...1 en_US Figure 6 293 Operating Mode Signal Examples With Tripping With Action Time Through the action time there is a direct influence on the dead time behavior of the automatic reclosing func tion With faults with short operate times other dead times can be realized than for removed faults with longer tripping time With faults with short operate time an automatic reclosing is executed with remove...

Page 889: ...m time Since cycle 2 is already complete these and all lower cycles are no longer able to expire The trip command comes during the current action time of cycle 3 Thus cycle 3 is active with the dead time setting for 3 phase faults dwarcbm2 190912 01 tif 1 en_US Figure 6 294 Operating Mode Signal Examples With Pickup With Action Time Operating Mode 3 with op w o act time With the operating mode wit...

Page 890: ...d the most important signals between the individual function blocks The automatic reclosing function works as a state machine From the idle state AREC ready the automatic reclosing function gets through the tripping or pickup indications of the protection functions to the Dead time state After expiration of the dead time the subsequent state is reached with the closing indication The reclaim time ...

Page 891: ...ls For operating modes with action time the start of the action time s occurs with the pickup messages During all operating modes the pickup indications are also required during the processing of faults and for supervision during the reclaim time 6 45 4 3 Protection and Automation Functions 6 45 Automatic Reclosing Function SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Protection Manual 891 C53000 G5040 C017 8 Edition 0...

Page 892: ...nd Pickup C for start Optionally the pickup information can be externally captured as a pickup sample thus as a 1 phase 2 phase and 3 phase pickup The outputs of the input logic signalize if the automatic reclosing start occurs through a 1 phase 2 phase or 3 phase pickup On Start with 3 phase pickup it is recognized if all 3 phases were picked up in the period from the first raising pickup indicat...

Page 893: ... time see Figure 6 300 The length of the starting signals is controlled with a supervision time Start Signal Supervision Time The start signal supervision stops the automatic reclosing if the short circuit is not switched off within the normal time for example in the case of a circuit breaker failure With the first raising operate indication the start signal supervision time is initiated parameter...

Page 894: ... Dead time start delay As long the corresponding binary signal is present the dead time of the automatic reclosing function will not be started The maximum duration of this binary signal is monitored through a time stage that can be set parameter Max dead time delay Upon expiration of this time stage that is if the binary signal is present longer than permitted the automatic reclosing function wil...

Page 895: ... through the parameter Start from idle state allow and not blocked During one of the started action times the corresponding reclosing cycle is blocked and the reclosing cycle is assigned the next highest cycle number whose action time is running and is not blocked With raising trip commands the action times are stopped and reset The process state of the action times existing at this moment determi...

Page 896: ...tion of the dead time and through a binary input In this way setting the parameter Dead time aft 1ph pickup to invalid avoids an automatic reclosing after 3 pole tripping due to 1 phase short circuits This also applies to Dead time aft 2ph pickup and Dead time aft 3ph pickup If all 3 dead times are set to invalid the respective reclosing cycle will be completely blocked With the binary input Block...

Page 897: ...ocked With raising trip commands the action times are stopped and reset The process state of the action times existing at this moment determines the automatic reclosing cycle that should be started If all initiated action times expire without capturing a tripping the automatic reclosing function does not take place However if a tripping function is initiated after expiry of the action time the aut...

Page 898: ...ll other configured automatic reclosing cycles The cycle availability is influenced through the parameterization of the dead time and through a binary input In this way setting the parameter Dead time aft 3 pole trip to invalid avoids an automatic reclosing after 3 pole tripping Correspondingly there is no automatic reclosing function after 1 pole tripping if the Dead time aft 1 pole trip 31 to in...

Page 899: ...ipping loauowrk 210311 01 tif 1 en_US Figure 6 303 Cycle Control with Operating Mode With Tripping Without Action Time Cycle Control with Operating Mode 4 With Pickup Without Action Time The cycle control checks the availability for each automatic reclosing cycle In Figure 6 304 the cycle control for the 1st automatic reclosing cycle and other reclosing cycles is illustrated The further automatic ...

Page 900: ... asso ciated automatic reclosing cycle loanowrk 100611 01 tif 1 en_US Figure 6 304 Cycle Control with Operating Mode With Pickup Without Action Time Stage Release The function block Stage release creates output indications for the release or switching over of special stages for protection functions stage release in the 1st cycle or stage release in the n cycle Examples for this are the release of ...

Page 901: ...dentical to the condition for the 1st automatic reclosing cycle If the reduced dead time RDT mode is selected and no additional reduced dead time occurs the release of the 2nd cycle will be maintained since it can be assumed that the opposite end is open lo2awezk 170912 01 tif 1 en_US Figure 6 306 Stage Release for Protection Functions Starting With the 2nd Automatic Reclosing Cycle Dead Time for ...

Page 902: ...Tripping Dead Time for Operating Modes with Pickup In the dead time function block the dead time corresponding to the type of short circuit that led to the trip command is started The automatic reclosing operating modes with pickup are only ideal for applications with 3 pole tripping After expiration of the dead time the automatic reclosing function changes to the status Switch on Figure 6 308 sho...

Page 903: ...inished lopauare 010611 01 tif 1 en_US Figure 6 308 Cyclic Automatic Reclosing Function Logic of the Dead Time for the Operating Modes With Pickup Evolving Fault Detection During Dead Time Evolving faults are short circuits which occur after switching off a short circuit during dead time This may be the case during 1 pole tripping and there is a short circuit in the non switched conductors after t...

Page 904: ... in 2 ways Parameter Response to evolv faults blocks 79 As soon as an evolving fault is recognized the reclosing function will be blocked There are no other reclosing attempts and the automatic reclosing function is blocked until the pickup and operate indica tions causing the evolving fault disappear Parameter Response to evolv faults strt evol flt dead time As soon as an evolving fault is recogn...

Page 905: ...hrough the binary input Through a binary input for delaying the close command Delay close cmd The Close cmd indication is a requirement for the assignment of the actual close command to the circuit breaker The mentioned criteria must not be fulfilled directly after expiration of the dead time If a dead time prolonga tion is set the mentioned criteria will be checked during the prolongation With th...

Page 906: ...aker readiness should occur directly before closing parameters CB ready check bef close Figure 6 312 Independent of this a test of the circuit breaker readiness before the start of the 1st automatic reclosing cycle can be set see Chapter 6 45 4 5 Start and chapter 6 45 4 16 Circuit Breaker Readiness Protection and Automation Functions 6 45 Automatic Reclosing Function 906 SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Pr...

Page 907: ...owance for the closure If the allowance is not given within the set maximum dead time extension the closure will be cancelled through the blocking of the automatic reclosing function The minimum duration of the measuring request is 50 ms losyncro 130511 01 tif 1 en_US Figure 6 313 Cyclic Reclosing Function Logic for the Inquiry of the Synchronism Close Command As soon as the test of the circuit br...

Page 908: ...er tripping occurred the currently running automatic reclosing cycle was not successful If other automatic reclosing cycles are permitted one of these cycles will be used to continue the process If in contrast the currently executed cycle was the last permissible cycle the auto matic reclosing process will end and be reported as unsuccessful In both cases the automatic reclosing function switches ...

Page 909: ...king of the automatic reclosing function This monitoring is optional and must be switched off through settings if the readiness signal is not available for the protection device Analysis of the circuit breaker readiness directly before the close command For each of the configured automatic reclosing cycles it can be set whether the circuit breaker readiness is a requirement for the assignment of t...

Page 910: ...static blocking Condition Indication Manual closing of the circuit breaker recognition through binary input or internal device control The blocking is temporary the duration can be set with the parameter Block time aft man close Inactive Circuit breaker not available for automatic reclosing function recognition through binary input This cause can be switched on or off through the parameter CB read...

Page 911: ...osing function start is available A separate indication for logging exists for each individual blocking cause The following conditions lead to the dynamic blocking Condition Indication If no reclosing cycle fitting the fault type is released With operating modes with tripping If a 1 pole or 3 pole operate indication occurs during the automatic reclosing function start input however the auto matic ...

Page 912: ...s Blk 1 pole AR Blk 3 pole AR Blk with 1 ph pickup Blk with 2 ph pickup Blk with 3 ph pickup Not ready Block by binary input If the maximum number of automatic reclosing attempts is reached and there is a trip command within the reclaim time Not ready Block by max cycles With operating modes with action time If the action times of all released automatic reclosing cycles expire without a trip comma...

Page 913: ... are only possible for applica tions with a voltage transformer connection Another requirement is that the voltage of the line being switched on can be correctly measured with an open circuit breaker This is only possible if the voltage trans former is aligned on the line side seen from the circuit breaker 6 45 4 18 Protection and Automation Functions 6 45 Automatic Reclosing Function SIPROTEC 5 O...

Page 914: ...d for the set duration Voltage supervision time Dead Line Check DLC If after switching off a short circuit the voltage on the switched off line does not disappear the automatic reclosing function can be avoided with the dead line check DLC The voltage measurement occurs with the 3 phase to ground voltages For the release of the close command with DLC the following conditions apply The automatic re...

Page 915: ...tions Default Setting General _ 6601 1 General Mode off on test on _ 6601 101 General 79 operating mode with op w o act time with op with act time w pickup w o act time w pickup w action time with op with act time 6 45 4 19 Protection and Automation Functions 6 45 Automatic Reclosing Function SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Protection Manual 915 C53000 G5040 C017 8 Edition 07 2017 ...

Page 916: ...uc d t without Reduced dead t RDT Dead line check DLC without _ 6601 114 General Voltage supervi sion time 0 10 s to 30 00 s 0 10 s _ 6601 115 General Volt thres f live line bus 0 300 V to 340 000 V 48 000 V _ 6601 116 General Volt thres f dead line bus 0 300 V to 340 000 V 30 000 V Cycle 1 _ 6571 102 Cycle 1 Start from idle state allow no yes yes _ 6571 103 Cycle 1 Action time 0 00 s to 300 00 s ...

Page 917: ... 6601 511 General Pickup 2ph for start SPS I _ 6601 512 General Pickup 3ph for start SPS I _ 6601 513 General Gen pickup for start SPS I _ 6601 514 General General trip for start SPS I _ 6601 515 General Trip pole A for start SPS I _ 6601 516 General Trip pole B for start SPS I _ 6601 517 General Trip pole C for start SPS I _ 6601 518 General Trip 1 pole for start SPS I _ 6601 519 General Trip 3 p...

Page 918: ...nput SPS O _ 6601 328 General Blk by CB ready sup SPS O _ 6601 329 General Blk by strtsig superv SPS O _ 6601 330 General Blk by action time exp SPS O _ 6601 331 General Blk by max d t expiry SPS O _ 6601 332 General Blk by max d t delay SPS O _ 6601 333 General Blk by evolving fault SPS O _ 6601 337 General Block by no cycle SPS O _ 6601 338 General Block by protection SPS O _ 6601 334 General Bl...

Page 919: ... line A B from the busbar A will be set under voltage through the position I Device II recognizes this voltage and switches on to warrant adequate voltage measurement time after a short delay The system incident is thus successfully cleared If the short circuit is not cleared after closure at position I I will be switched to the fault again At line end II now no healthy voltage will appear The dev...

Page 920: ... sion time 0 10 s to 30 00 s 0 10 s _ 6601 115 General Volt thres f live line bus 0 300 V to 340 000 V 48 000 V ADT _ 6631 101 ADT 1 pole trip allowed no yes no _ 6631 104 ADT Action time 0 00 s to 300 00 s 0 20 s _ 6631 105 ADT Maximum dead time 0 50 s to 3000 00 s 5 00 s _ 6631 102 ADT CB ready check bef close no yes no _ 6631 103 ADT Synchroch aft 3 pole d t none internal external none _ 6631 1...

Page 921: ...l 79 state ENS O _ 6601 302 General Actual reclose cycle INS O _ 6601 303 General Not ready SPS O _ 6601 304 General 79 successful SPS O _ 6601 305 General CB ready superv expir SPS O _ 6601 306 General CB is not ready SPS O _ 6601 307 General 79 permits 1 pole trip SPS O _ 6601 308 General AR only after 1p trip SPS O _ 6601 309 General In progress SPS O _ 6601 310 General Reclaim time running SPS...

Page 922: ...ng SPS O _ 6631 302 ADT Stage release prot SPS O _ 6631 303 ADT Synchrocheck request SPS O Cooperation with External Automatic Reclosing Function Description The operation of an external reclosing device with the SIPROTEC protection device occurs through the function mode Operation with external automatic reclosing function In this function mode the SIPROTEC protec tion functions create the trip c...

Page 923: ...the 1st reclosing cycle For applications with 1 pole tripping the external reclosing can provide the signal 1 pole trip permitted based on which the protection functions can switch off the 1 pole circuit breaker For applications with reclosing functions only with 1 pole faults and stage or zone releases through the reclosing function can the signal 1 pole AR only be connected The protection functi...

Page 924: ...puts through which the external protection devices can be connected to the internal Automatic reclosing function Configure the starting and blocking condition for the automatic reclosing function at the position shown in Figure 6 320 in DIGSI for example a protection function group Line is shown here or route the corre sponding binary inputs scdigsia 080311 01 tif 1 en_US Figure 6 320 Configuratio...

Page 925: ...r protection stages that are configured through the automatic reclosing function start matrix The automatic reclosing function start must be configured so that it only occurs from the protection stages zones for which an automatic reclosing should occur after tripping Detailed information can be found in the chapter 6 45 4 1 Operating Modes for Cyclic Automatic Reclosing Function section Operating...

Page 926: ... there is no possibility for circuit breaker supervision with multiple automatic reclosing for example due to missing auxiliary contacts or lacking circuit breaker ready information In this case the reclaim time must be longer than the recovery time of the circuit breaker Parameter Block time aft man close Default setting _ 6601 104 Block time aft man close 1 00 s With the Block time aft man close...

Page 927: ...d time Thus it does not matter if the tripping protection function is configured for the start of the automatic reclosing function or not The pickup of a protection function without an operate indication does not lead to evolving fault detection with pickup Evolving faults are detected if during the dead time a protection function configured for the automatic reclosing function start is picked up ...

Page 928: ...r the following conditions Waiting for the readiness of the circuit breaker Inquiry of a synchronous test Delay through binary input in order e g to give the leading automatic reclosing function priority in a system with 1 1 2 circuit breaker layout Remember that longer dead times after 3 pole disconnection are only permissible if no stability problems occur or if a synchronous test occurs before ...

Page 929: ... the chapter 6 45 4 18 Dead Line Checking DLC and Reduced Dead Time RDT i i NOTE Use RDT or DLC only if the voltages of the line can be correctly measured with an open circuit breaker This is only possible if the voltage transformer is aligned on the line side seen from the circuit breaker Parameter Volt thres f dead line bus This parameter is only important if you use the Dead line check subfunct...

Page 930: ...determine within which time frame the trip command must appear in order to start the automatic reclosing function If the trip command occurs only after the action time has expired automatic reclosing does not occur within the active automatic reclosing cycle You can find detailed information about the functionality in Chapters 6 45 4 6 Cycle Control with Operating Mode 1 With Tripping With Action ...

Page 931: ...With the parameter Dead time aft evolv fault you can determine after which dead time the auto matic reclosing function should be executed if based on an evolving fault during the current dead time a 3 pole trip has occurred For this 3 pole dead time stability concerns for the system are also important Often this dead time as well as the parameter _ 6571 108 Dead time aft 3 pole trip can be set Det...

Page 932: ...it breaker For the synchrocheck a synchrocheck stage of the internal synchronization function is used which is contained in the same function group as the circuit breaker and the automatic reclosing function The selection of the synchro check stage that is used in the automatic reclosing cycle occurs through the following described parameter Internal synchrocheck external In the configured automat...

Page 933: ...r for dropout of the short circuit protection The following functions can start the fault locator Overcurrent protection phases or ground Directional overcurrent protection phases or ground Instantaneous high current tripping i i NOTE The Fault locator function does not work with all possible current and voltage transformer connection types An error message is displayed in DIGSI 5 if the Fault loc...

Page 934: ...es Fault distance d of the line proportional to the reactance in kilometers or miles converted on the basis of the parameterized reactance per unit length of the line Fault distance d as a percentage of the line length calculated on the basis of the parameterized reac tance per unit length and the parameterized line length Selected fault loop for calculation of the fault location i i NOTE Specific...

Page 935: ...e The load compensation acts in 1 phase short circuits In doing so both the positive sequence and zero sequence system of the balanced components are analyzed for the correction You can activate and deactivate the load compensation via the Load compensation parameter dwfailur 190912 01 tif 1 en_US Figure 6 322 Fault Currents and Voltages in a Line Fed on Both Sides M Measuring point S1 S2 Source v...

Page 936: ...or with unfavorable grounding conditions of the towers if high transition resistances can occur in the event of 1 pole short circuits Parameter Value Description no The load compensation is deactivated with this setting yes The load compensation becomes effective with this setting Parameter X per length unit Default setting _ 113 X per length unit 0 210 Ω km With the X per length unit parameter yo...

Page 937: ...nce of the line R1 Positive sequence system resistance of the line X1 Positive sequence system reactance of the line This data can either be used for the entire line or as length related values since the quotients are length inde pendent You can calculate the data both from the primary values and from the secondary values EXAMPLE 110 kV overhead line 150 mm2 with the data R1 s 0 19 Ω km positive s...

Page 938: ... 180912 01 tif 1 en_US where Z 0 complex zero sequence impedance Z 1 complex positive sequence impedance This data can either be used for the entire line or as length related values since the quotients are length inde pendent The data can be calculated both from the primary values and from the secondary values For overhead lines you can use the values for the calculation because the angles of the ...

Page 939: ...ickup with going pickup _ 103 Fault locator Load compen sation no yes no _ 113 Fault locator X per length unit 1 A 0 0001 Ω km to 9 5000 Ω km Ω km 5 A 0 0000 Ω km to 1 9000 Ω km 0 0000 Ω km _ 114 Fault locator Line length 0 10 km to 1000 00 km 60 00 km _ 108 Fault locator Line angle 10 00 to 89 00 85 00 _ 104 Fault locator Kr 0 33 to 11 00 1 00 _ 105 Fault locator Kx 0 33 to 11 00 1 00 _ 118 Fault...

Page 940: ...eactance sec MV O _ 304 Fault locator Fault distance MV O _ 305 Fault locator Fault distance in MV O _ 306 Fault locator Fault loop ENS O _ 307 Fault locator FLO invalid ENS O Protection and Automation Functions 6 46 Fault Locator 940 SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Protection Manual C53000 G5040 C017 8 Edition 07 2017 ...

Page 941: ...its measured temperature values via the RTD unit Ether or RTD unit serial functions from the Analog units function group Structure of the Function The Temperature supervision function can work in all protection function groups A maximum of 48 tempera ture supervision locations can operate simultaneously in the Temperature supervision function function Each temperature supervision location has 2 th...

Page 942: ...ckup indication independent of one another and after a set tripping time delay an operate indication The indications from the supervision locations remain available for further processing i i NOTE The pickup of the stages does not result in fault logging The operate indications of the stages do not go into the trip logic of the device Application and Setting Notes If you use an external RTD unit c...

Page 943: ...blish the time the operate indication of the 1st tripping stage should be delayed after the pickup This time delay depends on the specific application If you set the time delay to the operate indication is blocked Parameter Threshold stage 2 Default setting _ 11101 42 Threshold stage 2 120 C With the Threshold stage 2 parameter you establish the temperature value whose exceedance causes a pickup o...

Page 944: ... 11102 42 Point 2 Threshold stage 2 50 C to 250 C 120 C _ 11102 43 Point 2 Operate delay of stage 2 0 s to 60 s 0 s _ 11102 44 Point 2 Sensor Setting options depend on config uration Point 3 _ 11103 46 Point 3 Sensor location Oil Ambient Turn Bearing Other Other _ 11103 1 Point 3 Mode off on test off _ 11103 40 Point 3 Threshold stage 1 50 C to 250 C 100 C _ 11103 41 Point 3 Operate delay of stage...

Page 945: ... 11105 42 Point 5 Threshold stage 2 50 C to 250 C 120 C _ 11105 43 Point 5 Operate delay of stage 2 0 s to 60 s 0 s _ 11105 44 Point 5 Sensor Setting options depend on config uration Point 6 _ 11106 46 Point 6 Sensor location Oil Ambient Turn Bearing Other Other _ 11106 1 Point 6 Mode off on test off _ 11106 40 Point 6 Threshold stage 1 50 C to 250 C 100 C _ 11106 41 Point 6 Operate delay of stage...

Page 946: ...11108 42 Point 8 Threshold stage 2 50 C to 250 C 120 C _ 11108 43 Point 8 Operate delay of stage 2 0 s to 60 s 0 s _ 11108 44 Point 8 Sensor Setting options depend on config uration Point 9 _ 11109 46 Point 9 Sensor location Oil Ambient Turn Bearing Other Other _ 11109 1 Point 9 Mode off on test off _ 11109 40 Point 9 Threshold stage 1 50 C to 250 C 100 C _ 11109 41 Point 9 Operate delay of stage ...

Page 947: ...erate delay of stage 1 0 s to 60 s 5 s _ 11111 42 Point 11 Threshold stage 2 50 C to 250 C 120 C _ 11111 43 Point 11 Operate delay of stage 2 0 s to 60 s 0 s _ 11111 44 Point 11 Sensor Setting options depend on config uration Point 12 _ 11112 46 Point 12 Sensor location Oil Ambient Turn Bearing Other Other _ 11112 1 Point 12 Mode off on test off _ 11112 40 Point 12 Threshold stage 1 50 C to 250 C ...

Page 948: ...1103 52 Point 3 Behavior ENS O _ 11103 53 Point 3 Health ENS O _ 11103 61 Point 3 Pickup stage 1 SPS O _ 11103 62 Point 3 Operate stage 1 SPS O _ 11103 63 Point 3 Pickup stage 2 SPS O _ 11103 64 Point 3 Operate stage 2 SPS O Point 4 _ 11104 81 Point 4 Block stage SPS I _ 11104 54 Point 4 Inactive SPS O _ 11104 52 Point 4 Behavior ENS O _ 11104 53 Point 4 Health ENS O _ 11104 61 Point 4 Pickup stag...

Page 949: ...oint 8 Behavior ENS O _ 11108 53 Point 8 Health ENS O _ 11108 61 Point 8 Pickup stage 1 SPS O _ 11108 62 Point 8 Operate stage 1 SPS O _ 11108 63 Point 8 Pickup stage 2 SPS O _ 11108 64 Point 8 Operate stage 2 SPS O Point 9 _ 11109 81 Point 9 Block stage SPS I _ 11109 54 Point 9 Inactive SPS O _ 11109 52 Point 9 Behavior ENS O _ 11109 53 Point 9 Health ENS O _ 11109 61 Point 9 Pickup stage 1 SPS O...

Page 950: ...S O _ 11111 64 Point 11 Operate stage 2 SPS O Point 12 _ 11112 81 Point 12 Block stage SPS I _ 11112 54 Point 12 Inactive SPS O _ 11112 52 Point 12 Behavior ENS O _ 11112 53 Point 12 Health ENS O _ 11112 61 Point 12 Pickup stage 1 SPS O _ 11112 62 Point 12 Operate stage 1 SPS O _ 11112 63 Point 12 Pickup stage 2 SPS O _ 11112 64 Point 12 Operate stage 2 SPS O Protection and Automation Functions 6 ...

Page 951: ...nly the activated measuring points are switched over The other measuring points remain unaffected Structure of the Function The Phase sequence switchover function is integrated in the Power system data You will find the signals in the DIGSI 5 project tree under Name of the device Settings There you will find the parameter for setting the phase sequence and the binary inputs via which you can influ...

Page 952: ...se sequence ABC and the phase sequence ACB is initi ated via the binary input Phs rotation reversal This switches over the phase sequence simultane ously at all 3 phase measuring points The following image shows a logic diagram for determining the current phase assignment and switchover The indications shown on the right show the present phase sequence If the phase sequence is set via the Phase se...

Page 953: ...ion Which phases and measuring points are changed over depends on the conditions in the system dwphrapp 240211 01 tif 1 en_US Figure 6 328 Application Example for Phase Rotation Reversal in a Pump Station The example shows 2 differential protection devices IED1 and IED2 and an impedance protection IED3 with the connected measuring points The phase sequence is insignificant for the differential pro...

Page 954: ...d correctly The following logic diagram shows the principle for determining the present phase assignment and measured variables with the example of currents The switchover of the phase sequence is only authorized for a time at which no measured values are pending at the selected measuring points The switchover command must be present for at least 200 ms The change of phase sequence is only impleme...

Page 955: ...s used to activate the setting of the parameter Inverted phases In doing so the phase sequence of the selected measuring point is changed Changing of the phase sequence via the binary input is only possible if no measurand 5 of the rated variables is present at the respective 3 phase measuring point Settings Addr Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting General _ 101 General Phase sequence ABC ...

Page 956: ...e sequence ACB SPS O _ 321 General Freq out of oper range SPS O _ 322 General f sys MV O _ 323 General f track MV O General _ 315 VT 3 phase Phases AB inverted SPS O _ 316 VT 3 phase Phases BC inverted SPS O _ 317 VT 3 phase Phases AC inverted SPS O 6 48 6 Protection and Automation Functions 6 48 Phase Sequence Switchover 956 SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Protection Manual C53000 G5040 C017 8 Edition 07 ...

Page 957: ...or each sampled value The rectified average is then determined for a system cycle from this differential signal Δi t The rectified average for sinusoidal measurands is then converted to a RMS value ΔI by subsequent multiplication by 1 11 The resultant measurand ΔI is then compared with the threshold value If the parameter _ 101 Threshold is exceeded the output indication Jump is generated If you h...

Page 958: ...ng stage evaluates the line currents IL1 IL2 and IL3 phase selectively to detect a jump zero sequence current The tripping stage evaluates the residual current IN 3I0 to detect a jump Parameter Threshold Default setting _ 101 Threshold 0 10 A for Irated 1A or 0 50 A for Irated 5 A With the parameter Threshold you set the threshold value for the measurand which when exceeded generates the output in...

Page 959: ... 6 Irated 0 005 A to 8 000 A 0 500 A _ 101 I jump det Threshold 1 A 100 Irated 0 030 A to 35 000 A 0 100 A 5 A 100 Irated 0 15 A to 175 00 A 0 50 A 1 A 50 Irated 0 030 A to 35 000 A 0 100 A 5 A 50 Irated 0 15 A to 175 00 A 0 50 A 1 A 1 6 Irated 0 001 A to 1 600 A 0 100 A 5 A 1 6 Irated 0 005 A to 8 000 A 0 500 A _ 102 I jump det Minimum pulse length 0 01 s to 60 00 s 0 10 s Information List No Inf...

Page 960: ...al measurands is then converted to a RMS value ΔV by subsequent multiplication by 1 11 The resultant measurand ΔV is then compared with the threshold value If the parameter _ 101 Threshold is exceeded the output indication Jump is generated If the measured value is set to phase to phase the sudden change in voltage is signaled selectively for the individual meas uring elements that have picked up ...

Page 961: ...With the parameter Measured value you specify which measured values of voltage are to be used for determining the voltage jumps Parameter Value Description phase to ground The tripping stage evaluates the phase to ground voltages VA VB and VC phase to phase The tripping stage evaluates the phase to phase voltages VAB VBC and VCA zero sequence voltage The tripping stage evaluates the zero sequence ...

Page 962: ...phase to ground _ 101 V jump det Threshold 0 300 V to 340 000 V 5 000 V _ 102 V jump det Minimum pulse length 0 01 s to 60 00 s 0 10 s Information List No Information Data Class Type Type V jump det _ 81 V jump det Block stage SPS I _ 501 V jump det Pulse extension SPS I _ 54 V jump det Inactive SPS O _ 52 V jump det Behavior ENS O _ 53 V jump det Health ENS O _ 301 V jump det Jump ACT O _ 302 V j...

Page 963: ...e protected objects Function Description The Voltage measuring point selection function block realizes the selection of voltage measuring points by a logic block chart The logic block chart controls the input MP ID selection depending on the switch posi tions of disconnectors Example Figure 6 334 shows an example of voltage measuring points selection for the function group Capacitor bank in a doub...

Page 964: ...entation is based on the example given in Figure 6 334 If the Disconnector 1 QB1 is closed and no matter what the position the Disconnector 2 QB2 is the value 2 is the output of CFC block mux_d_1 and transferred to the input MP ID selection Then the Meas point V 3ph with ID 2 is selected as the reference voltage Similarly the Meas point V 3ph with ID 3 is selected as the reference voltage if the D...

Page 965: ...t to invalid The indication Health is set to Alarm The indication Selection invalid becomes true Information List No Information Data Class Type Type V MP selection _ 501 V MP selection MP ID selection INS I _ 53 V MP selection Health ENS O _ 301 V MP selection Selection invalid SPS O 6 51 4 Protection and Automation Functions 6 51 Voltage Measuring Point Selection SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Protectio...

Page 966: ...966 SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Protection Manual C53000 G5040 C017 8 Edition 07 2017 ...

Page 967: ...ion for Capacitors 3 Phase 977 7 5 Current Unbalance Protection for Capacitors 1 Phase 1002 7 6 Peak Overvoltage Protection for Capacitors 1020 7 7 Voltage Differential Protection for Capacitors 1032 7 8 Differential Protection for Capacitor Banks 1043 7 9 Detuning Supervision for Capacitor Banks 1070 7 SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Protection Manual 967 C53000 G5040 C017 8 Edition 07 2017 ...

Page 968: ...it breakers The modularity of hardware and protection functionality allows to tailor the protection device exactly to the needs of the capacitor bank or the subcomponent of the capacitor bank and to realize the complete protection of the whole capacitor bank or the capacitor bank subcomponent with only one 7SJ8 device Capacitor banks require the use of extensive protection functionality The protec...

Page 969: ...of the device with reference to an example i i NOTE Starting from V07 30 the function type 50 51 OC 3ph 1p is no longer offered in the DIGSI 5 global library in the function group Capacitor bank Instead you can use now the standard overcurrent protection func tion Overcurrent protection phases advanced to apply phase segregated operate indications Overcurrent Protection Phases for Protection of RL...

Page 970: ...e Overcurr 3ph RLC function processes the current that is connected to the measuring point For more information refer to the description of the Capacitor bank function group starting from chapter 5 4 1 Overview Selection and Setting of the Rated Current With the parameter Rated current selection you define whether this function uses the rated current of the whole capacitor bank or the individual r...

Page 971: ..._ocp_rlc 1 en_US Figure 7 2 Example of Measuring Point Selection The MP selection parameter is set for all stages The setting applies equally to all stages of the function In the default setting a measuring point is not selected You must select a measuring point If you do not select a measuring point an inconsistency is indicated via the read only parameter Consistency failure scinconsistency_ocp_...

Page 972: ... RLC rated current Default setting _ 2311 102 RLC rated current 1000 A With the parameter RLC rated current you set the primary rated current of the respective protected object which is usually a reactor or resistor branch within the capacitor bank installation Capacitor Bank Protection 7 2 Overcurrent Protection for Capacitor Banks 972 SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Protection Manual C53000 G5040 C017 8 ...

Page 973: ... within the function if necessary dwtolp_rlc 200813 3 en_US Figure 7 4 Structure Embedding of the Function Function Description A feature of the function Overload RLC is the Measuring point selection A capacitor bank can include multiple filter circuits Each filter circuit can include for example a 3 phase current transformer each of which is assigned a measuring point In order to protect all filt...

Page 974: ... 305 Time until trip Estimated time until tripping s s s _ 601 306 Over load phase A Thermal measured values of phases Trip temperature _ 601 307 Over load phase B _ 601 308 Over load phase C _ 601 309 Over load maximum Thermal measured values of overload protection Trip temperature _ 601 310 Equival current phs A Current measured value as base for overload measured value A A Parameter Capacitor r...

Page 975: ...lica calculation for percentage measured values and for thresholds set in percentages Parameter Value Description prim rated curr of MP Select this setting if you want to use the rated current of the whole capac itor bank as the reference value RLC rated current Select this setting if you want to use the individual rated current of the RLC object to be proteced for example a resistor or reactor as...

Page 976: ...ed no Sensor configured no MP config ured _ 13501 81 MP selection MP selec tion Setting options depend on configuration Information List No Information Data Class Type Type MP selection _ 13501 301 MP selection Iph WYE O 7 3 6 Capacitor Bank Protection 7 3 Thermal Overload Protection for Capacitor Banks 976 SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Protection Manual C53000 G5040 C017 8 Edition 07 2017 ...

Page 977: ...m of 3 overcurrent protection stages and 4 counter stages can be operated simultaneously in the function The function is designed so that the General functionality including compensation and the Measuring point selection can work across the stages dwocpIunbalanced 300813 4 en_US Figure 7 7 Structure Embedding of the Function General Functions and Measuring Point Selection Description The General f...

Page 978: ...unbalance protection for capacitors 3 phase function processes the current that is connected to the measuring point For more information refer to the description of the Capacitor bank function group starting from chapter 5 4 1 Overview Measurands Method of Measurement The function receives its measurands via the I Unbalanced interface of the Capacitor bank function group Capacitor Bank Protection ...

Page 979: ...on Alg not compensated The algorithm is not compensated The compensated values are not available under the following conditions After initial startup of the device before any compensation is carried out After activating the binary input Reset comp val After change of Irated obj Protection stages that are working with compensated values are inactive Compens succeeded This indication is issued as tr...

Page 980: ...l Reset comp val of the function or function group resets the compensation see also Figure 7 8 For the reliability of manual compensation the binary input signal Reset comp val has a preset soft ware filtering time configurable in DIGIS of 20 ms i i NOTE When operating with manual compensation changing the value of parameter capacitor reference current will reset the compensation values Normalizat...

Page 981: ...ve phases To avoid overfunc tion in case of sensitive threshold settings the stages using compensated unbalanced values are blocked in a phase selective way by setting Iunbal comp to 0 A These stages are Counter stage I stage if set to operate with compensated unbalanced values The blocking Iunbal comp set to 0 A lasts for 250 ms after energizing detection Afterwards the calculated Iunbal comp is ...

Page 982: ...onnection This unbalance causes an unbalanced current this means a small current jump is generated in the unbalanced current Set the parameter Thresh defective C elem so that the current jump can be detected refer also to 7 4 3 2 Application and Setting Notes The unbalanced current that was caused by the fault must exceed the threshold for 100 ms before the affected group is determined and countin...

Page 983: ...er Rated primary current _ 2311 323 Cp vect Compensation vector Icomp vect kA A Parameter Rated primary current You can find the value of the parameter Rated primary current of the preceding table in the chapter 6 1 8 Settings according to the specified parameter MP selection Icomp vect is normalized with Ic The normalization is carried out no matter if the parameter Normalization with Ic is set t...

Page 984: ...t be determined with confidence an appropriate indication will be generated Application and Setting Notes Parameter MP selection Default setting _ 13501 81 MP selection None With the MP selection parameter you can select from a list the measuring point that is connected to the I Unbalanced interface of the Capacitor bank function group The setting applies equally to all stages of the function In t...

Page 985: ...rameter applies equally to all stages of the function Parameter Value Description no Select this setting if you can safely assume that Ic will not change for opera tional reasons or if you do not desire normalization of the unbalanced current with Ic Please consider that the protection sensitivity will decrease with decreasing Ic yes Select this setting if you want to keep the sensitivity of the p...

Page 986: ...a External Structure of the Capacitor Bank The external structure of the capacitor bank must be known or must be determined This information can be requested from the manufacturer of the capacitor bank This example assumes the following external structure of the capacitor bank 28 levels cans in series 4 cans per level H transformer between levels 13 and 14 counting from top to bottom 2 parallel ca...

Page 987: ...in series dwintauka 120314 01 2 en_US Figure 7 12 Internal Structure of a Can 2c Capacitance of a Can The capacitance of a can must be known or must be determined This information can be requested from the manufacturer of the capacitor bank Capacitance per can CK 19 67 μF 2d Current per Phase The unbalanced current is derived under the assumption of a certain phase current Capacitor Bank Protectio...

Page 988: ... C element Capacitance of a can during an element fault CK 1EF 19 456 μF 2f Capacitance in the Quarter of the H Connection during an Element Fault Consider 2 special conditions Cross linking and therefore the parallel connection of 2 cans refer to Figure 7 11 Current transformer is not in the center of the levels Therefore the following calculation must be performed for the upper C1 and lower quar...

Page 989: ... Setting in Case of a C Element Fault Unbalanced current Unbalanced current in case of an element fault in C1 Unbalanced current in case of an element fault in C3 The lesser of both values is relevant for the setting of the threshold value For instance set the threshold to 75 of this value Threshold value primary 0 75 20 0 mA 15 0 mA The threshold is a primary value In order to detect this a 1 1 t...

Page 990: ...uested from the manufacturer of the capacitor bank This example assumes the following external structure of the capacitor bank 28 levels cans in series 4 cans per level H transformer between levels 13 and 14 counting from top to bottom Parallel cans are not cross linked refer to the following diagram dwexafbocb 260314 01 1 en_US Figure 7 14 External Structure of the Capacitor Bank 3b Capacitance i...

Page 991: ...t C3RmEF 1 3104 μF C31EF C3RoEF C3RmEF 1 3113 μF 1 3104 μF 2 6217 μF 3c Capacitance in the Quarters of the H Connection without Element Fault The values are identical to those values in the example 2g Capacitance in the Quarters of the H Connection without Element Fault Page 989 3d Unbalanced Current and Threshold Value Setting in Case of a C Element Fault Use the values determined under 3b for th...

Page 992: ...rker Command SPC Signal to Information List Set up the following CFC Connect the SPC signal as input and the signal Reset all counters as output sc_CFC_60C_3ph 1 en_US Figure 7 17 Function Chart CFC Activating the Binary Input Signal Send a single point control command from the control center to the SPC signal to activate the signal Reset all counters Then the counters are reset Capacitor Bank Pro...

Page 993: ...ckup ACD O _ 4501 57 Group indicat Operate ACT O General _ 2311 500 General Compensate SPS I _ 2311 501 General Reset comp val SPS I _ 2311 502 General Reset all counters SPS I _ 2311 302 General Alg not compensated SPS O _ 2311 303 General Compens succeeded SPS O _ 2311 304 General Comp via BI blk Ic SPS O _ 2311 305 General I stage cmp blk Ic ACT O _ 2311 306 General No auto comp config SPS O _ ...

Page 994: ...I Description Logic of a Stage lounbalstufe 020913 1 en_US Figure 7 18 Logic Diagram of the Overcurrent Protection Stage I 7 4 4 7 4 4 1 Capacitor Bank Protection 7 4 Current Unbalance Protection for Capacitors 3 Phase 994 SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Protection Manual C53000 G5040 C017 8 Edition 07 2017 ...

Page 995: ...erefore fall below the threshold again at some time The timing depends on by how much the threshold is exceeded For this reason and under those conditions long time delays must not be set see also chapter 7 4 4 2 Applica tion and Setting Notes This effect does not occur if manual compensation or the non compensated measurand is used Blocking While Charging In order to prevent pickup as a consequen...

Page 996: ... tell the device whether the elements of the capacitor bank have internal fuses or not Non Compensated Status If no compensated values are available and the stage has been set to use such values the stage will be blocked The readiness of the stage turns to Warning This condition will be reported on the function stage indication Alg not compensated Application and Setting Notes Parameter Measured v...

Page 997: ...he threshold must be higher than the maximum operational unbalanced current Parameter Operate delay Default setting _ 13801 6 Operate delay 0 08 s for the 1st stage Set the parameter Operate delay for the specific application i i NOTE If the function has been set to automatic compensation and the stage works with compensated values the maximum permitted operate delay is 80 ms If the operate delay ...

Page 998: ...sition group 2 ACT O I 2 _ 13802 81 I 2 Block stage SPS I _ 13802 54 I 2 Inactive SPS O _ 13802 52 I 2 Behavior ENS O _ 13802 53 I 2 Health ENS O _ 13802 60 I 2 Inrush blocks operate ACT O _ 13802 55 I 2 Pickup ACD O _ 13802 56 I 2 Operate delay expired ACT O _ 13802 57 I 2 Operate ACT O _ 13802 301 I 2 Fault position group 1 ACT O _ 13802 302 I 2 Fault position group 2 ACT O 7 4 4 4 Capacitor Ban...

Page 999: ...ds Input Values The measurand input values of the counter stage are the phase and group segregated counter contents that are determined in the General FB 7 4 5 7 4 5 1 Capacitor Bank Protection 7 4 Current Unbalance Protection for Capacitors 3 Phase SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Protection Manual 999 C53000 G5040 C017 8 Edition 07 2017 ...

Page 1000: ... delay Default setting _ 13651 101 Max no of def elem phs A 10 Default setting _ 13651 102 Max no of def elem phs B 10 Default setting _ 13651 103 Max no of def elem phs C 10 Default setting _ 13651 6 Operate delay 0 00 s Set the parameters for the specific application It is possible to configure several stages for different tasks Reporting only with or without fault record Use this stage to repor...

Page 1001: ... elem phs C 1 to 1000 10 _ 13651 6 Counter 1 Operate delay 0 00 s to 10000 00 s 0 00 s Information List No Information Data Class Type Type Counter 1 _ 13651 81 Counter 1 Block stage SPS I _ 13651 54 Counter 1 Inactive SPS O _ 13651 52 Counter 1 Behavior ENS O _ 13651 53 Counter 1 Health ENS O _ 13651 55 Counter 1 Pickup ACD O _ 13651 56 Counter 1 Operate delay expired ACT O _ 13651 57 Counter 1 O...

Page 1002: ...aximum of 3 overcurrent protection stages and 4 counter stages can be operated simultaneously in the function The function is designed so that the General functionality including adjustment and the Measuring point selection can work across the stages dwocpIunb1ph 020714 3 en_US Figure 7 21 Structure Embedding of the Function General Functions and Measuring Point Selection Description The General f...

Page 1003: ...er to the description of the Capacitor bank function group starting from chapter 5 4 1 Overview Measurands Method of Measurement The function receives its measurands via the I Unbalanced interface of the Capacitor bank function group The compensated and non compensated unbalanced currents are provided for the overcurrent protection stage Within the protection stage one of the 2 values is selected ...

Page 1004: ...ilable under the following conditions After initial startup of the device before any compensation is carried out After activating the binary input Reset comp val After change of Irated obj Protection stages that are working with compensated values are inactive Compens succeeded This indication is issued as transient indication with a pulse duration of 10 ms if the existing unbalance has been compe...

Page 1005: ...me configurable in DIGIS of 20 ms Normalization with Ic The threshold for the unbalanced current is usually set by assuming the rated capacitor current Ic rated The current Ic flowing into the capacitor bank determines the amount of the unbalanced current A lower Ic also means a lower unbalanced current If Ic Ic rated the protection becomes less sensitive This influence can be compensated via the ...

Page 1006: ...nbal comp set to 0 A lasts for 250 ms after energizing detection Afterwards the calculated Iunbal comp is processed again Energizing detection takes place by monitoring the phases currents Ic flowing into the bank If all three phase currents exceed the threshold Current Thresh CB Open energizing is detected Logic for Counting Faulty C Elements This part of the General functionality is only importa...

Page 1007: ...ters of group 1 and group 2 via On site operation panel directly on the device Online DIGSI connection to the device Binary input Reset all counters only reset of all counters Communication connection with the control center You can directly set or reset the counters via IEC 61850 by setting the counter values to the desired value If you want to reset the counters via DNP3 IEC 60870 5 103 Modbus o...

Page 1008: ... to the I Unbalanced interface of the Capacitor bank function group The setting applies equally to all stages of the function In the default setting a measuring point is not selected You must select a measuring point If you do not select a measuring point an inconsistency is indicated via the read only parameter Consistency failure Parameter Automatic compensation Default setting _ 2311 101 Automa...

Page 1009: ...the parameter Thresh defective C elem to ensure that the jump in the unbalanced current caused by the faulty C element is detected Information about occurring unbalanced current as a consequence of single faulty C elements will be provided by the manufacturer of the capacitor bank Siemens recommends to set the threshold value to approx 75 of the unbalanced current that occurs after the fault of th...

Page 1010: ...ating the Binary Input Signal Send a single point control command from the control center to the SPC signal to activate the signal Reset all counters Then the counters are reset Settings Addr Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting MP selection _ 13501 100 MP selection Consistency failure no MP configured no Sensor configured no MP config ured 7 5 3 3 Capacitor Bank Protection 7 5 Current Unba...

Page 1011: ...l Compensate SPS I _ 2311 501 General Reset comp val SPS I _ 2311 502 General Reset all counters SPS I _ 2311 302 General Alg not compensated SPS O _ 2311 303 General Compens succeeded SPS O _ 2311 304 General Comp via BI blk Ic SPS O _ 2311 305 General I stage cmp blk Ic SPS O _ 2311 306 General No auto comp config SPS O _ 2311 307 General C defect counted SPS O _ 2311 308 General Unknown dir pha...

Page 1012: ...ues of the function at the function stage Pickup Operate Delay If the selected measurand exceeds the threshold the stage picks up The pickup starts the operate delay and a fault location information is issued More information can be found in this chapter under Fault Location Infor mation Page 1013 If the threshold is exceeded during the entire operate delay the operate indication is issued 7 5 4 7...

Page 1013: ...ined the corresponding indication Fault position group 1 or Fault position group 2 is issued Both indications also contain the information about the faulty phase If the capacitor is implemented with 2 neutral points the following definition is assumed dwfehlerortinf_iunsy1ph 070714 01 1 en_US Figure 7 28 Definition for the Fault Location Information The black dot indicates the orientation of the c...

Page 1014: ... the threshold must be higher than the maximum operational unbalanced current Parameter Operate delay Default setting _ 16231 6 Operate delay 0 30 s for the 1st stage Set the parameter Operate delay for the specific application i i NOTE If the function has been set to automatic compensation and the stage works with compensated values the maximum permitted operate delay is 80 ms If the operate dela...

Page 1015: ...th ENS O _ 16231 55 I 1 Pickup ACD O _ 16231 56 I 1 Operate delay expired ACT O _ 16231 57 I 1 Operate ACT O _ 16231 301 I 1 Fault position group 1 ACT O _ 16231 302 I 1 Fault position group 2 ACT O 7 5 4 4 Capacitor Bank Protection 7 5 Current Unbalance Protection for Capacitors 1 Phase SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Protection Manual 1015 C53000 G5040 C017 8 Edition 07 2017 ...

Page 1016: ...stage1ph 080714 01 2 en_US Figure 7 29 Logic Diagram of the Counter Stage 7 5 5 7 5 5 1 Capacitor Bank Protection 7 5 Current Unbalance Protection for Capacitors 1 Phase 1016 SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Protection Manual C53000 G5040 C017 8 Edition 07 2017 ...

Page 1017: ...ckly to the simultaneous fault of many C elements always use an overcurrent protec tion stage I with a short operate delay 100 ms in addition to the counter stage This is necessary as the counter function counts each current jump only once regardless of its height Parameter Type of counting groups Default setting _ 16261 101 Type of counting groups segregated With the parameter Type of counting gr...

Page 1018: ...solution cannot be found within 2 hours the stage trips and disconnects the capacitor bank Immediate operate The stage is used to initiate the operate immediately after a larger number of C elements became faulty Settings Addr Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting Counter 1 _ 16261 1 Counter 1 Mode off on test off _ 16261 2 Counter 1 Operate flt rec blocked no yes no _ 16261 101 Counter 1 Ty...

Page 1019: ...ata Class Type Type _ 16261 57 Counter 1 Operate ACT O Capacitor Bank Protection 7 5 Current Unbalance Protection for Capacitors 1 Phase SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Protection Manual 1019 C53000 G5040 C017 8 Edition 07 2017 ...

Page 1020: ...ing to IEC and IEEE Standards Stage with definite time characteristic curve Stage with user defined characteristic curve The function is preconfigured at the factory with a stage having an inverse time characteristic curve and a stage having a definite time characteristic curve Within the function the following maximum number of stages can be operated simultaneously 1 stage with an inverse time ch...

Page 1021: ...ge lo_peainv 230813 2 en_US Figure 7 31 Logic Diagram of the Stage with Inverse Time Characteristic Curve 7 6 3 7 6 3 1 Capacitor Bank Protection 7 6 Peak Overvoltage Protection for Capacitors SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Protection Manual 1021 C53000 G5040 C017 8 Edition 07 2017 ...

Page 1022: ...changed The stage however remains in the picked up state Use the parameter Dropout principle to select the method for the dropout of the stage Method with down integration time If the measurand falls below the dropout threshold the pickup drops out immediately If the value drops below the pickup threshold the internal integral value that depends on the selected Down integra tion time is slowly red...

Page 1023: ...peakC Peak voltage phase C kV V Parameter Capacitor reference volt 3 You can find the parameter Capacitor reference volt of the preceding table in the function block General of the function group Capacitor bank Application and Setting Notes Parameter Capacitor rated current Default setting _ 2311 101 Capacitor rated current 1000 0 A With the Capacitor rated current parameter you set the primary ra...

Page 1024: ...pacitor The threshold value is thus set as a referenced quantity The points on the characteristic curve defined in the Standards IEC 60871 1 2005 and IEEE Std 1036 2010 result from a threshold setting of 1 10 see Figure 7 32 Threshold values differing from this shift the charac teristic as shown in Figure 7 32 Siemens recommends using the default setting Parameter Dropout principle Default setting...

Page 1025: ...ting General _ 2311 101 General Capacitor rated current 1 0 A to 100000 0 A 1000 0 A Inverse T 1 _ 13861 1 Inverse T 1 Mode off on test off _ 13861 2 Inverse T 1 Operate flt rec blocked no yes no _ 13861 103 Inverse T 1 Dropout prin ciple with dropout delay with down integration with down inte gration _ 13861 3 Inverse T 1 Threshold 0 80 p u to 3 00 p u 1 10 p u _ 13861 102 Inverse T 1 Down inte g...

Page 1026: ...01 Inverse T 1 Down integr running SPS O _ 13861 56 Inverse T 1 Operate delay expired ACT O _ 13861 57 Inverse T 1 Operate ACT O Capacitor Bank Protection 7 6 Peak Overvoltage Protection for Capacitors 1026 SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Protection Manual C53000 G5040 C017 8 Edition 07 2017 ...

Page 1027: ...thod of Measurement The function calculates the peak voltage in a phase segregated way from the fundamental component and superimposed harmonics Integration of the phase currents then yields the voltage This approach captures 7 6 4 7 6 4 1 Capacitor Bank Protection 7 6 Peak Overvoltage Protection for Capacitors SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Protection Manual 1027 C53000 G5040 C017 8 Edition 07 2017 ...

Page 1028: ...00 0 A You can find the setting notes for the parameter Capacitor rated current under Parameter Capac itor rated current Page 1023 Parameter Threshold Default setting _ 13831 3 Threshold 1 10 The peak voltage determined is then set with reference to the rated voltage of the capacitor The Threshold is thus set as a referenced quantity The setting depends on the application of the stage If this stag...

Page 1029: ...acteristic curve This makes the dropout delay parameter superfluous and unneeded User Defined Characteristic Curve With the user defined characteristic curve you can define the operate curve point by point using up to 30 value pairs of voltage and time The device uses linear interpolation to calculate the characteristic curve from these values You can also define a dropout characteristic curve if ...

Page 1030: ...1 00 You can change the threshold value setting afterwards if you want to shift the characteristic curve Set the time value in seconds The characteristic curve is shifted via the Time dial parameter Set the number of value pairs to be used with DIGSI You can define a maximum of 30 value pairs i i NOTE The value pairs must be entered in continuous order Parameter Time dial Default setting _ 101 Tim...

Page 1031: ...g Options Default Setting General _ 1 User curve Mode off on test off _ 2 User curve Operate flt rec blocked no yes no _ 3 User curve Threshold 0 80 p u to 3 00 p u 1 10 p u _ 101 User curve Time dial 0 05 to 15 00 1 00 Information List No Information Data Class Type Type User curve _ 81 User curve Block stage SPS I _ 54 User curve Inactive SPS O _ 52 User curve Behavior ENS O _ 53 User curve Heal...

Page 1032: ...nk function group The function is preconfigured at the factory with one protection stage Vdiff A maximum of 4 protection stages Vdiff can be operated simultaneously in the function The General functionality including compensation works across all stages dw_strucVoldi 060213 01 vsd 1 en_US Figure 7 36 Structure of the Voltage Differential Protection Function General Functionality Description The Ge...

Page 1033: ...via the Voltage unbalance interface The method of measurement used processes the sampled voltage values and filters out the fundamental component numerically The compensated or not compensated differential voltage is provided to the protection stage for evaluation Voltage Matching Factor Setting of the Matching Factor The voltage matching factor k is used as a multiplier for the tap voltage to obt...

Page 1034: ...nt grounding are possible Grounded capacitor bank system dw_voltage_measurement_grounded 1 en_US Figure 7 38 Voltage Measurement for a Grounded Capacitor Bank System The following formula is used to calculate the differential voltage Vdiff of phase A Vdiff A V BB A kA V tap A VBB A Voltage from the busbar phase A Vtap A Voltage from the tap phase A kA Voltage matching factor phase A This calculati...

Page 1035: ...ction group Sc_isolate_ground 1 en_US Figure 7 41 Connecting Measuring Points to the Capacitor Bank Function Group for the Isolated Capacitor Bank System Both the capacitor bank tap voltage and the calculated differential voltage are displayed as measured values of the function General Notes on the Compensation An operational differential voltage is added to a differential voltage resulting from f...

Page 1036: ...ge Vdiff cp is calculated with the following formula for phase A Grounded capacitor bank system Vdiff cp A V BB A V N kcp A V tap A V N Isolated capacitor bank system Vdiff cp A V BB A kcp A V tap A With kcp A Calculated matching factor at the compensation moment phase A VBB A Voltage from the busbar phase A Vtap A Voltage from the tap phase A VN Neutral point to ground voltage This calculation al...

Page 1037: ...ware filtering time configurable in DIGIS of 20 ms Functional Measured Values Values Description Primary Secondary Referenced to _ 15781 300 Vtap Tap voltage kV V Parameter Capacitor refer ence volt 3 _ 15781 304 Vunbal Neutral point displacement voltage kV V Parameter Capacitor refer ence volt _ 15781 301 Vdiff Differential voltage kV V Parameter Capacitor refer ence volt 3 _ 15781 306 Vdiff cp T...

Page 1038: ...or phs B 2 0000 Default setting _ 15781 105 Volt match factor phs C 2 0000 The voltage matching factors are applied as multipliers for the primary tap voltage to calculate the differential voltage It depends on the position of the tap voltage measurement in the specific capacitor installation The setting is defined as the ratio of the capacitor bank reference voltage to the tap voltage EXAMPLE The...

Page 1039: ...than 1 V Otherwise the function cannot work prop erly Fulfill this condition by applying an appropriate voltage transformer for the tap voltage Siemens recommends applying a tap voltage transformer which provides under normal operation a secondary voltage in the area of the rated secondary voltage EXAMPLE In the grounded system Ratio of the capacitor bank busbar voltage to the tap voltage matching...

Page 1040: ...converted to a p u value in relation to the capacitor bank reference voltage If the converted value exceeds the Threshold value a Pickup indication is issued If the threshold is exceeded continuously during the operate delay an Operate signal is issued 7 7 4 7 7 4 1 Capacitor Bank Protection 7 7 Voltage Differential Protection for Capacitors 1040 SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Protection Manual C53000 G50...

Page 1041: ...arameter Operate delay for the specific application Parameter Blk by meas volt failure Default setting _ 15811 10 Blk by meas volt failure yes You can use the parameter Blk by meas volt failure to control the response of the stage when a measuring voltage failure is detected A measuring voltage failure can only be detected if one of the following 2 conditions is met The device internal Measuring v...

Page 1042: ...ensate SPS I _ 15781 501 General Reset comp val SPS I _ 15781 302 General Alg not compensated SPS O _ 15781 303 General Compens succeeded SPS O _ 15781 300 General Vtap WYE O _ 15781 304 General Vunbal CMV O _ 15781 301 General Vdiff WYE O _ 15781 306 General Vdiff cp WYE O _ 15781 305 General Mat fac WYE O Group indicat _ 4501 55 Group indicat Pickup ACD O _ 4501 57 Group indicat Operate ACT O Vd...

Page 1043: ...diff protection function group The stages can be blocked in addition you can switch the stages on and off The Capacitor bank side function group has the following characteristics The side related protection settings are performed The side related calculations are performed All data setting values detected currents are relayed to the Capacitor bank diff function group The side related protection fu...

Page 1044: ...ng points of the protected object is used for stabilization The definition for 2 measuring points is A trip or differential current is Idiff I1 I2 as well as a restraint current of Irest Max I1 I2 For more than 2 measuring points this definition is expanded This restraint method allows a reliable trip deci sion for more than 2 measuring points and different feeding behavior for internal short circ...

Page 1045: ... short circuit Current transformers can also become saturated through the large direct current time constant switching of transformers motors but small currents flowing through This manifests itself as a phase angle rotation of the current Exceeding the characteristic curve in a non stabilized area is possible Intelligent saturation detection methods capture this state and lead to a temporally lim...

Page 1046: ...ry to block all phases simultaneously This blocking must be limited with regard to time and is controlled by the parameter Crossblock time 2nd har The correct positioning of the filter windows is controlled by the internal pickup If you want only one method to be active the other method can be changed to inactive For this parameter Blocking with 2 harmonic no is used scinrush 120120 01 tif 1 en_US...

Page 1047: ...l Protection Function The interaction of the I DIFF I DIFF fast and I DIFF unrestrained tripping stages is shown in the following operate curve Capacitor Bank Protection 7 8 Differential Protection for Capacitor Banks SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Protection Manual 1047 C53000 G5040 C017 8 Edition 07 2017 ...

Page 1048: ...rim Sx Primary transformer rated current per measuring point Irated obj Sx Primary rated current of the protected object Srated ref Reference power maximum rated apparent power of the protected object Vrated Sx Rated voltage of the respective side measuring point of the protected object i i NOTE For more than 2 capacitor bank sides teed feeder the winding with the highest power is used as the refe...

Page 1049: ...S value is the largest are used as restraint current If for example the current collapses at a measuring point as a consequence of current transformer saturation the measuring point that has the largest current is automatically switched to at the point in time of the calcula tion i i NOTE Differential protection does not work with sensitive ground current transformers Since sensitive trans formers...

Page 1050: ...a logic is implemented that uses the characteristic curve Additional stabilization of external faults If the operating point is located in the additional stabilization range and exceeds the operate curve from there then the logic becomes active and blocks the differential protection The additional stabilization range is derived from the Threshold add on stabiliz and Slope 1 parameters dwdifaus 030...

Page 1051: ...he differential current With trans former saturation the instantaneous values fall below an internal threshold in the saturation free time If this threshold is permanently exceeded and a pickup is present in the corresponding phase an internal error is assumed The other phases are also examined during the parameterization with crossblock The blocking of the tripping is removed and the indication B...

Page 1052: ...nt detection until the internal dropout threshold is reached Added to this time are 5 periods and from this the dropout delay is derived Following this the characteristic curve increase is reset to the original value Figure 7 53 shows the overall logic dwdcerkn 201112 01 tif 2 en_US Figure 7 52 Increasing the Characteristic Curve after DC Detection lodcerkn 170712 01 tif 2 en_US Figure 7 53 Logic ...

Page 1053: ... startup detection in all phases the pickup value increase is activated The pickup value Threshold and Slope 1 are raised by the set value in accordance with parameter Factor increasing char As a rule here Slope 1 cannot exceed a value of 0 85 If the parameter Thresh startup detection is exceeded dropout occurs and a timing element param eter Max perm Start time is activated Once this time has ela...

Page 1054: ...rotection Function As a supplement to the I DIFF differential protection function the function I DIFF fast is available The main task consists in switching off high current internal faults in the shortest amount of time The method controls current transformer saturation and is stable in the event of external transverse faults integration in breaker and a half arrangements Metrologically 2 methods ...

Page 1055: ...urve Slope in Figure 7 57 idiff t 0 8 irest t Condition 3 After that a comparison determines whether the differential current exceeds the parameter Threshold When all conditions are met tripping occurs immediately If the 1st condition is recognized and not the 2nd condition then the function is blocked for 300 ms dwidfast 300114 01 tif 1 en_US Figure 7 57 I DIFF Fast Characteristic Curve The follo...

Page 1056: ...l to the instantaneous value method the fundamental component works with a temporal delay Here the same measured values are processed as with the I DIFF method The fundamental component of the differential current Idiff and the stabilization value maximum current of a measuring point Irest are ordered in the operate curve according to Figure 7 57 and the trip decision is made Figure 7 60 shows the...

Page 1057: ...thod controls current transformer saturation High current faults in the protection range can always be switched off immediately without consideration of the restraint currents if due to the current magnitude it is determined that an external fault is not involved In the case of protected objects with a large intrinsic longitudinal impedance transformer generator reactor a current can be found that...

Page 1058: ... instantaneous values method an immediate evaluation of the sampled values of the differential current iDiff t occurs The absolute value and vector group adapted currents i are also the basis Fundamental Component Method Parallel to the instantaneous value method the fundamental component works with a temporal delay Here the same measured values are processed as with the I DIFF method The fundamen...

Page 1059: ...f the Differential Protection A common trip signal is formed from the subfunctions I DIFF I DIFF fast and I DIFF unrestrained Figure 7 63 shows the corresponding logic Capacitor Bank Protection 7 8 Differential Protection for Capacitor Banks SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Protection Manual 1059 C53000 G5040 C017 8 Edition 07 2017 ...

Page 1060: ...an be used with the pickup function To enable fault recording even with external errors along with the exceedance of the characteristic curve a fault record is opened in case of a blocking by an external error or in case of a characteristic curve increase through a DC component detection This has the advantage that you can evaluate the transformer transfer method of the current transformers very w...

Page 1061: ...tion Example The measuring points must be interconnected with the corresponding function groups Figure 7 65 shows the corresponding screenshot from DIGSI 5 sccapbak 130514 01 1 en_US Figure 7 65 Internal Interconnection in DIGSI 5 7 8 4 Capacitor Bank Protection 7 8 Differential Protection for Capacitor Banks SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Protection Manual 1061 C53000 G5040 C017 8 Edition 07 2017 ...

Page 1062: ... these values are added to the correction amount rated current of the protected object If the capacitor bank is in a delta connection the value to be set can differ from the capacitor bank reference current set in the function group Capacitor bank by a factor 3 Otherwise always use the same value settings Depending on user philosophy you use the rated current of the capacitor bank as a reference v...

Page 1063: ...ctor group numeral from 0 to 11 to the extent possible Thus for example only even numbers are possible for the vector groups Yy and Dd and only odd numbers are possible for Yd and Dy You do not need to change this setting for the example application described Function Group Capacitor Bank diff Proceed with the following settings in the Capacitor bank diff function group for the I DIFF function Par...

Page 1064: ...pe 2 begins The default setting 2 50 I Irated obj is a practical value Parameter Slope 2 Default setting _ 11041 102 Slope 2 0 70 With the parameter Slope 2 an overfunction of the differential protection is avoided with high current external faults as a consequence of current transformer transmission faults for example due to saturation A value greater than or equal to double the value of Slope 1 ...

Page 1065: ...rrent Detection Default setting _ 11041 115 Blocking with 2 harmonic No The inrush current detection is not necessary for the capacitor bank applications Parameter 2nd harmonic content Default setting _ 11041 116 2nd harmonic content 15 For many practical applications the default setting value of 15 has proven useful In exceptional cases the setting value can be decreased with a small proportion o...

Page 1066: ...function with a corresponding setting of the time The set time must be identical to the time that is set for the duration of the additional stabilization Protection Stage I DIFF Fast The task of this protection stage is the fast detection of high current internal short circuits see also I DIFF Fast Differential Protection Function Page 1054 For this reason the protection stage must always be activ...

Page 1067: ...no _ 11041 116 I DIFF 2nd harmonic content 10 to 45 15 _ 11041 117 I DIFF Crossblock time 2nd har 0 00 s to 200 00 s 0 00 s Ext fault detection _ 11041 128 I DIFF Threshold add on stabiliz 1 00 I IrObj to 20 00 I IrObj 2 00 I IrObj _ 11041 129 I DIFF Time of add on stabiliz 0 00 s to 5 00 s 0 30 s _ 11041 130 I DIFF Crossblk time add on st 0 00 s to 2 00 s 0 30 s I DIFF fast _ 11071 1 I DIFF fast ...

Page 1068: ...F Blocked by inrush SPS O _ 11041 305 I DIFF Blocked by 2 Harmon ACT O _ 11041 306 I DIFF Crossblock by 2 Harm SPS O _ 11041 312 I DIFF Blocked by ext fault ACT O _ 11041 313 I DIFF Crossbl by ext fault SPS O _ 11041 316 I DIFF CWA int fault detected SPS O I DIFF fast _ 11071 81 I DIFF fast Block stage SPS I _ 11071 54 I DIFF fast Inactive SPS O _ 11071 52 I DIFF fast Behavior ENS O _ 11071 53 I D...

Page 1069: ...up indicat _ 4501 55 Group indicat Pickup ACD O _ 4501 57 Group indicat Operate ACT O Capacitor Bank Protection 7 8 Differential Protection for Capacitor Banks SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Protection Manual 1069 C53000 G5040 C017 8 Edition 07 2017 ...

Page 1070: ... voltage side capacitor Consequently a difference in the phase capacitances of the upper voltage side capacitor will cause a fundamental ground current Therefore it is not sufficient for the tuning section supervision to evaluate only the fundamental ground current Under normal operation and symmet rical network conditions the fundamental ground current will be 0 An unbalance in the phase impedanc...

Page 1071: ..._detuning supervision 1 en_US Figure 7 67 Application Overview Capacitor Bank Protection 7 9 Detuning Supervision for Capacitor Banks SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Protection Manual 1071 C53000 G5040 C017 8 Edition 07 2017 ...

Page 1072: ...1072 SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Protection Manual C53000 G5040 C017 8 Edition 07 2017 ...

Page 1073: ...ity 1105 8 4 Synchronization Function 1127 8 5 Switching Sequences 1170 8 6 User Defined Function Block Control 1177 8 7 CFC Chart Settings 1180 8 8 Transformer Tap Changers 1182 8 9 Voltage Controller 1194 8 SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Protection Manual 1073 C53000 G5040 C017 8 Edition 07 2017 ...

Page 1074: ...y for the control functions other logs are also used Concept of Controllables The concept of so called controllables is based on the data model described in IEC 61850 Controllables are objects that can be controlled such as a switch with feedback The model of a transformer tap changer for example contains controllables The controllables are identifiable by their last letter C of the data type for ...

Page 1075: ...nnected with 2 binary inputs double point indication In addition signals are available that display the current state of the switch not selected off on intermediate position disturbed position These signals can be queried in CFC for example in order to build interlocking conditions Control Models You can set the operating mode of the controllables by selecting the control model Control Functions 8...

Page 1076: ... models dwsteuer 190912 01 tif 1 en_US Figure 8 1 Command Sources Command Types and Control Models The figure shows the control models right with the respective control mechanisms center The standard control model for a switching command in an IEC 61850 compliant system is SBO with feedback monitoring SBO w enh security This control model is the default setting for newly created switching devices ...

Page 1077: ...e The Circuit breaker switching device contains the following function blocks that are needed for control Function block Circuit breaker Function block Control Function block Interlocking This corresponds to the logical nodes XCBR CSWI and CILO in IEC 61850 In the case of protection devices or combined protection and control devices additional functions can be contained in the circuit breaker swit...

Page 1078: ...DIGSI 5 is also linked with the binary outputs that issue the switching commands i i NOTE When setting the parameters of a device you will find 2 circuit breaker types in the DIGSI 5 library 3 pole circuit breaker or 1 pole circuit breaker depending on the device type selected 3 pole or 1 pole tripping Circuit breaker status only Control Functions 8 2 Switching Devices 1078 SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent ...

Page 1079: ... Element The setting options of the circuit breaker are assigned to the function blocks on the basis of their relevance Additional setting options of the circuit breakers that cannot be directly assigned to one of the 3 function blocks are nevertheless available Table 8 2 Setting Options of the Controllable Command with Feedback in the Control Function Block of the Circuit Breaker Properties Funct...

Page 1080: ...s of the Controllable Position in the Circuit Breaker Function Block Chatter Blocking Properties Function To Be Found in Chatter blocking yes no Switching chatter blocking on off Position of the Circuit breaker function block34 Table 8 4 Additional Settings in the Device Settings having Effects on the Circuit Breaker Properties Function To Be Found in Number of permissible status changes Chatter b...

Page 1081: ...gnal Name Description Type Default Value if Signal Quality invalid Ready The signal Ready indicates that the OFF ON OFF cycle is possible with the circuit breaker This signal is used for the AREC standby status SPS Going Acquisition blocking The binary input activates acquisition blocking You can also set this binary input with an external toggle switch SPS Unchanged Reset AcqBlk Subst Acquisition...

Page 1082: ...the hours the circuit breaker is open INS Operating hours The statistical value counts the hours where at least one phase current is greater than the Current thresh CB open parameter INS Control It is the task of the controls to execute command checks and establish communication between the command source and the circuit breaker Using the control settings you specify how the commands are to be pro...

Page 1083: ...int indi cation of the Circuit breaker function block and the command is issued Controllable DPC Unchanged Unchanged In the information routing of DIGSI 5 you may select a function key as a possible command source In addi tion it is displayed here if the command is activated by CFC The logging is routed here Connection Variants of the Circuit Breaker For each switching device you can establish the...

Page 1084: ... the position OFF if there is no voltage at the routed binary input L Click the right mouse button and enter OL GH The switching device feedback is in the position ON if there is voltage at the routed binary input H Click the right mouse button and enter CH CL The switching device feedback is in the position ON if there is no voltage at the routed binary input H Click the right mouse button and en...

Page 1085: ...ting in DIGSI You can select the contacts for On and Off as desired They need not necessarily be next to one another The letter U represents an unlatched command Alternatively TL latched tripping can be selected Control Functions 8 2 Switching Devices SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Protection Manual 1085 C53000 G5040 C017 8 Edition 07 2017 ...

Page 1086: ...1 tif 1 en_US Figure 8 10 1 5 Pole Triggering scrang1pLS15p 1 en_US Figure 8 11 1 5 Pole Triggering Routing in DIGSI Control Functions 8 2 Switching Devices 1086 SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Protection Manual C53000 G5040 C017 8 Edition 07 2017 ...

Page 1087: ...quisition of the individual poles of a circuit breaker It is intended for common use by 1 pole working protection and control functions i i NOTE The wiring of the Circuit breaker function group with binary inputs and binary outputs occurs once per device The control function in this type switches all 3 poles on or off simultaneously Control Functions 8 2 Switching Devices SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Pr...

Page 1088: ...Pole Triggering For the circuit breaker with 1 pole triggering triggering takes place via one relay per phase for the trip command and via a 4th relay for the close command see next figure dw1panls 020211 01 tif 1 en_US Figure 8 15 1 Pole Connection of a Circuit Breaker Control Functions 8 2 Switching Devices 1088 SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Protection Manual C53000 G5040 C017 8 Edition 07 2017 ...

Page 1089: ...n and trip command are set to 3 pole This routing is also used by protection functions that trip 3 poles The close command is issued simultaneously for all 3 phases Example Trip Command during Transition from 1 Pole to 3 Pole During a transition from 1 pole to 3 pole tripping Trip only pole A remains active To inform for example an external AREC whether it is a 1 pole or 3 pole trip you can use th...

Page 1090: ...ary inputs for feedback of the switch position is done as shown in the previous figure also see Chapter 5 7 7 3 Acquisition of Circuit Breaker Auxiliary Contacts and Further Information Control Functions 8 2 Switching Devices 1090 SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Protection Manual C53000 G5040 C017 8 Edition 07 2017 ...

Page 1091: ... General Rated normal current 0 20 A to 100000 00 A 1000 00 A _ 2311 102 General Rated voltage 0 20 kV to 1200 00 kV 400 00 kV Breaker settings _ 2311 112 General Current thresh CB open 1 A 100 Irated 0 030 A to 10 000 A 0 100 A 5 A 100 Irated 0 15 A to 50 00 A 0 50 A 1 A 50 Irated 0 030 A to 10 000 A 0 100 A 5 A 50 Irated 0 15 A to 50 00 A 0 50 A 1 A 1 6 Irated 0 001 A to 1 600 A 0 100 A 5 A 1 6 ...

Page 1092: ...ack monitoring time 0 01 s to 1800 00 s 1 00 s _ 4201 104 Control Check switching authority no yes advanced yes _ 4201 105 Control Check if pos is reached no yes yes _ 4201 106 Control Check double activat blk no yes yes _ 4201 107 Control Check blk by protection no yes yes Switching authority _ 4201 151 Control Swi dev related sw auth 0 1 false _ 4201 152 Control Specific sw authorities 0 1 true ...

Page 1093: ...lk Subst SPS I _ 4261 503 Circuit break External health ENS I _ 4261 53 Circuit break Health ENS O _ 4261 58 Circuit break Position 3 pole DPC C _ 4261 300 Circuit break Trip open cmd 3 pole SPS O _ 4261 301 Circuit break Close command SPS O _ 4261 302 Circuit break Command active SPS O _ 4261 303 Circuit break Definitive trip SPS O _ 4261 304 Circuit break Alarm suppression SPS O _ 4261 306 Circu...

Page 1094: ... SPC C _ 4201 313 Control Switching authority ENS O _ 4201 314 Control Switching mode ENS O Interlocking _ 4231 500 Interlocking Enable opening SPS I _ 4231 501 Interlocking Enable closing SPS I _ 4231 502 Interlocking Enable opening fixed SPS I _ 4231 503 Interlocking Enable closing fixed SPS I _ 4231 53 Interlocking Health ENS O CB test _ 6151 53 CB test Health ENS O _ 6151 301 CB test Test exec...

Page 1095: ...ical switch provides disconnector instead of circuit breaker Blocking by protection is not provided in the analysis of the Control function block The Disconnector switching device is available in the DIGSI 5 library in 2 different variants Disconnector with 3 pole connection The device switches all 3 poles of the disconnector on or off simultaneously Disconnector without triggering only status det...

Page 1096: ...s of Disconnector Switching Element The settings of the disconnector are assigned to the function blocks on the basis of their relevance Additional disconnector settings that cannot be directly assigned to one of the 3 function blocks and are identical to the circuit breaker settings are available Table 8 11 Setting Options of the Controllable Command with Feedback in the Control Function Block of...

Page 1097: ...ntrollable Position in the Disconnector Function Block Chatter Blocking Characteristics Function To Be Found in Chatter blocking yes no Switching chatter blocking on off Position of the Disconnector 1 function block 1 First click Position and then the Details key in the Properties window below Table 8 13 Additional Settings in the Device Settings with effect on the Disconnector Characteristics Fun...

Page 1098: ...n is not yet attained although feedback has already been received the output time is extended by the Seal in time The Seal in time is relevant for equipment that sends feedback before the switching operation is completely performed The Seal in time is only considered for control models with feedback moni toring 0 00 s 0 s to 60 s _ 5401 103 Switching device type The Switching device type specifies...

Page 1099: ...SPS Unchanged Reset switch statist The binary input sets the operation counter for the switch to the value 0 SPS Unchanged Position The binary input Position can be used to read the disconnector position with double point indication DPC Unchanged If the quality of the input signal assumes the status Quality invalid then the standby status Health of the Disconnector function block is set to Warning...

Page 1100: ...arameters Default Setting Possible Parameter Values _ 4201 101 Control model SBO w enh security38 direct w normal secur SBO w normal secur direct w enh security SBO w enh security _ 4201 102 SBO time out 30 00 s _ 4201 103 Feedback monitoring time 10 00 s _ 4201 104 Check switching authority yes no yes advanced _ 4201 105 Check if pos is reached yes no yes _ 4201 106 Check double activat blk yes n...

Page 1101: ... contacts for On and Off as desired They need not necessarily be next to one another 1 5 Pole Triggering dw5polig 020211 01 tif 1 en_US Figure 8 22 1 5 Pole Triggering Control Functions 8 2 Switching Devices SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Protection Manual 1101 C53000 G5040 C017 8 Edition 07 2017 ...

Page 1102: ...1 5 Pole Triggering Routing in DIGSI 2 Pole Triggering dw2polan 020211 01 tif 1 en_US Figure 8 24 2 Pole Triggering Control Functions 8 2 Switching Devices 1102 SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Protection Manual C53000 G5040 C017 8 Edition 07 2017 ...

Page 1103: ...eedback moni toring time 0 01 s to 1800 00 s 10 00 s _ 4201 104 Control Check switching authority no yes yes _ 4201 105 Control Check if pos is reached no yes yes _ 4201 106 Control Check double activat blk no yes yes Disconnector _ 5401 101 Disconnector Maximum output time 0 01 s to 1800 00 s 10 00 s _ 5401 102 Disconnector Seal in time 0 00 s to 60 00 s 0 00 s _ 5401 103 Disconnector Switching d...

Page 1104: ...witching authority ENS O _ 4201 314 Control Switching mode ENS O Interlocking _ 4231 500 Interlocking Enable opening SPS I _ 4231 501 Interlocking Enable closing SPS I _ 4231 502 Interlocking Enable opening fixed SPS I _ 4231 503 Interlocking Enable closing fixed SPS I _ 4231 53 Interlocking Health ENS O Disconnector _ 5401 500 Disconnector Acquisition blocking SPS I _ 5401 501 Disconnector Reset ...

Page 1105: ...ng settings The confirmation ID is requested before device parameters can be changed Operation function buttons Process data access via function buttons Access to process data is possible with the help of push buttons and function buttons The confirma tion ID of Set operation is requested Control process General release for control of switching devices The confirmation ID is usually not needed for...

Page 1106: ...CFC is checked before the command is output You can change the switching mode with the key switch S1 interlocking off normal For devices without a key switch you can change the switching mode with a corresponding menu item on the display after entering a confirmation ID You can also set the switching mode for switching commands from the sources DIGSI station or remote DANGER If the switching mode ...

Page 1107: ... on the device for command output no commands from other command sources or a different DIGSI PC will be executed Station This switching authority level can be activated via a parameter in the General function block A switching command from the station level cause of error source Station or Automatic station is accepted if the switching authority is set to Remote and the controllable Station switc...

Page 1108: ...n and the switching authority In the case of switching commands from Remote the information on whether a locked or non interlocked switching should take place is also sent For this reason the position of the key switch is irrelevant for the switching mode in these cases The information in the table assumes that in the case of remote switching commands or those from the station the switching mode i...

Page 1109: ... link the input signals and in this way establish the output signals see Figure 8 29 and Figure 8 30 dwhoheit 260511 01 tif 1 en_US Figure 8 29 Establishing Switching Authority dwmodsch 020513 01 tif 1 en_US Figure 8 30 Establishing Switching Mode In the case of both functions the input signals overwrite the state of the key switch This allows external inputs to also set the switching authority or...

Page 1110: ...fic Switching Authority Page 1111 By default these are not used scakthoh 161014 1 en_US Figure 8 31 How to Activate the Station Switching Authority and to Enable Several Switching Authority Levels Table 8 19 Effect on Switching Authority when Several Switching Authority Levels Are Enabled with without Activation of the Station Switching Authority Release Several Switching Authority Levels Switchin...

Page 1111: ...kes it possible to differentiate the Remote command sources at the bay level Switching authority can be routed to or revoked from different control centers that can for example belong to different companies Thus precisely one of these command sources can switch at a certain time This function is based on extending the switching authority check by verifying the identifier of the command source fiel...

Page 1112: ...used Table 8 21 Result Derived from the Combination of the Parameter Value Specific sw auth valid for and the Level of the Command Source Field Originator orCat of the Switching Command Command Source Specific sw auth valid for station station remote remote Local local automatic No check No check No check Station station automatic Check Check No check Remote remote auto matic No check Check Check ...

Page 1113: ...ws how to determine the resulting specific switching authority when activating the command sources of Remote or Station If this parameter is activated all parameterized command sources get permissible automatically see last row in the table and they cannot be deactivated via the controllable Enable sw auth 1 to Enable sw auth 5 Otherwise the enabled command source with the lowest number has always...

Page 1114: ...dual switching modes for single switching devices Therefore individual switching devices can accept various switching authorities and switching modes simulta neously This is offered for the following function groups and function blocks Circuit breaker function group Disconnector function group Transformer tap changer function group Switching sequence function block This allows to select individual...

Page 1115: ...ice sc_extended parameters sw authority sw device 1 en_US Figure 8 35 Expanded Parameters for the Switching Authority in the Switching Device sc_switching auth sw mode changeable 1 en_US Figure 8 36 Individually Modifiable Switching Authority and Switching Mode for Switching Devices The new input signals that are displayed allow you to set the individual switching authority and switching mode for ...

Page 1116: ...ority Modifiable for each Switching Device Switching Direction Set Actual With this check you avoid switching a switching device into a state that has already been achieved For instance before a trip command is issued to a circuit breaker its current position is determined If this circuit breaker is already in the Off position no command is issued This is logged accordingly Switchgear Interlocking...

Page 1117: ...tchgear interlocking checks take place if no CFC charts have been prepared scverrie 260912 01 tif 1 en_US Figure 8 39 Interlocking Signals in Function Block Interlocking EXAMPLE For interlocking For the making direction of the circuit breaker QA in bay E01 see the figure below it is necessary to check whether the disconnectors QB1 QB2 and QB9 are in the defined position that is either On or Off Op...

Page 1118: ... figure scverpla 270511 01 tif 1 en_US Figure 8 41 Interlocking Chart for Bay Interlocking Since the Disconnector function block provides the defined position On or Off the exclusive OR gate XOR is not necessary for interlocking A simple OR suffices Control Functions 8 3 Control Functionality 1118 SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Protection Manual C53000 G5040 C017 8 Edition 07 2017 ...

Page 1119: ...k at the end If the 2 busbars in bay E01 are connected that is if the 2 disconnectors QB1 and QB2 in bay E01 are closed the circuit breaker QA in bay E02 is not allowed to be switched off Accordingly bay E01 in the CFC of the device generates the indication Bus coupler closed from the positions of the switches QB1 and QB2 and using IEC 61850 GOOSE transmits it to bay E02 in the device You must the...

Page 1120: ...IEC 61850 GOOSE This signal is available under Position in every Circuit breaker or Disconnector function block in the switching device function groups see figure below scnotselected 090315_de 1 en_US Figure 8 45 Signal Not selected in the Circuit Breaker Function Block The signal is then queried in the CFC interlocking conditions for the associated switching devices and is used to generate the re...

Page 1121: ...k Blocking by protection function for disconnectors use the following indications if present in your interlocking conditions Group indication Pickup Function group Line Circuit breaker failure protection Pickup Circuit breaker failure protection General In progress Automatic reclosing function Command Logging All commands in the sequence are logged The command log contains Date and time Name of th...

Page 1122: ...US Figure 8 46 Positive Case Display 1 scposca2 070411 01 tif 1 en_US Figure 8 47 Positive Case Display 2 Control Functions 8 3 Control Functionality 1122 SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Protection Manual C53000 G5040 C017 8 Edition 07 2017 ...

Page 1123: ...ve Case with Command Cancellation scnegint 070411 01 tif 1 en_US Figure 8 49 Negative Case Blocked by Switchgear Interlocking Control Functions 8 3 Control Functionality SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Protection Manual 1123 C53000 G5040 C017 8 Edition 07 2017 ...

Page 1124: ...of Feedback Supervision Time Display 1 scnegti2 070411 01 tif 1 en_US Figure 8 51 Negative Case Expiration of Feedback Supervision Time Display 2 Control Functions 8 3 Control Functionality 1124 SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Protection Manual C53000 G5040 C017 8 Edition 07 2017 ...

Page 1125: ...C Desired value Command execution and termination CMT Actual value Spontaneous change SPN Actual value Settings Addr Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting Control _ 101 Control Control model status only direct w normal secur SBO w normal secur direct w enh security SBO w enh security SBO w enh security _ 102 Control SBO time out 0 01 s to 1800 00 s 30 00 s _ 103 Control Feedback moni toring ...

Page 1126: ...107 Control Check blk by protection no yes yes Information List No Information Data Class Type Type Control _ 53 Control Health ENS O _ 58 Control Cmd with feedback DPC C 8 3 4 Control Functions 8 3 Control Functionality 1126 SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Protection Manual C53000 G5040 C017 8 Edition 07 2017 ...

Page 1127: ...ing to dead line busbar Structure of the Function The Synchronization function is used in the Circuit breaker function group The following stage types can be used within the function Synchrocheck stage Synchronous asynchronous stage The Synchrocheck and Synchronous Asynchronous Sychr Asycr stage types are preconfigured at the factory In addition the stage type Extended delta f options are availabl...

Page 1128: ...it breaker function group can be configured see chapter 2 1 Function Embedding in the Device The selection of the voltages used for the synchronization depends on the device connection to the primary system Connection of the primary system via 4 voltage inputs and hence use of a 1 phase and a 3 phase meas uring point Figure 8 54 and Figure 8 56 The voltage connected to the 1 phase measuring point ...

Page 1129: ...sbar Connection via 4 Voltage Inputs dwsyns02 210912 01 tif 1 en_US Figure 8 55 Synchronization of Line and Busbar Connection via 6 Voltage Inputs Control Functions 8 4 Synchronization Function SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Protection Manual 1129 C53000 G5040 C017 8 Edition 07 2017 ...

Page 1130: ... V2 V1 A positive sign means that the voltage V2 is greater than the voltage V1 In other cases the sign is negative Differential frequency df f2 f1 A positive result means that according to the example from Figure 8 54 the busbar frequency is greater than the line frequency Phase angle difference dα α2 α1 The representation is limited to 180o A positive result means that α2 leads by a maximum of 1...

Page 1131: ...voltage diff V2 V1 the inequality V2 V1 applies It corresponds to a negative dV The procedure is the same for the differential frequency and differential phase angle General Functionality Description Overview of a Synchronization Stage Sync Stage A synchronization stage can be integrated in the following blocks see Figure 8 58 Stage control with mode state control standby and blocking description ...

Page 1132: ...ization function is deleted the circuit breaker is no longer regarded as subject to compulsory synchronization In this case it is possible to activate via the control without synchronization If more than one synchronization stage is switched on then the Selection signal must be active for exactly one stage so that it can be activated via the controls You can block the entire synchronization stage ...

Page 1133: ...ecific parameters Definite threshold value settings are checked after a parameter change If there is an inconsistency the error message Setting error is set For multiple selection of the stage at the start time of the synchronization If there is a simultaneous selection of multiple closed synchronization stages at the start time the error message Multiple selection is set Measuring Voltage Failure...

Page 1134: ...a synchroni zation point are included in each synchronization stage If you have to synchronize with different synchronization conditions parameter settings several synchroniza tion stages are used for a synchronization point circuit breaker In this case you must define which of the synchronization stages is currently active via the binary signal Selection synchronization stage x The closing condit...

Page 1135: ...h posi tion If galvanically coupled systems are switched in parallel synchronous systems are present A typical characteristic for synchronous systems is equality of frequency Δf 0 In this state the conditions Δα and ΔV are checked If the systems are galvanically isolated asynchronous systems can be present At the same time compliance with the voltage difference ΔV and frequency difference Δf condi...

Page 1136: ...his time If the conditions are not fulfilled no further closing release takes place and the synchronization stage is stopped If this time is set to the conditions are checked until they are fulfilled This is also the default setting Observe the operating conditions when defining the time limitation This must be defined specifically for each system If 0 or 0 01 s is set then all conditions are chec...

Page 1137: ... the voltage connection V1 is on the lower voltage side due to the system you then have to apply the exten sion angle with 360o A transformer with vector group 5 yields an angular adjustment of 360o 5 30o 210o 2 Correction of phase angle errors You can correct a phase angle error between the voltage transformers in increments Ascertain a possible correction value during commissioning Parameter CB ...

Page 1138: ... yes no _ 5041 126 Sychr Asycr 1 Voltage adjustment 0 500 to 2 000 1 000 Dynamic Measuring Point Switching Dynamic measuring point switching provides the capability to connect the voltages used in the Synchro check function to various measuring points In this way for example it is possible to use the correct voltage on the basis of the switch position on the switching devices If more than 1 measur...

Page 1139: ...t IDs If more than one measuring point is connected to interfaces Vsync1 or Vsync2 of the Circuit breaker function group the V sync select function block has to be removed from the library in the Circuit breaker function group A CFC logic see following example has to define IDs for the V sync1 or V sync2 inputs of this function block in order to ensure the correct measuring point connection for th...

Page 1140: ...encies are in the operating range see section 8 4 4 1 Description If this is not the case the closing conditions are not checked Checking the Closing Conditions Closure After starting the parameterized closing conditions are checked depending on the operating mode selected see Chapter 8 4 8 1 Description to 8 4 11 Direct Close Command Every condition fulfilled is explicitly indi cated here Conditi...

Page 1141: ...conditions are bypassed by the direct close command End of the Process If the function is started via the device internal controller or AREC these functions also terminate the synchro nization process upon closure The process is terminated via the corresponding binary signals in case of external starting If the supervision time Max durat sync process parameter has expired the process is also compl...

Page 1142: ...ference OK If a condition is not fulfilled detailed information on why the condition is not fulfilled is provided via indica tions If the differential voltage is outside the setting limits for example the indication V dif too large V2 V1 is issued The indication indirectly contains information that the voltage V2 has to be increased for a successful synchronization With the Expanded delta f option...

Page 1143: ...alues are selected in the default setting Depending on the system the settings must be checked and adjusted if necessary Settings Addr Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting General _ 5071 1 Synchrocheck 1 Mode off on test off _ 5071 101 Synchrocheck 1 Min operating limit Vmin 0 300 V to 340 000 V 90 000 V _ 5071 102 Synchrocheck 1 Max operat limit Vmax 0 300 V to 340 000 V 110 000 V _ 5071 1...

Page 1144: ...dir cls cmd SPS I _ 5071 501 Synchrocheck 1 Block close command SPS I _ 5071 54 Synchrocheck 1 Inactive SPS O _ 5071 52 Synchrocheck 1 Behavior ENS O _ 5071 53 Synchrocheck 1 Health ENS O _ 5071 328 Synchrocheck 1 In progress SPS O _ 5071 324 Synchrocheck 1 Release close cmd SPS O _ 5071 305 Synchrocheck 1 All sync conditio OK SPS O _ 5071 325 Synchrocheck 1 Voltage difference OK SPS O _ 5071 326 ...

Page 1145: ...reshold ASYN SYN parameter asynchronous systems are to be assumed This status occurs in galvanically isolated systems for example Both states have their own operating mode with its own closing conditions Both operating modes can be switched on and off separately parameter Sync operating mode and Async operating mode The following combinations result from this Sync operating mode Async operating mo...

Page 1146: ...filled is signaled individually via the indications Voltage difference OK and Angle difference OK If a condition is not fulfilled detailed information on why the condition is not fulfilled is provided via indica tions If the differential voltage is outside the setting limits for example the indication V dif too large V2 V1 is issued The indication indirectly contains information that the voltage V...

Page 1147: ... 110211 01 tif 1 en_US Figure 8 66 Connecting Under Synchronous System Conditions Control Functions 8 4 Synchronization Function SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Protection Manual 1147 C53000 G5040 C017 8 Edition 07 2017 ...

Page 1148: ...er ence Δα and the closing time of the circuit breaker This is calculated so that the voltage phasors are equal at the moment of pole contact by the circuit breaker ΔV 0 Δα 0 Ranges in the Voltage Frequency Diagram V f Diagram Figure 8 68 shows the setting parameters for synchronous and asynchronous conditions in the V f diagram The frequency range is very narrow owing to the functional principle ...

Page 1149: ...the parameters The operating modes are deactivated in the default setting for safety reasons The following combination options are possible Sync operating mode Async operating mode Description on on If the frequency difference is below the threshold value set f threshold ASYN SYN the oper ating mode synchronous is active In other cases the operating mode asynchronous is active If you wish to inter...

Page 1150: ...41 116 Max voltage diff V2 V1 2 0 V Default setting _ 5041 117 Max frequency diff f2 f1 0 10 Hz Default setting _ 5041 118 Max frequency diff f2 f1 0 10 Hz For information see Parameter for synchronous operation Parameter for synchronous operation Maximum voltage diff of voltage and angle Default setting _ 5041 122 Max voltage diff V2 V1 5 0 V Default setting _ 5041 123 Max voltage diff V2 V1 5 0 ...

Page 1151: ...r Asycr 1 Close cmd at V1 V2 no yes no _ 5041 103 Sychr Asycr 1 V1 V2 without voltage 0 300 V to 170 000 V 5 000 V _ 5041 104 Sychr Asycr 1 V1 V2 with voltage 0 300 V to 340 000 V 80 000 V _ 5041 109 Sychr Asycr 1 Supervi sion time 0 00 s to 60 00 s 0 10 s Asynchr op mode _ 5041 114 Sychr Asycr 1 Async operating mode off on on _ 5041 113 Sychr Asycr 1 CB make time 0 01 s to 0 60 s 0 06 s _ 5041 11...

Page 1152: ...1 Behavior ENS O _ 5041 53 Sychr Asycr 1 Health ENS O _ 5041 328 Sychr Asycr 1 In progress SPS O _ 5041 324 Sychr Asycr 1 Release close cmd SPS O _ 5041 305 Sychr Asycr 1 All sync conditio OK SPS O _ 5041 303 Sychr Asycr 1 State f synchronous SPS O _ 5041 325 Sychr Asycr 1 Voltage difference OK SPS O _ 5041 326 Sychr Asycr 1 Angle difference OK SPS O _ 5041 327 Sychr Asycr 1 Frequency diff OK SPS ...

Page 1153: ...The release checks for both stage types take these additional upper limits into consideration Both activation parameters _ 140 Limit dfdiff dt for sync op and _ 142 Limit dfdiff dt for asyn op and the upper limits parameters _ 141 Max value dfdiff dt syn and _ 143 Max value dfdiff dt asyn for the frequency change rate are adjustable selectively for synchronous and asynchronous conditions Both stag...

Page 1154: ...onous networks occurs after one second at the earliest This time is needed to smooth the frequency measured values The actual frequency can be larger or smaller than the smoothed value at any instant The Max diff f threshold parameter makes it possible to limit the increase in instantaneous frequency value in relation to the respective frequency threshold value Closing at De Energized Line Busbar ...

Page 1155: ...ease for closure if Close cmd at V1 V2 or Close cmd at V1 V2 has been fulfilled losyn003 160311 01 tif 1 en_US Figure 8 70 Release Conditions for Switching to De Energized Line Busbar The indications Cond V1 V2 fulfilled Cond V1 V2 fulfilled and Cond V1 V2 fulfilled indicate that the relevant conditions are fulfilled You can use the Supervision time parameter to set a supervision time for which th...

Page 1156: ...etting value _ 5071 106 Close cmd at V1 V2 no Settings Description no No release for closing is possible via this operating mode yes If part V1of the power system is energized and part V2 of the power system is de energized the release for closure is given upon starting the synchronization stage after the supervision time has passed The setting depends on the operational requirements Note the abov...

Page 1157: ...recommends leaving the setting atno If a direct close command is necessary Siemens recommends only using this operating mode dynamically via the binary input signal Op mode dir cls cmd see also Figure 8 72 This prevents this operating mode from being incorrectly acti vated statically thereby resulting in an incorrect switching Direct Close Command You can activate the operating mode direct close c...

Page 1158: ...e control which closes the circuit breaker and then stops and synchronization function losynaw1 310111 01 tif 1 en_US Figure 8 72 Interaction of the Control with the Synchronization Function With Automatic Reclosing The automatic reclosing mechanism AREC can also work with the synchronization function Both functions are always located in a function group Circuit breaker Consequently the AREC and s...

Page 1159: ...c tions The start is followed by the functional sequence see chapter 8 4 6 Sequence of Functions If the conditions are fulfilled the output signal Release close cmd is issued The switched object QAx of the function group Circuit breaker is not closed The output signal Release close cmd must be explicitly assigned to the binary output in order to close the circuit breaker losynaw3 160311 01 tif 1 e...

Page 1160: ... External synchronization function block integrates the external synchronization into command processing so that the corresponding feedback can be forwarded to the command source If a circuit breaker close command with a synchronization requirement is present the external synchroniza tion device is started After successfully checking the synchronization conditions the close command is issued from ...

Page 1161: ...ntrol function group You can instantiate only 1 External synchronization function block within these function groups at a time scextsyn 041116 01 1 en_US Figure 8 77 Instantiating the External Synchronization Function Block in the Circuit Breaker Function Group It is not possible to jointly instantiate the External synchronization function block with the 25 synchroniza tion function in the same Ci...

Page 1162: ...nchronization device you can also close the circuit breaker directly without considering the synchronization conditions To do this activate the input signal Op mode dir cls cmd or the parameter _ 110 Direct close command The close command is then issued directly by the bay controller Application and Setting Notes External Synchronization Parameter Mode Default setting _ 1 Mode on With the Mode par...

Page 1163: ...to 340 000 V 80 000 V _ 109 Syn Asy bal Supervi sion time 0 00 s to 60 00 s 0 10 s Asynchr op mode _ 114 Syn Asy bal Async operating mode off on off _ 113 Syn Asy bal CB make time 0 01 s to 0 60 s 0 06 s _ 115 Syn Asy bal Max voltage diff V2 V1 0 000 V to 170 000 V 2 000 V _ 116 Syn Asy bal Max voltage diff V2 V1 0 000 V to 170 000 V 2 000 V _ 117 Syn Asy bal Max frequency diff f2 f1 0 000 Hz to 4...

Page 1164: ... _ 142 Syn Asy bal T f pulse min 0 01 s to 1 00 s 0 10 s _ 143 Syn Asy bal T f pulse max 0 01 s to 60 00 s 1 00 s _ 144 Syn Asy bal df dt of the controller 0 05 Hz s to 5 00 Hz s 1 00 Hz s _ 145 Syn Asy bal T pause f 0 10 s to 60 00 s 5 00 s _ 146 Syn Asy bal Δf set point for balancing 1 00 Hz to 1 00 Hz 0 04 Hz _ 147 Syn Asy bal Smoothing 1 to 100 1 _ 148 Syn Asy bal T close without balancing 1 0...

Page 1165: ... 1 Synchrocheck 1 Mode off on test off _ 5071 101 Synchrocheck 1 Min oper ating limit Vmin 0 300 V to 340 000 V 90 000 V _ 5071 102 Synchrocheck 1 Max operat limit Vmax 0 300 V to 340 000 V 110 000 V _ 5071 110 Synchrocheck 1 Max durat sync process 0 00 s to 3600 00 s 30 00 s _ 5071 108 Synchrocheck 1 Direct close command no yes no _ 5071 126 Synchrocheck 1 Voltage adjustment 0 500 to 2 000 1 000 ...

Page 1166: ...r Asycr 1 Max durat sync process 0 00 s to 3600 00 s 30 00 s _ 5041 108 Sychr Asycr 1 Direct close command no yes no _ 5041 126 Sychr Asycr 1 Voltage adjustment 0 500 to 2 000 1 000 De en gized switch _ 5041 105 Sychr Asycr 1 Close cmd at V1 V2 no yes no _ 5041 106 Sychr Asycr 1 Close cmd at V1 V2 no yes no _ 5041 107 Sychr Asycr 1 Close cmd at V1 V2 no yes no _ 5041 103 Sychr Asycr 1 V1 V2 withou...

Page 1167: ...t limitation _ 140 Adv options Limit dfdiff dt for sync op 0 1 false _ 141 Adv options Max value dfdiff dt syn 0 010 Hz sto 0 025 Hz s 0 010 Hz s _ 142 Adv options Limit dfdiff dt for asyn op 0 1 false _ 143 Adv options Max value dfdiff dt asyn 0 050 Hz sto 0 500 Hz s 0 050 Hz s Frequ oscillations _ 150 Adv options Suppr frequ oscillations 0 1 false _ 151 Adv options Max diff f threshold 0 000 Hzt...

Page 1168: ...nchrocheck 1 Cond V1 V2 fulfilled SPS O _ 5071 309 Synchrocheck 1 Frequency f1 fmax SPS O _ 5071 310 Synchrocheck 1 Frequency f1 fmin SPS O _ 5071 311 Synchrocheck 1 Frequency f2 fmax SPS O _ 5071 312 Synchrocheck 1 Frequency f2 fmin SPS O _ 5071 313 Synchrocheck 1 Voltage V1 Vmax SPS O _ 5071 314 Synchrocheck 1 Voltage V1 Vmin SPS O _ 5071 315 Synchrocheck 1 Voltage V2 Vmax SPS O _ 5071 316 Synch...

Page 1169: ...led SPS O _ 5041 308 Sychr Asycr 1 Cond V1 V2 fulfilled SPS O _ 5041 309 Sychr Asycr 1 Frequency f1 fmax SPS O _ 5041 310 Sychr Asycr 1 Frequency f1 fmin SPS O _ 5041 311 Sychr Asycr 1 Frequency f2 fmax SPS O _ 5041 312 Sychr Asycr 1 Frequency f2 fmin SPS O _ 5041 313 Sychr Asycr 1 Voltage V1 Vmax SPS O _ 5041 314 Sychr Asycr 1 Voltage V1 Vmin SPS O _ 5041 315 Sychr Asycr 1 Voltage V2 Vmax SPS O _...

Page 1170: ...unction groups or in a user defined function group One Switching sequence function block is used per switching sequence The function block is the interface for controlling and monitoring the condition of the CFC switching sequence The task of the function block is to verify the relative conditions for control commands for example switching authority interlocking condi tions etc You can connect the...

Page 1171: ...lay page Input Cancel during rising edge for example via binary input Controllable Cancel for the cancelation via a communication protocol for example IEC 61850 T103 or DNP Input Cancel via a function key Controllable Cancel via a function key On Site Operation If at least one Switching sequence function block is used in the device a new Switching sequences entry is shown in the first line of the ...

Page 1172: ...s With the Check double activat blk parameter you can determine whether the double activation of switching devices should be checked The setting value yes indicates that a switching sequence will be started only if no switching commands for a circuit breaker and disconnector are activated provided that double activation blocking was activated for those switching devices Parameter Time out monitori...

Page 1173: ...ss of the switching mode If the time out monitoring is activated parameter Time out monitoring the process feedback must take place via the inputs Successful and Failed If the last switching command of the switching sequence was executed successfully the input Successful usually is set To do this connect the feedback of the last switching command from the CFC with this input of the function block ...

Page 1174: ...should switch off feeder bay C4 The circuit breaker is opened followed by opening of one of the 2 busbar disconnectors Scssc4as 110913 01 1 en_US Figure 8 84 CFC Switching Sequence C4 Off Control Functions 8 5 Switching Sequences 1174 SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Protection Manual C53000 G5040 C017 8 Edition 07 2017 ...

Page 1175: ...ation of the OK outputs for the disconnectors QB1 and QB2 is sufficient The feedback of all failed executions takes place via the OR operation of all ERR outputs of the switching devices The benefit of such assessment is the fact that in case of a failure waiting for the time out is not necessary but the active switching sequence can be ended immediately In this example the use of the EN_I input o...

Page 1176: ...15 Swi seq Specific sw auth valid for station station remote remote station remote _ 153 Swi seq Num of specific sw auth 2 to 5 2 _ 154 Swi seq Multiple specific sw auth 0 1 false Information List No Information Data Class Type Type Swi seq _ 501 Swi seq Enable start SPS I _ 502 Swi seq Enable start fixed SPS I _ 503 Swi seq Start SPS I _ 504 Swi seq Cancel SPS I _ 505 Swi seq Successful SPS I _ 5...

Page 1177: ...te every user defined signal for example SPS DPC INC in the function block and route the corresponding indications see following figure scbenutz 1 en_US Figure 8 85 Information Routing with Inserted User Defined Function Block Control Process Indications and Some Individual Indications Application and Setting Notes The function block contains the parameters _ 104 Check switching authority _ 105 Ch...

Page 1178: ...heck swi auth for Mode Default setting _ 150 Check swi auth for Mode no With the Check swi auth for Mode parameter you specify whether the switching authority for the command source must be checked when switching the controllable Mode controllable to the mode On Off or Test If you set the parameter Check swi auth for Mode to yes the switching command is only executed with appropriate switching aut...

Page 1179: ...ltiple specific sw auth 0 1 false Information List No Information Data Class Type Type U def FB ctl _ 503 U def FB ctl Sw authority local SPS I _ 504 U def FB ctl Sw authority remote SPS I _ 505 U def FB ctl Sw mode interlocked SPS I _ 506 U def FB ctl Sw mode non interl SPS I _ 51 U def FB ctl Mode controllable ENC C _ 52 U def FB ctl Behavior ENS O _ 53 U def FB ctl Health ENS O _ 302 U def FB c...

Page 1180: ... functions folder Drag and drop the desired function block into a func tion group or a function Set the appropriate parameter value of the function block in DIGSI using the param eter editor or via HMI under the Settings menu item You can then use the parameter as an input signal in CFC charts i i NOTE The user defined function groups and the user defined functions can be used to group the CFC cha...

Page 1181: ...untime of the CFC chart Settings Addr Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting Chrt sett Bool _ 105 Chrt sett Bool Value 0 1 false Addr Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting Chart setting Int _ 105 Chart setting Int Value 2147483648 to 2147483647 10 Addr Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting Chrt sett real _ 105 Chrt sett real Value 10000000000 000 to 10000000000 000 100 000 Informa...

Page 1182: ...ontroller is controlled by the function group Tap changer which you can select from the DIGSI library group Switching devices sc_tssdig 1 en_US Figure 8 88 Tap Changer Functionality in the DIGSI Information Matrix The central element is the Controllable Position of type BSC Binary Controlled Step Position Information based on IEC 61850 You connect this Controllable in the matrix to the desired num...

Page 1183: ...ls To use the function keys you create 2 user defined single point indications SPS These are used for the func tion keys for example F1 Higher function key and F2 Lower function key and as the input signals for the appropriate CFC blocks In addition you must use the controllable Cmd with feedback for the CFC chart Control Functions 8 8 Transformer Tap Changers SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Protection Man...

Page 1184: ... for checking the proper operation of the tap changer mechanism The Tap changer function calculates the next logical tap position as a result of the higher lower command The time of position detection is determined as a function of the availability of the motor sliding contact After resetting the active motor sliding contact the Tap changer function reads the new tap position value If the value fo...

Page 1185: ...ate Warning Executing tap changer commands is still possible You can reset the health state of alarm block or warning manually using the controllable Reset errors Main menu Device functions Reset functions Tap changer As an alternative to this you can also switch off the supervision function and then switch it on again Operating Meter The device counts the number of successfully completed adjustin...

Page 1186: ... the motor sliding contact Parameter Check switching authority Default setting _ 104 Check switching authority yes With the Check switching authority parameter you specify whether the switching authority on site remote is checked in case of an adjusting command see also chapter 8 3 1 Command Checks and Switch gear Interlocking Protection Parameter Control model Default setting _ 108 Control model ...

Page 1187: ...n behavior alarm block You can select whether the supervision is switched off off or if only a warning is indicated warning With the alarm block setting an alarm indication is generated and the function is blocked Parameter Motor supervision time Default setting _ 113 Motor supervision time 10 s After the motor supervision time has elapsed the indication Motor sup time expired is displayed Additio...

Page 1188: ...offset Parameter Tap display offset Default setting Tap display offset 0 If you want to move the height of the displayed value in a positive or the negative direction with respect to the height of the actual value enter the value for this in the Tap display offset field Parameter Number of bits f tap code Default setting Number of bits f tap code 4 With the Number of bits f tap code parameter you ...

Page 1189: ...coding is in binary Table 8 25 Routing of the Binary Inputs Tap Coding Type binary Example BI1 BI2 BI3 BI4 BI5 BI6 Tap changer X X X X Meaning Bit 1 Bit 2 Bit 3 Moving contact Tap 1 1 0 0 With 3 binary inputs a maximum of 23 1 7 tap positions can be mapped in binary code If all routed binary inputs indicate 0 this is interpreted as a connection error and is reported by Position or 64 with quality ...

Page 1190: ...hest binary input Yes Individual Tap Coding Type table With the table parameter setting you can specify an individual Tap coding type In the Representation of encoding section select the number system in which your code table entries will take place alternatively Binary 2 characters Octal 8 characters Decimal 10 characters Hexadecimal 16 characters The selected option is valid for all inputs in th...

Page 1191: ...3 to 3 The encoding uses BCD signed Table 8 27 Routing of the Binary Inputs Tap Coding Type BCD signed Example BI1 BI2 BI3 BI4 BI5 BI6 Tap changer X X X Meaning BCD 1 BCD 2 Sign Tap 1 1 0 1 Using 3 binary inputs a maximum of 7 tap positions can be mapped with the tap coding type of BCD signed This yields the number of tap positions from 3 to 3 If all routed binary inputs indicate 0 this is recogni...

Page 1192: ...tamp before filtering Default setting Indication timestamp before filtering no With this parameter you specify whether the hardware filtering time is accounted for in the time stamp of position capture Parameter Chatter blocking Default setting Chatter blocking no With this parameter you switch Chatter blocking on or off Settings Addr Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting Tap changer _ 104 T...

Page 1193: ...changer Position BSC C _ 305 Tap changer Higher command SPS O _ 306 Tap changer Lower command SPS O _ 307 Tap changer Command active SPS O _ 309 Tap changer Motor sup time expired SPS O _ 310 Tap changer Trigger motor prot sw SPS O _ 311 Tap changer Position failure SPS O _ 312 Tap changer Op ct INS O _ 319 Tap changer Reset failure SPC C 8 8 4 Control Functions 8 8 Transformer Tap Changers SIPROT...

Page 1194: ... the upper voltage side and the low voltage side of the transformer to block the controller during impermissible operating states overcurrent undercurrent undervoltage The voltage controller function also has limiting values that in special operating cases suppress higher commands in the case of overvoltage and lower commands in the case of undervoltage Structure of the Function The Two winding tr...

Page 1195: ...former taps cause the voltage to change The Voltage control function is intended to control transformers with motor operated transformer tap changers This function is designed to control the following For two winding transformers 2W the voltage on the secondary circuit of the power transformer For three winding transformers 3W the voltage of the secondary winding 1 or winding 2 For grid coupling t...

Page 1196: ...int The following figures show possible configurations of the voltage controller for two winding transformers with and without current measurement dwkonlst 060913 vsd 1 en_US Figure 8 98 Voltage Controller Constellation for Two Winding Transformers with Current Measurement for Load Compensation at the End of the Line 1 Only if a transformer side is present Control Functions 8 9 Voltage Controller ...

Page 1197: ... In the process the voltage to be controlled can be automatically selected via the load current of both sides or by using one parameter This parameter is the settings group switching via binary input protocol or function keys The uncontrolled voltage can be monitored in parallel to ensure that it remains within the defined voltage limits If a current measuring point is assigned to a function group...

Page 1198: ...onstellation for Three Winding Transformers with Current Measurement for Load Compensation at the End of the Line 1 Only if a transformer side is available Control Functions 8 9 Voltage Controller 1198 SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Protection Manual C53000 G5040 C017 8 Edition 07 2017 ...

Page 1199: ... 1 and winding 2 voltage measuring inputs V1 V2 and current measuring inputs I1 and I2 must be fed A voltage must be specified as a function of the load situation to the voltage controller as the control variable The voltages of the windings 1 and 2 of the grid coupling transformers are simultaneously monitored In the process you can select the voltage to be controlled using one parameter This par...

Page 1200: ... and lower adjusting commands are generated by the voltage controller The Check switching authority Control model SBO time out and Feedback monitoring time parameters are set only in the voltage controller You can find more information in chapter 8 9 4 Application and Setting Notes Voltage Controllers Voltage Controller The Voltage controller function controls the voltage within the bandwidth and ...

Page 1201: ... in one of the two windings is greater than the load current in the other winding by 5 of the rated current for 10 s then the winding voltage is controlled using the larger load current Grid Coupling Transformer Voltage Controller For the two winding transformer voltage controller the measurands that are used to manage the feedback control are permanently defined With the grid coupling transformer...

Page 1202: ...ual operation 2 Automatic operation 3 Controllable 4 Command In accordance with the IEC 61850 standard DOI LTCBlk Block automatic operation command automatic control can be blocked with a command Control Functions 8 9 Voltage Controller 1202 SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Protection Manual C53000 G5040 C017 8 Edition 07 2017 ...

Page 1203: ...l deviation Bandwidth To minimize the number of switching operations by the tap changer a permitted bandwidth is defined If the actual voltage is within the bandwidth no adjusting control commands are issued to the tap changer If the actual voltage exceeds the defined bandwidth an adjusting command is issued after the set time delay T1 delay If the actual voltage returns to the voltage range of th...

Page 1204: ...nverse characteristic curve is a function of the parameter T1 delay The characteristic curves arising for different settings of the time T1 delay are shown in chapter 8 9 4 Application and Setting Notes Voltage Controllers margin title Parameter T1 characteristic Control Response with Zero Potential or Voltage Recovery If the actual voltage is not within the defined bandwidth after a voltage recov...

Page 1205: ... 106 shows such a situation at point 4 A fast step down mode occurs until the bandwidth has been reached The tap position time between 2 consecutive lower adjusting commands results from the following 2 conditions The completion of a tap change command after the new valid position was detected The measurement time for capturing the new actual voltage The activity of the fast step down mode and the...

Page 1206: ...clude the voltage drop of a line connected to the transformer You can switch Z compensation on or off If cos φ is roughly constant you can use Z compensation Setting the parameters requires the calculation of the voltage increase Target voltage rising taking into consideration the load current Max load current The parameter Target voltage rising represents the voltage drop across the line as a und...

Page 1207: ... The following figure shows the effect of this compensation type dw line drop kompensation 250214 01 vsd 1 en_US Figure 8 110 Phasor Diagram of the X and R Compensation Vtransf Voltage on the transformer voltage to be controlled Vload Voltage of load point target voltage Vload Vtransf Vdrop Vdrop Voltage drop of the phase IR IX Voltage drop due to R and X of the line Control Functions 8 9 Voltage ...

Page 1208: ...cking functions are available Undervoltage Overcurrent load current Undercurrent External blocking binary input Blocking command LTCBlock IEC 61850 Blocking in the event of pickup of the transformer differential protection Using the parameter Blocking behavior you specify whether the blockings are to take effect only in auto matic operation Auto or in both automatic and manual operation Auto Manua...

Page 1209: ...the measured values for the two winding three winding and grid coupling transformers at any time The following 3 tables show you the measured values available Measured Values Two Winding Transformer Measured Value Description Primary Secondary Referenced to V act Current measured positive sequence voltage referenced to phase to phase kV V Target voltage of the primary system referenced to the rate...

Page 1210: ... the rated current of winding 1 I load w2 Load current of winding 2 A A Load current referenced to the rated current of winding 2 Vmax 1 Maximum voltage of winding 1 kV V Maximum voltage of winding 1 referenced to the rated voltage of winding 1 Vmax 2 Maximum voltage of winding 2 kV V Maximum voltage of winding 2 referenced to the rated voltage of winding 2 Vmin 1 Minimum voltage of winding 1 kV V...

Page 1211: ...r w1 Target voltage of winding 1 kV V Target voltage of winding 1 referenced to the rated voltage of winding 1 V tar w2 Target voltage of winding 2 kV V Target voltage of winding 2 referenced to the rated voltage of winding 2 The functional measured values Vmax 1 Vmax 2 Vmin 1 and Vmin 2 can be reset with the input indication Reset min max For the grid coupling transformer you can find the measure...

Page 1212: ...imary system 3 Vrated Irated Stotal Apparent power total power MVA VA Apparent power of the primary system 3 Vrated Irated Cos φ Active power factor abs abs 100 corresponds to cos φ 1 Application and Setting Notes Voltage Controllers Two Winding Transformer General Parameter Rated current Default setting _ 2311 101 Rated current 1000 00 A Parameter Rated voltage Default setting _ 2311 102 Rated vo...

Page 1213: ..._ 15601 157 Winding selection Winding 1 With the Winding selection parameter you specify whether the controller controls the voltage of Winding 1 or Winding 2 With the WithMaxLoad parameter the voltage to be controlled is selected auto matically depending on the load current With this method you can toggle using the parameter Winding selection or the controllable Automatic winding selection If the...

Page 1214: ...14011 160 Set point mode active on With the Set point mode active on parameter you can send a target voltage to the controller via a communication network The controller uses the specified voltage value as target voltage If the controller does not receive any valid voltage values it uses the original target voltage You can enable or disable the parameter For the three winding transformer the addre...

Page 1215: ...ary or in percent For the activation of the target voltage 1 to 4 via a binary input you need a CFC chart Parameter Target voltage 1 w1 Default setting _ 15601 112 Target voltage 1 w1 110 000 V Parameter Target voltage 1 w2 Default setting _ 15601 146 Target voltage 1 w2 110 000 V Parameter Target voltage 2 w1 Default setting _ 15601 165 Target voltage 2 w1 110 000 V Parameter Target voltage 2 w2 ...

Page 1216: ...t setting _ 16351 170 Target voltage 4 w2 110 000 V Voltage Controller Parameter Bandwidth Default setting _ 113 Bandwidth 1 0 With the Bandwidth parameter you specify the voltage range where no control action higher or lower is to occur at the Target voltage 1 If the actual voltage is outside the bandwidth referenced to the Target voltage 1 no correction takes place Calculation of the Bandwidth i...

Page 1217: ... characteristic you set the control response and using T1 delay you set a time delay In the Linear setting linear control response the control response is independent of the voltage deviation A constant time delay applies here In the Inverse setting inverse control response the time delay is a function of the voltage deviation refer enced to Target voltage 1 The greater the control deviation the f...

Page 1218: ...egulate with T2 at start Default setting _ 14011 155 Regulate with T2 at start on With the Regulate with T2 at start parameter you can activate a shorter time than T1 This can be necessary for controlling a voltage recovery or after switching on a transformer If voltage was not present beforehand this setting controls with the shorter time T2 when starting the control action You can switch this fu...

Page 1219: ...meter Power flow supervision Default setting _ 16351 162 Power flow supervision on With the Power flow supervision parameter you monitor the power flow You can switch the param eter on or off Line Compensation for the Two Winding Transformer Parameter Line drop compensation Default setting _ 14011 125 Line drop compensation off You can use the Line drop compensation parameter to select the correct...

Page 1220: ...n_US As an example calculate Xsec with the following parameters Current transformer ratio 1000 A 1 A Voltage transformer ratio 380 kV 0 1 kV Xprim 21 Ω Therefore the result for Xsec is Line Compensation for the Three Winding Transformer and Grid Coupling Transformer Parameter Line drop compensation Default setting _ 125 Line drop compensation off For setting the parameter Line drop compensation LD...

Page 1221: ...ontroller if the limiting value Vmax threshold is exceeded The undervoltage limit prevents a change to a lower tap by the controller if the voltage drops below the limiting value Vmin threshold Limiting Values for Three Winding Transformer and Grid Coupling Transformers Parameter Vmin threshold w1 Default setting _ 129 Vmin threshold w1 105 000 V Parameter Vmin threshold w2 Default setting _ 148 V...

Page 1222: ...s changing to a higher or lower tap Set the threshold value I Threshold in in relation to the rated current To do this set the parameter I reference for values Blockings for Three Winding Transformers and Grid Coupling Transformers Parameter V Threshold w1 Default setting _ 136 V Threshold w1 90 000 V Parameter V Threshold w2 Default setting _ 150 V Threshold w2 90 000 V Settings Two Winding Trans...

Page 1223: ...oltage 2 10 000 V to 340 000 V 110 000 V _ 14011 158 90V V contr 2w Target voltage 3 10 000 V to 340 000 V 110 000 V _ 14011 159 90V V contr 2w Target voltage 4 10 000 V to 340 000 V 110 000 V _ 14011 113 90V V contr 2w Band width 0 2 to 10 0 1 0 _ 14011 114 90V V contr 2w T1 char acteristic Linear Inverse Linear _ 14011 115 90V V contr 2w T1 delay 5 s to 600 s 40 s _ 14011 116 90V V contr 2w T1 I...

Page 1224: ...ntr 2w Vmin limiting off on on _ 14011 129 90V V contr 2w Vmin threshold 10 000 V to 340 000 V 105 000 V _ 14011 130 90V V contr 2w Vmin time delay 0 s to 20 s 10 s _ 14011 131 90V V contr 2w Vmax limiting off on on _ 14011 132 90V V contr 2w Vmax threshold 10 000 V to 340 000 V 115 000 V _ 14011 133 90V V contr 2w Vmax time delay 0 s to 20 s 10 s Blocking _ 14011 134 90V V contr 2w Blocking behav...

Page 1225: ... Tap changer Motor supervision time 5 s to 100 s 10 s _ 13981 116 Tap changer Highest tap changer pos Lowest voltage tap Highest voltage tap Lowest voltage tap _ 13981 114 Tap changer Lowest tap position 64 to 64 1 _ 13981 115 Tap changer Highest tap position 64 to 64 15 General _ 15601 1 90V V contr 3w Mode off on test on _ 15601 101 90V V contr 3w Oper ating mode Manual Auto Manual _ 15601 157 9...

Page 1226: ... 0 2 to 10 0 1 0 _ 15601 114 90V V contr 3w T1 char acteristic Linear Inverse Linear _ 15601 115 90V V contr 3w T1 delay 5 s to 600 s 40 s _ 15601 116 90V V contr 3w T1 Inverse Min 5 s to 100 s 5 s _ 15601 117 90V V contr 3w T2 delay 0 s to 100 s 5 s _ 15601 118 90V V contr 3w Fast step up off on off _ 15601 119 90V V contr 3w Fast step up limit 50 0 to 0 0 6 0 _ 15601 120 90V V contr 3w Fast step...

Page 1227: ...miting off on on _ 15601 129 90V V contr 3w Vmin threshold w1 10 000 V to 340 000 V 105 000 V _ 15601 148 90V V contr 3w Vmin threshold w2 10 000 V to 340 000 V 105 000 V _ 15601 130 90V V contr 3w Vmin time delay 0 s to 20 s 10 s _ 15601 131 90V V contr 3w Vmax limiting off on on _ 15601 132 90V V contr 3w Vmax threshold w1 10 000 V to 340 000 V 115 000 V _ 15601 149 90V V contr 3w Vmax threshold...

Page 1228: ...00 00 kV _ 2311 106 General Rated apparent power 1 00 MVA to 1 00 MVA 0 00 MVA Tap changer _ 13981 111 Tap changer Maximum output time 0 02 s to 1800 00 s 1 50 s _ 13981 112 Tap changer Supervision behavior off warning alarm block alarm block _ 13981 113 Tap changer Motor supervision time 5 s to 100 s 10 s _ 13981 116 Tap changer Highest tap changer pos Lowest voltage tap Highest voltage tap Lowes...

Page 1229: ...age 2 w2 10 000 V to 340 000 V 110 000 V _ 16351 169 90V V contr gc Target voltage 3 w2 10 000 V to 340 000 V 110 000 V _ 16351 170 90V V contr gc Target voltage 4 w2 10 000 V to 340 000 V 110 000 V _ 16351 113 90V V contr gc Band width 0 2 to 10 0 1 0 _ 16351 114 90V V contr gc T1 char acteristic Linear Inverse Linear _ 16351 115 90V V contr gc T1 delay 5 s to 600 s 40 s _ 16351 116 90V V contr g...

Page 1230: ...imit 128 to 127 1 _ 16351 103 90V V contr gc Higher tap position limit 128 to 127 15 _ 16351 128 90V V contr gc Vmin limiting off on on _ 16351 129 90V V contr gc Vmin threshold w1 10 000 V to 340 000 V 105 000 V _ 16351 148 90V V contr gc Vmin threshold w2 10 000 V to 340 000 V 105 000 V _ 16351 130 90V V contr gc Vmin time delay 0 s to 20 s 10 s _ 16351 131 90V V contr gc Vmax limiting off on on...

Page 1231: ...os reached SPS O _ 13981 302 Tap changer End lower pos reached SPS O _ 13981 308 Tap changer Position BALANCED SCORECARD C _ 13981 305 Tap changer Higher command SPS O _ 13981 306 Tap changer Lower command SPS O _ 13981 307 Tap changer Command active SPS O _ 13981 309 Tap changer Motor sup time expired SPS O _ 13981 310 Tap changer Trigger motor prot sw SPS O _ 13981 311 Tap changer Position failu...

Page 1232: ... 90V V contr 2w V max MV O _ 14011 324 90V V contr 2w V min MV O _ 14011 325 90V V contr 2w V target MV O _ 14011 354 90V V contr 2w Target voltage 1 SPC C _ 14011 355 90V V contr 2w Target voltage 2 SPC C _ 14011 356 90V V contr 2w Target voltage 3 SPC C _ 14011 357 90V V contr 2w Target voltage 4 SPC C _ 14011 358 90V V contr 2w Set target voltage APC C _ 14011 359 90V V contr 2w Block T1 SPC C ...

Page 1233: ...5601 357 90V V contr 3w Power flow superv SPS O _ 15601 310 90V V contr 3w Vmin Limiting w1 SPS O _ 15601 311 90V V contr 3w Vmin Limiting w2 SPS O _ 15601 312 90V V contr 3w Vmax Limiting w1 SPS O _ 15601 313 90V V contr 3w Vmax Limiting w2 SPS O _ 15601 314 90V V contr 3w Auto Blocking SPS O _ 15601 315 90V V contr 3w Manual Blocking SPS O _ 15601 316 90V V contr 3w V Blocking w1 SPS O _ 15601 3...

Page 1234: ...p changer Health ENS O _ 13981 301 Tap changer End higher pos reached SPS O _ 13981 302 Tap changer End lower pos reached SPS O _ 13981 308 Tap changer Position BALANCED SCORECARD C _ 13981 305 Tap changer Higher command SPS O _ 13981 306 Tap changer Lower command SPS O _ 13981 307 Tap changer Command active SPS O _ 13981 309 Tap changer Motor sup time expired SPS O _ 13981 310 Tap changer Trigger...

Page 1235: ... _ 16351 323 90V V contr gc I load w1 MV O _ 16351 324 90V V contr gc I load w2 MV O _ 16351 325 90V V contr gc Vmax 1 MV O _ 16351 326 90V V contr gc Vmax 2 MV O _ 16351 327 90V V contr gc Vmin 1 MV O _ 16351 328 90V V contr gc Vmin 2 MV O _ 16351 329 90V V contr gc V tar w1 MV O _ 16351 330 90V V contr gc V tar w2 MV O _ 16351 358 90V V contr gc Target voltage 1 w1 SPC C _ 16351 359 90V V contr ...

Page 1236: ...1236 SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Protection Manual C53000 G5040 C017 8 Edition 07 2017 ...

Page 1237: ...pervision of the Device Hardware 1288 9 5 Supervision of Device Firmware 1293 9 6 Supervision of Hardware Configuration 1294 9 7 Supervision of Communication Connections 1295 9 8 Error Responses and Corrective Measures 1296 9 9 Group Indications 1304 9 SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Protection Manual 1237 C53000 G5040 C017 8 Edition 07 2017 ...

Page 1238: ...rmware Supervision of hardware configuration Supervision of communication connections When the supervision functions pick up that will be displayed and also indicated Error responses are defined for the device The error responses are grouped in defect severities The supervision functions work selectively When the supervision functions pick up as far as possible only the affected parts of the hardw...

Page 1239: ...same real time requirements in groups A green display in front of an area see Figure 9 1 indicates that the response times of the functions grouped in this area can be maintained A red exclamation point indicates that functions may have longer response times than are specified in the Technical data for the device In such a case loading of the application into the device is blocked The following ta...

Page 1240: ...g voltage failure detection Add to or remove from transmission values via the protec tion communication Single point indications Measured values Other protec tion Protection functions with low requirements for fast operate times Adding or removing Overload protection functions Functions and stages of voltage protection All functions not listed previously CFC event trig gered standard GOOSE CFC cha...

Page 1241: ...y function group Function Points When you order a SIPROTEC 5 device you are also ordering a function points account for use of additional functions The following figure illustrates consumption of function points in the current application with respect to the existing function points account scfpunkt 141210 01 1 en_US Figure 9 2 Resource Overview Function Points Consumption The remaining white bar ...

Page 1242: ...ent Triggered task level shown in the following figure are sufficient for the required CFC functionality you do not need to use the Interlocking task level All CFC function blocks can be assigned to all the task levels There are no device specific function blocks If enough ticks are available all CFC charts can be created in the same task level A tick is the measure of the performance requirement ...

Page 1243: ...e than at all other tasks It is recommended to configure only very high priority logic functions at this task and to configure the other logic functions in any other level i i NOTE Empty CFC charts also consume system resources Empty charts that are not required any more should be deleted Supervision Functions 9 2 Resource Consumption Supervision SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Protection Manual 1243 C5300...

Page 1244: ...can go into a secure state A detailed description of the supervision mechanisms and their error responses can be found in the Function Description and as overall overview at the end of chapter 8 Measuring Voltage Failure Overview of Functions The Measuring voltage failure detection function monitors the voltage transformer secondary circuits Non connected transformers Pickup of the voltage transfo...

Page 1245: ...3 subfunctions see Figure 9 5 Supervision for unbalanced measuring voltage failure Supervision for 3 phase measuring voltage failure Supervision for switching onto a 3 phase measuring voltage failure lozusamm 100611 01 tif 2 en_US Figure 9 5 Breakdown of the Measuring Voltage Failure Detection Function Each subfunction creates its own monitoring indication The function summarizes these indications...

Page 1246: ...e sequence and positive sequence current In the event of 1 pole automatic reclosing the supervision is blocked Delay Seal In In the presence of a weak infeed current 10 of rated current certain protection functions require more time for detection of a system incident For this purpose the monitoring can be delayed using the Asym fail time delay parameter If a system incident is detected during the ...

Page 1247: ...ut When the voltage returns even as 1 phase the monitoring drops out Release by Phase Current When all phase currents exceed the threshold value 3ph fail phs curr release the monitoring is released Blocking in the Case of a System Incident In the case of a 3 phase system incident supervision must be blocked The device detects a 3 phase incident with a jump in the current This change is detected vi...

Page 1248: ...the threshold value 3ph fail VA VB VC The circuit breaker is detected to be in closed position The detection takes place either via the phase currents or via the 1 pole closed signal which is generated via the circuit breaker auxiliary contacts You can find more detailed information in chapter 5 8 5 Circuit Breaker Condition for the Protected Object A voltage jump such as in a 3 phase measuring vo...

Page 1249: ... you can reduce the time Parameter Asym fail DO on netw flt Recommended setting value _ 115 Asym fail DO on netw flt No Parameter Value Description no After elapse of the time delay the supervision function seals in Even if the system incident criterion is fulfilled the protection functions concerned will remain blocked This avoids an unselective tripping of the protection functions due to an abse...

Page 1250: ... Parameter Value Description on The subfunction Switching to a 3 phase measuring voltage failure is active In the case of low loads the subfunction for detection of a 3 phase meas uring voltage failure is not released for example because the current flow is too low In this situation the subfunction Switching to a 3 phase meas uring voltage failure can perform the monitoring task Siemens recommends...

Page 1251: ...m SPS O _ 301 Mes v fail det 3ph failure alarm SPS O _ 302 Mes v fail det SO 3ph failure alarm SPS O Signaling Voltage Supervision Overview of Functions Signaling voltage supervision is used to evaluate the validity of binary signals connected to the SIPROTEC device via binary inputs For this purpose one binary input is used to monitor the signaling voltage If the signaling voltage fails the assoc...

Page 1252: ...et the binary input used for signaling voltage supervision within one input output module using the setting option see the following figure This binary input monitors the presence of the signaling voltage If the signaling voltage fails this sets the quality attribute for all other binary inputs of the parameterized input output module to invalid The signal status of each of these binary inputs is ...

Page 1253: ...ion can be located on any input output module within the group defined in this manner If you have to monitor several binary inputs that for example work with different signaling voltages from different sources then you can also instantiate and configure several Supervision group function blocks within the Signaling voltage supervision function group accordingly Within different supervision groups ...

Page 1254: ...ult setting _ 102 Enable variable group untrue You can activate the parameter Enable variable group by placing the check mark If you have not set the check mark default setting only these 2 parameters are available for the configuration of the supervision signal If you have set the check mark the parameter menu is extended by the areas Start supervision group and End supervision group You can then...

Page 1255: ...ule 7 I O module 8 I O module 9 I O module 10 I O module 11 I O module 12 I O module 13 I O module 14 I O module 15 I O module 1 _ 105 Superv Grp Binary input 1 to 256 1 _ 102 Superv Grp Enable variable group 0 1 false Supervis grp start _ 106 Superv Grp I O module ID I O module 1 I O module 2 I O module 3 I O module 4 I O module 5 I O module 6 I O module 7 I O module 8 I O module 9 I O module 10 ...

Page 1256: ... used if possible in parallel to it The tripping of the voltage transformer circuit breaker has an impact on the quality of the recorded measured value data see chapter 3 3 Processing Quality Attributes The following protection function is automatically blocked in cases of the tripping of the voltage transformer circuit breaker Directional negative sequence protection For the following functions t...

Page 1257: ...response time Application and Setting Notes The function is always active and need not be switched on Input Signal Open Input signal _ 500 Open The input signal Open must be connected to the tripping of the voltage transformer circuit breaker As a rule this occurs via the routing to a binary input Parameter Response time of the voltage transformer circuit breaker Recommended setting value _ 101 Re...

Page 1258: ...es of the fundamental component Structure of the Function The Voltage balance supervision function is located in the Power system data of each 3 phase voltage measuring point dwstrusy 300913 2 en_US Figure 9 11 Structure Embedding of the Function Function Description The voltage balance is checked by a magnitude supervision function This function relates the smallest phase to phase voltage to the ...

Page 1259: ... to phase voltage unbalance is meas ured The device calculates the ratio between the minimum Vmin and the maximum Vmax phase to phase voltage Enter the lower limit of the maximum phase to phase voltage Vmax with the parameter Release threshold This specifies the lower limit of the operating range of this function Supervision Functions 9 3 Supervision of the Secondary System SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent ...

Page 1260: ... Release threshold 50 V With the Release threshold parameter you set the lower limit of the maximum phase to phase voltage Vmax Siemens recommends using the default setting Parameter Operate delay Recommended setting value _ 6 Operate delay 5 00 s Set the Operate delay parameter so that overfunctions due to disturbing influences such as switching operations are avoided Siemens recommends using the...

Page 1261: ... component i i NOTE For the Voltage sum supervision the externally generated residual voltage must be connected to the 4th voltage measuring input For the Voltage sum supervision to work correctly the Matching ratio Vph VN parameter must be set accordingly Structure of the Function The Voltage sum supervision function is located in the Power system data function group of each 3 phase voltage measu...

Page 1262: ...measures the phase to ground voltage and the ground voltage of the lines to be protected The sum of the 4 voltages must be 0 Threshold If the calculated fault voltage VF exceeds the Threshold the parameter Operate delay triggers the indi cation Failure Supervision Functions 9 3 Supervision of the Secondary System 1262 SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Protection Manual C53000 G5040 C017 8 Edition 07 2017 ...

Page 1263: ...ld parameter is used to set the voltage which the device uses to recognize the calculated fault voltage VF as a failure of the voltage sums Siemens recommends using the default setting Parameter Operate delay Recommended setting value _ 6 Operate delay 5 00 s Set the Operate delay parameter so that overfunctions due to disturbing influences such as switching operations are avoided Siemens recommen...

Page 1264: ... setting of the Phase sequence parameter Structure of the Function The Voltage phase rotation supervision function is located in the Power system data of each 3 phase voltage measuring point dwstrvrs 060611 01 tif 3 en_US Figure 9 17 Structure Embedding of the Function Function Description Logic lovrsymm 100611 01 tif 3 en_US Figure 9 18 Logic Diagram of the Voltage Phase Rotation Supervision 9 3 ...

Page 1265: ...tection pickup The pickup signal from a protection function blocks the indication Failure Operate delay When the device detects an inverted phase rotation direction for the duration of the Operate delay the indication Failure is generated Application and Setting Notes Parameter Operate delay Recommended setting value _ 6 Operate delay 5 00 s Set the Operate delay parameter so that overfunctions du...

Page 1266: ...FGs works independent of the status of the Voltage comparison supervision function Structure of the Function The Voltage comparison supervision function can be used in the following function groups Generator stator Generator side Voltage current 3 phase VI 3ph Transformer side Auto transformer autoside Auto trf autoside The Voltage comparison supervision function supports only 1 stage The stage is...

Page 1267: ...d They must not be instantiated at the same time About the Voltage measuring point selection function you can find more information in chapter 6 51 Voltage Measuring Point Selection Voltage Selection 2 voltage measuring points are connected to a voltage interface of a function group In the Voltage compar ison supervision function you can set one of the voltages as the reference voltage via the par...

Page 1268: ...ble shows the description of the voltages Table 9 1 Voltage Description Voltages Description v n ref Sampled value of the reference voltage v n main Sampled value of the main voltage Vref Fundamental value of the reference voltage Vmain Fundamental value of the main voltage V1ref Positive sequence value of the reference voltage Supervision Functions 9 3 Supervision of the Secondary System 1268 SIP...

Page 1269: ...e is influenced the phase information is indicated If more than one phase is influenced the phase to phase information is indicated Take the main voltage transformer for example You can determine the faulty phase with the following table Determination Criteria Calculated Result vAB n ref vAB n main 8 Vrated 0 0 0 vBC n ref vBC n main 8 Vrated 0 0 0 vAC n ref vAC n main 8 Vrated 0 0 0 Failure Infor...

Page 1270: ...election Page 1267 EXAMPLE Meas point V 3ph 1 and Meas point V 3ph 2 are connected to the Voltage comparison supervision func tion Then you have 2 more setting options as shown in the following figure You must select one of these setting options for the parameter Reference voltage sc_VBS_ref voltage 1 en_US Parameter Mode Default setting _ 2311 1 Mode off With the parameter Mode you can activate a...

Page 1271: ...n add a marker for blocking protection functions for the affected phases After 10 ms of broken wire check the wire break is reliably signaled Function Description Broken Wire Suspected The Broken wire detection function monitors the dynamic behavior of the currents of each phase and of all measuring points For this purpose the instantaneous values of the currents are checked for their plausibility...

Page 1272: ...nformation Data Class Type Type Brk wire det _ 82 Brk wire det Block function SPS I _ 54 Brk wire det Inactive SPS O _ 52 Brk wire det Behavior ENS O _ 53 Brk wire det Health ENS O _ 301 Brk wire det Phs A BW suspected SPS O _ 302 Brk wire det Phs B BW suspected SPS O _ 303 Brk wire det Phs C BW suspected SPS O _ 304 Brk wire det Phase A broken wire SPS O _ 305 Brk wire det Phase B broken wire SPS...

Page 1273: ...unction Description The current balance is checked by a magnitude monitoring function This function relates the smallest phase current to the largest phase current Unbalance is detected if Imin Imax Threshold min max as long as Imax Release threshold losymmke 040211 01 tif 1 en_US Figure 9 25 Characteristic of the Current Balance Supervision 9 3 10 2 9 3 10 3 Supervision Functions 9 3 Supervision ...

Page 1274: ...rent exceeds the Release threshold the tripping delay begins If both conditions persist during this time the indication Failure is generated Blocking the Function The following blockings reset the picked up function completely Externally or internally via the binary input signal Block function A protection pickup The pickup signal of a protection function blocks the indication Failure Application ...

Page 1275: ...ation List No Information Data Class Type Type Supv balan I _ 82 Supv balan I Block function SPS I _ 54 Supv balan I Inactive SPS O _ 52 Supv balan I Behavior ENS O _ 53 Supv balan I Health ENS O _ 71 Supv balan I Failure SPS O Current Sum Supervision Overview of Functions In healthy system operation the sum of all currents at one measuring point must be approximately 0 The Current sum supervision...

Page 1276: ...s 300913 2 en_US Figure 9 27 Structure Embedding of the Function Function Description The current sum is generated by addition of the current phasors Errors in the current circuits are detected if IF IA IB IC kl IN Threshold Slope factor Σ I lokensum 300311 01 tif 1 en_US Figure 9 28 Characteristic of the Current Sum Supervision 9 3 11 2 9 3 11 3 Supervision Functions 9 3 Supervision of the Second...

Page 1277: ...ates this fault current limit with the formula IFmax Threshold Slope factor Σ I The device uses the current inputs IA IB IC and IN to calculate The fault current IF IA IB IC kl IN The maximum current Σ I IA IB IC kl IN with kI taking into account a possible difference from the transformation ratio of a separated ground current transformer IN for example cable type current transformer Transformatio...

Page 1278: ...ase current This function calculates the RMS values Parameter Threshold Recommended setting value _ 102 Threshold 0 1 A for Irated 1 A or 0 5 A for Irated 5 A The Threshold parameter is used to set the maximum phase current Imax Parameter Operate delay Recommended setting value _ 6 Operate delay 5 00 s Set the Operate delay parameter so that overfunctions due to disturbing influences such as switc...

Page 1279: ...g the sequence of the zero crossings with same sign of the currents This enables the device to detect connections that were inverted during commissioning The criterion for the check is the setting of the Phase sequence parameter The current measurement is based on the RMS values of the fundamental component Structure of the Function The Current phase rotation supervision function is located in the...

Page 1280: ...device does not depend on the selected phase sequence The connec tion diagrams are shown in the chapter A Appendix Release Condition The supervision of the current phase rotation is carried out when all measured phase currents are greater than 0 5 Irated Blocking of the Function The following blockings reset the function completely Via the binary input signal Block function from an external or int...

Page 1281: ...unction recognizes disruptions in the trip circuit When 2 binary inputs are used the function recognizes all disruptions in the trip circuit If only 1 binary input is available it will not recognize disruptions at the circuit breaker The control voltage for the circuit breaker must be greater than the sum of the minimum voltage drops at the binary inputs VCtrl 2 VBImin At least 19 V are required f...

Page 1282: ...trip circuit and the outage of the control voltage It also monitors the reaction of the circuit breaker by way of the position of the circuit breaker auxiliary contacts Depending on the switch position of the command relay and circuit breaker the binary inputs are either acti vated H or not L If both binary inputs are not activated there is a fault The fault may be a interruption or a short circui...

Page 1283: ...igure shows the logic diagram of the trip circuit supervision with 2 binary inputs lotcs2be 260912 01 tif 1 en_US Figure 9 34 Logic Diagram of Trip Circuit Supervision with 2 Binary Inputs Trip Circuit Supervision with 1 Binary Input When using 1 binary input you will not identify any disruptions on the circuit breaker The binary input is connected in parallel with the respective command relay of ...

Page 1284: ...on2 BI Dynamic State Static State 1 Open ON Closed Open H Normal operation with closed circuit breaker 2 Open OFF Open Closed H Normal operation with open circuit breaker 3 Closed ON Closed Open L Transmission or fault Fault 4 Closed OFF Open Closed L CR successfully activated the circuit breaker Use the parameter Blk by trip open cmd from to set the conditions under which the trip circuit super v...

Page 1285: ...nce R must be dimensioned such that the circuit breaker coil is no longer activated when the circuit breaker is open Simultaneously the binary input must still be activated when the command relay is open In order to ensure the minimum voltage for activating the binary input Rmax results in fofr1b02 090330 01 tif 1 en_US So that the circuit breaker coil does not remain activated Rmin results in fof...

Page 1286: ...by trip open cmd from to set the conditions under which the trip circuit super vision is blocked The following conditions can cause a blocking of the trip circuit supervision function The Trip open cmd of the circuit breaker is activated One of the trip commands of the circuit breaker failure protection is activated One of the trip commands of the circuit breaker reignition protection is activated...

Page 1287: ...I Health ENS O _ 71 74TC sup 1BI Trip circuit failure SPS O _ 301 74TC sup 1BI Input sig not routed SPS O 74TC sup 2BI _ 82 74TC sup 2BI Block function SPS I _ 500 74TC sup 2BI Trip relay SPS I _ 503 74TC sup 2BI CB auxiliary contact SPS I _ 54 74TC sup 2BI Inactive SPS O _ 52 74TC sup 2BI Behavior ENS O _ 53 74TC sup 2BI Health ENS O _ 71 74TC sup 2BI Trip circuit failure SPS O _ 301 74TC sup 2BI...

Page 1288: ...values magnitude phase Failures which can partially be corrected by a restart of the device The device goes briefly out of opera tion Such errors are for example Memory error RAM in the base module Faulty module Module connection error PCB Link Control circuit error binary output Outage of an internal auxiliary voltage i i NOTE If the error has not be rectified after 3 unsuccessful attempts the sy...

Page 1289: ...nsure that even the fast tripping stages of the protection functions can be blocked in time before a spurious pickup the fast current measurement is based on instanta neous values For Analog digital converter supervision the neutral point current of the line to be protected must be connected to the 4th current measuring input IN The 4th current measuring input must be routed via the current transf...

Page 1290: ...teristic 2 Σ i Base point 2 With the current inputs iA iB iC and iN the device calculates The fault current IF iA iB iC iN The maximum current Σ i iA iB iC iN lokenisu 240413 01 tif 2 en_US Figure 9 39 Characteristic Curve of the Supervision of the Device Internal Analog Digital Converters 9 4 2 3 Supervision Functions 9 4 Supervision of the Device Hardware 1290 SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Protection M...

Page 1291: ...ting range of the Supervision of the device internal analog digital converters function The threshold value is fixed to 10 of the device rated current Slope of the Characteristic 1 The component slope of characteristic 1 Σ i takes into account permissible current input errors which can occur in the case of small overcurrents The slope of characteristic 1 is fixed to 0 1 Slope of the Characteristic...

Page 1292: ...ic 2 is fixed to 0 95 The base point of the slope of characteristic 2 is fixed to 10 Supervision Functions 9 4 Supervision of the Device Hardware 1292 SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Protection Manual C53000 G5040 C017 8 Edition 07 2017 ...

Page 1293: ...cure state Such errors are for example errors in time synchronization loss and errors Failures which can partially be corrected by a restart of the device The device goes briefly out of operation Such errors are for example Device startup with faulty new parameter set The old parameter set is still present Overloading of the processor Program sequence error Fatal firmware error The device goes per...

Page 1294: ...gnals data affected by the failure are marked as invalid In this way the affected protection functions can go into a secure state Such errors are for example errors in IE converter configura tion loss and errors Fatal configuration error The device goes permanently out of operation into a secure state fallback mode Such errors are for example Missing hardware module module x Incorrect hardware mod...

Page 1295: ...n go into a secure state In the following some examples are named GOOSE signals can automatically be set to defined values in case of disturbed IEC 61850 communication Disturbed protection interfaces set phasor values both analog measured values and binary information to invalid for example for differential protection Binary signal traces can be set to defined values in cases of failures Disturbed...

Page 1296: ...device Indications of causes for defects and corrective measures Determination of Causes for Defects and Corrective Measures To determine the cause for defect and the corresponding corrective measure proceed step by step Step 1 Pick up of supervisions leads to one of the following defect severities in all cases Defect severity 1 Internal or external device error that is reported The device stays i...

Page 1297: ... available for further analyses If super visions in the communication interfaces area of the device pick up there is a separate communication log available for each port Extended diagnostic indications and measured values are available there The device diagnosis log contains expanded fault descriptions There you also receive recommendations of corresponding corrective measures for each detected de...

Page 1298: ...tate is processed via the associated function group up to the general group indication Health _ 53 Check from the operational log from which function or function block the error originates In the associated func tion description there is additional information as to why the Health of the function or a function block can change _ 53 Health Warning SPS _ 53 Health Alarm SPS Device Supervision Functi...

Page 1299: ... the fault is not remedied contact the Customer Support Center Quality The internal time is marked with the quality attribute of Clock Failure _ 319 Error memory SPS Checksum CRC error in monitored memory areas of the device Measuring transducer error x ENS Hardware error on the measuring trans ducer module on plug in module posi tion E F M N P Contact the Customer Support Center Handling an alarm...

Page 1300: ...em data meas point V 3ph Superv bal V _ 71 Failure SPS CFC Failure of the voltage balance see chap 9 3 5 1 Overview of Functions Power system data meas point V 3ph Superv Phsseq V _ 71 Failure SPS CFC Failure of the voltage phase rotation supervision see chap 9 3 7 1 Overview of Functions Power system data meas point V 3ph Superv of Sum V _ 71 Failure SPS CFC Failure of the voltage sum see chap 9 ...

Page 1301: ...ore the restart These indications are recorded with a real time stamp and are thus available for later analyses The device diagnosis log contains expanded fault descriptions There you also receive recom mendations of corresponding corrective measures for each detected device error You can find further information on handling the logs in chapter 3 Overview of Errors Number Device Diagnosis Log 826 ...

Page 1302: ...rdware failure at module 1 12 Contact the Customer Support Center 4729 Device bus error repeated Check the module configuration and the module connections Contact the Customer Support Center 4733 Incorrect hardware configuration Synchronize the hardware configuration of the device with DIGSI 5037 5048 Wrong module 1 12 detected Synchronize the hardware configuration of the device with DIGSI 5031 5...

Page 1303: ...k mode The signals managed internally are marked with the invalid quality attribute Signals managed inter nally are for example measured values binary input and output signals GOOSE and CFC signals In the delivery condition every device has the CFC chart Process mode inactive that initiates the Group alarm see chapter 9 9 Group Indications Life contact Is terminated in case of Group alarm Red erro...

Page 1304: ... _ 503 Group Alarm is reset the signal _ 300 Group alarm is also reset and the device returns to the normal operating state In the delivery condition every device has the CFC chart Process mode inactive that initiates the Group Alarm This CFC chart checks whether the device is still accidentally in the simulation or commissioning mode You can adapt the CFC chart as needed You can find the CFC char...

Page 1305: ... _ 505 Group indication is set the indication _ 302 Group indication becomes active and is recorded in the operational log In the delivery condition there is no further response of the device If the binary input signal is reset the signal _ 302 Group indication drops out Via a CFC chart you can define when the binary input signal _ 505 Group indication is to be set Supervision Functions 9 9 Group ...

Page 1306: ...1306 SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Protection Manual C53000 G5040 C017 8 Edition 07 2017 ...

Page 1307: ...ymmetrical Components 1313 10 5 Average Values 1314 10 6 Minimum Maximum Values 1317 10 7 Energy Values 1319 10 8 User Defined Metered Values 1322 10 9 Phasor Measurement Unit PMU 1326 10 10 Measuring Transducers 1346 10 11 Statistical Values of the Primary System 1352 10 12 Circuit Breaker Wear Monitoring 1353 10 SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Protection Manual 1307 C53000 G5040 C017 8 Edition 07 2017 ...

Page 1308: ...uctions for recording and editing process data can be found in the chapter 2 1 Function Embedding in the Device dwomverf 010212 01 tif 1 en_US Figure 10 1 Structure of Measured Value Acquisition and Processing For the display the measured values of a SIPROTEC 5 device are summed up in the following groups Operational measured values Fundamental and symmetrical components Function specific measured...

Page 1309: ...lue groups dwstrciv 011012 01 tif 1 en_US The Minimum values Maximum values Average values and User defined values can be inserted from the library into the Voltage Current 3 phase function group Details regarding the individual measured value groups can be found in the tables in the following chapters Circuit Breaker Function Group The Circuit breaker function group may contain the following meas...

Page 1310: ...rection for the protection functions and the positive direction for the powers etc differently for example such that the active power import from the line to the busbar is displayed positively Then set the option P Q sign in the affected function groups on the reversed parameter With the parameter not reversed default setting the positive direction for the powers etc corresponds with the forward d...

Page 1311: ...ating current of the primary values 3I0 Calculated zero sequence current A A Rated operating current of the primary values IN Neutral point phase current A A Rated operating current of the primary values VA VB VC Phase to ground voltages kV V Rated operating voltage of primary values 3 VAB VBC VCA Phase to phase voltage kV V Rated operating voltage of the primary values V0 Calculated zero sequence...

Page 1312: ...r MVA Apparent power of the phase Vrated phsx Irated phsx i i NOTE With the P Q sign parameter in the function block General of the respective function group the sign of the following measured values can be inverted Active power total P total Active power phase related PA PB PC Reactive power total Q total Reactive power phase related QA QB and QC Measured Values Energy Values and Supervision of t...

Page 1313: ...hase currents A A Rated operating current of the primary values I N Neutral point phase current A A Rated operating current of the primary values Symmetrical Components Table 10 3 Symmetrical Components Values Primary Secon dary Phase Angle Referenced to V 0 Zero sequence component of the voltage kV V Rated operating voltage of primary values 3 V 1 Positive sequence component of the voltage kV V R...

Page 1314: ... sign of the following measured values of the respective function group can be inverted see Chapter 10 2 Structure of the Function Structure of the Function section Inversion of Output Related Measured and Statistical Values Active power total P total Reactive power total Q total Application and Setting Notes for Average Values The average value formation functionality is not preconfigured with th...

Page 1315: ...terval 60 min Average update interval 30 min Average synchroniz time hh 15 A new average value is formed every 30 min at hh 15 15 min after the top of the hour and hh 45 15 min before the top of the hour All measured values obtained during the last 60 min are used for average value formation If these settings are changed to 11 03 25 for instance the average values are first reset and appears in th...

Page 1316: ...he average value If these settings are changed to 11 03 25 for instance the average values are first reset and appears in the display The 1st average value is then formed at 11 10 00 Measured Values Energy Values and Supervision of the Primary System 10 5 Average Values 1316 SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Protection Manual C53000 G5040 C017 8 Edition 07 2017 ...

Page 1317: ...etting Min Max reset each and setting Min Max reset minute Point in time at which the cyclical reset procedure of the minimum maximum values begins after the parameterization Setting Min Max days until start The following figure shows the effect of the settings dwminmax 100611 01 tif 1 en_US Figure 10 2 Minimum and Maximum Value Formation Minimum and maximum values are time stamped Minimum maximum...

Page 1318: ...cyclic reset yes Parameter Value Description Yes Cyclical resetting of the minimum and maximum value memories is activated No Cyclical resetting of the minimum and maximum value memories is deactivated None of the following parameters are visible Parameter Min Max reset each Default setting _ 108 Min Max reset each 1 day Parameter Value Description 1 day to 365 days Resetting of the minimum value ...

Page 1319: ...ntil the first and every further transfer of the metered value to the commu nication interface of the device After this it will be transferred in accordance with the selected log Note The transfer interval is used alternatively to the transfer time and deactivates the set transfer time The display of the device is always up to date You will find these parameters in the device settings under measur...

Page 1320: ...effect and will be deactivated automatically Parameter Energy restore time Default setting _ 112 Energy restore time none Parameter Value Description none Deactivated hh 00 Restoring on the full hour hh 15 Restoring 15 minutes after the full hour hh 30 Restoring 30 minutes after the full hour hh 45 Restoring 45 minutes after the full hour Note If the parameter is activated through a time setting t...

Page 1321: ...min 30 min 60 min Input Signals Restoring and Resetting Binary Inputs Description Restoring The restoring of the metered values is initiated via a binary input Reset The metered value memory is set to 0 through the binary input You route these logical signals in the DIGSI routing matrix Open the function group for example Line where you created the energy value There under the tab Measured values ...

Page 1322: ...external internal pulse generator is connected to the device via a routable binary input Pulse input If this does not deliver any plausible values this can be signaled to the device via another routable binary input External error In compliance with IEC 61850 in the event of an external error the quality of the pulse metered value changes to the state Questionable No more pulses are added as long ...

Page 1323: ...tings and binary inputs are available Parameter Restore time Default setting _ 101 Restore time none Parameter Value Description none Deactivated hh 00 Transfer on the full hour hh 15 Transfer 15 minutes after the full hour Note hh 30 Transfer 30 minutes after the full hour Note hh 45 Transfer 45 minutes after the full hour Note Note If the parameter is activated through a time setting the paramet...

Page 1324: ... rising edge at the binary input resets the pulse counter to 0 The amount of energy indicated by a pulse generator is to be displayed as a measured value 1 pulse corresponds to 100 Wh The pulse weighting the SI unit and the factor must be adjusted to one another Display value Calculated metered value Pulse weighting Factor SI unit If the check box Restore delta value is activated the differential ...

Page 1325: ...f 1 en_US Figure 10 4 Setting with DIGSI Measured Values Energy Values and Supervision of the Primary System 10 8 User Defined Metered Values SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Protection Manual 1325 C53000 G5040 C017 8 Edition 07 2017 ...

Page 1326: ...ith additional values via the communication module to a server PDC Phasor Data Concentrator dwstrpmu 250613 01 tif 2 en_US Figure 10 5 Structure Embedding of the Function Function Description The synchrophasors sent from the PMU in a continuous data stream to a PDC are provided with time stamps and thus are comparable with the measured values of other PMUs The power frequency the power frequency c...

Page 1327: ... for communication with the substation automation technology for example through the IEC 61850 protocol The central evaluation system e g SIGUARD PDP Phasor Data Processor receives the data files archives them and graphically displays them on a User Interface In this system a self checking function may also be performed for example on undamped power swings The further distribution of information t...

Page 1328: ...ion having a rated frequency which is synchronized with the UTC time reference see Figure 10 8 dwutcphi 260112 01 tif 1 en_US Figure 10 8 Determination of Phase Angle ρ of Measuring Signal Xm Relative to the Cosine Function Measured Values Energy Values and Supervision of the Primary System 10 9 Phasor Measurement Unit PMU 1328 SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Protection Manual C53000 G5040 C017 8 Edition 0...

Page 1329: ...een the actual and the measured values of the input signal The Synchro phasor Standard IEEE 37 118 defines upper limiting values of 120 VN and 200 IN among other things Up to these limiting values the TVE of 1 must not be exceeded for stationary signals The standard defines the 2 performance classes Class P and Class M as ranges within which influencing variables are acceptable and the TVE of 1 mu...

Page 1330: ...gnal Variables that influence the TVE are Amplitude errors Phase errors Synchronization accuracy deviation from the UTC Synchronization accuracy is affected by a GPS timer and the precise correction of the time delay within the GPS receiver module as well as by the optimal setup of the GPS antenna Measured Values Energy Values and Supervision of the Primary System 10 9 Phasor Measurement Unit PMU ...

Page 1331: ...tor functions as both the client and the server Once the PDC has been successfully connected to the device PMU and the PMU configuration data has been queried the PDC initiates transmission of the synchrophasor data by sending a close command to the PMU If you use the method of spontaneous transmission via UDP data output starts immediately after the device boots without a close command to the PMU...

Page 1332: ...d mode or asynchronous response mode as the communication mode In asynchronous response mode data can be transmitted continuously to preset PDC destination addresses in IEEE C37 118 format without a PDC having to request transmission of the synchrophasor data via a close command to the PMU Up to 3 different PDCs can be connected to one device PMU at the same time The IP addresses of the maximum 3 ...

Page 1333: ...n modules Addressing You must configure the respective Ethernet address IP address subnet mask etc for each communication module in DIGSI This is done in the DIGSI General settings properties dialog of the communication module in item Ethernet addresses and so forms the IP address for the respective PMU scethern 210415 1 en_US Figure 10 11 Ethernet Address Configuration In the DIGSI properties dia...

Page 1334: ...col for the communication module an advanced settings dialog for PMU specific configuration opens see the following figure Measured Values Energy Values and Supervision of the Primary System 10 9 Phasor Measurement Unit PMU 1334 SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Protection Manual C53000 G5040 C017 8 Edition 07 2017 ...

Page 1335: ...e commanded operation These placeholders allow you to define a range of IP addresses where they are accepted within these accesses The purpose of this is to permit each individual device or system access within the respective system without limits with regard to their hierarchy level Therefore with regard to security aspects the limitation to individual IP addresses is elimi nated You are thus all...

Page 1336: ... to connect is rejected If you have configured IP address 0 0 0 0 and the placeholder 255 255 255 255 every IP address received is accepted as valid This could be of use in the course of commissioning measures i i NOTE You must have configured at least 1 IP address in order to establish a connection between the device and PDC If you use the asynchronous data transmission method set the PMU transfe...

Page 1337: ...subnetwork destination address cannot be reached EXAMPLE COM Module Address Configuration IP address 192 168 100 1 Subnet mask 255 255 255 0 PDC Address Configuration IP address for PDC1 192 168 100 160 IP address for PDC2 86 168 100 161 Only PDC1 receives the data because the IP address is in the same subnetwork as that of the COM module PDC2 cannot be reached because the subnetwork address 86 x ...

Page 1338: ...MU are 2 x 3 phase voltage measuring points 2 x 3 phase current measuring points 2 x 1 phase voltage measuring points 2 x 1 phase current measuring points You can assign all supported measuring points to any PMU see the following figure However each PMU must be connected to a 3 phase voltage measuring point Measured Values Energy Values and Supervision of the Primary System 10 9 Phasor Measurement...

Page 1339: ...le in the IEEE C37 118 interface can be changed The function block designations themselves cannot The IEEE C37 118 defines the ASCII character set for changing the channel names in the scope of the SIPROTEC 5 PMU support Due to the protocol the designation length is limited to 16 ASCII characters per channel However when renaming you have to assign at least 1 character The renaming of binary chann...

Page 1340: ... or CFC information with binary channels of the PMU via DIGSI information routing You will find in the Phasor Measurement Unit PMU folder the Binary information transmission function block in the DIGSI function library see the following figure You can instantiate this function block up to 10 times in one PMU function group Each of these function blocks contains 8 options for routing binary channel...

Page 1341: ... the Device You can also change the PMU settings directly on the device To do this select the desired PMU instance on the device display By selecting menu item Settings you then access the editable setting values see Figure 10 21 Note that the parameter Port cannot be changed because this corresponds to the physical slot position of the communication module in question 10 9 7 Measured Values Energ...

Page 1342: ...u on the device display From the Channel 1 menu item you can then access the detailed setting options for the IP or PMU communication settings see Figure 10 22 sccompmu 1 en_US Figure 10 22 Changing the Communication Setting Values Via the Device Display Measured Values Energy Values and Supervision of the Primary System 10 9 Phasor Measurement Unit PMU 1342 SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Protection Manua...

Page 1343: ...alue thus to 1 s Parameter Mode Default setting _ 10621 1 Mode on Activate and deactivate the PMU or switch to Test mode via the parameter Mode The possible setting values are on off and test In Test mode the PMU data is marked as invalid Parameter Reporting rate Default setting _ 10621 102 Reporting rate 10 frames s With the parameter Reporting rate you specify the number of telegrams that are co...

Page 1344: ...is parameter cannot be set because the Port results from the physical position where the corresponding communication module is inserted Settings Addr Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting Func settings _ 10621 1 Func settings Mode off on test on _ 10621 101 Func settings Class Class P Class M Class P _ 10621 102 Func settings Reporting rate 1 frame s 5 frames s 6 frames s 10 frames s 12 fram...

Page 1345: ...ttings Phasor 2 Freely editable text _ 10621 115 Func settings Phasor 3 Freely editable text _ 10621 117 Func settings Phasor Freely editable text Meas point I 3ph _ 10621 118 Func settings Meas uring point ID 0to0 0 _ 10621 119 Func settings Phasor 1 Freely editable text _ 10621 120 Func settings Phasor 2 Freely editable text _ 10621 121 Func settings Phasor 3 Freely editable text _ 10621 123 Fun...

Page 1346: ...onfigurable independently of each other dwstrumu 050313 01 tif 1 en_US Figure 10 24 Structure Embedding of the Function Function Description The 20 mA inputs typically transmit a value which represents a physical quantity such as a temperature or a pressure Therefore the device must contain a characteristic curve that assigns the physical quantity to the 20 mA value If the parameter Range active i...

Page 1347: ...mA or larger than 24 mA is applied to the measuring transducer input the meas ured value is marked as invalid If the parameter Range active is activated the 2 additional parameters Upper limit and Lower limit appear Both limiting values indicate the input currents in mA for which the value set by the Conversion factor Upper limit and the value 0 Lower limit of the calcu lated measurand are valid s...

Page 1348: ...e input current corresponds to the value in the Lower limit setting dwklges2 120124 01 tif 2 en_US Figure 10 28 Total Characteristic Curve in Example 2 sctrans2 210415 1 en_US Figure 10 29 Settings for Example 2 Each measuring transducer makes available the scaled measured value in the information matrix these are the temperature values in the examples and the original current measured value in mA...

Page 1349: ...wer limit and Lower limit Sensor appear Parameter Upper limit Lower limit Upper limit Sensor and Lower limit Sensor Default setting _ 105 Upper limit 20000 mA Default setting _ 109 Upper limit Sensor 100 Default setting _ 106 Lower limit 4000 mA Default setting _ 110 Lower limit Sensor 100 If you activate the Range active setting then 4 additional settings Upper limit Lower limit Upper limit Senso...

Page 1350: ...on 1 0 1 0 01 0 001 0 1 _ 107 MT in Range active 0 1 false _ 104 MT in Conversion factor 1 to 10000 100 _ 105 MT in Upper limit 20 00 mA to 20 00 mA 20 00 mA _ 109 MT in Upper limit Sensor 10000 to 10000 100 _ 106 MT in Lower limit 20 00 mA to 20 00 mA 4 00 mA Measured Values Energy Values and Supervision of the Primary System 10 10 Measuring Transducers 1350 SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Protection Manu...

Page 1351: ...nformation List No Information Data Class Type Type MT in _ 301 MT in TD scale MV MV O _ 302 MT in TD direct MV MV O 10 10 6 Measured Values Energy Values and Supervision of the Primary System 10 10 Measuring Transducers SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Protection Manual 1351 C53000 G5040 C017 8 Edition 07 2017 ...

Page 1352: ...nts Sum of the primary breaking currents separately for each breaker pole Hours with open circuit breaker Hours under load The following values are available for each disconnector switch Total number of switching operations of the disconnector switch initiated by the device Number of switching operations of the disconnector switch initiated by the device separately for each switch pole if 1 pole s...

Page 1353: ...asuring methods ΣIx method stage Sum of tripping current powers 2P method stage 2 points method for calculating the remaining switching cycles I2t method stage Sum of all squared fault current integrals Supv CB make time stage Supervision of the circuit breaker make time The function is preconfigured by the manufacturer with 1 ΣIx method stage A maximum of 1 ΣIx method stage 1 2P method stage 1 I2...

Page 1354: ... Logic Diagram of the Functionality Across Stages of the Circuit Breaker Wear Monitoring Func tion Start Criterion for the Circuit Breaker Wear Monitoring Function The Circuit breaker wear monitoring function starts when any of the following criteria is fulfilled Internal protection function tripping signal from the function block Trip logic is received Open command signal from the internal Contro...

Page 1355: ... mental components are used for comparing the threshold values When the current criterion fulfills the requirement of the phase selective logic release the calculation and evaluation of the respective methods are initiated End Criterion for the Circuit Breaker Wear Monitoring Function After calculation and evaluation have been completed the end criterion of the circuit breaker maintenance is fulfi...

Page 1356: ...sing procedure for the circuit breaker and the point in time when the first current flows You can find more information on the setting value in the technical data of the used circuit breaker Settings Addr Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting General _ 2311 101 General CB opening time 0 001 s to 0 500 s 0 065 s _ 2311 102 General CB break time 0 001 s to 0 600 s 0 080 s _ 2311 103 General CB...

Page 1357: ... in the buffer is searched for whose value is above the setting of parameter Current thresh CB open The 20 ms prior value is used as tripping opening current for further calculation If no value within the buffer is above the setting value this circuit breaker opening affects only the mechan ical lifetime of the circuit breaker and is consequently not considered by this method 10 12 4 10 12 4 1 Mea...

Page 1358: ...d normal current to the power of x Statistic value of current phase A calculated with the Ix method m Total number of switching cycles The phase selective ΣIx value is available as statistical value You can reset or preset the statistics according to the specific application To simplify the interpretation of the sum of the tripping current powers the values are set in relation to the exponentiated...

Page 1359: ...it breaker whose contacts have not yet been worn the maximum number of make break operations can be entered directly as limiting value Settings Addr Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting ΣIx method _ 11371 1 ΣIx method Mode off on test off _ 11371 101 ΣIx method Exponent 1 0 to 3 0 2 0 _ 11371 102 ΣIx method Threshold 0 to 10000000 10000 Information List No Information Data Class Type Type Σ...

Page 1360: ...itted switching cycles and the tripping opening current see the following figure According to the example this circuit breaker can operate approximately 1000 times at a tripping current of 10 kA 2 points and their connecting line determine the relationship of switching cycles and tripping current Point P1 is determined by the number of permitted switching cycles at rated normal current Irated Poin...

Page 1361: ...ine between P1 and P2 can be expressed by the following exponential function FoCBW2P1 301012 01 tif 1 en_US Where Itrip Tripping opening current Irated Rated normal current m Slope coefficient b Switching cycles at rated normal current n Number of switching cycles The general line equation for the double logarithmic representation can be derived from the exponential func tion and leads to the coef...

Page 1362: ...ic release signal the current number of used up switching cycles in relation to the number of switching cycles at rated normal current is calculated based on the determined trip ping current This value is subtracted from the the remaining lifetime switching cycles The remaining life time is available as statistic value For better understanding refer to the example below You can reset or preset the...

Page 1363: ...arning signal is gener ated Application and Setting Notes Parameter Switching cycles at Ir Default setting _ 101 Switching cycles at Ir 10 000 You use the Switching cycles at Ir parameter to define the number of permitted switching cycles at rated normal current You can find the information on the setting value in the technical data of the used circuit breaker Parameter Rated short circ cur Isc De...

Page 1364: ...hreshold value based on the following calcu lation FoCBW2P4 301012 01 tif 1 en_US Settings Addr Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting 2P method _ 1 2P method Mode off on test off _ 101 2P method Switching cycles at Ir 100 to 1000000 10000 _ 102 2P method Rated short circ cur Isc 10 A to 100000 A 25000 A _ 103 2P method Switching cycles at Isc 1 to 1000 50 _ 104 2P method Threshold 0 to 10000...

Page 1365: ...n the 2 settings of parameters CB break time and CB opening time see also Figure 10 32 The stage determines the ending point of the arc time by searching backward the zero crossing point of the phase currents after it receives the logic release signal Then the squared fault currents during the arc time are integrated phase 10 12 6 10 12 6 1 Measured Values Energy Values and Supervision of the Prim...

Page 1366: ...etting _ 101 Threshold 10 000 00 I Ir s You use the Threshold parameter to specify the maximum permitted integral of squared sampled measured values of the phase currents Settings Addr Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting I2t method _ 1 I2t method Mode off on test off _ 101 I2t method Threshold 0 00 I Ir s to 21400000 00 I Ir s 10000 00 I Ir s Information List No Information Data Class Type...

Page 1367: ...o 0 and marked with the quality invalid If at least one phase of the current has exceeded the parameter Oper current threshold or the param eter Current thresh CB open at the time of the circuit breaker closing command the measurement is canceled and the output value Make time is marked with the quality invalid You can define 2 independent thresholds for the supervision of the measured make time W...

Page 1368: ...s the end of the time interval Make time is detected Parameter Delay correction time Default setting _ 104 Delay correction time 0 000 s With the parameter Delay correction time you define a correction value which will be subtracted from the Make time during calculation This allows you to compensate delays caused by the system for example relay residual times if necessary Settings Addr Parameter C...

Page 1369: ..._ 53 Supv CB mak t Health ENS O _ 301 Supv CB mak t Make time MV O _ 302 Supv CB mak t Warning 1 SPS O _ 303 Supv CB mak t Warning 2 SPS O 10 12 7 4 Measured Values Energy Values and Supervision of the Primary System 10 12 Circuit Breaker Wear Monitoring SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Protection Manual 1369 C53000 G5040 C017 8 Edition 07 2017 ...

Page 1370: ...1370 SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Protection Manual C53000 G5040 C017 8 Edition 07 2017 ...

Page 1371: ... Ground Fault Protection 1386 11 9 Functional Test of the Trip Circuit Supervision 1387 11 10 Functional Test for the Phase Rotation Reversal 1388 11 11 Functional Test for Overvoltage Protection with Zero Sequence Voltage Residual Voltage 1389 11 12 Primary and Secondary Testing of the Synchronization Function 1391 11 13 Testing the Negative Sequence Current 1395 11 14 Reverse Power Protection 13...

Page 1372: ...s They provide a theoretical check of the setting values only Primary tests may be done only by qualified personnel who are familiar with the commissioning of protection systems with the operation of the system and with safety regulations and provisions switching grounding etc Switching operations also have to be performed for the commissioning The described tests require that these be capable of ...

Page 1373: ...ce or DIGSI 5 make sure that it corresponds to the power direc tion P is positive if the active power flows in the line or protected object P is negative if the active power flows to the busbar or out of the protected object Q is positive if the inductive reactive power flows in the line or protected object Q is negative if the inductive reactive power flows to the busbar or out of the protected o...

Page 1374: ...ry side see Figure 11 2 Only the current of the transformer in the phase of which the voltage is missing is transferred via the current circuit If the line carries resistive inductive load the protection is subject to the same conditions as existing during a ground fault in line direction For directional testing the Directional ground fault protection function 67N is configured and at least one st...

Page 1375: ...d in a Holmgreen Connection and VTs with Star Connection Directional Testing for Isolated or Resonant Grounded Systems Primary Test The primary test is used for the evaluation of the correct polarity of the transformer connections for the deter mination of the ground fault direction 11 3 3 Functional Tests 11 3 Direction Test of Ground Quantities for Directional Ground Fault Functions SIPROTEC 5 O...

Page 1376: ...rounding is done on the farthest end sealing end Remove the protective grounding from the line Switch on the circuit breaker on the line to be tested Check direction indicator LED if routed Check the indication _ 302 Ground fault in the ground fault log or fault log with regard to its direction The indication _ 302 Ground fault forward must be logged as direction information If backward is determi...

Page 1377: ... results in a secondary current of 724 5 A 1A 750A 0 966 A A secondary current of 0 966 A must therefore be supplied Calculate the operate time with the following formula Enter only primary variables here Set Iprevious load 0 The setting parameters reveal the K factor for example 1 1 and the Thermal time constant for example 600 s or 10 min Test from the cold state foauslpr 190309 01 tif 2 en_US A...

Page 1378: ...ests are carried out with significantly reduced time constants Reset the original setting value after completing the tests Functional Tests 11 4 Functional Test of Thermal Overload Protection 1378 SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Protection Manual C53000 G5040 C017 8 Edition 07 2017 ...

Page 1379: ...ion it must be ensured that the protection external protection device or device internal protection functions cannot operate the circuit breaker The corresponding trip command must be interrupted Although the following list does not claim to be complete it can also contain points which have to be ignored in the current application Test Modes The device and the function can be switched to test mode...

Page 1380: ...enerate the trip for the protection function This can be generated within the device by a test sequence see description in the Operating manual or by creating corresponding secondary test values The trip command s and their time delay compared to the pickup depending on the parameterization External Starting Conditions Trip Command from External Protection Function If external protection devices a...

Page 1381: ...he feeder with the fault is connected A general detailed test guide cannot be specified because the layout of the adjacent circuit breakers depends largely on the system topology With multiple busbars the trip distribution logic for the adjacent circuit breakers must be checked The test has to check for every busbar section that in case of a failure of the feeder circuit breaker under observation ...

Page 1382: ... circuit breaker test No Test Program 1 3 phase open closed cycle Structure of the Function The Circuit breaker test function is used in protection function groups for circuit breakers dwcbch01 240217 1 en_US Figure 11 3 Embedding of the Function dwzecbc3p2 030217 2 en_US Figure 11 4 Structure of the Function Test Procedure The following conditions must be satisfied before the circuit breaker test...

Page 1383: ...e 11 6 Progress over Time of a Circuit Breaker Test Cycle Use the _ 6151 103 Consider current criterion parameter to ensure the circuit breaker test is only carried out when the current flowing through the circuit breaker does not exceed a specific current threshold parameter _ 6151 104 Current threshold Otherwise the circuit breaker test is not started If the current flowcriterion is deactivated ...

Page 1384: ...e upper portion of the working area The corresponding feedback is displayed in the bottom portion of the working area Additional informa tion about the behavior of other functions while the circuit breaker test is being performed can be read in the operational log Functional Tests 11 6 Circuit Breaker Test 1384 SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Protection Manual C53000 G5040 C017 8 Edition 07 2017 ...

Page 1385: ...nt of double frequency 2nd harmonic and test the pickup behavior with this Cause a threshold value excess internal pickup for one of the protection functions that you want to block or Apply a test current with a load current as lead current step The inrush current detection creates a blocking signal CWA Process Create a test current that has flat ranges of a minimum width of 3 ms simultaneously in...

Page 1386: ...injected to the SIPROTEC 5 device By carrying out a shot for example a status change from zero sequence values of 0 A and 0 V to the values not equal to zero a transient is generated The signal _ 13021 302 Ground fault is issued as long as the static zero sequence voltage of the 2nd state is greater than the set threshold As amplitude for the secondary 3I0 100 mA is a suitable value In this test t...

Page 1387: ...ake sure that the binary inputs used are isolated 1 Binary Input Make sure that in the circuit of the 2nd circuit breaker auxiliary contact an equivalent resistance R is connected Observe the dimensioning notes under the section Equivalent resistance R 11 9 Functional Tests 11 9 Functional Test of the Trip Circuit Supervision SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Protection Manual 1387 C53000 G5040 C017 8 Editio...

Page 1388: ... correspond to the phase sequence that was set You can also determine the phase sequence via the Symmetrical components measured values If you obtain negative sequence system variables V2 I2 and no positive sequence system variables V1 I1 with symmetrical 3 phase infeed the setting parameter Phase sequence does not correspond to the connection 11 10 Functional Tests 11 10 Functional Test for the P...

Page 1389: ...ction stage to test This prevents the trip command from being generated for the stage Start the machine and excite it slowly up to approx 20 of the rated machine voltage From the operational measured values check the plausibility of the zero sequence voltage V0 and the input voltage at the connected input Determine the protection range from the pickup voltage The following applies for the protecti...

Page 1390: ... sequence voltage to 100 of the machine voltage V0 fault Calculate the safety margin by dividing the calculated fault value by the set threshold value If the result is less than 0 5 the safety margin is sufficient If the fault voltage is lower you can increase the sensitivity of the protection function EXAMPLE V0 meas 0 75 V Vthreshold value 5 68 V V0 fault 0 75 V 100 30 2 5 V Safety margin 2 5 V ...

Page 1391: ... switched through activate the operating mode Close cmd at V1 V2 Make sure that the fault recorder is turned on Via a temporary CFC chart link the signal Release close cmd of the active synchronization stage to the binary input signal Manual start of the fault recorder With the release of closure a fault record of the parameterized duration is set up the default setting of 500 ms is more than adeq...

Page 1392: ...epeat the attempt Siemens recommends calculating the average value from several 3 to 5 successful switching attempts i i NOTE Add the command output time of the protected device to measured time This exclusively depends in good approximation on the binary output used for the close command You can find the switching times for the different binary outputs in the Technical data Set the total time wit...

Page 1393: ... measuring points Check the functional measured values within the synchronization function The delta values must be 0 Check the voltages V1 and V2 for plausible values in comparison with the operational measured values for the voltage Check the frequencies f1 and f2 for plausible values in comparison with the operational measured value for the frequency Blind Switching Attempts when Used in Machin...

Page 1394: ...ation stage for example externally with binary input signal or via the integrated controller Check the proper release for activation with the message log or via a fault record You have to start the fault recording explicitly All activation conditions have to be fulfilled within the time Delay close command If you observe the change between synchronous and asynchronous operation raise the changeove...

Page 1395: ...t a setting of 10 the primary negative sequence current is 80 A 10 100 8 A For a current transformer ratio of 100 test with a secondary current of 0 08 A With a transformer of 100 A 5 A the test current is higher by the factor 5 Test with 0 4 A The pickup value is at 1 1 0 4 A 0 44 A If deviations occur during the testing you must check whether the power system data were entered correctly i i NOTE...

Page 1396: ...formers and voltage transformers the protection device does not measure a constant active power The current flowing at this time which can be assumed as being propor tional to the reactive power has a substantial influence The deviations are determined with 3 measurements and the correcting quantity φcorr is determined from the results To calculate the correction angle enter the active power and r...

Page 1397: ...h the sign negative in the functional measured values and note these 2 values in the values table Run the generator again at no load excitation and select the desired operating state With the measured value pairs P1 Q1 and P2 Q2 calculate the correction angle ϕ corr with the following formula fo_RPP correction angle 2 en_US i i NOTE Insert the power values with the signs that you read previously E...

Page 1398: ...ows i i NOTE Make sure that the binary input Stop valve closed is properly routed The quick stop criterion the pressure operated switch or the limit switch on the quick stop valve must control this binary input Close the quick stop valve From the functional measured value P1avg take the reverse power that was measured by the protec tion device as the active power If contrary to expectations this v...

Page 1399: ...IGSI 5 If a connection is successfully established the Status of topo recog field shows the indication valid in DIGSI 5 see Figure 11 11 If 2 devices are parameterized incorrectly the Status of topo recog field shows the indication invalid see Figure 11 11 In Figure 11 12 there is no protection data communication between device 1 and device 2 that is the protec tion interfaces 1 and 2 of device 1 ...

Page 1400: ...or 1 1 2 circuit breaker layouts a measuring point can therefore be transferred and checked optionally You can also check and test the 2nd measuring point by rerouting Furthermore communication with DIGSI 5 can take place via the protection interface to other devices of the constellation For this purpose the protection interface connection is interrupted and DIGSI 5 uses this connection for commun...

Page 1401: ...nal conditions if the secondary rated voltage is 100 V a voltage of 1 1 100 V 110 V must be supplied The measured value of the function Measured value V f must display 1 0000 i i NOTE When checking the dependent stage ensure it is associated with a thermal replica When repeating a test always reset the replica using the binary input indication Reset therm replica _ 13951 501 Primary Test The plaus...

Page 1402: ...responds to the simulation of a fault supplied from one side If a side has several measuring points the measuring inputs not included in the test carry no current The pickup value is tested by increasing the test current slowly i i NOTE Tests of currents via quadruple device rated current or a maximum of 20 A lead to an overload of the input circuits and may be performed only briefly You can find ...

Page 1403: ... current The differential current must be 0 and the restraint current is the current which is fed in To rule out overfunction on initial switch on for example due to the incorrect installation of a transformer Siemens recommends switching the differential protection to test mode The protection function operates but does not issue a trip command With the protection measurement values in the fault l...

Page 1404: ...1404 SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Protection Manual C53000 G5040 C017 8 Edition 07 2017 ...

Page 1405: ...ult Detection 1476 12 19 Undercurrent Protection 1486 12 20 Negative Sequence Protection 1488 12 21 Directional Negative Sequence Protection with Definite Time Delay 1492 12 22 Thermal Overload Protection 3 Phase Advanced 1494 12 23 Thermal Overload Protection User Defined Characteristic Curve 1497 12 24 Unbalanced Load Protection 1498 12 25 Current Unbalance Protection for Capacitors 3 Phase 1500...

Page 1406: ...ip Initiation 1541 12 52 Automatic Reclosing 1542 12 53 Fault Locator 1543 12 54 Temperature Supervision 1544 12 55 Current Jump Detection 1545 12 56 Voltage Jump Detection 1546 12 57 Synchronization Function 1547 12 58 Voltage Controller 1550 12 59 Current Balance Supervision 1553 12 60 Voltage Balance Supervision 1554 12 61 Current Sum Supervision 1555 12 62 Voltage Sum Supervision 1556 12 63 Cu...

Page 1407: ...alues Rated frequency frated 50 Hz 60 Hz Input and output modules IO202 IO208 IO211 IO214 IO215 Measuring range 0 V to 200 V 0 V to 7 07 V Input impedance 0 1 VA 0 01 VA Thermal rating 230 V continuously 20 V continuously Measuring Transducer Inputs via Module ANAI CA 4EL Insulation class SELV Safety Extra Low Voltage according to IEC 60255 27 Connector type 8 pin multiple contact strip Differenti...

Page 1408: ...must not be connected to a measuring transducer input at the same time only either current or voltage may be connected Due to EMC no line may be connected to an input that is not used current or voltage Use shielded cables Table 12 1 High Speed Measuring Transducer Inputs Voltage Differential voltage input channels IO210 442 IO212 843 Measuring range DC 10 V to 10 V Fault 0 5 of the measuring rang...

Page 1409: ...00 Ω Ni 100 Ω Ni 120 Ω 3 wire connection shielded cables Connector type 16 pin 17 pin terminal spring Temperature measuring range 65 C to 710 C For PT100 50 C to 250 C For NI100 50 C to 250 C For NI120 Supply Voltage Integrated Power Supply For modular devices the following printed circuit board assemblies have a power supply PS201 Power supply of the base module and of the 1st device row PS203 Po...

Page 1410: ...50 V UL recognized SIBA type 179200 or Schurter type SPT 5x20 2 A time lag AC 250 V DC 300 V UL recognized SIBA type 179200 or Schurter type SPT 5x20 PS201 PS203 CB202 2 A time lag AC 250 V DC 300 V UL recognized SIBA type 179200 or Schurter type SPT 5x20 Power consumption life relay active DC AC 230 V 50 Hz AC 115 V 50 Hz 1 3 base module non modular Without plug in modules 7 0 W 16 VA 12 5 VA 1 3...

Page 1411: ... contain interference suppression capacitors In order to ensure EMC immunity use the terminals shown in the terminal diagrams connection diagrams to connect the binary inputs to the common potential Relay Outputs Standard Relay Type S Switching capacity On 1000 W VA Off 30 VA 40 W ohmic 30 W VA at L R 40 ms AC and DC contact voltage 250 V Permissible current per contact continuous 5 A Permissible ...

Page 1412: ...ated data of the output contacts in accordance with UL certification AC 120 V 5 A General Purpose AC 250 V 5 A General Purpose AC 250 V 0 5 hp B300 R300 Interference suppression capacitors across the contacts 4 7 nF 20 AC 250 V Supervision 2 channel activation with cyclic testing only for make contact High Speed Relay with Semiconductor Acceleration Type HS Switching capacity On Off 1000 W VA Cont...

Page 1413: ... A Switching time OOT Output Operating Time Additional delay of the output medium used 16 ms Rated data of the output contacts in accordance with UL certification DC 300 V 4 5 A 30 s ON 15 min OFF DC 250 V 1 hp motor 30 s ON 15 min OFF DC 110 V 3 4 hp motor 30 s ON 15 min OFF DC 60 V 1 2 hp motor 30 s ON 15 min OFF DC 48 V 1 3 hp motor 30 s ON 15 min OFF DC 24 V 1 6 hp motor 30 s ON 15 min OFF Int...

Page 1414: ...ith integrated on site operation panel 150 mm x 314 mm x 337 mm 5 91 x 12 36 x 13 27 225 mm x 314 mm x 337 mm 8 86 x 12 36 x 13 27 300 mm x 314 mm x 337 mm 11 81 x 12 36 x 13 27 375 mm x 314 mm x 337 mm 14 76 x 12 36 x 13 27 450 mm x 314 mm x 337 mm 17 72 x 12 36 x 13 27 Surface mounted device with detached on site operation panel 150 mm x 314 mm x 230 mm 5 91 x 12 36 x 9 06 225 mm x 314 mm x 230 ...

Page 1415: ...perator protection back side IP2x for current terminal installed IP2x for voltage terminal installed Degree of pollution IEC 60255 27 2 Maximum altitude above sea level 2000 m 6561 68 ft UL Note Type 1 if mounted into a door or front cover of an enclosure When expanding the device with the 2nd device row then they must be mounted completely inside an enclosure Tightening Torques for Terminal Screw...

Page 1416: ... 0 39 Nm Countersunk screw M2 5 x 6 0 39 Nm Countersunk screw M2 5 x 8 0 39 Nm Collar screw M4 x 20 0 7 Nm Technical Data 12 1 General Device Data 1416 SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Protection Manual C53000 G5040 C017 8 Edition 07 2017 ...

Page 1417: ...irect connection Transmission rate 2048 kbit s Connection via communication networks Supported network interfaces G703 1 with 64 kbit s G703 T1 with 1 455 Mbit s G703 E1 with 2 048 Mbit s X 21 with 64 kbit s or 128 kbit s or 512 kbit s Pilot wires with 128 kbit s Transmission rate 64 kbit s at G703 1 1 455 Mbit s at G703 T1 2 048 Mbit s at G703 E1 512 kbit s or 128 kbit s or 64 kbit s at X 21 128 ...

Page 1418: ...y 351 Response time total approx For 2 ends Minimum Typical 100 ms For 3 ends Minimum Typical 150 ms For 6 ends Minimum Typical 200 ms Dropout times total approx For 2 ends Typical 100 ms For 3 ends Typical 150 ms For 6 ends Typical 200 ms 51 Times cannot be determined because the signals are transmitted in fragments Technical Data 12 2 Protection Interface and Protection Topology 1418 SIPROTEC 5 ...

Page 1419: ...Failure indication after 0 s to 3600 s Time zone and daylight saving time Manually setting the time zones Time zone offset with respect to GMT 720 min to 840 min Switching over to daylight saving time Active Inactive Beginning of daylight saving time Input day and time End of daylight saving time Input day and time Offset daylight saving time 0 min to 120 min steps of 15 12 3 52 If provided Techni...

Page 1420: ...easured values must be converted in the evaluation unit RTD Unit Ziehl TR1200 IP 7XV5662 8AD10 Max number of connected RTD units 4 Max number of sensors per RTD unit 12 Sensor type Pt 100 to EN 60751 connection of Ni 100 and Ni 120 sensors possible The measured values must be converted in the evaluation unit Temperature Measured Values Unit of measurement for temperature C or F adjustable Pt 100 1...

Page 1421: ...1 s Dropout The greater dropout differential pickup value dropout value of the following 2 criteria applies Dropout differential derived from the parameter Dropout ratio If this parameter is not available a dropout ratio of 95 applies for overcurrent and of 105 for undercur rent functionality Minimum absolute dropout differential Protection class current transformer 15 mA sec Irated 1 A or 75 mA s...

Page 1422: ...r 10 mA Irated 1 A or 50 mA Irated 5 A frated 10 Up to 50th harmonic frated 60 Hz 3 of the setting value or 20 mA Irated 1 A or 100 mA Irated 5 A frated 10 Currents method of measurement RMS value with filter for the gain of harmonics including compensation of the amplitude attenuation55 33 harmonics in relation to the fundamental component Up to 30 harmonic 1 5 of the setting value or 10 mA Irate...

Page 1423: ... Disk emulation Instantaneous Time multiplier 0 00 to 15 00 Increments of 0 01 Pickup delay 0 00 s to 60 00 s Increments of 0 01 s Minimum time of the curve 0 00 s to 1 00 s Increments of 0 01 s Additional time delay 0 00 s to 60 00 s Increments of 0 01 s Dropout The greater dropout differential pickup value dropout value of the following 2 criteria applies Dropout 95 of 1 1 threshold value Minimu...

Page 1424: ...f 1 en_US Figure 12 1 Operate Curves and Dropout Time Characteristic Curves According to IEC Technical Data 12 5 Overcurrent Protection Phases 1424 SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Protection Manual C53000 G5040 C017 8 Edition 07 2017 ...

Page 1425: ...f 1 en_US Figure 12 2 Operate Curves and Dropout Time Characteristic Curves According to IEC Technical Data 12 5 Overcurrent Protection Phases SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Protection Manual 1425 C53000 G5040 C017 8 Edition 07 2017 ...

Page 1426: ... to ANSI IEEE dwocpka1 080213 01 tif 2 en_US Figure 12 3 Operate Curves and Dropout Time Characteristic Curves According to ANSI IEEE Technical Data 12 5 Overcurrent Protection Phases 1426 SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Protection Manual C53000 G5040 C017 8 Edition 07 2017 ...

Page 1427: ... en_US Figure 12 4 Operate Curves and Dropout Time Characteristic Curves According to ANSI IEEE Technical Data 12 5 Overcurrent Protection Phases SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Protection Manual 1427 C53000 G5040 C017 8 Edition 07 2017 ...

Page 1428: ... Figure 12 5 Tripping Characteristic Curves and Dropout Characteristic Curves According to ANSI IEEE Technical Data 12 5 Overcurrent Protection Phases 1428 SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Protection Manual C53000 G5040 C017 8 Edition 07 2017 ...

Page 1429: ...omponent Up to 30th harmonic 1 of the setting value or 5 mA Irated 1 A or 25 mA Irated 5 A frated 10 Up to 50th harmonic frated 50 Hz 3 of the setting value or 20 mA Irated 1 A or 100 mA Irated 5 A frated 10 Up to 50th harmonic frated 60 Hz 4 of the setting value or 20 mA Irated 1 A or 100 mA Irated 5 A frated 10 Currents method of measurement RMS value with filter for the compensation of the ampl...

Page 1430: ...damental component for τ 100 ms with complete unbalance 5 Stage with User Defined Characteristic Curve Setting Value for the Function Block Filter h 0 100 000 to 100 000 Increments of 0 001 h 1 100 000 to 100 000 Increments of 0 001 h 2 100 000 to 100 000 Increments of 0 001 h 3 100 000 to 100 000 Increments of 0 001 h 4 100 000 to 100 000 Increments of 0 001 Setting Values for Protection Stage Me...

Page 1431: ...eater dropout differential pickup value dropout value of the following 2 criteria applies Dropout 95 of 1 1 threshold value or 95 of the absolute pickup value Minimum absolute dropout differential Protection class current transformer 15 mA sec Irated 1 A or 75 mA sec Irated 5 A Instrument current transformer 0 5 mA sec Irated 1 A or 2 5 mA sec Irated 5 A Reset of the Integration Timer Instantaneou...

Page 1432: ...00 mA Irated 5 A frated 10 65 Up to 50th harmonic frated 60 Hz 4 of the setting value or 20 mA Irated 1 A or 100 mA Irated 5 A frated 10 66 Operate time for 2 I I threshold value 20 5 of the reference calculated value 2 current tolerance or 30 ms Dropout time for I I threshold value 0 90 5 of the reference calculated value 2 current tolerance or 30 ms Time delays 1 of the setting value or 10 ms In...

Page 1433: ...ements of 0 001 V Negative sequence voltage V2 0 300 V to 200 000 V Increments of 0 001 V Time delay 0 00 s to 60 00 s Increments of 0 01 s Duration of V seal in time 0 10 s to 60 00 s Increments of 0 01 s Dropout for Inverse Time Overcurrent Protection Stages The greater dropout differential pickup value dropout value of the following 2 criteria applies Dropout Current 95 of 1 1 threshold value V...

Page 1434: ...se Time Overcurrent Protection Frequency Operating Range 0 9 f frated 1 1 According to specified tolerances 10 Hz f 0 9 frated 1 1 frated f 80 Hz Slightly expanded tolerances f 10 Hz f 80 Hz Inactive Tolerances Currents method of measurement fundamental component 1 of the setting value or 5 mA Irated 1 A or 25 mA Irated 5 A frated 10 Currents method of measurement RMS value 33 part of harmonic in ...

Page 1435: ...excess pickup in method of measurement fundamental component for τ 100 ms with complete unbalance 5 Technical Data 12 6 Voltage Dependent Overcurrent Protection Phases SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Protection Manual 1435 C53000 G5040 C017 8 Edition 07 2017 ...

Page 1436: ...t and of 105 for undercur rent functionality Minimum absolute dropout differential Protection class current transformer 15 mA sec Irated 1 A or 75 mA sec Irated 5 A Instrument current transformer 0 5 mA sec Irated 1 A or 2 5 mA sec Irated 5 A Times Operate time with time delay 0 ms Approx 25 ms OOT69 at 50 Hz Approx 22 ms OOT at 60 Hz Extension of the operate time during operation with transformer...

Page 1437: ...0 and 100 Irated 0 05 A to 175 00 A Increments of 0 01 A 1 A 1 6 Irated 0 001 A to 1 600 A Increments of 0 001 A 5 A 1 6 Irated 0 002 A to 8 000 A Increments of 0 001 A Dropout Disk emulation Instantaneous Time multiplier 0 00 to 15 00 Increments of 0 01 Minimum time of the curve 0 00 s to 1 00 s Increments of 0 01 s Additional time delay 0 00 s to 60 00 s Increments of 0 01 s Dropout The greater ...

Page 1438: ...rding to IEC Extension of the operate time during operation with transformer inrush current detection Approx 10 ms dwocpki1 080213 01 tif 1 en_US Figure 12 7 Operate Curves and Dropout Characteristic Curves According to IEC Technical Data 12 7 Overcurrent Protection Ground 1438 SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Protection Manual C53000 G5040 C017 8 Edition 07 2017 ...

Page 1439: ...tif 1 en_US Figure 12 8 Operate Curves and Dropout Characteristic Curves According to IEC Technical Data 12 7 Overcurrent Protection Ground SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Protection Manual 1439 C53000 G5040 C017 8 Edition 07 2017 ...

Page 1440: ... to ANSI IEEE dwocpka1 080213 01 tif 2 en_US Figure 12 9 Operate Curves and Dropout Characteristic Curves According to ANSI IEEE Technical Data 12 7 Overcurrent Protection Ground 1440 SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Protection Manual C53000 G5040 C017 8 Edition 07 2017 ...

Page 1441: ... 2 en_US Figure 12 10 Operate Curves and Dropout Characteristic Curves According to ANSI IEEE Technical Data 12 7 Overcurrent Protection Ground SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Protection Manual 1441 C53000 G5040 C017 8 Edition 07 2017 ...

Page 1442: ... 2 en_US Figure 12 11 Operate Curves and Dropout Characteristic Curves According to ANSI IEEE Technical Data 12 7 Overcurrent Protection Ground 1442 SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Protection Manual C53000 G5040 C017 8 Edition 07 2017 ...

Page 1443: ...o 30th harmonic 1 of the setting value or 5 mA Irated 1 A or 25 mA Irated 5 A frated 10 Up to 50th harmonic frated 50 Hz 3 of the setting value or 20 mA Irated 1 A or 100 mA Irated 5 A frated 10 Up to 50th harmonic frated 60 Hz 4 of the setting value or 20 mA Irated 1 A or 100 mA Irated 5 A frated 10 Operate time for 2 I I threshold value 20 5 of the reference calculated value 2 current tolerance ...

Page 1444: ...ements of 0 01 Number of value pairs for the operate curve 2 to 30 Increments of 1 X values of the operate curve 1 00 p u to 20 00 p u Increments of 0 01 p u Y values of the operate curve 0 00 s to 999 00 s Increments of 0 01 s Number of value pairs for the dropout characteristic curve 2 to 30 Increments of 1 X values of the dropout characteristic curve 0 05 p u to 0 95 p u Increments of 0 01 p u ...

Page 1445: ...r 100 mA Irated 5 A frated 10 Operate time for 2 I I threshold value 20 5 of the reference calculated value 2 current tolerance or 30 ms Dropout time for I I threshold value 0 90 5 of the reference calculated value 2 current tolerance or 30 ms Influencing Variables for Thresholds Transient excess pickup in method of measurement fundamental component for τ 100 ms with complete unbalance 5 Operate C...

Page 1446: ...able a dropout ratio of 95 applies for overcurrent and of 105 for undercur rent functionality Minimum absolute dropout differential Protection class current transformer 15 mA sec Irated 1 A or 75 mA sec Irated 5 A Instrument current transformer 0 5 mA sec Irated 1 A or 2 5 mA sec Irated 5 A Direction Determination Type With healthy voltages With voltage memory 2 s Forward range Vref rot 88 Dropout...

Page 1447: ...ted 5 A frated 10 Time delay 1 of the setting value or 10 ms Direction determination angle error 1 Influencing Variables for Thresholds Transient excess pickup in method of measurement fundamental component for τ 100 ms with complete unbalance 5 Stage with Inverse Time Characteristic Curve Setting Values Rotation angle of the reference voltage 180 to 180 Increments of 1 Directional mode Forward Ba...

Page 1448: ...apter 12 5 2 Stage with Inverse Time Charac teristic Curve Figure 12 2 Long time inverse type B Operate Curves and Dropout Time Characteristic Curves according to ANSI IEEE Inverse type C See chapter 12 5 2 Stage with Inverse Time Charac teristic Curve Figure 12 3 Short inverse Long inverse See chapter 12 5 2 Stage with Inverse Time Charac teristic Curve Figure 12 4 Moderately inverse Very inverse...

Page 1449: ...A Irated 5 A frated 10 Up to 50th harmonic frated 60 Hz 4 of the setting value or 20 mA Irated 1 A or 100 mA Irated 5 A frated 10 Operate time for 2 I threshold value I 20 5 of the reference calculated value 2 current tolerance or 10 ms Dropout time for I threshold value I 0 90 5 of the reference calculated value 2 current tolerance or 10 ms Direction determination angle error 1 Influencing Variab...

Page 1450: ...e Minimum absolute dropout differential Protection class current transformer 15 mA sec Irated 1 A or 75 mA sec Irated 5 A Instrument current transformer 0 5 mA sec Irated 1 A or 2 5 mA sec Irated 5 A Reset of the Integration Timer Instantaneous With dropout Disk emulation Approx 0 90 threshold value Direction Determination Type With healthy voltages With voltage memory 2 s Forward range Vref rot 8...

Page 1451: ... frated 50 Hz 3 of the setting value or 20 mA Irated 1 A or 100 mA Irated 5 A frated 10 Up to 50th harmonic frated 60 Hz 4 of the setting value or 20 mA Irated 1 A or 100 mA Irated 5 A frated 10 Operate time for 2 I threshold value I 20 5 of the reference calculated value 2 current tolerance or 10 ms Dropout time for I threshold value I 0 90 5 of the reference calculated value 2 current tolerance ...

Page 1452: ...Dropout delay 0 00 s to 60 00 s Increments of 0 01 s Dropout The greater dropout differential pickup value dropout value of the following 2 criteria applies Dropout differential derived from the parameter Dropout ratio If this parameter is not available a dropout ratio of 95 applies for overcurrent and of 105 for undercur rent functionality Minimum absolute dropout differential Protection class cu...

Page 1453: ...tal component for τ 100 ms with complete unbalance 5 Stage with Inverse Time Characteristic Curve Setting Values for the Function Direction Determination Method for direction determination Zero sequence Negative sequence Minimum V0 or V2 threshold 0 150 V to 20 000 V 0 001 V Rotation angle of the reference voltage 180 to 180 1 Forward range 0 to 180 1 Setting Values Direction mode Forward Reverse ...

Page 1454: ...haracteristic Curve Very inverse type B Extremely inverse type C Long time inverse type B Operate Curves and Dropout Time Characteristic Curves according to ANSI IEEE Inverse type C Refer to the respective figure of the technical data for the non dir OC ground function 12 7 2 Stage with Inverse Time Characteristic Curve Short inverse Long inverse Moderately inverse Very inverse Extremely inverse D...

Page 1455: ...e Overcurrent Protection with Logarithmic Inverse Characteristic Curve Setting Values for the Function Direction Determination Method for direction determination Zero sequence Negative sequence Minimum V0 or V2 threshold 0 150 V to 20 000 V 0 001 V Rotation angle of the reference voltage 180 to 180 1 Forward range 0 to 180 1 Setting Values Direction mode Forward Reverse Method of measurement Funda...

Page 1456: ...ty Minimum absolute dropout differential Protection class current transformer 15 mA sec Irated 1 A or 75 mA sec Irated 5 A Instrument current transformer 0 5 mA sec Irated 1 A or 2 5 mA sec Irated 5 A Times The maximum pickup time with operate delay 0 ms Approx 30 ms OOT at 50 Hz Approx 25 ms OOT at 60 Hz Extension of the operate time during operation with inrush current detection Approx 10 ms Dro...

Page 1457: ...f the reference calculated value 2 current tolerance or 30 ms Direction determination angle error 1º Influencing Variables for Thresholds Transient excess pickup in method of measurement fundamental component for τ 100 ms with complete unbalance 5 Stage with Knee Point Characteristic Curve Setting Values for the Function Direction Determination Method for direction determination Zero sequence Nega...

Page 1458: ...rithmic Inverse Time with Knee Point Characteristic In the Example of Threshold 0 004 A Dropout The greater dropout differential pickup value dropout value of the following 2 criteria applies Dropout differential derived from the parameter Dropout ratio If this parameter is not available a dropout ratio of 95 applies for overcurrent and of 105 for undercur rent functionality Minimum absolute dropo...

Page 1459: ... to 50th harmonic frated 60 Hz 4 of the setting value or 20 mA Irated 1 A or 100 mA Irated 5 A frated 10 Inverse time operate time to logarithmic inverse time with knee point characteristic 5 of the reference calculated value 2 current tolerance or 30 ms Inverse time dropout time to logarithmic inverse time with knee point characteristic 5 of the reference calculated value 2 current tolerance or 3...

Page 1460: ...s Increments of 0 01 s Dropout The greater dropout differential pickup value dropout value of the following 2 criteria applies Dropout 95 of 1 1 threshold value Minimum absolute dropout differential Protection class current transformer 15 mA sec Irated 1 A or 75 mA sec Irated 5 A Instrument current transformer 0 5 mA sec Irated 1 A or 2 5 mA sec Irated 5 A Reset of the Integration Timer Instantane...

Page 1461: ...monic frated 60 Hz 4 of the setting value or 20 mA Irated 1 A or 100 mA Irated 5 A frated 10 Operate time for 2 I I threshold value 20 5 of the reference calculated value 2 current tolerance or 30 ms Dropout time for I I threshold value 0 90 5 of the reference calculated value 2 current tolerance or 30 ms Direction determination angle error 1º Influencing Variables for Thresholds Transient excess ...

Page 1462: ...arameter Dropout ratio If this parameter is not available a dropout ratio of 95 applies for overcurrent and of 105 for undercur rent functionality Minimum absolute dropout differential Protection class current transformer 15 mA sec Irated 1 A or 75 mA sec Irated 5 A Instrument current transformer 0 5 mA sec Irated 1 A or 2 5 mA sec Irated 5 A Frequency Operating Range 0 9 f frated 1 1 According to...

Page 1463: ...ut The larger dropout differential pickup threshold dropout threshold of the following 2 criteria is used Dropout differential derived from the Dropout ratio parameter If this parameter is not available a dropout ratio of 95 applies to the overcurrent protection and a dropout ratio of 105 applies to the undercurrent protection Minimum absolute dropout differential Protection class current transfor...

Page 1464: ...ratio If this parameter is not available a dropout ratio of 95 applies for overcurrent and of 105 for undercur rent functionality Minimum absolute dropout differential Protection class current transformer 15 mA sec Irated 1 A or 75 mA sec Irated 5 A Instrument current transformer 0 5 mA sec Irated 1 A or 2 5 mA sec Irated 5 A Times Operate time for current 2 2 threshold value Approx 8 ms OOT84 Tol...

Page 1465: ...es Tripping delay 0 00 s to 60 00 s Increments of 0 01 s Tolerances Times 1 of the setting value or 10 ms 12 13 Technical Data 12 13 Instantaneous Tripping at Switch onto Fault SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Protection Manual 1465 C53000 G5040 C017 8 Edition 07 2017 ...

Page 1466: ...olute dropout differential Protection class current transformer 15 mA sec Irated 1 A or 75 mA sec Irated 5 A Instrument current transformer 0 5 mA sec Irated 1 A or 2 5 mA sec Irated 5 A Times Operate time with time delay 0 ms Approx 15 ms OOT86 at 50 Hz Approx 14 ms OOT at 60 Hz Extension of the operate time during operation with transformer inrush current detection Approx 10 ms Dropout time Appr...

Page 1467: ...ntal component RMS value Threshold value87 1 A 50 and 100 Irated 0 030 A to 35 000 A Increments of 0 001 A 5 A 50 and 100 Irated 0 15 A to 175 00 A Increments of 0 01 A 1 A 1 6 Irated 0 001 A to 1 600 A Increments of 0 001 A 5 A 1 6 Irated 0 005 A to 8 000 A Increments of 0 001 A Dropout Disk emulation Instantaneous Time multiplier 0 05 to 15 00 Increments of 0 01 Dropout The greater dropout diffe...

Page 1468: ... mA Irated 1 A or 25 mA Irated 5 A frated 10 Currents method of measurement RMS value 33 harmonics in relation to fundamental component Up to 30th harmonic 1 of the setting value or 5 mA Irated 1 A or 25 mA Irated 5 A frated 10 Up to 50th harmonic frated 50 Hz 3 of the setting value or 20 mA Irated 1 A or 100 mA Irated 5 A frated 10 Up to 50th harmonic frated 60 Hz 4 of the setting value or 20 mA ...

Page 1469: ...criteria applies Dropout 95 of 1 1 threshold value Minimum absolute dropout differential Protection class current transformer 15 mA sec Irated 1 A or 75 mA sec Irated 5 A Instrument current transformer 0 5 mA sec Irated 1 A or 2 5 mA sec Irated 5 A Reset of the Integration Timer Instantaneous With dropout Disk emulation Approx 0 90 threshold value Frequency Operating Range 0 9 f frated 1 1 Accordi...

Page 1470: ...value 2 current tolerance or 30 ms Influencing Variables for Thresholds Transient excess pickup in method of measurement fundamental component for τ 100 ms with complete unbalance 5 Operate Curves and Dropout Time Characteristic Curves According to IEC Extension of the operate time during operation with transformer inrush current detection Approx 10 ms Technical Data 12 14 Overcurrent Protection 1...

Page 1471: ...rcur rent functionality Minimum absolute dropout differential Protection class current transformer 15 mA sec Irated 1 A or 75 mA sec Irated 5 A Instrument current transformer 0 5 mA sec Irated 1 A or 2 5 mA sec Irated 5 A Times Operate time with time delay 0 ms Approx 8 ms OOT88 Dropout time Approx 25 ms OOT Frequency Operating Range 0 9 f frated 1 1 According to specified tolerances 10 Hz f 0 9 f...

Page 1472: ...The greater dropout differential pickup value dropout value of the following 2 criteria applies Dropout differential derived from the parameter Dropout ratio If this parameter is not available a dropout ratio of 95 applies for overcurrent and of 105 for undercur rent functionality Minimum absolute dropout differential Protection class current transformer 15 mA sec Irated 1 A or 75 mA sec Irated 5 ...

Page 1473: ...5 mA Irated 5 A 3I0 via sensitive current transformer 1 of setting value or 0 1 mA Irated 1 6 A or 0 5 mA Irated 8 A Times 1 of the setting value or 10 ms Technical Data 12 16 Non Directional Intermittent Ground Fault Protection SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Protection Manual 1473 C53000 G5040 C017 8 Edition 07 2017 ...

Page 1474: ...e 2 to 100 Increments of 1 Dropout The greater dropout differential pickup value dropout value of the following 2 criteria applies Dropout differential derived from the parameter Dropout ratio If this parameter is not available a dropout ratio of 95 applies for overcurrent and of 105 for undercur rent functionality Minimum absolute dropout differential Protection class current transformer 15 mA se...

Page 1475: ... 25 mA Irated 5 A 3I0 via sensitive current transformer 1 of the setting value or 0 1 mA Irated 1 6 A or 0 5 mA Irated 8 A Times 1 of the setting value or 10 ms Technical Data 12 17 Directional Intermittent Ground Fault Protection SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Protection Manual 1475 C53000 G5040 C017 8 Edition 07 2017 ...

Page 1476: ...tion F2 0 0 to 5 0 Increments of 0 1 Times Pickup times Approx 25 ms OOT91 at 50 Hz Approx 23 ms OOT at 60 Hz Dropout times Approx 25 ms OOT at 50 Hz Approx 22 ms OOT at 60 Hz Frequency Operating Range 0 9 f frated 1 1 According to specified tolerances 10 Hz f 0 9 frated 1 1 frated f 80 Hz Slightly expanded tolerances 92 f 10 Hz f 80 Hz Active with less sensitivity 93 Tolerances Currents 3I0 via s...

Page 1477: ... 1 to 15 Increments of 1 Angle correction φ 45 to 45 Increments of 1 Tripping delay 0 00 s to 60 00 s Increments of 0 01 s Dropout The greater dropout differential pickup value dropout value of the following 2 criteria applies Dropout differential derived from the parameter Dropout ratio If this parameter is not available a dropout ratio of 95 applies for overcurrent overvoltage and of 105 for und...

Page 1478: ... overvoltage and of 105 for undercurrent undervoltage functionality Minimum absolute dropout differential Protection class current transformer 15 mA sec Irated 1 A or 75 mA sec Irated 5 A Instrument current transformer 0 5 mA sec Irated 1 A or 2 5 mA sec Irated 5 A Voltage transformer 150 mV sec Times Operate time with time delay 0 ms Approx 115 ms OOT96 at 50 Hz Approx 112 ms OOT at 60 Hz Dropout...

Page 1479: ...ltage functionality Minimum absolute dropout differential Protection class current transformer 15 mA sec Irated 1 A or 75 mA sec Irated 5 A Instrument current transformer 0 5 mA sec Irated 1 A or 2 5 mA sec Irated 5 A Voltage transformer 150 mV sec Times Operate time with time delay 0 ms Approx 23 ms OOT97 at 50 Hz Approx 21 ms OOT at 60 Hz Extension of operate time during operation with transform...

Page 1480: ... greater dropout differential pickup value dropout value of the following 2 criteria applies Dropout differential derived from the parameter Dropout ratio If this parameter is not available a dropout ratio of 95 applies for overcurrent overvoltage and of 105 for undercurrent undervoltage functionality Minimum absolute dropout differential Protection class current transformer 15 mA sec Irated 1 A o...

Page 1481: ...irection result 0 00 s to 60 00 s Increments of 0 01 s Forward range 0 to 90 Increments of 1 Tripping delay 0 00 s to 60 00 s Increments of 0 01 s Dropout The greater dropout differential pickup value dropout value of the following 2 criteria applies Dropout differential derived from the parameter Dropout ratio If this parameter is not available a dropout ratio of 95 applies for overcurrent overvo...

Page 1482: ...erential pickup value dropout value of the following 2 criteria applies Dropout differential derived from the parameter Dropout ratio If this parameter is not available a dropout ratio of 95 applies for the overvoltage and of 105 for the undervoltage functionality Minimum absolute dropout differential 150 mV sec Times Operate time with time delay 0 ms Standard filter true RMS Approx 25 ms OOT101 a...

Page 1483: ...al derived from the parameter Dropout ratio If this parameter is not available a dropout ratio of 95 applies for overcurrent and of 105 for undercur rent functionality Minimum absolute dropout differential Protection class current transformer 15 mA sec Irated 1 A or 75 mA sec Irated 5 A Instrument current transformer 0 5 mA sec Irated 1 A or 2 5 mA sec Irated 5 A Times Operate time with time delay...

Page 1484: ... A Sensitive current trans former 1 mA sec Irated 1 A 5 mA sec Irated 5 A Tolerances Admittance 1 of the setting value or 0 05 mS Irated 1 6 A or 0 25 mS Irated 8 A frated 10 Pulse Pattern Detection Stage Setting Values V0 threshold value 0 300 V to 200 000 V Increments of 0 001 V 3I0 threshold value Protection class current trans formers For Iph rated 1 A 0 030 A to 35 000 A Increments of 0 001 A...

Page 1485: ...rential Protection class current transformer 15 mA sec Irated 1 A or 75 mA sec Irated 5 A Instrument current transformer 0 5 mA sec Irated 1 A or 2 5 mA sec Irated 5 A Voltage transformer 150 mV sec Times Operate delay 0 ms Approx 2 5 s 0 3 s OOT104 at 50 Hz and 60 Hz105 Dropout time Approx 32 ms OOT at 50 Hz and 60 Hz 104 OOT Output Operating Time additional delay of the output medium used see ch...

Page 1486: ... 75 mA sec Irated 5 A Instrument current transformer 0 5 mA sec Irated 1 A or 2 5 mA sec Irated 5 A Times Operate time Approx 25 ms OOT106 at 50 Hz Approx 22 ms OOT at 60 Hz Dropout time Approx 25 ms OOT at 50 Hz Approx 22 ms OOT at 60 Hz Frequency Operating Range 0 9 f frated 1 1 According to specified tolerances 10 Hz f 0 9 frated 1 1 frated f 80 Hz Slightly expanded tolerances f 10 Hz f 80 Hz I...

Page 1487: ...d 5 A frated 10 Up to 50th harmonic frated 60 Hz 4 of setting value or 20 mA Irated 1 A or 100 mA Irated 5 A frated 10 Time delays 1 of the setting value or 10 ms Technical Data 12 19 Undercurrent Protection SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Protection Manual 1487 C53000 G5040 C017 8 Edition 07 2017 ...

Page 1488: ... 1 6 Irated 0 001 A to 1 600 A Increments of 0 001 A 5 A 1 6 Irated 0 005 A to 8 000 A Increments of 0 001 A Dropout The greater dropout differential pickup value dropout value of the following 2 criteria applies Dropout differential derived from the parameter Dropout ratio Dropout differential of 3 of the object rated current Times Pickup time Approx 40 ms OOT107 at 50 Hz Approx 35 ms OOT at 60 H...

Page 1489: ...ments of 0 001 A Maximum phase current maximum current limiting 1 A 50 and 100 Irated 0 030 A to 35 000 A Increments of 0 001 A 5 A 50 and 100 Irated 0 15 A to 175 00 A Increments of 0 01 A 1 A 1 6 Irated 0 001 A to 1 600 A Increments of 0 001 A 5 A 1 6 Irated 0 005 A to 8 000 A Increments of 0 001 A Dropout The greater dropout differential pickup value dropout value of the following 2 criteria ap...

Page 1490: ... teristic Curve Figure 12 6 Extension of the Operating Time Extension of the operate time during operation with transformer inrush current detection Approx 10 ms Current Operating Range Current range At least one phase current setting value Irelease All phase currents setting value Iph max Frequency Operating Range 0 9 f frated 1 1 According to specified tolerances 10 Hz 0 9 frated 1 1 frated f 80...

Page 1491: ...value 2 current tolerance or 30 ms Dropout time for I I threshold value 0 90 5 of the reference calculated value 2 current tolerance or 30 ms Technical Data 12 20 Negative Sequence Protection SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Protection Manual 1491 C53000 G5040 C017 8 Edition 07 2017 ...

Page 1492: ...The greater dropout differential pickup value dropout value of the following 2 criteria applies Dropout differential derived from the parameter Dropout ratio Dropout differential of 3 of the object rated current Times Operate time with time delay 0 ms Approx 40 ms OOT109 at 50 Hz Approx 40 ms OOT at 60 Hz Dropout time Approx 39 ms OOT Frequency Operating Range 0 9 f frated 1 1 According to specifi...

Page 1493: ... angle in determining the direction 5o Technical Data 12 21 Directional Negative Sequence Protection with Definite Time Delay SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Protection Manual 1493 C53000 G5040 C017 8 Edition 07 2017 ...

Page 1494: ...of 1 s Imax thermal 1 A 50 and 100 Irated 0 030 A to 10 000 A Increments of 0 001 A 5 A 50 and 100 Irated 0 15 A to 50 00 A Increments of 0 01 A 1 A 1 6 Irated 0 001 A to 1 600 A Increments of 0 001 A 5 A 1 6 Irated 0 005 A to 8 000 A Increments of 0 001 A Imin cooling 1 A 50 and 100 Irated 0 000 A to 10 000 A Increments of 0 001 A 5 A 50 and 100 Irated 0 00 A to 50 00 A Increments of 0 01 A 1 A 1...

Page 1495: ...in relation to the fundamental component With reference to k Irated Up to 30th harmonic 2 or 10 mA Irated 1 A or 50 mA Irated 5 A 2 class acc to IEC 60255 8111 Up to 50th harmonic frated 50 Hz 4 or 20 mA Irated 1 A or 100 mA Irated 5 A 4 class acc to IEC 60255 8112 Up to 50th harmonic frated 60 Hz 5 or 25 mA Irated 1 A or 125 mA Irated 5 A 5 class acc to IEC 60255 8112 With reference to the operat...

Page 1496: ...11 01 tif 1 en_US Figure 12 15 Operate Curve of Overload Protection Technical Data 12 22 Thermal Overload Protection 3 Phase Advanced 1496 SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Protection Manual C53000 G5040 C017 8 Edition 07 2017 ...

Page 1497: ...6 Irated 0 000 A to 1 600 A Increments of 0 001 A 5 A 1 6 Irated 0 000 A to 8 000 A Increments of 0 001 A Curve based on preload 1 to 100 Increments of 1 Number of value pairs for the operate curve 2 to 30 Increments of 1 X values of the operate curve 1 10 p u to 20 00 p u Increments of 0 0 p u Y values of the operate curve 1 00 s to 20 000 00 s Increments of 0 01 s Dropout Ratios Tripping thresho...

Page 1498: ...rated current Operate Characteristics Characteristic of the thermal replica Where tI2Perm Permissible application time of the negative sequence current K Unbalanced load factor K I2 Irated machine Unbalanced load negative sequence current rated current of the machine dwunbaop 300913 1 en_US Figure 12 16 Thermal Characteristic for Unbalanced Load Protection Times Pickup time of the warning stage Ap...

Page 1499: ... setting value or 0 150 A at Irated 5 A Warning delay 1 of the setting value or 10 ms Time for 2 I2 I2Perm 20 5 of reference calculated value or 100 ms 1 current tolerance or 10 mA at Irated 1 A 5 of reference calculated value or 100 ms 1 current tolerance or 50 mA at Irated 5 A Influencing Variables for the Thresholds Harmonics Up to 10 3rd harmonic Up to 10 5th harmonic 1 1 Technical Data 12 24 ...

Page 1500: ...er Stage Type of counting groups segregated sum Max no of def elem phs A 1 to 1000 Increments of 1 Max no of def elem phs B 1 to 1000 Increments of 1 Max no of def elem phs C 1 to 1000 Increments of 1 Operate delay 0 00 s to 10000 00 s Increments of 0 01 s Dropout The greater dropout differential pickup value dropout value of the following 2 criteria applies Dropout differential derived from the p...

Page 1501: ...rents Ic Iunbal Protection class current transformers 1 of the setting value or 5 mA Irated 1 A or 25 mA Irated 5 A frated 10 Currents Iunbal Sensitive current transformer 1 of the setting value or 0 1 mA Irated 1 6 A or 0 5 mA Irated 8 A frated 10 Time delays 1 of the setting value or 10 ms Technical Data 12 25 Current Unbalance Protection for Capacitors 3 Phase SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Protection ...

Page 1502: ...s Measured value compensated non compensated Setting Values Counter Stage Type of counting groups segregated sum Type of counting phases segregated sum Max no of def elem phs A 1 to 1000 Increments of 1 Max no of def elem phs B 1 to 1000 Increments of 1 Max no of def elem phs C 1 to 1000 Increments of 1 Max no of def elem 1 to 1000 Increments of 1 Operate delay 0 00 s to 10000 00 s Increments of 0...

Page 1503: ... Ic Iunbal Protection class current transformers 1 of the setting value or 5 mA Irated 1 A or 25 mA Irated 5 A frated 10 Currents Iunbal Sensitive current transformer 1 of the setting value or 0 1 mA Irated 1 6 A or 0 5 mA Irated 8 A frated 10 Time delays 1 of the setting value or 10 ms 115 OOT Output Operating Time additional delay of the output medium used see chapter 12 1 4 Relay Outputs Techni...

Page 1504: ...rating Time at 50 Hz Approx 27 ms OOT Output Operating Time at 60 Hz Dropout time Approx 20 ms OOT Output Operating Time at 50 Hz Approx 18 ms OOT Output Operating Time at 60 Hz Tolerances Threshold 0 2 V 1 of the setting value or 0 05 V compensated Time delays 1 of the setting value or 10 ms Operating Range of the Secondary Differential Voltage Operating Range of the secondary differential voltag...

Page 1505: ...ization threshold value I IRated obj 1 00 to 20 00 Increments of 0 01 Add on stabilization time 0 00 s to 5 00 s or Increments of 0 01 s Crossblk time additional stabilization 0 00 s to 2 00 s or Increments of 0 01 s Operate curve See figure Figure 12 17 I DIFF Fast Threshold value I IRated obj 0 5 to 35 0 Increments of 0 1 Tripping delay 0 00 s to 60 00 s Increments of 0 01 s I DIFF Unrestrained ...

Page 1506: ... 50 Hz 60 Hz 8 ms OOT1 8 ms OOT1 I DIFF unrestrained stage min 50 Hz 60 Hz 8 ms OOT1 8 ms OOT1 Dropout time approx 50 Hz 60 Hz 29 ms 26 ms Frequency Operating Range 0 9 f frated 1 1 According to specified tolerances 10 Hz f 0 9 frated 1 1 frated f 80 Hz Slightly expanded tolerances f 10 Hz f 80 Hz Active 117 Refer to protection functions for example overcurrent protection Technical Data 12 28 Diff...

Page 1507: ...1 20 Increments of 0 01 Characteristic constant k 0 00 to 300 00 Increments of 0 01 Characteristic constant α 0 010 to 5 000 Increments of 0 001 Characteristic constant c 0 000 to 5 000 Increments of 0 001 Time multiplier 0 05 to 15 00 Increments of 0 01 Additional time delay 0 00 s to 60 00 s Increments of 0 01 s Reset time 0 00 s to 60 00 s Increments of 0 01 s Operate Curve for Stage Type Inver...

Page 1508: ...Dropout time Approx 20 ms OOT Frequency Operating Range 0 9 f frated 1 1 According to specified tolerances 10 Hz f 0 9 frated 1 1 frated f 80 Hz Slightly expanded tolerances f 10 Hz f 80 Hz Active Tolerances for Stage Type Definite Time Overvoltage Protection Voltages 0 5 of the setting value or 0 05 V Time delays 1 of the setting value or 10 ms Tolerances for Stage Type Inverse Time Overvoltage P...

Page 1509: ...tio of 95 applies for the overvoltage and of 105 for the undervoltage functionality Minimum absolute dropout differential 150 mV sec Times Operate time with time delay 0 ms Standard filter true RMS Approx 25 ms OOT121 at 50 Hz Approx 22 ms OOT at 60 Hz 2 cycle filters Approx 45 ms OOT at 50 Hz Approx 39 ms OOT at 60 Hz Dropout time Standard filter true RMS Approx 20 ms OOT at 50 Hz Approx 17 ms OO...

Page 1510: ...5 of the setting value or 0 05 V Time delays 1 of the setting value or 10 ms Technical Data 12 30 Overvoltage Protection with Zero Sequence Voltage Residual Voltage 1510 SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Protection Manual C53000 G5040 C017 8 Edition 07 2017 ...

Page 1511: ...ality Minimum absolute dropout differential 150 mV sec Times Operate time with time delay 0 ms Approx 25 ms OOT122 at 50 Hz Approx 22 ms OOT at 60 Hz Dropout time Approx 20 ms OOT Frequency Operating Range 0 9 f frated 1 1 According to specified tolerances 10 Hz f 0 9 frated 1 1 frated f 80 Hz Slightly expanded tolerances f 10 Hz f 80 Hz Active Tolerances Voltages 0 5 of the setting value or 0 05 ...

Page 1512: ...Minimum absolute dropout differential 150 mV sec Times Pickup times 55 ms to 210 ms OOT 123 depends on the measuring window length at 50 Hz 48 ms to 185 ms OOT depends on the measuring window length at 60 Hz Dropout time 20 ms to 70 ms OOT depends on the measuring window length Frequency Operating Range 0 9 f frated 1 1 According to specified tolerances 10 Hz f 0 9 frated 1 1 frated f 80 Hz Slight...

Page 1513: ...ter is not available a dropout ratio of 95 applies for the overvoltage and of 105 for the undervoltage functionality Minimum absolute dropout differential 150 mV sec Times Operate time with time delay 0 ms Approx 25 ms OOT126 at 50 Hz Approx 22 ms OOT at 60 Hz Dropout time Approx 20 ms OOT Frequency Operating Range 0 9 f frated 1 1 According to specified tolerances 10 Hz f 0 9 frated 1 1 frated f ...

Page 1514: ...Time delays 1 of the setting value or 10 ms Technical Data 12 33 Overvoltage Protection with Any Voltage 1514 SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Protection Manual C53000 G5040 C017 8 Edition 07 2017 ...

Page 1515: ... u Increments of 0 01 p u Y values of the operate curve 0 00 s to 9999 99 s Increments of 0 01 s Number of value pairs for the dropout characteristic curve 30 Increments of 1 X values of the dropout characteristic curve 0 01 p u to 0 95 p u Increments of 0 01 p u Y values of the dropout characteristic curve 0 00 s to 9999 99 s Increments of 0 01 s Inverse Time Characteristic Curve IEC IEEE dw_peci...

Page 1516: ...Frequency Operating Range 0 9 f frated 1 1 According to specified tolerances 10 Hz f 0 9 frated 1 1 frated f 80 Hz Slightly expanded tolerances f 10 Hz f 80 Hz Active Tolerances Peak overvoltage 33 harmonics with reference to fundamental component Up to 30th harmonic Up to 50th harmonic frated 50 Hz Up to 50th harmonic frated 60 Hz 1 of the setting value or 0 005 p u frated 10 3 of the setting val...

Page 1517: ...lute dropout differential 150 mV sec Times Pickup times 55 ms to 210 ms OOT127 depends on the measuring window length at 50 Hz 48 ms to 190 ms OOT depends on the measuring window length at 60 Hz Dropout times 22 ms to 55 ms OOT depends on the measuring window length at 50 Hz 18 ms to 45 ms OOT depends on the measuring window length at 60 Hz Frequency Operating Range 0 9 f frated to 1 1 f frated Ac...

Page 1518: ...I 1 A 50 and 100 Irated 0 030 A to 10 000 A Increments of 0 001 A 5 A 50 and 100 Irated 0 15 A to 50 00 A Increments of 0 01 A 1 A 1 6 Irated 0 001 A to 1 600 A Increments of 0 001 A 5 A 1 6 Irated 0 005 A to 8 000 A Increments of 0 001 A Threshold 0 300 V to 175 000 V Increments of 0 001 V Pickup factor 0 80 to 1 00 Increments of 0 01 Characteristic constant k 0 00 to 300 00 Increments of 0 01 Ch...

Page 1519: ...pprox 20 ms OOT Frequency Operating Range 0 9 f frated 1 1 According to specified tolerances 10 Hz f 0 9 frated 1 1 frated f 80 Hz Slightly expanded tolerances f 10 Hz f 80 Hz Inactive maintained Dropout of the pickup induced by blocking or by increasing the measurand beyond the dropout threshold Tolerances for Stage Type Definite Time Undervoltage Protection Voltages 0 5 of the setting value or 0...

Page 1520: ...ction class current transformers 1 of the setting value or 0 1 mA Irated 1 6 A or 0 5 mA Irated 8 A frated 10 valid for instrument transformers Operate time for 0 V VThresh 0 9 5 of the setting value or 30 ms Reset time delay 1 of the setting value or 10 ms Technical Data 12 36 Undervoltage Protection with 3 Phase Voltage 1520 SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Protection Manual C53000 G5040 C017 8 Edition 07...

Page 1521: ...ropout differential 150 mV sec Times Operate time Approx 25 ms OOT 130 at 50 Hz Approx 22 ms OOT at 60 Hz Dropout time Approx 20 ms OOT Frequency Operating Range 0 9 f frated 1 1 According to specified tolerances 10 Hz f 0 9 frated 1 1 frated f 80 Hz Slightly expanded tolerances f 10 Hz f 80 Hz Inactive maintained Dropout of the pickup induced by blocking or by increasing the measurand beyond the ...

Page 1522: ...not available a dropout ratio of 95 applies for the overvoltage and of 105 for the undervoltage functionality Minimum absolute dropout differential 150 mV sec Times Operate time with time delay 0 ms Approx 25 ms OOT132 at 50 Hz Approx 22 ms OOT at 60 Hz Dropout time Approx 20 ms OOT Frequency Operating Range 0 9 f frated 1 1 According to specified tolerances 10 Hz f 0 9 frated 1 1 frated f 80 Hz S...

Page 1523: ...following 2 criteria is used Dropout differential derived from Dropout ratio 105 for the Minimum voltage parameter Minimum absolute dropout differential 150 mV secondary Operating Ranges Voltage range 5 V to 230 V phase phase Frequency range Angle difference method 10 Hz to 80 Hz Filtering method 25 Hz to 80 Hz Tolerances Frequency f frated 0 20 Hz f frated 0 20 Hz 5 mHz at V Vrated frated 3 0 Hz ...

Page 1524: ...following 2 criteria is used Dropout differential derived from Dropout ratio 105 for the Minimum voltage parameter Minimum absolute dropout differential 150 mV secondary Operating Ranges Voltage range 5 V to 230 V phase phase Frequency range Angle difference method 10 Hz to 80 Hz Filtering method 25 Hz to 80 Hz Tolerances Frequency f frated 0 20 Hz f frated 0 20 Hz 5 mHz at V Vrated frated 3 0 Hz ...

Page 1525: ...s with stabilization counter 6 Approx 85 ms OOT135 at 50 Hz Approx 80 ms OOT at 60 Hz Dropout time Approx 80 ms OOT at 50 Hz Approx 75 ms OOT at 60 Hz Dropout The greater dropout differential pickup value dropout value of the following 2 criteria applies Dropout Frequency 0 01 Hz df dt rising rate and df dt falling rate 0 1 Hz s Voltage V1 105 of the threshold value Current I1 105 of the threshold...

Page 1526: ...1 of the setting value or 5 mA Irated 1 A or 25 mA Irated 5 A frated 10 Power angle 1 Time delays 1 of the setting value or 10 ms Frequency Operating Range 0 9 f frated 1 1 According to specified tolerances 10 Hz f 0 9 frated 1 1 frated f 80 Hz Slightly expanded tolerances f 10 Hz f 80 Hz Active Technical Data 12 41 Underfrequency Load Shedding 1526 SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Protection Manual C53000 ...

Page 1527: ...es Pickup time Approx 160 ms OOT136 to 220 ms OOT depends on measuring window length at 50 Hz Approx 140 ms OOT to 200 ms OOT depends on measuring window length at 60 Hz Dropout time Approx 160 ms OOT to 220 ms OOT depends on measuring window length at 50 Hz Approx 140 ms OOT to 200 ms OOT depends on measuring window length at 60 Hz Frequency Operating Range 0 9 f frated 1 1 According to specified...

Page 1528: ...ys 1 of the setting value or 10 ms Functional Measured Value Value Description df dt Calculated rate of frequency change Technical Data 12 42 Rate of Frequency Change Protection 1528 SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Protection Manual C53000 G5040 C017 8 Edition 07 2017 ...

Page 1529: ...60 Hz Dropout times Approx 80 ms OOT at 50 Hz Approx 66 8 ms OOT at 60 Hz Frequency Operating Range frated 3 Hz f or frated frated 3 Hz According to specified tolerances f frated 3 Hz or f frated 3 Hz Inactive Tolerances Angle jump 0 5 at V 0 5 Vrated Voltage blocking 1 of the setting value or 0 500 V Undercurrent release For Irated 1 A 1 of the setting value or 10 mA For Irated 5 A 1 of the setti...

Page 1530: ...s OOT138 at 50 Hz Approx 45 ms OOT at 60 Hz Dropout times Approx 55 ms OOT at 50 Hz Approx 45 ms OOT at 60 Hz Tolerances Power 0 5 Srated 3 of setting value Srated rated apparent power Time delays 1 of the setting value or 10 ms Variables That Influence Pickup Values Auxiliary DC voltage in the range 0 8 VAux VAuxRated 1 15 1 Frequency in the range 0 95 f frated 1 05 1 Harmonics Up to 10 of 3rd ha...

Page 1531: ...Dropout ratio 0 40 to 0 99 Increments of 0 01 Times Pickup times Approx 360 ms at f 50 Hz Approx 300 ms at f 60 Hz Dropout times Approx 360 ms at f 50 Hz Approx 300 ms at f 60 Hz Frequency Operating Range 0 9 f frated 1 1 According to specified tolerances 10 Hz f 0 9 frated 1 1 frated f 80 Hz Slightly expanded tolerances f 10 Hz f 80 Hz Inactive Tolerances Reverse power 0 15 Srated or 5 of the set...

Page 1532: ...ection If the value reaches 100 tripping occurs Frequency Operating Range 0 9 f frated 1 1 According to specified tolerances 10 Hz f 0 9 frated 1 1 frated f 80 Hz Slightly expanded tolerances f 10 Hz f 80 Hz Active Operating Times Operate times dropout times Operate time at frequency 50 Hz 60 Hz Minimum 33 ms OOT1 30 ms OOT139 Dropout time 10 ms OOT1 10 ms OOT1 Dropout Ratios Warning tripping inde...

Page 1533: ...s Auxiliary direct voltage in the 0 8 range 1 Time delays 0 5 10 K Thermal replica 1 Harmonics Up to 10 of 3rd harmonic Up to 10 of 5th harmonic 1 1 dwrsasuf 070513 01 tif 1 en_US Figure 12 19 Operate Curve from the Thermal Replica of the Overexcitation Protection Default Setting Technical Data 12 46 Overexcitation Protection SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Protection Manual 1533 C53000 G5040 C017 8 Editio...

Page 1534: ... 1 02 Release current Approx 0 95 Reclosure stage Voltage Approx 0 98 Release current Approx 0 95 Times Pickup time Approx 55 ms OOT140 at 50 Hz Approx 45 ms OOT at 60 Hz Dropout time Approx 55 ms OOT at 50 Hz Approx 45 ms OOT at 60 Hz Tolerances Current I1 1 of the setting value or 5 mA Irated 1 A or 25 mA Irated 5 A Voltage 0 5 of the setting value or 0 05 V Power Q 0 5 Srated 3 of the setting v...

Page 1535: ...f 10 Hz f 80 Hz Active Technical Data 12 47 Undervoltage Controlled Reactive Power Protection SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Protection Manual 1535 C53000 G5040 C017 8 Edition 07 2017 ...

Page 1536: ...ements of 0 001 s Supervision times of binary inputs 0 05 s to 60 00 s Increments of 0 01 s Dropout The greater dropout differential pickup threshold dropout threshold of the following 2 criteria applies Dropout differential 95 of the pickup value Minimum absolute dropout differential Protection class current transformer 15 mA sec Irated 1 A or 75 mA sec Irated 5 A Instrument current transformer 0...

Page 1537: ... Range 0 9 f frated 1 1 According to specified tolerances 10 Hz f 0 9 frated 1 1 frated f 80 Hz Slightly expanded tolerances f 10 Hz f 80 Hz Active Tolerances Threshold values dropout thresholds 2 of the setting value or 1 of the rated current Times 1 of the setting value or 10 ms Technical Data 12 48 Circuit Breaker Failure Protection SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Protection Manual 1537 C53000 G5040 C01...

Page 1538: ...ia applies Dropout differential derived from the parameter Dropout ratio If this parameter is not available a dropout ratio of 95 applies for overcurrent and of 105 for undercur rent functionality Minimum absolute dropout differential Protection class current transformer 15 mA sec Irated 1 A or 75 mA sec Irated 5 A Instrument current transformer 0 5 mA sec Irated 1 A or 2 5 mA sec Irated 5 A Times...

Page 1539: ...ound fault protection when OFF _ 301 I diff Differential current _ 302 I restr Restraint current Dropout Ratio Threshold value 0 7 Dropout The greater dropout differential pickup value dropout value of the following 2 criteria applies Dropout differential derived from the parameter Dropout ratio If this parameter is not available a dropout ratio of 95 applies for overcurrent and of 105 for undercu...

Page 1540: ...approx 80 ms 67 ms dwausken 170712 01 tif 1 en_US Figure 12 20 Restricted Ground Fault Protection Operate Curve depending on the Phase Angle between lI0 and II0 at II0 II0 180 External fault Technical Data 12 50 Restricted Ground Fault Protection 1540 SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Protection Manual C53000 G5040 C017 8 Edition 07 2017 ...

Page 1541: ... Approx 10 ms OOT 143 Tolerance Sequence tolerance for delay times 1 of the setting value or 10 ms 12 51 143 OOT Output Operating Time additional delay of the output medium used for example 5 ms with fast relays see chapter 12 1 4 Relay Outputs Technical Data 12 51 External Trip Initiation SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Protection Manual 1541 C53000 G5040 C017 8 Edition 07 2017 ...

Page 1542: ...th trip command with Pickup Reaction to evolving faults Blocks automatic reclosing function Start evolving fault dead time Action times separated for all cycles 0 00 s to 300 00 s or oo ineffec tive Increments of 0 01 s Dead times after trip command separated for all types and all cycles 0 00 s to 1 800 00 s or oo ineffec tive Increments of 0 01 s Dead time after evolving fault detection separated...

Page 1543: ...tion Fault Distance Output of the fault distance line length In Ω primary and secondary In km miles or in percent 144 Tolerances Measuring tolerances during sinusoidal measurands and error duration 25 ms at 60 Hz or 30 ms at 50 Hz 1 5 from fault location at VK Vrated 0 01 and one of the following scenarios Metal fault Non metallic fault for one side infeed without load 12 53 144 The output of the ...

Page 1544: ... 60 s or Increments of 1 s Dropout Conditions Dropout differential 3 C or 6 F Tolerances Tripping delay 1 of the setting value or 10 ms Measured temperature value 0 5 of the setting value or 1 C or 2 F 12 54 Technical Data 12 54 Temperature Supervision 1544 SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Protection Manual C53000 G5040 C017 8 Edition 07 2017 ...

Page 1545: ... 10 Hz f 80 Hz Inactive Tolerances Currents 3 of setting value or 10 mA Irated 1 A or 50 mA Irated 5 A frated 10 for amplitude changes of sinusoidal measurands Pulse time 1 of the setting value or 10 ms 12 55 145 OOT Output Operating Time additional delay of the output medium used for example 5 ms with fast relays Technical Data 12 55 Current Jump Detection SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Protection Manual...

Page 1546: ...anded tolerances f 10 Hz f 80 Hz Inactive Tolerances Voltages 2 of the setting value or 0 100 V for amplitude changes of sinusoidal measurands Pulse time 1 of the setting value or 10 ms 12 56 146 OOT Output Operating Time additional delay of the output medium used for example 5 ms with fast relays Technical Data 12 56 Voltage Jump Detection 1546 SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Protection Manual C53000 G504...

Page 1547: ...min 0 300 V to 340 000 V phase to phase Increments of 0 001 V V for off circuit conditions V for voltage present 0 300 V to 170 000 V phase to phase 0 300 V to 340 000 V phase to phase Increments of 0 001 V Increments of 0 001 V Differential values changeover thresholds asynchronous synchronous balancing Voltage differences V2 V1 V2 V1 0 000 V to 170 000 V Increments of 0 001 V Frequency differenc...

Page 1548: ...Hz 1 mHz Frequency of the voltage V1f2 Range Tolerance at rated frequency f2 in Hz 25 Hz f 70 Hz 1 mHz Voltage difference V2 V1 Range Tolerance at rated frequency In kV primary in V secondary or in Vrated Display always as phase to phase voltage in relation to side 1 10 to 120 of Vrated 1 of the measured value or 0 5 Vrated Frequency difference f2 f1 Range Tolerance at rated frequency In mHz frate...

Page 1549: ...lse or 10 ms Tolerance of all time settings 10 ms Max phase displacement angle 5o for Δf 1 Hz 10o for Δf 1 Hz Technical Data 12 57 Synchronization Function SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Protection Manual 1549 C53000 G5040 C017 8 Edition 07 2017 ...

Page 1550: ...0 0 s Increments of 0 1 s Fast step up limit 50 0 to 0 0 Increments of 0 1 Fast step up T delay 0 0 s to 10 0 s Increments of 0 1 s Function monitoring 1 min to 120 min Increments of 1 min Line compensation LDC Z Target voltage rising 0 0 to 20 0 Increments of 0 1 Max load current 0 0 to 500 0 Increments of 0 1 Line compensation LDC X and R R line 0 0 Ω to 30 0 Ω Increments of 0 1 Ω X line 30 0 Ω ...

Page 1551: ...alue Description Primary Secondary Referenced to Vact w1 Actual voltage of winding 1 kV V Target voltage of the primary system referenced to the rated voltage Vact w2 Actual voltage of winding 2 kV V Target voltage of the primary system referenced to the rated voltage ΔV act Voltage difference between the target voltage and the actual voltage kV V Voltage difference referenced to the rated voltage...

Page 1552: ... current referenced to the rated current of winding 2 Vmax 1 Maximum voltage of winding 1 kV V Maximum voltage of winding 1 referenced to the rated voltage of winding 1 Vmax 2 Maximum voltage of winding 2 kV V Maximum voltage of winding 2 referenced to the rated voltage of winding 2 Vmin 1 Minimum voltage of winding 1 kV V Minimum voltage of winding 1 referenced to rated voltage of winding 1 Vmin ...

Page 1553: ...A 5 A 1 6 Irated 0 005 A to 8 000 A Increments of 0 001 A Threshold value min max 0 10 to 0 95 Increments of 0 01 Tripping delay 0 00 s to 100 00 s Increments of 0 01 s Dropout Ratio Overcurrent dropout ratio Approx 0 97 Undercurrent dropout ratio Approx 1 05 Times Tripping time Approx 500 ms Dropout time Approx 500 ms 12 59 Technical Data 12 59 Current Balance Supervision SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent P...

Page 1554: ...nts of 0 01 Tripping delay 0 00 s to 100 00 s Increments of 0 01 s Dropout Ratio Overvoltage dropout ratio Approx 0 97 Undervoltage dropout ratio Approx 1 05 Times Tripping time Approx 500 ms Dropout time Approx 500 ms 12 60 Technical Data 12 60 Voltage Balance Supervision 1554 SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Protection Manual C53000 G5040 C017 8 Edition 07 2017 ...

Page 1555: ...Increments 0 01 A 1 A 1 6 Irated 0 001 A to 1 600 A Increments of 0 001 A 5 A 1 6 Irated 0 005 A to 8 000 A Increments of 0 001 A Tripping delay 0 00 s to 100 00 s Increments of 0 01 s Dropout Ratio Dropout ratio Approx 0 97 Times Tripping time Approx 500 ms Dropout time Approx 500 ms 12 61 Technical Data 12 61 Current Sum Supervision SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Protection Manual 1555 C53000 G5040 C017...

Page 1556: ...001 V Tripping delay 0 00 s to 100 00 s Increments of 0 01 s Dropout Ratio Dropout ratio Approx 0 97 Times Tripping time Approx 500 ms Dropout time Approx 500 ms 12 62 Technical Data 12 62 Voltage Sum Supervision 1556 SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Protection Manual C53000 G5040 C017 8 Edition 07 2017 ...

Page 1557: ...to 100 00 s Increments of 0 01 s Phase rotation direction A B C A C B Times Tripping time Approx 500 ms Dropout time Approx 500 ms 12 63 Technical Data 12 63 Current Phase Rotation Supervision SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Protection Manual 1557 C53000 G5040 C017 8 Edition 07 2017 ...

Page 1558: ...to 100 00 s Increments of 0 01 s Phase rotation direction A B C A C B Times Tripping time Approx 500 ms Dropout time Approx 500 ms 12 64 Technical Data 12 64 Voltage Phase Rotation Supervision 1558 SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Protection Manual C53000 G5040 C017 8 Edition 07 2017 ...

Page 1559: ...ng Range 10 Hz f 80 Hz According to specified tolerances f 10 Hz Inactive f 80 Hz Tolerances Pickup threshold Voltage 0 5 of the setting value or 0 05 V 12 65 147 OOT Output Operating Time extra delay of the output medium used Technical Data 12 65 Voltage Comparison Supervision SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Protection Manual 1559 C53000 G5040 C017 8 Edition 07 2017 ...

Page 1560: ... binary inputs Pickup and dropout time About 1 s to 2 s Adjustable indication delay with 1 binary input 1 00 s to 600 00 s Increments of 0 01 s Adjustable indication delay with 2 binary inputs 1 00 s to 600 00 s Increments of 0 01 s 12 66 Technical Data 12 66 Trip Circuit Supervision 1560 SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Protection Manual C53000 G5040 C017 8 Edition 07 2017 ...

Page 1561: ...opout time Approx 100 ms Blockings Blocked functions All functions that process the measured values from this current meas uring point for example differential protection 12 67 Technical Data 12 67 Analog Channel Supervision via Fast Current Sum SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Protection Manual 1561 C53000 G5040 C017 8 Edition 07 2017 ...

Page 1562: ...lable a dropout ratio of 95 applies to the overvoltage protection and a dropout ratio of 105 applies to the undervoltage protection Minimum absolute dropout differential 150 mV sec Times Pickup time Approx 10 ms OOT148 at 50 Hz Approx 10 ms OOT at 60 Hz Dropout time Approx 20 ms OOT Times Use in function group Line Pickup time Approx 10 ms OOT149 at 50 Hz Approx 9 ms OOT at 60 Hz Use in other func...

Page 1563: ...5 mA Irated 1 A or 25 mA Irated 5 A frated 10 Voltages 0 5 of the setting value or 0 5 V Time delays 1 of the setting value or 10 ms Technical Data 12 68 Measuring Voltage Failure Detection SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Protection Manual 1563 C53000 G5040 C017 8 Edition 07 2017 ...

Page 1564: ...uit Breaker Setting Values Response time 0 000 s to 0 030 s Increments of 0 001 s 12 69 Technical Data 12 69 Voltage Transformer Circuit Breaker 1564 SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Protection Manual C53000 G5040 C017 8 Edition 07 2017 ...

Page 1565: ...dary rated voltage Measuring range Frequency range 100 V to 125 V AC 0 1 to 2 Vrated 49 Hz to 51 Hz at frated 50 Hz 59 Hz to 61 Hz at frated 60 Hz Tolerance 0 1 of the measured value in the above mentioned measuring range Frequency range expanded 40 Hz to 60 Hz at frated 50 Hz 50 Hz to 70 Hz at frated 60 Hz Tolerance 0 3 of the measured value in the above mentioned measuring range Currents Instrum...

Page 1566: ...alue in the above mentioned measuring range Frequency range expanded 40 Hz to 60 Hz at frated 50 Hz 50 Hz to 70 Hz at frated 60 Hz Tolerance 0 6 of the measured value in the above mentioned measuring range Currents Sensitive Ground Current Transformer 3I0 Current range A secondary 1 6 Irated Rated currents Measuring range Frequency range 1 A 5 A 0 1 to 1 6 Irated 49 Hz to 51 Hz at frated 50 Hz 59 ...

Page 1567: ... 2 Irated 49 Hz to 51 Hz at frated 50 Hz 59 Hz to 61 Hz at frated 60 Hz Tolerance 1 0 of the measured value in the above mentioned measuring range Frequency range expanded 40 Hz to 69 Hz at frated 50 Hz 50 Hz to 70 Hz at frated 60 Hz Tolerance 1 5 of the measured value in the above mentioned measuring range Apparent power S VA secondary Measuring range Voltage range Current range Frequency range 0...

Page 1568: ...9 999 999 h Tolerance 1 h Statistical Values of the Circuit Breaker Op cnt operation counter Range 0 to 999 999 999 Tolerance None I Off sum of the primary currents switched off A kA MA GA TA PA primary Range 0 to 9 2 e 15 Operating hours h Range 0 to 9 999 999 h Tolerance 1 h Circuit breaker open hours h Range 0 to 9 999 999 h Tolerance 1 h Statistical Values of the Disconnector Op cnt operation ...

Page 1569: ...active energy Wq kWh MWh GWh kvarh Mvarh Gvarh Range 2 for I 0 1 Irated V 0 1 Vrated cosφ 0 707 Tolerance at rated frequency 1 12 71 Technical Data 12 71 Energy Values SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Protection Manual 1569 C53000 G5040 C017 8 Edition 07 2017 ...

Page 1570: ...sor Measurements IEEE Std C37 118 1aTM 2014 Data Transfer IEEE Standard for Synchrophasor Data transfer IEEE Std C37 118 2TM 2011 12 72 Technical Data 12 72 Phasor Measurement Unit 1570 SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Protection Manual C53000 G5040 C017 8 Edition 07 2017 ...

Page 1571: ...t circuit breaking current Isc 10 to 100 000 Increments of 1 Switching cycles at Isc 1 to 1000 Increments of 1 Level of warning 1 1 to 100 Increments of 1 Level of warning 2 1 to 100 Increments of 1 Operating current threshold 1 A 50 and 100 Irated 0 030 A to 35 000 A Increments of 0 001 A 5 A 50 and 100 Irated 0 15 A to 175 00 A Increments of 0 01 A 1 A 1 6 Irated 0 001 A to 1 600 A Increments of...

Page 1572: ...cles every 500 ms All other task levels are event triggered In order to estimate the tick consumption of a CFC chart you can use the following formula Tchart 5 nInp 5 nOutp TTLev i Tint j TBlock where nInp Number of indications routed as input in the CFC chart nOutp Number of indications routed as output in the CFC chart TTLev 101 Ticks in Fast Event Triggered Level 104 Ticks in Event Triggered Le...

Page 1573: ...5 9 CMP_DPS 1 5 CON_ACD 0 7 CON_ACT 0 5 CONNECT 0 4 COS_R 2 5 CTD 1 8 CTU 1 6 CTUD 2 3 DINT_REAL 3 0 DINT_UINT 3 0 DIV_D 2 9 DIV_R 1 6 DIV_XMV 2 2 DPC_DEF 0 4 DPC_EXE 0 4 DPC_INFO 1 1 DPC_OUT 1 3 DPS_SPS 1 0 DRAGI_R 1 7 EQ_D 1 0 EQ_R 1 9 EXP_R 1 5 EXPT_R 2 7 F_TRGM 0 3 F_TRIG 0 3 FF_D 0 9 FF_D_MEM 1 4 FF_RS 0 7 FF_RS_MEM 1 2 FF_SR 0 8 Technical Data 12 74 CFC SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Protection Manu...

Page 1574: ...EMORY_D 0 9 MEMORY_R 1 1 MIN_D 0 7 MIN_R 1 3 MOD_D 1 5 MUL_D4 2 5 MUL_R4 2 7 MUL_XMV 2 8 MUX_D 1 2 MUX_R 0 9 NAND10 3 5 NE_D 0 9 NE_R 0 9 NEG 1 2 NEG_SPS 0 8 NL_LZ 3 8 NL_MV 5 6 NL_ZP 2 7 NOR10 3 2 OR_DYN 1 1 OR_SPS 1 3 OR10 2 6 R_TRGM 0 4 R_TRIG 0 4 REAL_DINT 3 0 REAL_SXMV 3 0 SIN_R 0 8 SPC_DEF 0 4 Technical Data 12 74 CFC 1574 SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Protection Manual C53000 G5040 C017 8 Edition ...

Page 1575: ...IT_Q 0 7 SPLIT_SPS 0 8 SPLIT_WYE 2 6 SPLIT_XMV 2 1 SQRT_R 0 6 SUB_D 1 3 SUB_R 1 6 SUB_XMV 2 4 SUBST_B 1 0 SUBST_BQ 1 5 SUBST_D 1 0 SUBST_R 1 0 SUBST_XQ 1 4 SXMV_REAL 3 0 TAN_R 1 1 TLONG 2 2 TOF 1 0 TON 1 1 TT 2 5 TSHORT 1 9 UINT_DINT 3 0 XOR2 2 6 Technical Data 12 74 CFC SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Protection Manual 1575 C53000 G5040 C017 8 Edition 07 2017 ...

Page 1576: ...1576 SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Protection Manual C53000 G5040 C017 8 Edition 07 2017 ...

Page 1577: ...t Transformer Requirements 1591 A 7 Connection Examples for Current Transformers 1594 A 8 Connection Examples of Voltage Transformers for Modular Devices 1600 A 9 Connection Examples of Voltage Transformers for Non Modular Devices 1606 A 10 Prerouting 7SJ82 85 General 1610 A 11 Prerouting 7SJ82 85 Capacitor Bank Applications 1612 A SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Protection Manual 1577 C53000 G5040 C017 8 ...

Page 1578: ...a detailed presentation of the configuration result are provided The product code unambiguously describes the selected product and also serves as an order number Ordering Options The following ordering options are possible for SIPROTEC 5 products Device Single part DIGSI 5 Functional enhancement i i NOTE To order single parts in the order configurator use the Single part link Individual parts are ...

Page 1579: ...minal Cover for current terminal block Terminal Cover for voltage terminal block Terminal Transport safety current terminal Terminal Transport safety voltage terminal Accessories USB covers 10 pieces each for CP 100 200 300 Accessories Cable integrated operation panel 0 43 m Accessories Cable detached operation panel 2 50 m Accessories Cable detached operation panel 5 00 m Accessories Cable set CO...

Page 1580: ...ngth of 10 m Sensors for arc protection Point sensor with line length of 15 m Sensors for arc protection Point sensor with line length of 20 m Sensors for arc protection Point sensor with line length of 35 m Sensors for arc protection Line sensor length 3 m Sensors for arc protection Line sensor length 10 m Sensors for arc protection Line sensor length 20 m Sensors for arc protection Line sensor l...

Page 1581: ...Parameter Parameters with setting values The default setting is in the 1st position and displayed in italics Parameters with application dependent setting values Dynamic settings State logic Health of a function stage or function block External binary input signal with indication number External output signal with indication number and additional information External output signal without indicati...

Page 1582: ...eshold stage shortfall Threshold stage shortfall with reset of input Threshold stage exceeded with dropout delay Threshold stage exceeded with dropout delay and reset of input Threshold stage shortfall with Dropout delay Threshold stage shortfall with dropout delay and reset of input Comparators Pickup delay Dropout delay Pickup and dropout delay Appendix A 3 Typographic and Symbol Conventions 158...

Page 1583: ...edge Trigger the pulse of duration T with a negative signal edge SR Flip Flop RS Flip Flop D Flip Flop Characteristic curve Minimum operate time Appendix A 3 Typographic and Symbol Conventions SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Protection Manual 1583 C53000 G5040 C017 8 Edition 07 2017 ...

Page 1584: ... 01 tif 1 en_US Figure A 1 Standard Variant Type U1 sv82typ02 120913 01 tif 1 en_US Figure A 2 Standard Variant Type U2 A 4 Appendix A 4 Standard Variants for 7SJ82 1584 SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Protection Manual C53000 G5040 C017 8 Edition 07 2017 ...

Page 1585: ..._US Figure A 3 Standard Variant Type U3 sv82typ04 120913 01 tif 1 en_US Figure A 4 Standard Variant Type U4 Appendix A 4 Standard Variants for 7SJ82 SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Protection Manual 1585 C53000 G5040 C017 8 Edition 07 2017 ...

Page 1586: ... svut82typ01 210114 01 1 en_US Figure A 5 Standard Variant Type U5 Appendix A 4 Standard Variants for 7SJ82 1586 SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Protection Manual C53000 G5040 C017 8 Edition 07 2017 ...

Page 1587: ... 01 tif 1 en_US Figure A 6 Standard Variant Type S1 svstyp02 191112 01 tif 1 en_US Figure A 7 Standard Variant Type S2 A 5 Appendix A 5 Standard Variants for 7SJ85 SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Protection Manual 1587 C53000 G5040 C017 8 Edition 07 2017 ...

Page 1588: ... svstyp03 191112 01 tif 1 en_US Figure A 8 Standard Variant Type S3 Appendix A 5 Standard Variants for 7SJ85 1588 SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Protection Manual C53000 G5040 C017 8 Edition 07 2017 ...

Page 1589: ... svstyp04 191112 01 tif 1 en_US Figure A 9 Standard Variant Type S4 Appendix A 5 Standard Variants for 7SJ85 SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Protection Manual 1589 C53000 G5040 C017 8 Edition 07 2017 ...

Page 1590: ... svstyp05 191112 01 tif 1 en_US Figure A 10 Standard Variant Type S5 Appendix A 5 Standard Variants for 7SJ85 1590 SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Protection Manual C53000 G5040 C017 8 Edition 07 2017 ...

Page 1591: ... but at least 20 with KALF Minimum effective accuracy limiting factor I PU Primary pickup value of the high current element Irated prim Primary rated transformer current Resulting rated accuracy limiting factor with KALF Rated accuracy limiting factor RBC Connected burden device and cables RBN Rated burden RCt Internal burden Table A 3 Calculation Example According to IEC 60044 1 Irated sec 1 A KA...

Page 1592: ...ent transforma tion ratio to suit the specific power system and thus the corresponding amount of the maximum ground fault current 60 1 Accuracy limiting factor FS 10 Power 1 to 4 times the connected burden device input plus infeeds Notes concerning the power The burden of the sensitive ground current input is very low 0 05 VA or 0 1 VA Thus an underburden of more than factor 4 is probable In this ...

Page 1593: ...classes 0 5S or 0 1S that define the class accuracy via an extended current range up to 1 Irated see chapter 5 6 201 5 IEC 61869 2 Another possibility is to correct the phase angle error of the transformer on the device if this error is known see function description Sensitive ground fault detection Appendix A 6 Current Transformer Requirements SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Protection Manual 1593 C53000 ...

Page 1594: ...Connection to a 3 Wire Current Transformer and Measured Zero Sequence Current Current in Common Return Path i i NOTE The switchover of current polarity at the 3 phase current transformer causes a rotation in the direction of electric current for current input I4 IN A 7 Appendix A 7 Connection Examples for Current Transformers 1594 SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Protection Manual C53000 G5040 C017 8 Editio...

Page 1595: ... the 3 phase current transformer causes a rotation in the direction of electric current for current input I4 IN sep tileite4 260313 01 tif 2 en_US Figure A 14 Connection to a 3 Wire Current Transformer and Measured Ground Current from a Complete Holmgreen Connection Appendix A 7 Connection Examples for Current Transformers SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Protection Manual 1595 C53000 G5040 C017 8 Edition 0...

Page 1596: ...ction to a 3 Wire Current Transformer and Measured Ground Current via the Neutral Point Current Transformer of a Grounded Power Transformer tileite7 070211 01 tif 2 en_US Figure A 16 Connection to a 2 Wire Current Transformer for Isolated or Resonant Grounded Systems Only Appendix A 7 Connection Examples for Current Transformers 1596 SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Protection Manual C53000 G5040 C017 8 Edi...

Page 1597: ...polarity at the 3 phase current transformer causes a rotation in the direction of electric current for current input I4 IN sep tileite9 260313 01 tif 2 en_US Figure A 18 Connection to a 3 Wire Current Transformer and an Additional Current Transformer in the Neutral Point of a Grounded Power Transformer Appendix A 7 Connection Examples for Current Transformers SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Protection Manu...

Page 1598: ... Transformer Connection for High Impedance Differential Protection for Example a Power Transformer in Preparation Appendix A 7 Connection Examples for Current Transformers 1598 SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Protection Manual C53000 G5040 C017 8 Edition 07 2017 ...

Page 1599: ... Ground Fault Detection via the Neutral Point Current Transformer of a Grounded Power Transformer i i NOTE The switchover of current polarity at the 3 phase current transformer causes a rotation in the direction of electric current for current input I3 IN sep Appendix A 7 Connection Examples for Current Transformers SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Protection Manual 1599 C53000 G5040 C017 8 Edition 07 2017 ...

Page 1600: ...Star Connected Voltage Transformers tvvolta2 260313 01 tif 1 en_US Figure A 22 Connection to 3 Star Connected Voltage Transformers and to the Broken Delta Winding A 8 Appendix A 8 Connection Examples of Voltage Transformers for Modular Devices 1600 SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Protection Manual C53000 G5040 C017 8 Edition 07 2017 ...

Page 1601: ...ected Voltage Transformers and to the Broken Delta Winding of a Separate Voltage Transformer for example Busbar Appendix A 8 Connection Examples of Voltage Transformers for Modular Devices SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Protection Manual 1601 C53000 G5040 C017 8 Edition 07 2017 ...

Page 1602: ...ge Transformers and to the Phase to Phase Voltage of a Busbar Voltage Transformer for Example for Synchrocheck Applications Appendix A 8 Connection Examples of Voltage Transformers for Modular Devices 1602 SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Protection Manual C53000 G5040 C017 8 Edition 07 2017 ...

Page 1603: ...nnection to the Phase to Phase Voltage of a Busbar Voltage Transformer i i NOTE When using the connection type 3 phase to phase voltage the zero sequence voltage cannot be detected Appendix A 8 Connection Examples of Voltage Transformers for Modular Devices SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Protection Manual 1603 C53000 G5040 C017 8 Edition 07 2017 ...

Page 1604: ...to the Broken Delta Winding of a Busbar Voltage Transformer tvvol2ll 260313 01 tif 2 en_US Figure A 27 Connection to V Connected Voltage Transformer Measurement of 2 Phase to Phase Voltages Appendix A 8 Connection Examples of Voltage Transformers for Modular Devices 1604 SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Protection Manual C53000 G5040 C017 8 Edition 07 2017 ...

Page 1605: ...tion to the Broken Delta Winding of a Busbar Voltage Transformer tvvolta7 260313 01 tif 1 en_US Figure A 29 Connection to a 1 Pole Insulated Voltage Transformer Phase to Ground Voltage Appendix A 8 Connection Examples of Voltage Transformers for Modular Devices SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Protection Manual 1605 C53000 G5040 C017 8 Edition 07 2017 ...

Page 1606: ...sformers tvvolta3 260313 01 tif 1 en_US Figure A 31 Connection to 3 Star Connected Voltage Transformers and to the Broken Delta Winding of a Separate Voltage Transformer for Example Busbar A 9 Appendix A 9 Connection Examples of Voltage Transformers for Non Modular Devices 1606 SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Protection Manual C53000 G5040 C017 8 Edition 07 2017 ...

Page 1607: ...e Transformer for Example for Synchrocheck Applications tvvol2ll82 260313 01 vsd 1 en_US Figure A 33 Connection to V Connected Voltage Transformer Measurement of 2 Phase to Phase Voltages Appendix A 9 Connection Examples of Voltage Transformers for Non Modular Devices SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Protection Manual 1607 C53000 G5040 C017 8 Edition 07 2017 ...

Page 1608: ...sformer Measurement of 2 Phase to Phase Voltages and Connection to the Broken Delta Winding of a Busbar Voltage Transformer Appendix A 9 Connection Examples of Voltage Transformers for Non Modular Devices 1608 SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Protection Manual C53000 G5040 C017 8 Edition 07 2017 ...

Page 1609: ...a Winding of a Busbar Voltage Transformer for example for Synchrocheck Applications tvvolta7SJ82 260313 01 vsd 1 en_US Figure A 36 Connection to a 1 Pole Insulated Voltage Transformer Phase to Ground Voltage Appendix A 9 Connection Examples of Voltage Transformers for Non Modular Devices SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Protection Manual 1609 C53000 G5040 C017 8 Edition 07 2017 ...

Page 1610: ... 8 Default Output Relays Using the Example of Overcurrent Protection Binary Output Signal Number Signal Type Configura tion BO1 Circuit breaker 1 Circuit break Trip open cmd 201 4261 300 SPS U BO2 Circuit breaker 1 Circuit break Close command 201 4261 301 SPS X BO3 Disconnector 1 Disconnector Open command 601 5401 300 SPS X BO4 Disconnector 1 Disconnector Close command 601 5401 301 SPS X BO5 Disco...

Page 1611: ...p indicat Pickup phs B SPS NT LED3 VI 3ph 1 Group indicat Pickup phs C SPS NT LED4 VI 3ph 1 Group indicat Pickup phs gnd SPS NT LED5 Circuit breaker 1 Circuit break Trip open cmd 201 4261 300 SPS L LED15 Alarm handling Group warning 5971 301 SPS U LED16 Device Process mode inactive SPS U Appendix A 10 Prerouting 7SJ82 85 General SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Protection Manual 1611 C53000 G5040 C017 8 Edi...

Page 1612: ...p open cmd 201 4261 300 SPS U BO2 Circuit breaker 1 Circuit break Close command 201 4261 301 SPS X Function Keys Table A 13 Default Setting Function Key Using the Example of Overcurrent Protection Function key Signal Number Signal type Configu ration F key1 Main menu Logs Opera tional log X F key2 Main menu Meas urements Capacitor bank 1 Operational values X F key3 Main menu Logs Fault log X Light...

Page 1613: ...dicat Pickup phs gnd SPS NT LED5 Circuit breaker 1 Circuit break Trip open cmd 201 4261 300 SPS L LED15 Alarm handling Group warning 5971 301 SPS U LED16 Device Process mode inac tive SPS U Appendix A 11 Prerouting 7SJ82 85 Capacitor Bank Applications SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Protection Manual 1613 C53000 G5040 C017 8 Edition 07 2017 ...

Page 1614: ...1614 SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Protection Manual C53000 G5040 C017 8 Edition 07 2017 ...

Page 1615: ...tegral increments 1 BAC Binary Controlled Analog Process Value Back up battery The back up battery ensures that specified data areas flags times and counters are kept retentive Bay Controller Bay controllers are devices with control and monitoring functions without protection functions BCR IEC 61850 data type Binary counter reading Best master clock algorithm A PTP network contains communicating c...

Page 1616: ...ple inputs The bit pattern indication can be selected as 1 2 3 or 4 bytes BMC See best master clock algorithm Boundary Clock The Precision Time Protocol knows different types of clocks an ordinary clock abbreviation OC a boundary clock BC and a transparent clock TC The boundary clock transports time information over a network limit for example in a router connecting different switched networks As ...

Page 1617: ...art The Continuous Function Chart CFC is a programming language It is used for programmable logic control lers The programming language Continuous Function Chart is not defined in the standard IEC 61131 3 but represents a current extension of IEC programming environments CFC is a graphic programming language Function blocks are linked to one another This represents an essential difference from con...

Page 1618: ...lt PTB in Bruns wick The atomic clock unit of the PTB transmits this time via the long wave time signal transmitter in Main flingen near Frankfurt Main The emitted time signal can be received within a radius of approx 1500 km from Frankfurt Main DCP Discovery and Basic Configuration Protocol DDD SIPROTEC 5 device driver DIGSI 5 Device Driver DEL Phase to phase related measurements of a 3 phase sys...

Page 1619: ...can export the protocol settings in DIGMOD format The DIGMOD format is specially designed to transmit interface data from DIGSI 5 into the SICAM PAS substation automation system DIGSI 5 Test Sequences You can archive individual or all test sequences of a SIPROTEC 5 device in SEQ5 format You can also use this format to exchange test sequences between SIPROTEC 5 devices The SEQ5 format is based on X...

Page 1620: ...be assigned and specifies the time lapse over which they are assigned DHCP is defined in the Internet standards RFC 2131 03 97 and RFC 2241 11 97 For SIPROTEC 5 a device can also be assigned an IP address via DIGSI via DHCP ELCAD Electrical CAD Electrical CAD You can import the topology information contained in an ELCAD file into a project and use it as the basis for a single line configuration Th...

Page 1621: ...efore no current flows through the body to ground in the event of touching Folder This object type helps when structuring a project hierarchically Function group Functions are brought together into function groups FG The assignment of functions to current and or voltage transformers assignment of functions to measuring points the information exchange between the function groups via interfaces as w...

Page 1622: ... installed in the HSR node Thus the HSR node forwards indication in the ring that are not directed at it In order to avoid circular messages in the ring corresponding mechanisms are defined in the case of HSR SAN Single Attached Node end devices can only be connected with the aid of a REDBOX in the case of HSR PRP systems and HSR systems can be coupled redundantly with 2 REDBOXES HMI Human Machine...

Page 1623: ...IEC bus A total of 254 IEC addresses per IEC bus are available IEC communication branch Within an IEC communication branch the participants communicate on the basis of the protocol IEC 60870 5 103 via an IEC bus IED Capability Description Data exchange from the IED configuration software DIGSI to the system configurator This file describes the performance properties of an IED IEEE 1588 Time synchr...

Page 1624: ...mination of the configuration List view The right area of the project window displays the names and symbols of the objects which are within a container selected in the tree view As the visualization is in the form of a list this area is also referred to as list view LLDP Link Layer Discovery Protocol Local Area Network A Local Area Network LAN is a regional local PC network The PCs are all equippe...

Page 1625: ...ult for instance Metered value Metered values are a processing function used to determine the total number of discrete similar events counting pulses for example as integral over a time span In the power supply utility field electrical energy is often recorded as a metered value energy import delivery energy transport MIB Management Information Base MICS Model Implementation Conformance Statement ...

Page 1626: ...er to the protocol slave Parallel Redundancy Protocol Parallel Redundancy Protocol PRP is a redundancy protocol for Ethernet networks that is specified in IEC 62439 3 Unlike conventional redundancy procedures such as RSTP Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol IEEE 802 1D 2004 PRP offers uninterruptible switching which avoids any down time in the event of a fault and thus the highest availability PRP is bas...

Page 1627: ...ion with an API uniquely identifies the access and the behavior of an application PROFINET IO PROFINET is an open Industrial Ethernet Standard from PROFIBUS for the automation Programmable Logic The programmable logic is a function in Siemens devices or station controllers enabling user specific func tionality in the form of a program This logic component can be programmed by various methods CFC C...

Page 1628: ...tation Conformance Statement PRP Parallel Redundancy Protocol Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol The Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP is a standardized redundancy process with a short response time In the Spanning Tree Protocol STP protocol structuring times in the multidigit second range apply in the case of a reorganization of the network structure These times are reduced to several 100 milliseconds ...

Page 1629: ...nym SOE An ordered time stamped log of status changes at binary inputs also referred to as state inputs SOE is used to restore or analyze the performance or an electrical power system itself over a certain period of time Service Interface Device interface for interfacing DIGSI 5 for example through a modem SICAM SAS Substation Automation System Modularly structured station control system based on ...

Page 1630: ...e 2 process states for example On Off at an output Single line diagram A single line diagram SLD is a simplified electric overview of the switchgear Only 1 phase is shown instead of all 3 phases of a line Therefore the diagram is called single line Single Line Editor A Single Line Editor contains a catalog of topological components to create a single line diagram The customer may use the single li...

Page 1631: ...umented consistently This format is therefore suit able for exchanging IEC 61850 specific data between different applications even if these come from different manufacturers The described import checks are basically done for all SCL formats not only for SCD imports System Exchange Description Files in SED format can be used to exchange interface information between DIGSI 5 projects and thus betwee...

Page 1632: ...sion TCP ensures the correct ness of the data and the correct sequence of the data packages Transparent Clock The Precision Time Protocol knows different types of clocks an ordinary clock abbreviation OC a boundary clock BC and a transparent clock TC The transparent clock was added to the specification in 2008 and improves the time information transmission within a network by receiving PTP message...

Page 1633: ...rate UTC Universal Time Coordinated Vendor ID Manufacturer specific part of the device identification for PROFINET Virtual Device A VD virtual device comprises all communication objects as well as their properties and states which a communication user can utilize in the form of services A VD can be a physical device a module of a device or a software module WYE Phase to ground related measurements...

Page 1634: ...1634 SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Protection Manual C53000 G5040 C017 8 Edition 07 2017 ...

Page 1635: ...oken wire detection Application and setting notes 1272 Broken wire suspected 1271 Function structure 1271 Overview of functions 1271 C Circuit breaker Circuit breaker failure protection 276 Circuit breaker test 276 Trip Logic 281 Trip circuit supervision 276 Trip Command Reset 281 Circuit breaker failure protection CBFP 836 Communication Log 77 Control functions Command checks 1105 Command logging...

Page 1636: ...round fault log 71 Group Indications Time Overcurrent Protection Functions 322 I IEC 60529 1415 INC 157 Incident display Configuration 82 Spontaneous 82 Indication display Spontaneous 82 Indications 62 Displays 65 Read out 62 Reading 62 Reading with DIGSI 64 INS 156 157 Instantaneous high current tripping Function structure 493 Overview of functions 493 Release via protection interface 496 Standar...

Page 1637: ... General functionality 810 Stage description 814 S Security log 78 Sensitive ground fault detection Directional overcurrent protection stage with 3I0 φ V I measurement 586 Directional overcurrent protection stage with cos φ or sin φ measurement 568 Directional overcurrent protection stage with G0 or B0 measurement 592 Overvoltage protection stage with zero sequence voltage residual voltage 608 Sen...

Page 1638: ...rvoltage protection with positive sequence voltage 710 Overvoltage protection with zero sequence voltage residual voltage 704 Undervoltage protection with 3 phase voltage 734 Undervoltage protection with any voltage 757 Undervoltage protection with positive sequence voltage 750 Voltage jump detection Overview of functions 960 Index 1638 SIPROTEC 5 Overcurrent Protection Manual C53000 G5040 C017 8 ...

Reviews:

No comments

Brands by name

Popular brands

Load more brands